4341_MI_sn11543_Vol_18_General_Information 4341 MI Sn11543 Vol 18 General Information
User Manual: Pdf 4341_MI_sn11543_Vol_18_General_Information
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 223
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
4341 81 543 MI GENERAL INFORMATION CONSOLE FUNCTIONS INDEX INSTALLATION VOL 18 REQUESTED BY DEpUE VOLUME 01B INDI VIDUAL MACHINE 4341- -0011543 LOGIC TYPE -0- SYSTEMS DIAGRAMS '..... PAGE NUM 44005 4401 T 44015F 44025 44035 44045 44051 44055 44071 44075 44085 44115 44125 44135 44155 44165 44175 441B5F 44187 44191F 44195F 442}5 44235 44245 44255 44205 44275 44285 44295F 44305 44313 44315 44325 44327 44329 44335 44345 44355 44305 44375 44391 44395 44403 44405 44407 44409 44413 44415 44417 44419 44425F 44427 44429 44435 44443 44445 44447 44449 44453 44455 44457 44463 44495 44497 44501 44515 44517 44519 44521F 44525F 44535 44!>45F 44555F 445b5F 44575F 44585 44595 44605 44607 44015 44035F 44b55F 44675 44695F 4600T 46005 SH TITLE GENERAL INFORMATION TAB I NTRODUCT ION OPER CONT PANEL DISP CONSOLE DISPLAY KEYBOARD PRINTER MODES OF OPER ERROR COND ADDITIONAL FEAT DISPLAY MESSAGES ERROR MESSAGES MANUAL FUNCTIONS SP STOR DISPLAY SYSTEM CONFIG MOD TRANSFER PROGRAM LOAD COMPARE/TRACE(A-SCN) CK CTRL(K-SCRN)-SCN OPERATION RATE CTRL DISPLAY/ALTER SCRN DISPLAY/ALTER SCRN DISPLAY/ALTER CURREN DISPLA Y/ALTER VIR ST DISPLAY/ALTER BL S A ALTER UCW/DEVICE DIR DISPLAY/ALT UCW/DV D DISPLAY/ALT LOC STOR ALTER EXTERNAL REG DISPLAY REGISTER DISPLAY/ALT SP STR INSERT/EXTRACT SCR INSERT/EXT LOC STOR INSERT/EXT CH D BUFF INSERT/EXT SWAP BUFF EXT" TRAP/SAL STACK INSERT/EXT TRAP/BAL EXTRACT PU DLAT INSERT/EXT IPU DLAT CHANNEL DLAT GRP 2 INSERT/EXTRACT DLAT EXTRACT KEY GRP 2 INSERT/EXT KEY Ll DIRECTORY INSERT/EXT DIRECTORY CACHE RETRY DATA INSERT/EXT CACHE INSERT/EXT STA SC RG INSERT CHECKS SYSTEM INSERT/EXT CK SYS PU HARDWARE INST/EXT HARDWARE CONTROL STORAGE MAIN STOR HARDWARE MAIN STORAGE HWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE INSERT /EXT CH INTR FC EXTERNAL REGISTERS EXTERNAL REGISTERS INSERT/EXT SCAN RING CLOCK SCAN RINGS CLOCK SCAN RINGS INSERT/EXT SET CSAR CAP INITIATOR PWR/TEM(M-5CREENl ANALOG SENSE DISPLAY PWR DIAG DISKETTE IPL UCW ASSI G PROC SP STAND ALONE DUMP TAd INDEX TABLE MODEL L02 OF CONTENTS SYSTEM 0008848 DOC COUNTER PART NUM 0005666453 0005666268 0002676421 0005666351 0005666352 0005666353 0002676422 0005666354 0002676423 0005666355 0005666356 0005666358 0005666359 0005666360 0005666361 0005666362 0005666363 0002676455 0002676425 0002676456 0002676457 0005666366 0005666367 0005666368 0005666369 0005666370 0005666371 0005666372 0002676409 0005666374 0002676430 0005666375 0005666376 0002676431 0002676432 0005666377 0005666378 0005666379 0005666380 0005666381 0002676433 0005666382 0002676434 0005666383 0002676435 0002676436 0002676437 0005666384 0002676438 0002676439 0002676410 0002676440 0002676441 0005666386 0002676442 0005666387 0002676443 0002676444 0002676445 0002676446 0002676447 0002676448 0005666388 0002676449 0002676450 0005666389 0002676451 0002676452 0002676453 0002676412 0005666391 0002676413 0002676414 0002676415 0002676458 0005666396 0005666397 0005666398 0002676454 0005666400 0002676424 0002676426 0005666403 0002676416 0005666269 0005666420 81/07/27 MODE SCHED SHIP 81/Q2/02 08 EC NUM 376695 376688 379808 379824 379824 379824 379824 379607 379824 379824 379605 379824 379586 379607 379607 379807 379824 379808 379607 379808 379808 379807 379604 379594 379598 379598 379807 379598 379808 379807 379822 379824 379807 379822 379807 379598 379607 379807 379807 379807 379822 379807 379822 379807 379822 379807 379822 379807 379822 379807 379808 379822 379807 379807 379822 379807 379822 379807 379807 379822. 379807 379807 379807 379822 379807 379807 379822 379807 379808 379808 379807 379808 379808' 379808 379808 379598 379604 379598 379807 379824 379808 379808 379807 379808 376688 379607 FEATURE B/M OR B/MS 0004432864 .W. 0004432864 .W. 0004230664 • W. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 • W. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 .W. 0004432864 .W. 0004432864 • W. 0004432864 • W. 0004432864 • W. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 .W. 0004432864 .W. 0004230664 0004230664 0004432864 • W. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 .W. 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 • W. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 000423"0664 0004432864 • W• 0004230664 .W. 0004432864 0004230664 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 • W. 0004230664 0004230664 0004432864 0004230664 • W. 0004230664 • W. 0004230664 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 .W. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004230664 0004230664 0004432864 0004230664 0004432864 0004432864 .w. .W. .w. .W. .w. .W. .w. .W. .W. .w. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. .W. PAGE .W. 0004230664 7 _~ REQUESTED BY DEPUE VOLUME LO~IC 018 SH MACHINE 4341- -0011543 TITLE TAB MAINT INFO MAINT INFO PROCESSOR CLAMP INTERFRAME INTERFRAME MAINT MAINT ~~ INOI VIDUAL MANUAL MANUAL CABLES CABLES INFO MANUAL INFO MANUAL TOTAL PART NUMBERS THIS VOLUME __ ~ ___________" _ ~ ~. _____-_-'--""-=.... SYS TEM 0008848 DOC COUNTER PART NUM 0005666270 0005666435 0005666436 0002676480 0002676481 0002676482 0002676483 0002676490 0005666440 0005666441 0005666425 97 __________ '"="""--~~ MODE FEATURE B/M OR B/MS • w. 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004154511 0004154511 0004154511 0004154511 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 0004432864 .w. .w. .w. .w. .w. .w. .w. .w. .w. .w. = ___ 81/07/27 08 EC NUM 376688 379607 379605 379607 379607 379607 379605 379607 379607 379607 379600 •. ,_--'--._-_-_"""-"->~~-~~~_.o=.--_= TABLE OF CONTENTS MODEL L02 TYPE -0- SYSTEMS DIAGRAMS PAGE NUM 4SooT 4S005 48015 4S025C 48035C 48045C 48049C 48051 48055 48065 49005 ____ ~~~.~_~ PAGE SCHED SHIP 81/02/02 8 C: ·c' ( ( C ( ( ( (-' ===== - - -....--- - --- - -,--- -- ";:' == -= - - == _.- ( C' ( " Maintenance Information VOLUME 18 GENERAL INFORMATION CONSOLE FUNCTIONS INDEX .'w,:"oo , oz>' - -.:: =- -== -= == -----== -=~ - = - ~ ~ INSTALLATION General Information EC 376695 16Aug79 © IBM Corp. 1979 PN 5666453 1 of 1 44005 - . __..... _. . _.. . .. ..... -.. --~ 0000000000000000000000000000000000 - -- . . ----~--.~.------- ..---- ....- - - - - .. -.--~.---.-. c' ( ... ( ( ( ( ( ( ( o ( CONSOLE FUNCTIONS 00(. r Q GENERAL SELECTION ----- SCREEN ABBREVIATED CONTENTS ( Y TIME OF DAY-E NABLE ----- SAVE MACHINE SAVE Z X F L B A K 0 D V E M I S SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE P CONSOLE TEST PATTERN MODULE TRANSFER o DATA BANK INITIALIZATION B REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY T TAPE TO DISKETTE BUILD QL PROGRAM LOAD 44 195 I LI MODE ASSIST 44 195 QD DISPLAY/ALTER 44 255 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 185 187 188 191 680 691 695 QDU UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY 44 E 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 265 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 305 310 315 325 329 335 340 260 DIRECTORY 44 315 C COMPRESSED DIRECTORY 44 320 E EXPANDED DIRECTORY 44 320 QDT TRACE AREA 44 295 I COUNTER 44 295 C PSW AND I/O TRACE CONTROLS 44 296 P PSW AND I/O TRACE 44 296 F SAVED IFCC 44 297 I/O DEVICE STATUS 44 297 Notes: • Selections with broken lines indicate a non-displayable function. • Selections with asterisks (*) not available at all microcode levels. @ ----_ .. IBM Corp. 1981 -------_._---.-_ ......_-_._-.-------- • * ---------- ( c ( ( (- ( (' A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM GRP 2 K CHECKS IN SYSTEM GRP 1 I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTERFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING GRP 2 Y CLOCK SCAN ~ING GRP 1 W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS 165 165 170 170 170 170 170 170 175 180 195 635 215 235 245 255 345 545 585 607 QE ERROR LOGOUTS 44 545 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 350 435 443 445 449 453 457 463 495 501 515 517 519 521 525 535 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 355 360 365 370 375 380 395 397 403 405 407 409 413 415 417 419 425 427 429 C PU LOGOUTS S SP LOGOUTS L POWER LOGOUTS B TEMPERATURE LOGOUTS T RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS R REFERENCE CODE LOGOUTS I CAP INIT IATOR W SAVED SCREENS o DISKETTE READABILITY QM POWER/TEMPERATURE 44 545 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 545 555 560 565 566 570 575 576 580 W PARTIAL POWER UP/DOWN U FULL POWER UP A ANALOG SENSOR DISPLAY D DIGITAL SENSOR DiSPLAY T TEMPERATURE SENSOR DISPLAY V VOLTAGE TRACKING ---- P POWER DIAGNOSTICS 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 f QVA ARRAYS 44 350 L PU LS P PU RETRY LS o CHNL DATA BUFFER N CHNL CONTROL S SWAP BUFFER C CONTROL STORAGE T TRAP/BAL STACK B CSAR BACKUP U PU DLAT GRP 2 U PU DLAT GRP 1 H CHNL DLAT GRP 2 H CHNL DLAT GRP 1 Y KEY GRP 2 Y KEY GRP 1 F L1 DIR GRP 2 F L1 0 IR GRP 1 G Ll CACHE DATA R CACHE RETRY DATA GRP 2 R CACHE RETRY DATA GRP 1 585 585 595 595 600 600 605 1 315 u DEVICE § RETURN TO PR OG SYS SP STORAGE 01 SPLAY CONFIGURATIO N PROGRAM LOAD BLOCK/PATCH COMPARE/TRACE CHECK CONTROL OPERATION RATE DISPl.AY/ALTE R INSERT/EXTRA CT ERROR LOGOUT S POWER/TEMPER ATURE DISKETTE IPL 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 QV INSERT/EXTRACT 44 345 G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSI.' K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE ---- = HEX CALCULATOR ( 44 165 1 J INTERVAL T IME R-SWITCH --------- PROGR SYSTEM RESET -PROGRAM ----- CLEAR SYSTEM RESET -CLEAR CM MACHINE RESET --------- RES RESTART ----- QF CONFIGURATION 44 180 ( Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676421 1 of 5 44 015f .~----- --'--- - - - -><- - , .•.• - - - - , ~- ..... ~ . - - - . - - - ~,-.-- .. - --.-. - -, - -, -- ._-------- _._..... _- -... -- "--"---' ~-"'-'---~ ..-...-. --"'-' ---.-<.----.... -~-~ .. --~~ . . --.. - --~'-" '-~- ... ~.~.- .. ,--. '--- -_ ....... _-_. -'---'''-'~---.~--~- .. -."-~ .'-:",'.;; . -.-.;.-.-.-.. "-........ ~ ... :...".-- CONTENTS Introduction . ................................. 44 025 Operator Control Panel (OCP) .................. 44 035 Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Definitions (Display Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions and Deviations (Display Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console and Printer Sensing Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 OCP Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 System Status . ............................... 44 135 095 095 095 095 095 096 096 096 115 44' 045 44 045 44 050 44 050 44 050 Messages . ................................... 44 155 3279 Model 2C Display Console ................ 44 051 Manual Functions . ............................ 44 165 Display / Alter Screens .............. ' ........... 44 255 Console Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 Model 2C Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 Model 2C Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Selection (Q-Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the General Selection Screen (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Manual Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . ..... Fast-Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time-of-Day Enable (V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interval Timer Switch (J) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chp.ck Reset (Re-IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Reset (CM) (Normal) .... ' ....... ; ....... Machine Reset (CMrr) (One Ring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Reset (CMLxxxx) (With Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restart (RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Store Status (SAVE) (370 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Save (SAVE) (VSE Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP Storage (OX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration (OF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Record Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to General Selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Color Convergence (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convergence Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Test Pattern (OFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Transfer (OFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Load (QL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode/ Assist (QU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Assists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . load Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perform 1M L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . Return to General Selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Load-Parameter Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invoking Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patches at IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display / Alter (D-Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 255 Display / Alter D-Screen (QD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 255 Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44260 Display / Alter Hex Calculator (QD=) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 Display Hex Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 Fast-Selection Hexadecimal Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 Display / Alter General Registers (ODG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Display General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Alter General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Fast-Alter General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Save General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Display / Alter Control Register (QDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Display Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Alter Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Fast-Alter Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Save Control Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 Display / Alter Floating-Point Registers (QDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 Display Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 Alter Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 Fast-Alter Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " .. 44 270 Save Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 Display / Alter Current PSW (ODP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 Display Current· PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 Alter Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 Fast-Alter Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 Save Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 PSW Screen Label (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 PSW Screen Label (BC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 Display / Alter Storage Key (QDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 Display Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 Alter Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 Fast-Alter Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 Save Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 44 44 44 44 44 44 025 025 025 025 025 025 3278 Model 2A Display Console ................ 44 045 Console Characteristics .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3278 Model 2A Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3278 Model 2A Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 051 051 052 052 052 Display/Keyboard . ............................ 44 055 Keyboard Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typematic Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alphameric and Special Character Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Symbqls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols and Punctuation Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Cursor to Beginning of Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Cursor One Character Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Facility Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy ........ '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44055 44 055 44 055 44 055 44 055 44 060 44 060 44 060 44 065 44 065 44 070 44 070 44 070 Features . .................................... 44 071 Security Keylock (Optional Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071 Audible Alarm Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071 3287 Printer . ................................. 44 075 Printer Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 Modes of Operation . .......................... 44 085 Printer / Keyboard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Area .... ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer/Keyboard Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Definitions (Printer/Keyboard Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions and Deviations (Ptr/Kbd Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . o 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to General Selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retur.n to Prog Sys (Z). . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . : . . '.' . . . . . Compare/Trace (QA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ........ Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD DR Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OP Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V /R Field (370 Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Control (QK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Control - Fast-Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Controls ......... -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Rate Control (QO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ...... Operation Rate - Fast-Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Rate Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Control Panel (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Console/Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3287 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085 44 085 44 085 44 085 44 090 44 090 44 090 44 090 Line Line Line Line Line 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0 0 0 0, () 0 0 0 00 (0 0 0 0 I' · · 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 135 140 140 140 145 165 165 165 165 170 170 165 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 175 180 185 185 185 185 187 187 188 188 191 191 195 195 195 195 195 200 200 200 200 200 205 205 210 0 0 0 0 0 0 Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676421 44 210 44 210 44 205 44 205 44215 44 215 44 225 44 230 44 230 44 230 44 230 44 235 44 235 44 240 44 240 44 245 44 245 44 245 44016f 2 of 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 t) 0 0 ( ( ( "'C ' ( ( ( ( Display / Alter Virtual Storage 370!VSE (ODV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Virtual Storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Virtual Storage 370!VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Virtual Storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Virtual Storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display / Alter Real Storage 370 (ODM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Real Storage 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display/Alter Trace Area (ODT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Trace Area (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Instruction Counter Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Instruction Counter Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display PSW and I/O Trace Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display PSW and I/O Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear PSW and I/O Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Saved IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Saved IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display I/O Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Sample Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display / Alter Block Save Area (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Block Save Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Block Save Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Block Save Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Screen Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Area Type Field Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display/Alter Auxiliary Storage (ODA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display/Alter UCW/Device Directory (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( 44 285 44 285 44 285 44 285 44 285 44 290 44 290 44 290 44 290 44 290 44295 44 295 44 295 44 295 44 296 44296 44 296 44 297 44 297 44 297 44 297 44297 44 301 44 305 44 305 44 305 44 305 44 305 44 305 44 310 44 310 44 310 44310 44 310 44 315 Display UCW /Device Directory Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315 Alter UCW / Device Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315 Display UCW/Device Directory Update (QDUU) . . . . . . . . . . . 44315 Alter UCW/Device Directory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315 UCW Compressed Directories (QDUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 Display UCW /Device Directory-Compressed Directories Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 Alter UCW /Device Directory-Compressed Directories Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 UCW Expanded Directories (ODUE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 Display UCW /Device Directory-Expanded Directories Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 Alter UCW /Device Directory-Expanded Directories Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 Display/Alter Local Storage (ODL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44325 Display Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 Alter Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 Fast-Alter Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 Save Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 Display / Alter External Registers (ODX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 Display External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 Fast-Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 Save External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 Display / Alter SP Storage (ODW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 Display SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 Alter SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 Fast-Alter SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 Save SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 ( ( ( o o 6' ( ( Display / Alter Console Disk File (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Console Disk File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Console Disk File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Console Disk File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Console Disk File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 Insert/Extract Screens ........................ 44 345 44 345 44 345 44 350 44 350 44 355 44 355 44 355 44 355 44 355 44 360 44 360 44 360 44 360 44 360 44 360 44 365 44 365 44 365 44 365 44 365 44 365 44 370 44 370 44 370 44 370 44 370 44 375 44 375 44 375 44 375 44 375 44 380 44 380 44 380 44 380 44 380 44 380 44 385 44 385 44 395 44 395 44 395 44 395 44 395 44 395 44 397 44 397 44 397 44 397 44 397 44403 44 403 44 403 44 403 44 403 44 403 Insert/Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/ Extract (OV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Arrays (OVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Array Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Local Store (OVAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Local Store. . . . . ..................... Alter Local Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Local Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Local Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract PU Retry Local Store (OVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display PU Retry Local Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter PU Retry Local Store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save PU Retry Local Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter PU Retry Loca! Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Channel Data Buffer (OVAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Channel Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Channel Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Channel Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Channel Data Buffer. . . . . . . . .. . ... Label Identification . . . . . . . . ....... " .... Insert/Extract Channel Control (OVAN). . . . . . . .. . ... Display Channel Control. . . . . . . . . . . ... Alter Channel Control . . . ..................... Save Channel Control . . . ................... Fast-Alter Channel Control. . . . . . . . . . . . ...... Insert/Extract Swap Buffer (OVAS) . . . .... Display Swap Buffer. . . . . ................... Alter Swap Buffer. . . . . . . ....... Save Swap Buffer. . . . . . . . . . . ......... Fast-Alter Swap Buffer. . . . . . ............... Insert/Extract Control Store (OVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Control Store. . . . . . . . . . ............ Alter Control Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Control Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Control Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Store (OVAC) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract!Trap!BAL Stack (OVAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Trap/BAL Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Trap/BAL Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Trap/BAL Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Trap/BAL Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract CSAR Backup (OVAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display CSAR Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter CSAR Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save CSAR Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter CSAR Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract PU DLAT (OVAU) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. Save PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 340 340 340 340 ( ( ( ( (: ( Insert/Extract PU DLAT (OVAU) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display PU DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter PU DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save PU DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter PU DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Channel DLAT (OVAH) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Channel DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Channel DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Channel DLAT (OVAH) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Channel DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Channel DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Key (OVAY) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Key (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Key (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Key (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Key (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Key (OVAY) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract L1 Directory (OVAF) (GRP 2).. . . . . . . . . . . . . Display L1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter L1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save L1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter L1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract L1 Directory (OVAF) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display L1 Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter L1 Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save L1 Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Ll Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract L1 Cache Data (OVAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display L1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter l1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save L1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter L1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Cache Retry Data (OVAR) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . Display Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Cache Retry Data (OVAR) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . Display Cache Retry Data (GRP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Cache Retry Data (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast-Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676421 3 of 5 44 405 44 405 44 405 44 405 44405 44 405 44 407 44 407 44 407 44 407 44 407 44 407 44409 44 409 44409 44 409 44 409 44 409 44 413 44413 44 413 44 413 44 413 44 413 44 415 44 415 44 415 44 415 44 415 44 415 44 417 44 417 44 417 44 417 44 417 44 417 44 419 44 419 44 419 44 419 44 419 44 419 44 425 44 425 44 425 44 425 44 425 44 425 44 427 44 427 44 427 44 427 44 427 44 427 44 429 44 429 44 429 44 429 44 429 44429 44017f Insert/Extract Status Scan Ring (QVS) .................. 44 435 Display Status Scan Ring.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 Alter Status Scan Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 Save Status Scan Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 Insert/Extract Checks in System (QVK) (GRP 2) ., ......... 44 443 Display Checks in System (GRP 2) .................. 44 443 Alter Checks in System (GRP 2) .................... 44 443 Save Checks in System (GRP 2) .................... 44 443 Check Reset (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443 Fast-Alter Checks in System (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443 Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443 Insert/Extract Checks in System (QVK) (GRP 1) ........... 44 445 Display Checks in System (GRP 1) .................. 44 445 Alter Checks in System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 Save Checks in System (GRP 1) .................... 44 445 Check Reset (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 Fast-Alter Checks in System (GRP 1) ................ 44 445 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 Insert/Extract PU Harclware (QVI) ..................... 44 449 Display PU Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 Alter PU Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 Save PU Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 Fast-Alter PU Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 450 Insert/Extract Control Storage Hardware (QVB) ............ 44 453 Display Control Storage Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453 Alter Control Storage Hardware .................... 44 453 Save Control Storage Hardware .................... 44 453 Fast-Alter Control Storage Hardware ................. 44 453 Label Identification , . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 454 Insert/Extract Main Storage Hardware (QVM) ............. 44 457 Display Main Storage Hardware .................... 44 457 Alter Main Storage Hardware ...................... 44 457 Save Main Storage Hardware ...................... 44 457 Fast-Alter Main Storage Hardware .................. 44 457 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 458 Insert/Extract Channel Hardware (QVH) ................. 44 463 Display Channel Hardware ........................ 44 463 Alter Channel Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463 Save Channel Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463 Fast-Alter Channel Hardware ...................... 44 463 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 464 Insert/Extract Channel Interface (QVC) .................. 44 495 Display Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 Alter Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 Save Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 Fast-Alter Channel Interface ....................... 44 495 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 Insert/Extract External Registers (QVX) .............. ' ... 44 501 Display External Registers ........................ 44 501 Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 Save External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 Fast-Alter External Registers ...................... 44 501 Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 502 Insert/Extract Scan Rings (QVR) ...................... 44 515 Display Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 Alter Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 Save Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 Fast-Alter Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 Loop Scan Rings ....•.......................... 44 515 Insert/Extract Clock Scan Rings (QVY) (GRP 2) ............ 44 517 Display Clock Scan Rings (GRP 2) .... , .............. 44 517 Label Identification (GRP 2) ....................... 44 517 Insert/Extract Clock Scan Rings (QVY) (GRP 1) ............ Display Clock Scan Rings (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract W Command (QVW) .................... W Command Invoke Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Maintenance Chip Command List ............... PU Maintenance Chip Command List ................. Control Storage Maintenance Chip Command List ........ Cache/Storage Maintenance Chip CMD List............ Insert/Extract Translate Address (QVT) .................. Translate Address Any V Screen .................... Alter Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert/Extract Set CSAR Address (QVG) ................. Set CSAR Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44519 44 519 44 519 44 521 44 521 44 521 44 521 44 521 44 521 44 525 44 525 44 525 44 525 44 535 44 535 Error Logout Screens .......................... 44 545 Error Logouts (QE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Error Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU Logouts ............. : .................... PU Directory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU Purge Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU Logout Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP Logout Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP Purge All Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSF Line Error Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Code Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Code Logout File ....................... Purge All Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAP Initiator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saved Screens (QEW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Saved Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diskette Readability Screen (QED) ..................... Diskette Readability Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . Return to General Selection (Q) ..................... Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 545 545 545 550 550 550 555 555 555 560 560 565 566 570 570 570 575 576 576 576 577 580 580 580 580 580 Power/Temperature Screens ................... 44 585 Power /Temperature (QM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Power/Temperature Screen ................. Partial Power Up and Down Screen .................. Full Power-Up Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Momentary Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Status Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Sense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Sensor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Sense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Tracking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to General Selection (Q) ..................... Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diskette IPL (QI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Diskette IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to General Selection (Q) ..................... Return to Prog Sys (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 585 585 585 585 590 590 595 595 600 600 605 605 605 607 Block Facility (QB) ............................ 44 635 Rules For Specifying Blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 Block Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 Displaying the Block List (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 Editing Blocks (F blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 Erasing Blocks (R block name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 Activating Blocks (A blockname) ...................• 44 640 Halting Blocks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 Transferring Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 Initializing The Index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 Automatically Running a Block at IML (M) ................ 44 640 Block Execution Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 Fast-Selecting a Screen (Q screenid) ................. 44 645 NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 TOO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 HALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 44 645 MSG ....... ' ..............' ..... : ............ 44 645 GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 44 645 Setting Variable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 Comparing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 Simulating the Start or Stop Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 Transferring Control from One Block to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 XFER.blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 Waiting for an Address Match to Occur ................. 44 650 Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 Executing a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 Using the Address Compare (OA) and Match Commands .... .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 Aborting a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 IML Effect on a Running Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 Patch Facility (QBTP) .......................... 44 655 44 655 44 655 44 655 44 655 Rules For Specifying Patchname .....................• Patch Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . Displaying the Patch List (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Patches (F Patchname) ..................... Erasing Patches (R Patch name) ..................... Activating Patches (A Patchname) ................... Patch Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating Patches (0 Patchname) ................. Transferring Patches (K Patch name) .................... Patch Execution Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDD ........ , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .... END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patch Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 44 660 44 44 44 44 44 44 660 660 660 660 660 660 44 660 44 660 44 660 607 607 607 SP Stand-Alone Dump Support ................. 44 608 Model Group 2 EC 379825 OSJun81 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676421 i 44018f 40f5 ------ - - - - - - - o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 o o o o o o o o 00 o 0···· . . o 00 ( ( ( ( (- { () o () ( ( ( Remote Support Facility ....................... 44 675 Remote Support Facility Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Bank Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Bank Invoke Procedures ...................... Data Bank Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Bank Disconnect Procedures ................... Data Bank Mode Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Console Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 675 44 675 44 675 44 685 44 680 44 680 44 680 Remote Operator Console Facility (OFB) . ........ 44 691 Diskette Build Function (OFT) .................. 44 695 Diskette Build Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diskette Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diskette Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 695 695 700 700 Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676421 50f 5 44 019f , 0000000000000000000000000000000000 .~ - .----.----~~ .. - ..... _.- .. - ------ -- . __ .. __ ._- ... - ._ .. - - --- (: (~ ( (: (' (' ( ( ( ( (' ( (-~\ (~" (-: (~ (:' INTRODUCTION This manual provides information required by the operator for: • Normal system operations. • Procedures that can be carried out by service representatives. The 4341 system consists of one 3278 Display Console Model 2A (standard) or the 3279 Color Display Console Model 2C (optional). Optional features allow three additional devices (3278-2A, 3279-2C Display Consoles or 3287 Model 1, 2, 1C, and 2C Printers) in any arrangement. Optional display consoles can be assigned used as alternate operator display consoles. OPERATOR CONSOLE The operator console for the 4341 consists of: • Hardware Configuration Modes of The operator control panel has switches for basic tasks (such as making the system operational) and lights to alert the operator of system status. The 4341 Processor consists of one 3278-2A (standard) or 3279-2C (optional) Display Console. Optional features allow three additional 3278-2A, 3279-2C or 3287 devices to be attached to the support processor and configured as needed. The 3278-2A and 3279-2C operator console keyboard has 75 keys including 12 Program Function keys. All alphameric, graphic, and cursor control keys are typamatic. When held pressed, typamatic keys automatically repeat at .approximately ten operations a second. The 3278-2A and 3279-2C Display Consoles have three modes of operatiol1 that affect screen fO.rmat:Display mode, Printer/Keyboard mode, and Manual mode. The Display and Printer / Keyboard modes are used under the control of the operating system. Manual mode, which can be entered at any time, provides control of basic system fllnctions. The following figure indicates the 4341 hardware configuration. In display mode, the 3278-2Aor 3279-2C Display Console and the optional 3287 Printer are separately addressable . devices operating as a 3270-type of operator console. Data. may be entered or displayed on the display console and separately printed on the hard-copy printer. Display Console/Keyboard The Display Console is the principal device for the operator to communicate with the system. The keyboard and the display can control system operations as well as display the status of the system. The display keyboard has alphameric, control. and function keys. All keys, except the Copy key and those keys designated for CE use only, operate when the console is in display mode. A display screen • A display keyboard. Messages and status information appear on the display screen in clear text. Most of the operator functions are performed at the keyboard. Display Mode P U 3287 Printer BYTE CHANNEL A control panel • Op~,.ation Operator Control Panel (OCP) The 3287 Printer provides a printed copy of information that is displayed at a display console, or of information written from the program. Printed data appears in the same alphameric characters and symbols that appear on a display image. Printouts can be formatted in the same manner as a display image. The cursor indication is not shown on the printer output. I 1 Manual operations (such as displaying and altering data, loading programs, and running the system in instruction-stepor address-compare mo'de) are performed by keying characters from the keyboard into displays on the video screen. The screen is used to display all acti.ons. No indicator lights are to be decoded. All information is displayed on the screen, either in clear text, hexadecimal notation, or binary zeros and ones. L CA SUPPORT I 0 C A 3278 2A ==1 I In printer/keyboard mode, the 3278-2A or 3279-2C Display Console and the optional 3287 Printer share a single address. This mode is used to emulate a 1052 for those operating systems and programs designed for that type of operator console. Operating messages to and from the system are displayed on the display console and also printed on the coupled printer. 3287 When the system is in manual mode, the display console is under control of support processor microcode. The system uses the display console to display or alter data, control a function, or display the results of a function. The support processor manual functions are: to alter/display storage, registers, PSW, UCWs, etc., or to compare stop on addresses or data. All manual function facilities are displayed on the General Selection screen (a). I PROCESSOR I Manual Mode I I A permanent display of the 4341 status is at the lower part of the screen. Printer/Keyboard Mode a I I 3287 3278 2A 3279 2C ==[ 1 3279 2C EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379824 16Jan81 .~~~~ -----_. __ ., PN 5666351 1 of 1 '44·025 ( (~ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0·0-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C' ( .... ~ (" ( ... C (- ( ( -' (" ( {-- ( (- (' (~: (-, (- ( ( 0, (/ (- ( '" '(- (' ( " " "'" 'OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP) The, operator control panel (OCP)is on bOth the 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboards. The OCP provides the facilities to control the sy.stem power and the associated initial microcode load and tom,onitor the system operating states. Clan"'::'Chan Disabled 0 ) OCP SWITCHES Power On/IML Switch Basic Check 0 System 0 Wait 0 Power In Process Power Complete 0 0 Clannel To Clannel Power On IML E] This switch has a dual function. Powering on the system by pressing this switch: • Applies powe,r Powers on all I/O devices that are switched to power , on/off with the processor. IMLs the instruction processor if IML at power-on is specified on the Program Load screen. If system, problems later occur during operational processing, pressing Power On re-IMLs the support processor without powering down the system. Note. that a re-IML does not reset any PU errors. Notes: The 4341 requires 15 seconds of warmup time after the main power is applied before the operator control panel can power up the system. The Power On/IML switch must not be pressed within approximately 30 seconds following a power-off or a BASIC CHECK results. The cooling fans must have time to stop. • ~ Off <1,. to the processor. IMLs the support processor. (A subsequent, non related IML of the processing unit occurs at the conclusion of the , power-on cycle). • Test After initiating power-on or re-IML, do not perform any other functions or press any key, until the power-on or re-IML is complete. These functions cannot be aborted as microcode is involved in a very complex sequence. Even if you make an error, you must wait for the sequence to be completed. Logic Reset Key OCP INDICATORS Note: This key is inside the machine near the diskette drive. This key invokes a process which attempts to restore proper operation to the SP without reloading any code. However, to do this, a small module is read from the diskette. Therefore, the diskette must be operational. All adapters and certain control blocks are reset; then the General Selection screen appears. Power Off Switch This switch removes power from the system under control of the power sequencing program resident in the support . processor. Note: Observe the notes for Power On/IML switch above; they apply to this switch also. Channel-to-Channel Switch Power In Process This indicator turns on as soon as the Power On switch is pressed. It remains on through the power-on sequence of hardware initialization of the support processor, IML, ' processor power sequence, and control unit power. At this point it goes out, and the Power Complete light turns on. Power Complete Basic Check This indicator turns on when a hardware malfunction exists in the basic power (hardwire sequence), the display console, or when the CE switch is in the CE Mode. If the Operator Console has a control panel, a power-off, a Test Mode condition, an open coax cable or a console and/or DCA hardware failure, the Basic Check indicator turns on. When power is restored and the console is returned from Test mode, the Basic Check indicator is reset. System This indicator turns on at the end of the power-on sequence. This indicator is on when PU operations are active; for example, during instruction processing. Chan-Chan Disabled Wait Indicator This indicator is associated with the Channel-to-Channel switch and comes on when the processor logical interface is not connected. When lit, the operator can power down the system and not lose data or hang up the other processor. This indicator is on when the processor is idle (processing clock is running, but no instruction processing is taking place). The channel-to-channel switch is required for systems having a channel-to-channel adapter feature. This switch is activated to make a logical interface connection of one processor to another processor for data sharing purposes. Normally, it is activated only two times during the workday: 1. After power-up completion. Activation places the interface in,the enabled mode and causes the Disable indicator to go out. 2. Prior to powering off. Power Off should not be pressed until the Chan-Chan Disabled indicator comes on. Lamp Test Switch This switch is used by the operator to check whether or not all indicators are working. EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379824 16Jan81 PN 5666352 1 of 1 44035 . ------- --------------- ---~--- -----~ ------- - ---- -~~-- - - - - - ( c' (:,~ (~ (~ ( c c c C (, .( (- (- (- C ( (,' ( ( ( ( (. c ( (~ ( ( ( 3278 DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2A CONSOLE CHARACTERISTICS 3278 MODEL2A OPERATOR CONTROLS The 3218 Display Console Model 2A has a screen size of 1920 characters, 24 lines at 80 characters per line. The bottom four (21-24) lines are reserved for system status information. Both uppercase and lowercase characters can be displayed. Brightness Control Audible Alarm Volume Control You can adjust the brightness of the characters displayed on the screen by turning the brightness control knob to the left or to the right. Turning it to the right makes the display image brighter; to the left, dimmer. Find the setting most convenient and comfortable for your viewing. If held aU the way to the right. a raster pattern is displayed for test purposes. This raster pattern can vary between consoles. If the display console has the Audible Alarm feature, the volume control for the audible alarm is at the outside of the screen contrast control. Turning this control clockwise increases the sound level; turning the control counterclockwise decreases the sound level. To test or adjust the audible alarm, refer to "Audible Alarm Feature." Display Image Normal/Test Switch The display image format is divided into three functional areas. When you are operating the display station, have this switch in the Normal position. Use the Test position of this switch when you have a problem with the display console and you perform the Problem Determination Procedures. When you place the switch in. the Test position, the operator can perform tests that help diagnose the cause of the problem. Display upper and lowercase characters. Display uppercase characters. -Operating Mode Test Mode - displays test pattern. Audible Alarm Volume Control The Normal/Test switch is used together with the Power On/Off switch to create ready and not ready conditions. See "Power On/Off Switch" above. Dual Case/Mono Case Switch (Aa/A) When this switch is set to dual case (Aa), both uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters are displayed on the screen. When the switch is set to monocase (Al, both lowercase and uppercase alphabetic characters are displayed in uppercase. Screen Contrast Control. Scret.!n Brightness Control ..· Test, if held all the way to the right, Program Area Lines 1-20 display the operator input and host program output messages. System Status Area Lines 21-24 display system status. for the layout for these four lines, see "System Status." Operator Information Area Line 25 for displays console and keyboard status. Regardless of how the switch is set, lowercase characters are transmitted if you do not switch to uppercase and they may be received as data on a 'Write command. Power On/Off Switch Push in on the top portion of the Power On/Off switch to apply power to your display. The red indicator is visible at the lower part of the switch when it is in the On ( II position. This is a reminder to turn power off (0) before leaving your display. The On indicator and Indicator 1 turn on when you turn on the Power switch. A delay of a few seconds allows the machine to warm up. After 'this delay, Indicator 2 turns on, and the cursor appears in the first character position on line one. Contrast Control The contrast control can aid in adjusting the display for comfortable viewing. Two intensity levels are used to display characters, the contrast cOntrol varies the difference between these two levels. Experiment to find the contrast level that is prefered. To turn off the display console, push in on the bottom portion of the Power On/Off switch. The Power On/Off switch is used together with the Normal/Test switch to make the device ready or not-ready. On and Normal create a ready condition; Off or Test create a not-ready condition. In the not-ready case, intervention required sense is set, and Start I/O instructions to the device are rejected. When a not-ready-to-ready transition occurs, device-end status is presented. Whenever the device is made ready in this manner, a blank program area screen appears. EC 379587 31Jan80 EC 379824 16Jan81 PN 5666353 1 of 2 44045 c - - - - - - ---- ---------~---~.-.--.------ 3278 MODEL 2AINDICATORS The 3278 Console Display Model 2A has both .off-screen and on-screen indicators. The off-screen indicators are on the left front of the display. The on-screen indicators are displayed on the bottom line of the display. ~ Off-Screen Indicators ~ Power On Indicator The Power On indicator, when lit, indicates that power is on in the display console. It turns on when you turn the Power On/Off switch to the On position. ~i ~ Indicator 1 Indicator 1, when lit, indicates that the internal console circuits for the display image are ready. It turns on when you turn the Power On/Off switch to the On position. Indicator 2 Indicator 2, when lit, indicates that the high-voltage circuits in the display console are on. It turns on a few seconds after you place the Power On/Off switch in the On position. On-Screen Indicators The On-Screen indicators are messages that appear on line 25 in the Operator Display Area. For messages, refer to "Messages." ,~ i: EC 379587 31Jan80 EC 379824 16Jan81 ~ 00000 o o 00 o 00000 00 o 0 00 o 00 PN 5666353 44050 20f 2 o o o o o o '" c c c c (- (' c c c ( c c c c c 3279 COLOR DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2C CONSOLE CHARACTERISTICS Base Color Switch 3279 MODEL 2C OPERATOR CONTROLS The 3279 Color Display Console Model 2C is a tabletop display using a high-resolution color cathhode ray tube (CRT) display. The 3279-2C Base Color Mode provides four different colors, which can be produced by existing 3270 application programs with little or no reprogramming. Fields can be displayed in red, blue, green, or white. Field colors are determined by the four combinations of the field protection and intensity attributes. The 3279-2C Display Console has a screen size of 1920 characters, 24 lines at 80 characters per line. The bottom four (21-24) lines are reserved for system status information. Both uppercase and lowercase characters can be displayed. In the base color position (0000), the base colors red, blue, green and white are displayed. In the monochrome position (00), the base colors blue and red are replaced by green and white. Green and white fields are not affected. Indicator 1 Normal Test Switch ( (Poweron)~ Indicator 2 . (Display Ready) I 'fo r.J..:_-i-- Base Color Switch Indicator 3 (Test) Mono Case/Dual Case Switch FIELD ATTR IBUTES Audible Alarm Volume Control Turning this control clockwise increases the sound level; turning the control counterclockwise decreases the sound level. To test or adjust the audible alarm, refer to "Audible Alarm Feature." Normal/Test Switch When you are operating the display station, have this switch in the Normal position. COLOR DISPLAY Use the Test position of this switch when you have a problem with the display console and you perform the Problem Determination Procedures. When you place the switch in the Test position, the operator can perform tests that help diagnose the cause of the problem. 3279 MODEL 2C Operator PROTECTED I NTENS ITY COLOR MONO MODE NO NORMAL GREEN GREEN NO HIGH RED WHITE YES N'ORMAL BLUE GREEN YES HIGH WHITE WHITE The Normal/Test switch is used together with the Power On/Off switch to create ready and not-ready conditions. See "Power On / Off Switch" above. Power On/Off Switch Dual Case/Mono Case Switch (Aa/ A) Security Keylock Display Image When the switch is set to monocase (AI, both lowercase and uppercase alphabetic characters are displayed in uppercase. Fuse The display image format is divided into three functional areas. Program Area Lines 1-20 display the operator input and host program output messages. System Status Area Lines 21-24 display system status. For the layout for these four lines, see "System Status." Console Indicator Area line 25 for displays console and keyboard status. Line 25 is displayed in the color blue. Power On/Off Switch Brightness Control Push in on the top portion of the Power On/Off switch to apply power to your display. The On indicator and Indicator 1 turn on when you turn on the Power switch. A delay of a few seconds allows the machine to warm up. After this delay, Indicator 2 turns on, and the cursor appears in the first character position on line one. You can adjust the brightness of thil characters displayed on the screen by turning the brightnes!i control knob to the left or to the right. Turning it to the ritJht makes the display image brighter; to the left, dimmer. Find the setting most convenient and comfortable for viewing. If held all the way to the right, a raster pattern is displayed for test purposes. To turn off the display station, push in on the bottom portion of the Power On/Off switch. The Power On/Off switch is used together with the Normal/Test switch to make the device ready or not-ready. On and Normal create a ready condition; Off or Test create a not-ready condition. In the not-ready case, intervention required sense is set, and Start I/O instructions to the device are rejected. When a not-ready-to-ready transition occurs, device-end status is presented. Whenever the device is made ready in this manner, a blank program area screen appears. When this switch is set to dual case (Aa), both uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters are displayed on the screen. Regardless of how the switch is set, lowercase characters are transmitted if you do not shift to uppercase and they may be received as data on a Write command. Intensity Override Switch Operates when the brightness control is turned fully counterclockwise. This position sets the brightness circuits to maximum and the screen shows full rasters of red, blue and green. These are converged if the Test/ Normal switch is set to NORMAL on the 3279 and unconverged when set to the TEST position. EC 379824 16Jan81 PN 2676422 44051 1 of 2 '--~-------~'----.-'-'--- -- .._--. -_.._----- --- - ---- --'- - .. _.. _-- -~-- -~----- --_.-.- --_.- -.---- ..-- .. -.------.--------------~-.--- -- ---------~ ..------- - . _.. ---------,..--- .... - -------~-~----- --. 3279 MODEL 2C INDICATORS The 3279 Console Display Model 2C has two types of indicators: off-screen indicators and on-screen indicators. The off-screen indicators are on the left front of the display. The· on-screen indicators are displayed on the bottom line of the display screen. Off-Screen Indicators Power On Indicator The Power On indiCJItor, when lit, indicates that power is on in the display console. It turns on when you turn the Power On/Off switch to the On position. Indicator 1 Indicator 1, when lit indi«;ates line supply and +5 volts are available. This does not confirm the availability of other voltages throughout the machine, but it does turn on when the Power On/Off switch is in the On postion. Indicator 2 Indicator 2, when lit, indicates that the high-voltage circuits in the display console are operating. It turns on 'about 40 . seconds after you place the Power On/Off switch in the On position. This allows fOT warmup. Indicator 3 Indicator 3, when lit, indicates Normal/Test switch is in the Test poSition. On-8creen Indicators The On-Screen Indicators are messages that appear on line 25 in the operator display area. For messages, refer to "Messages. " EC 379824 ·16Jan81 PN 2676422 20f 2 o o o o o o 00 o 00 o 00 00 o o o 00 I 44 052 J. o o o o o o o o .() o \.. .. ( ("~ (, ( (" ( . " -, j (' ( l,.• ( (: ( ( DISPLAY/KEYBOARD KEYBOARD CHARACTERISTICS Key Symbols Symbols and Punctuation Marks The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboards enable the operator to communicate with the system. Most functions are available in the stopped and running states of the system. Instead of language, the following symbols appear on the display keyboard: These characters are in two groups because of their physical locations. The first group contains the symbols that are on the upper part of the key top that have numerals 1 through 0 on the lower half. The second group is on keys that have two special symbols on them. The display symbols that appear on the upper half of a key require pressing of the shift key_ All the symbol and punctuation mark keys are typamatic when held down. The characters that can be displayed consist of 26 uppercase and 26 lowercase alphabetic characters, 10 numeric characters, and 32 symbols and punctuation marks. The keyboard also contains input control keys, cursor control keys, program function keys, and system function keys. Keys that have two characters on the key tops can display either of them depending upon the position of the shift key. The lower character displays when the keyboard is in the unshifted mode (the shift key not pressed). To display the upper character, hold the shift key down or press the shift lock key before pressing the character key. Those keys that appear on the front face of indicated keys on the keyboard are program function keys and system function keys. To select one of these functions, hold the ALT key down while pressing the key that indicates the specific function you want. Typamatic Keys Key Function Backspace -.. Backtab ~ Home Cursor Up Cursor Down Cursor moving keys • Program Function (PF) and Enter keys Co,) ,• Cursor Left ~ Cursor Right ~ New Line ..--J Shift 11 Shift Lock ® Insert "8'- Numeric Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ~ Page Up. Page t Page Down Page ~ Character keys (alphabetic, numeric, and special characters). • ~ Tab .Delete A majority of the keys have the typamatic feature. For example, if you hold the key down, the character or function automatically repeats at a rate of approximately ten operations per second until you release the key. The keys that have this capability are: Symbol Lower Symbol ¢ \ { < , Alphameric and Special Character Keys These keys can only be used when an unprotected field is present. At that time, pressing the key causes the character indicated to appear and the cursor to advance. At other times, or if the cursor is not in an unprotected field, pressing these keys causes the INHIBITED message to appear on line 25 of the display. The INHIBITED condition is cleared with the RESET key. / (grave accent) (minus sign) (equal sign) (cent sign) (back slash) (semicolon) (apostrophe) (openi,ng brace) (less than sign) (comma) (period) (slash) Upper Half of Numeric Key I @ # $ % ..., & -. (logical OR, vertical bar) (at sign) (number sign) (dollar sign) (percent sign) (logical NOT sign) (ampersand) (asterisk) (left parenthesis) (right parenthesis) Upper Symbol (equivalent, similar) + } > ? (underscore) (plus sign) (exclamation point) (broken vertical line) (colon) (quotation mark) (closing brace) (greater than sign) (comma) (period) (question mark) Data displayed is not effective until ENTER is pressed. This greatly reduces the possibility of entering erroneous or incorrectly formatted data. When operated with the ALT key held down, the numeric keys become PF1 through PF10. ' Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379607 05Jun81 C IBM Corp~ 1981 .. -,~--~-.~~~-~------------. PN 5666354 1014 44055 ---------- ---- --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Shift and Shift Lock The SHIFT and SHIFT LOCK keys are the same as on a standard typewriter keyboard. When either the left or the right SHIFT key is pressed, the upper symbols shown on the key tops are displayed when their respective keys are pressed. If the character key has no upper symbol (such as the alphabetic keys), the uppercase characters appear on the screen. The SHIFT keys are nonlocking and must be held down. Pressing the SHIFT LOCK key locks the keyboard in the shifted (uppercase) mode. When the SHIFT LOCK key is used, you need not hold the SHIFT key down. This frees both hands for typing. Pressing either SHIFT key resets the SHIFT LOCK to return the keyboard to the unshifted (lowercase) mode. ALT The ALT key selects the function that appears on the face of specific keys. To invoke the alternate function, hold the ALT key down and then press the desired function key. Moving Cursor to Beginning of Field Moving Cursor One Character Space New Line Key Horizontal Positioning The New Line key moves the cursor to the first unprotected character location of the next line. If all character positions of the next line or lines are protected, the cursor continues as many lines as necessary to the first unprotected field. If all character positions on the display screen are protected, the cursor is repositioned to the first character location on the first line. The New Line key is typamatic and moves the cursor quickly from line to line. Pressing either of the two horizontal keys (right or left) moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow, one character position at a time, including unprotected and protected alphameric character and attribute character locations. These keys can cause the cursor to wrap and reposition the cursor to the next or preceding line of characters. These keys are typamatic. If the cursor is positioned in a protected field or attribute position, no data can be entered at that location. Tab Key Vertical Positioning Keys Pressing the Tab key moves the cursor to the right to the first character location of the next unprotected data field. Pressing the Tab key moves the cursor to the first character location on line 1 if the screen is not formatted or if there are no unprotected data fields. Tab key is typamatic and moves the cursor quickly from field to field. Cursor Control Keys The cursor keys control the vertical and horizontal movement of the cursor. These keys position the cursor without affecting the information on the screen. The two types of cursor control keys are: 1. Those that move the cursor to the first character location in an unprotected field. 2. Those that move the cursor one character position at a time. Operating either of two vertical cursor pOSitioning keys (cursor up, cursor down) moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow, one line at a time. These keys can cause the cursor to wrap vertically. The cursor stays in the same character - column. These keys are typamatic. Backspace Key Space Bar A space is considered an actual character that occupies a position on the screen. When the -space bar is pressed, a space is entered on the screen and replaces whatever character is presently in that pOSition. For this reason, the space bar should not be used to position the cursor. The space bar is typamatic. - - - - - - - -------- ------------ Back Tab Key The Back Tab key moves the cursor back to the first character position in an input field. Pressing the Backspace key moves the cursor one character space to the left for each pressing of the key. This key operates exactly like the horizontal (left) positioning key and is also typamatic. If the cursor is already in the first character position of an input field, pressing the Back Tab key moves the cursor back to the first character position of the preceding input field. Pressing the Back Tab key moves the cursor to the first character position on line 1 if the screen is not formatted or if there are no unprotected data fields. Home Key Pressing the Home key repositions the cursor to the first unprotected character position on the screen. If there are no unprotected character positions on the screen, the cursor is placed at the first character position on line 1. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379607 0SJun81 a o 00000000 o 0 o 0000000 00 00 PN 5666354 20f4 44060 - .. - - o o o o o o o o 0 c ( C ( (- ( (", (- ( (,,1- Input Control Keys Insert Pressing the Insert key allows the insertion of a character, or a string of characters, into the middle of a field without disturbing the information already displayed there. Pressing the Insert key places the keyboard in the insert mode of operation, The word Insert is displayed on line 25 to remind you that your keyboard is in the insert mode. (" (~ c (" (- (- (: (- • ("'" (' (, (-- (~ ( Reset enel (Display Mode) Pressing the RESET key restores the keyboard to its normal mode of operation. The keyboard is inhibited whenever an attempt is made to enter a character into a protected location. This can occur when the cursor is moved (via the cursor keys) to a protected field. When the keyboard is inhibited, the alphameric and symbol keys can be pressed, but no action results. The message INHIBITED appears on line 25 on the display. To remove the inhibit, press the RESET key. Pressing the CNCL (cancel) key generates an attention interrupt to the operating system in display mode. To find the next unprotected field (and avoid inhibiting the keyboard again), press the Tab or Back Tab key. All the keyboard control keys perforrn normally when in insert mode. (- Pressing the Delete key when the cursor is located in an unprotected field deletes the character at the cursor position. All characters in the field to the right of that position and on the same line are then shifted left one position and a null character is added to the end. The Delete key is active for the display, printer/keyboard, or manual mode, During a read operation, the CNCL key initiates a cancel response to the channel. The cancel response is a channel end with exception. The input area is cleared and protected and an asterisk (*) is written in the display area. No data is transferred across the channel. If no Read is in progress, the ALARM indicator is cleared and the keyboard is unlocked. Erase Input Pressing the ERASE INPUT key erases all input fields on the screen. On a permanently displayed document with blanks to fill in, only those areas in which you can enter data are erased, The cursor moves to the first character position in the first field in which you can begin keying input data. Pressing the ERASE INPUT key for a screen with no input fields erases nothing. The cursor moves to the first character position on line 1. Pressing the ERASE INPUT key for an unformatted screen erases all character positions. The cursor moves to the first character position on line 1. enel (Manual Mode) In display mode, the ENTER key causes an attention status and sets an attention identifier (AID). The software performs a subsequent Read command to obtain the AID and any entered data. The message FUNCTION KEY IGNORED is displayed if the CNCL key is pressed while in manual mode. Note: Before the ENTER key is pressed, the keyed in data is displayed on the screen and can be changed or corrected. Req (Display Mode) Pressing the REQ key generates an attention interrupt to the operating system in display mode. Enter (Printer/Keyboard Mode) During a read operation, pressing the ENTER key signals that data entry is complete and transfers the input data to the channel. The data is read, and the input area is cleared and protected. If no Read is in progress, the ALARM indicator is cleared and the keyboard unlocked. Note: Before the ENTER key is pressed, the keyed in data is displayed on the screen and can be changed or corrected. (, C c\ (, (: () C Program Function Keys PF1 enel (Printer/Keyboard Mode) Enter (Display Mode) Delete (- :;;; WE PF12 (Display Mode) In addition to the functions permanently assigned to system function keys, application programs can define the action that occurs with anyone of the PF (program function) keys. Program function keys allow the operator to tailor the keyboard to fit some specific need. To activate a programmable function, hold the ALT key pressed, and then press the appropriate PF key. The PF keys generate attention interrupt with the appropriate AID value when in display mode. PF1 - PF12 (Printer/Keyboard Mode) These keys clear the ALARM indicator and unlock the keyboard when in printer/keyboard mode. PF1 - PF12 (Manual Mode) These keys are reserved for power screen function. Req (Printer/Keyboard Mode) The REQUEST key initiates communication with the operating system by sending an attention status (X'SO'). If the request status cannot be sent immediately because of a busy condition, the REQUEST indicator appears, and the attention is stacked. When the device becomes not busy, the attention is sent and the REQUEST indicator is cleared. Req (Manual Mode) Enter (Manual Mode) When the screen is being used as the machine panel for manual operations, pressing the ENTER key causes the specified operation to be performed. The message FUNCTION KEY IGNORED is displayed if the REQUEST key is pressed while in manual mode. Note: Do not confuse the REO and INTR keys. The red INTR key is used to cause an EXTERNAL INTERRUPT. Note: Before the ENTER key is pressed, the keyed in data is displayed on the screen and can be changed or corrected. Erase EOF , Pressing the ERASE EOF (Erase to End of Field) key erases (blanks) character positions in that input field from the cursor location to the end of the field. The cursor, however, does not move. If the screen is unformatted, all character positions from the cursor to the last character position of the bottom line are erased. For example, if incorrect information has been keyed in a field, press the Back Tab key to return the cursor to the beginning of the field, press the ERASE EOF key to erase the incorrect information, and then key in the correct information. Model Groups 1 and '2 EC 379605 OSMar81 EC 379607 05Jun81 PN 5666354 30f4 44065 ( ~ ~, j !I System Function Keys Chg Dply Pressing the CHG DPLY key causes the display screen program area to switch from the operating system buffer to the manual operations buffer (manual mode). and vice versa. Stop Note: This function is to be used only under the guidance of the field support center. Pressing STOP places the system in manual mode after the current instruction has been processed, and any pending interruptions have been serviced. This key is active on any display console when in normal mode. The SPM /0 (support processor manual operations) key is reserved for CE use only, and can be invoked only after the CE key is activated. Pressing this key while the ALT key is held down, invokes the SPIL manual operations. You must be in manual functions mode to use this key. 'The keyboard becomes inhibited when another console has been placed in manual functions mode through a MODE SEL or a CHG DPLY. Note: To exIt from this function: CHG DPLY Restrictions: 1. Enter 7 following the MANUAL OPS FOR LEVEL MESSAGE, and press ENTER. • Pressing the CHG DPLY key while displaying one of the following screens causes the INHIBIT indicator to be set: OMW OMP OEB OMA OMV OEE OMD OEL Press RESET to clear. Pressing MODE SEL invokes the manual function and brings the General Selection screen to the display. The state of the machine is not changed when the MODE SEL key is pressed. The only difference is that the screen cannot be used by the operating system. The last screen of the operating system (that was on the screen before the MODE SEL key was pressed) is stored by the machine for later use. If the MODE SEL key was pressed accidentally, key Z and press ENTER. This releases the screen to the operating system and restores the previous screen. Pressing the INTR key requests an external interruption. This key is active from any display console when you are in normal operation. The STOP key is inactive if a maintenance or log display program is running. When PSW looping occurs, the STOP key has no effect, and only a system reset or an I~L can cause a normal stop. The STOP key is active only on that console which is in manual mode. The STOP key on any other console is inoperative. Normally when STOP is pressed, the ADDR and DATA fields on line 21 are updated. However, sometimes they may not be updated if the message CHANNEL 0 UNAVAILABLE appears on line 23 position 1. Normally, when STOP is pressed, within a few seconds the words INSTR STOP appear on line 21. Comm Req The Communications .Request (COMM REO) key initiates voice or terminal communication between an on-site service representative and a remote specialist. The initiation of COMM REO can be done by either the on-site service representative or the remote specialist. Line Disc The Line Disconnect (LINE DISC) key disconnects the data link and can also be used'to abort the RSF. Use this key if an RSF fails to initialize and the SP appears to be hung up. Note: These keys are for service personnel only. Copy The COpy key is used to make a copy of the information displayed on the screen. The COpy key can be assigned to make a copy in three different ways: By a console attached printer Start • Pressing the START key on any console when all consoles are in normal operation causes the system to execute instructions at the current operation rate. Operating Restrictions: • When the operation rate control is other than NORMAL, only one instruction is processed each time the START key is pressed. When the START key is pressed after a normal stop, the system carries on instruction processing as if no stop has occurred, provided the operation rate function is at NORMAL. • The START key has no effect when instruction processing is in progress, with the system in wait state, or with the system in the check-stop state. This key is a CE diagnostic function. e Whenever the Diagnostic key is pressed, a copy of the Testcase Monitor is read into the support processor storage, and execution of the Testcase Monitor begins. The START key is inactive if a maintenance or log display program is running. • The START key is active only on that console which is in manual mode. The START key on any other console is inoperative. The keyboard becomes inhibited when you press MODE SEL and another console has already been selected. Diag The key can be used when in manual console functions mode, or while running Testcase Monitor to start it. • • • The MODE SEL key performs the same function in display, printer/keyboard, or manual mode. • - If the STOP key is pressed while the console printer is printing, the printer completes the operation even after MAN appears in line 21. This clears the message and returns you to normal operation. If you are in manual mode, this key is only operative on the display console that is in manual mode. Mode Sel Operating Restrictions: 2. In field 3, enter G fol/owing the F, and press ENTER. Intr When the momentary or error status screens are displayed, pressing the CHG DPLY key causes the system to exit to the Partly Power Up and Down screen (OMW). Remote Facility Keys SPM/O Page To the diskette By a channel-attached printer. The page function (manual mode only) allows you to increase or decrease storage addresses. This allows you to display new blocks of storage. The amount the address increases or decreases depends upon the manual function being executed. The COPY Key is operative when in manual operations and with proper assignment. For more information about Copy Key, see "Program Load Copy Key (Kx)." You must be in manual mode to use this key. To increase the address, hold the ALT key pressed and press the PAGE UP key. To decrease the address, hold the ALT key pressed and press the PAGE DOWN key. A message PAGING KEY IGNORED appears on line 20 when the paging keys have no significance to the function being performed, or if the address that would be generated by paging is either too high or too low for the function, or the previous command had a nonpaging error. Note: Pressing the paging key, while using the Copy-to-Diskette (KD) or the Copy-to-Channel Printer (KC) options, may require you to press the key twice after using the copy key function. Note: If the DIAG key and the ALT key are accidently pressed: To exit the diagnostic function, either press the MODE SEL key or, Enter E next to SELECT/ON and press ENTER. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379607 05Jun81 a o o 000 o o 0 ,0 o o 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 PN 5666354 40f4 44070 o 00 o o o o o o o o o o G C -C: ( (~ c () OC (, (' ( o 00 c ( FEATURES SECURITY KEYLOCK (Optional Feature) . AUDIBLE ALARM FEATURE The Security Keylock feature is an optional feature and may not be installed on all systems. On the 4341, it has the following characteristics: A hardware feature on the display console. .. ".;.....: • Security keylock microcode is installed on all systems, but is only activated when the Security Keylock feature is installed. • All functions are normal when: - Security Keylock feature is not installed - Security Keylock feature is ON. • When .Security Keylock is OFF; Keyboard is locked - Console is blank INHIBITED indie&tor on line 25 is on Intervention required is the response to application programs . No Power-on/IML can be done. Note: If the mBin displB'f console is off and the Power-On/IML key is pre~• • message apPfIIHs on the scrtlfln 01 .11 unlocked end operstional display consoles on the system. This indicstes thet the CHG DPLY key should be pressed on the consolil from which the power-on/IML is to continue. The key;s ignored if it;s pre~ed on. console with thesscurity lock in the- OFF position. However, if the lock is turned to the ON position and the CHG DPLY key is pressed. the power-onllML continues from thet console. A high-pitched tone sounds for about one second when the audible alarm is activated on the display console. The audible alarm always sounds when you enm a character into the next to last character position on your screen. The cursor wraps from the last character position on the screen after a character is keyed into that last position. This is normal operation. The alarm wams that to key another character after the cursor has wrapped, enters it into the first character position on line 1 of your screen and destroys the data already displayed there. The computer program can also activate the alarm. To do so, the program sends a Signal to your display. The User's Guide for that program indicates if the audible alarm will sound and, if so, the different reasons for sounding it. The volume of the audible alarm is edjustable. The , adjustment control is located at the outside of the screen. Generally, it has been set for a normal operating environment. To test the volume level, the next-to-Iast character position must be in an unprotacted input field. If your display station . does not have have an unprotected input field in this area of the screen, check the application program User's Guide or ask your supervisor for instructions to obtain one. When you have an unprotected input field in this area of this area of the screen, move the cursor and key in a character in the next-to-Iast position on the screen. Then, listen to the level of the alarm. To check the sound level again, press the backspace key and then a character key. If the sound is not at the desired volume, adjust the alarm control and test the sound level again. When the volume is adjusted for your environment. press the ERASE INPUT key. EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379824 16Jan81 i 1 ,i PN 2676423 10f1 44071 (~ r ~;I !o 0 () 0 0 0: 0 0 0 ,00 iO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 eGO 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :0 0 ((~ 1'1' I' , ( ( ( (> ( (- ( ( (- ( ( ( (- ( , ( -" 3287 PRINTER PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS The 3287 Printer Model 1 or 2 is a compact, desk-top, matrix printer with a nominal print rate of 80 characters per second (cps) for Model 1 and 120 characters per second for Model 2. The 3287 Printer Models 1C and 2C print in four colors: red, blue, green, and black. The basic printer prints fields in one of four colors as determined by the existing field protection and intensity attributes. Copy Mode The 3287 can be used to obtain local copies from the Display Console that is in manual mode, when the following conditions are met: o The 3287 Model 1C rate is 80 cps and the 2C is 120 cps at maximum print rate for each color on a line. Print positions 1-120 can be printed in any of the four colors. Print positions 121-132 can only be printed in black. A maximum of three hard-copy printers (3287s) can be on each system, but none is standard. If a hard-copy printer is installed, it must be configured on the System Configuration screen (OFS). When a 3287 is optionally coupled as a hard-copy device in printer/keyboard mode, it prints all data transferred across the channel interface. The data is arranged in lines of 126 or less characters as they would appear on a printer/keyboard printer. Each line is printed as soon as it is completed. A line is complete when one of the following conditions occurs: 126 bytes of data are received. o A new-line character (X'15') is found in a Write or Write-ACR command data stream. o All data is received on a Write-ACR command. o After a Read command is executed. o A system or selective reset occurs. Note that, after a Write command (X'01') is executed, if a complete line has not been accumulated, the last partial line is not printed. The data is accumulated in the 3287 buffer and is printed when the line is comp.leted by succeeding commands. The printer appears busy to a COPY key request at this time. A system or selective reset causes a line feed if no data is present in the buffer. The 3287 Printer provides an automatic printout when attached to the system in printer/keyboard mode, or it can be separately addressed by the system and it responds with the equivalent 3270 status and sense information, when the hard-copy printer is in display mode. A copy key device has been configured. The 3287 to be used for local copy must be specified on the Program load screen (Ol) or by using the K-selection. This makes the 3287 available for shared use with the operating system. The 3287 is not busy. The 3287 can be busy because of the following conditions: o - In display mode, the 3287 is executing a 3270 CCW command, or the last write command does not specify Start Print in the WCC. In this condition, the printer is considered to have accepted data in preparation for a later print operation. - In printer/keyboard mode, an incomplete line is being saved in the 3287 buffer for later printing. - A previous COpy key request is not complete. The 3287 is operational. The copy operation overwrites the 3287 buffer with the console display buffer. After printing is completed, the 3287 buffer is cleared. The printer output is formatted in 80 lines with Nl, EM, and CR characters printed as spaces. Null lines are suppressed. If a CCW command is received while a local copy is in progress, the command is queued until copy is complete. The command is then executed normally. Audible Alarm An audible alarm sounds a continuous, one-second beep when the 3287 printer enters the end-of-form condition or when a host-initiated request is received. The audible alarm is also operational in offline mode. The audible alarm knob, located under the left platen access cover, controls the. alarm volume. To reset the alarm, press HOLD PRINT, and then press ENABLE PRINT. EC 379586 19Nov79 'PN 5666355 EC 379824 16Jan81 1 of 1 44075 - C· ... ./ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0;,0;,0; 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C' , ' .~,.,...,. ..' .. ;t.: ~--------------- ---------_ .. ~~- f ( ( (- ( ( ( ( ( o ( ( ( ( ( ( ( { MODES OF OPERATION PRINTER/KEYBOARD MODE column: line: 80 1~----------------/I----------------------------------------------~ The printer/keyboard emulation. mode allows the system to run operating systems and programs designed for that type of operator console. DIS P LAY In printer/keyboard mode, the display console shares the same address with a 3287 Printer. The 3287 Printer prints all data read from or written to the main console display. The main console displays 18 lines instead of the normal 20 lines. A maximum of 126 characters can be entered at one time from the console display keyboard. Line 19 and columns 1-46 of line 20 are reserved for data input. Columns 48-79 of line 20 are for indicators when in printer/keyboard mode. During printer/keyboard mode, hard-copy cannot be obtained, if a printer is not coupled or the system does not have a printer attached. The addresses are assigned and the coupling assigned from the Program Load screen. For more detail about assignments, see 11 Program Load Screen. 11 The main display console and printer responds to printer /keyboard commands and send status and sense information back to the system. The following sections provide detailed information on using the display console and 3287 Printer in printer/keyboard mode. The printer /keyboard mode is called emulation mode in some of the 4341 documents. In this manual, printer /keyboard operations are referred to as printer/keyboard mode or Ptr/Kybd mode. The Display Consoles and 3287. Printers are attached to the 4341 Processor via the support processor and are addressed via I/O instructions to channel 0 addresses. The device addresses used on channel 0 and the coupling assignment are selected by the operator and can be modified at any time. A maximum of two printer /keyboard devices can be configured at one time. The standard configuration of the 4341 system has one 3278-2A Display Console or 3279-2C which is the optional Display Console. Optional features allow three additional 3278-2A/3279-2C/3287 devices to be attached. These are configured from the Program Load screen. The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard has 75 keys including 12 program function keys. All alphameric. graphic, and cursor control keys are typamatic. 19 20 The input area is defined by an attribute at line 18 column 80 and contains 126 characters on lines 19 and 20. This area is unprotected only when a Read command is in progress (PROCEED displayed). At other times, it is protected from ARE A operator alteration. The operator may enter and modify data for the Read, up to 126 characters, in this area. When the ENTER or CNCL key is pressed, the data in the input area is transferred across the channel. Data accepted by the channel for a Read command is moved to the display area and printed. If the channel stopped data transfer before all data entered by the operator is sent, only that data accepted appears in the display area. II I INPUT AREA II INDICATOR AREA 21 SYSTEM STATUS AREA 24 25 II Input Area The field initially contains all nulls. These are compressed out of the Read data and not transferred to the channel. The SPACE BAR must be used to enter spaces. Cursor I movement keys leave nulls in the input area which are compressed from the data. OPERATOR INFORMATION AREA II Display Console Display Area In printer/keyboard mode, the entire 20-line system mode screen is controlled by the emulation module. After the screen is in printer /keyboard mode and made ready, the operator is only able to enter data on the screen when a Read command is issued. At other times, the entire display is protected from operator alteration. The display area starts in line 1 column 1 and ends on line 18 column 79. Lines 1-18 display the last 18 lines written or read to the device (3278-2A/3279-2C). Lines 19 and 20 are a 126-character input area with line 20 columns 48-79 used for emulate indicators. The data is organized into lines corresponding to lines of printer/keyboard printer output. Each new line begins in column 1 of a display area line. A line longer than 80 characters (the display area line length), wraps to the next line in the display area, to a maximum of 126 characters (the printer line length). When the 18-line display area is filled, the next new line causes the display area to be scrolled by 6 lines. Lines 7 -18 move to the top of of the screen, and lines 13-18 are cleared and ready for additional input. In order to allow the maximum amount of data to be displayed at all times in the display area, mUltiple New Line characters (NL=X'15') in a write data stream result in only one blank fine on the display. Multiple blank lines caused by NL characters are displayed as only one blank line. This prevents data from being scrolled off the screen in cases where New Line characters are added to space the printer output. Note: Line 25 of the display console is used exclusively for indication of console and keyboard status. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379814 020ct81 © IBM Corp. 1981 PN 5666356 1 of 4 44085 (~ Indicator Area Sense Printer/Keyboard Mode Commands The indicator area is a brightened field on line 20 columns 4S-79 and is 32 characters in length. Columns 47 and 80 are attribute characters. This area is used to contain visual indicators signaling the state of the printer /keyboarcldevice being emulated. The indicators displayed on line 20 are PROCEED, REQUEST, ALARM, and INTV-REQD. They are used in printer /keyboard mode. This brightened field highlights the indicators above that of data. Proceed This indicator appears whenever there is a Read command in progress. Only at this time may the operator enter data in the input area. PROCEED is cleared when the READ command is ended, by one of the following conditions: Normal ending caused by ENTER orCNCL key. A system or selective reset. The printer/keyboard mode accepts and executes all commands valid for a printer/keyboard type device. The valid commands and the normal status response received are: Command Hex Value Initial Status Ending Status Async. Status Write Write-ACR Read-Inquiry Sense Sense I/O NOP Alarm 01 09 OA 04 E4 03 OB 00 00 00 00 00 CE+DE CE+DE CE CE CE CE+DE CE+DE DE DE DE A brief description of each command is summarized in the following section. In the descriptions, a 3287 Printer is assumed to be coupled as a hard-copy device. If no printer is coupled, ending status for a command is presented to the channel after the data has been placed in the 3278-2A/3279-2C display area. A Halt Device or Halt I/O instruction issued to the device. Command Definitions (Printer/Keyboard Mode) Request This indicates that a REQ (Request) key attention status has been stacked because the device is busy executing a command. When the cw:rent operation is completed, the attention status is presented. to the channel and the REQUEST indicator is cleared. A system or'selective reset also clears the, REQUEST indicator. Alarm This indicator appears and the audible alarm sounds whenever an Alarm command is received. The indicator is cleared by one of the following: Pressing a Program Function (PF) key at any time. Pressing the ENTER or CNCL key when PROCEED is not displayed. ' This control command causes the audible alarm on the display console to be sounded and the ALARM indicator to be displayed. If the display is NOT READY, the command functions as a NOP. Immediate channel end and device end are presented as initial status for this command. The command is accepted even if an intervention-required condition exists. NOP This control command results in an immediate channel end and device end. No action is performed in the device. This command may be used to cause a command chain to end with a combined channel end and device end. Read-Inquiry The Intervention- Required indicator appears if the 3287 Printer coupled as a hard-copy device becomes not ready. This condition can occur when end-of-form, power off, or other check conditions are present. At this time, a Start I/O is not accepted. When the check condition is cleared, the indicator is cleared, and device-end status is presented to the channel. Bit No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Code Explanation CR IR BOC EC Command Reject Intervention Required Bus-Out Check Equipment Check Unused; always 0 Unused; always 0 Unused; always 0 Unused; always 0 Sense I/O The Sense I/O command facilitates device type identification. If the device, is not busy the data transferred (in printer / keyboard mode) is a constant seven bytes: , X' FF4341 001 05200'. This command is executed even when the device is not ready. Alarm' System or selective reset condition. Intv-Reqd One byte of sense information is transferred in response to a Sense command. After the sense byte is accepted, channel-end and device-end status are presented as ending status. The sense byte is reset at the initiation of any command except a NOP. The sense byte is reset after the Sense command is executed. The sense byte is defined below: When the Read-Inquiry command is received, the input area is unprotected and the PROCEED indicator is displayed. The command then waits until the operator signals that data entry is completed by pressing the ENTER or CNCL key. If the ENTER key is pressed, the data is read from the input area and transferred to the channel. A channel end is presented after data transfer; then any data the channel accepted is written to the display area and printed on the printer. If the CNCL key is pressed, a channel end with unit exception status is presented to the channel. and an asterisk (*) is written to the display area and printed. After printing is completed, in either of the above cases, device end is sent to terminate the command. Write Restrictions and Deviations (Printer/Keyboard Mode) Timing (Printer/Keyboard Mode) In printer/keyboard mode, the time taken to execute a command differs from all other printer/keyboard devices. Typically, the time from SIO to channel end is much shorter, and the time from channel end to device end is longer. This is because buffering takes place, and printing is not started until a complete line is received. When running in uncoupled mode (3278-2A or 3279-2C without 3287 Printer), a timing delay of 0.5 seconds per line is added to keep the display area from changing faster than it can be read. Keyboard Deviations (Printer/Keyboard Mode) The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard differs in both the number of keys and the keyboard layout. All of the keys on the 3278-2A and 3279-2C can be used even if the printer has no corresponding key. It is, therefore, possible to read and write characters which are not implemented on a printer/keyboard device. The CARRIAGE RETURN key on a printer /keyboard is not implemented either physically on the 3278-2A/3279-2C or logically in the printer/keyboard emulation module. Programs which require the use of the RETURN key do not operate in 4341 printer/keyboard mode. Upon receipt of the Write command, the data is transferred from the channel to an internal buffer and then processed, a line at a time, to the display area on the display console and printed on the 3287 Printer. When all of the data has been received, channel-end status is returned, and the last line is processed. If the last line is not complete (ended with new-line character or 126 bytes), device-end status is sent after the data has been placed in the display area and saved in the printer buffer without printing. If the command ends with a complete line, device-end status is sent when printing is finished. The Write command continues requesting data from the channel until the channel stops data transfer. This occurs when the CCW count reaches zero. Therefore, incorrect length channel status is always indicated with a zero residual count unless the Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator (Sill) flag is on in the CCW. Write-ACR (Automatic Carriage Return) This command is executed identically to the Write command except at the end of data processing. The printer performs the automatic carriage return. and perform the automatic carriage return. Model G rou ps 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379814 020ct81 PN 5666356 44 090 2 of 4 ~) 000 o 0) 00 o 00 00000 00 o 0 00 o o · O' 0 0 0 O '~ ." o o ( ( ( ( DISPLAY MODE ( (' ( ( o ( ( ( ( co 1urnn: 80 line: 1~-----------------------------------------------------------------------, The display mode of operation enables the 4341 to run operating systems and programs designed for cathode-ray tube (CRT) type console with IBM 3270 support. For detailed information on IBM 3270 support. refer to IBM 3270 Information Display System Component Description, GA27-2749. DIS P LAY ARE A The console devices appear to the software as local channel attached devices that support the 3272 command set. Each console device appears as a separate address to the operating system. A maximum of four console devices is supported: the standard 3278-2A or the optional 3279-2C and up to three optional 3278-2A/3279-2C/3287 devices in any combination. The display console provides a 20-line (1600-byte) user accessible buffer. The last four lines on the display are reserved for displaying 4341 Processor status and are not available to the user for either reading or writing. The 3287 Printers has a 24-line (1920-bytel user accessi~l~ buffer. The device addresses to be used in displ~y mode are selectable by the operator by using the Console Functions Program load screen (Qll. Display Console When the display console is in display mode, the entire 20-line user buffer is controlled by software. The user buffer may be accessed by 3270 Read, Write. and Control commands. Lines 21 through 24 are reserved to display 4341 Processor status. Any attempt to access lines 21 through 24 by the user is rejected as invalid buffer addresses and causes an operation check sense byte to be set. A 25th line. separated from the other lines by a solid line. displays console status indicators. Line 25 is also unavailable to the user. The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard is for communicating with system. In display mode, the display contains an operating system or user-defined screen that may be either formatted or unformatted. Formatted screens contain fields that can be protected or unprotected from keyboard alteration. brightened for highlighting purposes. or nondisplayable for security reasons. -----~----~ ( ( ( ( ( ( Read Buffer This command causes all data in the device buffer to be transferred to main storage. The data stream consists of a read heading followed by the device buffer data. The read heading is three bytes: a 1-byte AID character followed by a 2-byte cursor address. The buffer data has a Start Field (SF) character inserted before each attribute byte to identify the beginning of each field. Read Modified 20 21~-------------------------------------------------------; PROCESSOR STATUS AREA 24~--------------------------------------------------------~ OPERATOR INFORMATION AREA 2S Display Area Command Definitions (Display Mode) Lines 1 through 20 on the display are system input and output areas. This area is organized and used as defined by the operation of the system. EAU (Erase All Unprotected) Display Mode Commands In display mode. the display console and 3287 Printer accept and execute all commands valid for a 3272 Control Unit. The valid commands and the normal status responses received are: Hex Value Command 01 05 02 06 04 E4 03 OB OF Write Erase/Write Read Buffer Read Modified Sense Sense I/O NOP Select EAU Initial Status 00 00 00 00 00 00 CE+DE CE CE Ending Status CE CE CE+DE CE+DE CE+DE CE+DE Async. Status DE DE DE DE A brief description of each command is summarized In the following section. In the descriptions. the 3278-2A/3279-2C or 3287 is assumed to be ready and no programming or device errors occur. References to a device refer to either a 3278-2A or 3279-2C Display Console or a 3287 Printer. The Read Modified command performs one of two functions based on the value of the current AID character. A Short Read is performed if the AID character is from a REQ (PA 1) or CNCL (PA2) key. The Short Read only transfers the AID byte to identify which key was pressed (no data is included). The read modified data function is performed for all other AID characters. The data stream consists of a read heading and the data from modified fields. The read heading consists of the AID character and the two-byte cursor address. The data for each modified field is preceded by a Set Buffer Address order code with a two-byte buffer address of the first character position in the field (the attribute address + 1). An unformatted screen results in a read modified data stream consisting of the read heading and all data in the buffer because modification of data cannot be determined. All null characters are suppressed from the data transferred. Select This command causes afl unprotected fields in the device buffer to be cleared to nulls. The Modified Data Tags (MDT) are reset to zero for each unprotected field. and the cursor is positioned to the first unprotected character location on the screen. Channel-end status is presented as initial status to the SIO. and device-end status is sent when the erase is completed. Erase/Write This command performs two functions: a buffer erase operation. then a write operation. The erase operation clears the device buffer to nulls and sets the cursor and current buffer address to location O. The write operation is performed exactly as the Write command. NOP This control command results in ari immediate channel end and device end. No action is performed in the device. This command can be used to cause a command chain to:end with a combined channel end and device end or to modify the initial buffer address position for a subsequent command in a chain. This control command is implemented for 3270 compatibility, and no function is performed internally. Channel-end status is presented as initial status to the SIO. and device-end status is generated immediately after. Sense One byte of sense information is transferred in response to a Sense command. After the sense byte is accepted, channel-end and device-end status are presented as ending status. The sense byte is reset at the initiation of any command except a NOP. The sense byte is reset after the Sense command is executed. The sense byte is defined below: Bit No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Code Explanation CR IR BOC Command Reject Intervention Required Bus-Out Check Equipment Check Data Check Unit Specify Control Check Operation Check ~C DC US CC OC Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379814 020ct81 --- ------- ~- .. -.---.--.------.------~ --_ .. ----.-- -, PN 5666356 3 of 4 44095 Sense I/O 4 Restrictions and Deviations (Display Mode) The Sense I/O command facilitates device-type identification. If the device is not busy, the data transferred (in display mode) is a constant seven bytes: X'FF43410032782A' for 3278-2A Display Console, 3279-2C FF43410032792C and X'FF434100328700' for a 3287 or 3268 Printer. This command is executed even when the device is not ready. Timing The time taken to execute a command may differ from other 3270 control units/ devices. Programs depending on the time to execute a command cannot be assumed to operate correctly in display mode. Write Upon receipt of the Write command, the data is transferred from the channel to an internal buffer and then processed to the device. When all of the data has been received, channel-end status is returned, and the last buffer is processed. Device-end status is sent after the last buffer has been processed. The Write command continues requesting data from the channel until the channel stops data transfer when the CCW count reaches zero. Therefore, incorrect length channel status is always indicated by a zero residual count unless the Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator (Sill) flag is on in the CCW. 3278-2A and 3279-2C Buffer The 3278-2A and 3279-2C buffer is not completely available for use by the Operating System or user program. Lines 21 through 24 are reserved for 4341 Processor use and are unavailable for programmed use. Therefore, programs written for a 24 line 3270 terminal do not execute correctly without some alterations. Generally, an attempt to use such a program results in an error when access lines 21 through 24 is attempted. The error causes unit-check status to be presented and operation-check sense to be set. Keyboard Deviations The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard differs from a standard 3277 or 3278 keyboard layout. Several keys are either not in the standard position or not implemented. Programs requiring the keys that have not been implemented may not be able to use the 3278-2A and 3279~2C for a input device. For the following keys a difference exists between the 3278- 2A /3279-2C and other 3270 display units. CNCL (PA2) key - MOiled to a different position REQ (PA 1) key - Moved to a different position CLEAR key - Not implemented TEST REQ key DUP key - Operation Check Error Handling Write command data is internally buffered before it is processed and written to the device. Therefore, an operation check as the result of an invalid buffer address is not detected when the invalid data byte is received from the channel but at some later time. It is likely that more data has been received from the channel and possibly that channel end may have been sent before the operation check occurred. The residual count field is unpredictable in this case and cannot be used to determine precisely the location of the error in the write data stream. MANUAL MODE In manual mode, the following functions are provided: Processor IML, IPL, and resetting of the system Display / alter functions CE functions • TOO and timer control START, STOP, and INTR keys. All of the manual function facilities are displayed on the General Selection screen (Q). For detailed information, refer to "Manual Functions." Display Console In manual mode, the screen configuration depends upon the function that is being used. For detailed information, refer to Manual Functions. Not implemented Not implemented FIELD MARK key - Not implemented Several 3278/3279-only functions involving 3274/3276 Control Units also differ on the 3278-2A and 3279-2C from a standard 3278-2. Cursor blinking and reverse functions not available. \; Keyboard clicker selection function not alterable. The clicker is set to click when keyboard unlocks and cannot be changed. Local print function keys and matrix not available. Insert mode reset 3277 -compatible, instead of 3278, 3279-compatible. Line 25 indicators patterned after 3277 indicators, not 3278 symbols. Keys used for SNA/SDLC functions (SYS REQ and ATTN) not implemented. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379605 06Mar81 EC 379814 02.0ct81 PN 5666356 44 096 40f 4 L-__________ .. -) . :' o o 00 /'~~ :."- I' () 0 0 o o 00000 o o o o o o o 0'000 -0 0 o ( ( ( ( ( Console/Printer Sensing Conditions Hold-Print Timeout (3287 Only) The following sensing conditions can occur while operating the system. When the hold-print condition has lasted more than ten minutes. an intervention-required condition exists and is reported to a Sense command. Not Ready ( () 00 () c c (~ Operation Check (Display Mode) When the device is not ready, all commands except Sense are rejected. .Power Off When the device is not powered on, an intervention-required condition exists and is reported to a Sense command. An operation-check occurs when invalid data is received in the data for a Write or Erase/Write command. This error is a programming error which cannot be recovered from by software retry. A programmer must inspect the data to locate the invalid condition. The following conditions may cause an operation check: Invalid buffer address specified in a SBA. RA. or EUA order. A buffer address is invalid when it references a location past the end of the user buffer area (20 lines on a 3278-2A/3279-2C or 24 lines on a 3287). Test Mode When the device is in test mode (TEST/NORMAL switch in TEST position)' an intervention-required condition exists and is reported to a Sense command. Incomplete order sequence for SBA. RA. EUA. or SF order. An order requiring multiple data bytes was not complete at the end of the data stream. • Device Not Functional If the device hardware is failing. or the device is not connected or configured correctly, an intervention-required or equipment-check condition exists and is reported to a Sense command. End-of-Forms (3287 Only) The start print bit was set in the WCC for a Write or Erase/Write command and chaining is indicated. Printing is suppressed and command chaining is canceled. An operation check sets unit-check and device-end status to be sent. combined with channel end. if it has not already been sent. The residual count in the channel status word is unpredictable and cannot be used to determine the location of the invalid order. The device buffer is modified with all data processed before the invalid order. When the end-of-forms· switch indicates no paper is in the printer. and a one-minute timeout condition occurs. an intervention-required condition exists and is reported to a Sense command. This delay is incorporated in the 3287 to allow the operator to correct the end-of-forms condition and have the 3287 automatically continue printing with no errors reported or software retry required. The end-of-forms condition causes the audible alarm to sound until the HOLD PRINT switch is pressed. The end-of-forms should be cleared by pressing the HOLD PRINT switch. replacing the forms. then pressing the ENABLE PRINT switch to allow printing to continue. EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379824 16Jan81 PN 5666358 1 of 1 ....... -- . - . - .- - - . -"":"::-:-:'":-:--. 44115 L o 0 () 0 0 0 0 ,0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C' I \: _______ ~~ ___ . _____ .~ ______ 0_ ------- - ---------- ~ - -- ----------------------------------- - ---- ------------------ --------------~~~-~~~ ( (>: (~ (- ( ( ( ( ( (-' C (~ (' (- ( (-,' (-- (- ( ( f' ( ( -. ( (- (- (- (- --(- (' ( Ci ADDITIONAL FEATURES SECURITY KEYLOCK (Optional Feature) AUDIBLE ALARM FEATURE The Security Keylock Feature is an optional feature and may not be installed on all systems. On the 4341, it has -the following characteristics: The 3278 display can be equipped with an audible alarm. This is a feature of your display that can't be seen but that you should be aware of. A hardware feature on the 3278 Display Console 2A. Security Keylock microcode is installed on all systems, but it is only activated when the Security Keylock Feature is installed. • All functions are normal when: - Security Keylock Feature is not installed Security Keylock Feature is ON. When Security Keylock is OFF: Keyboard is locked Console is blank INHIBITED indicator on line 25 INTERVENTION REQUIRED response to application programs All functions NORMAL when switched from OFF to ON No Power-On/IML. Note: If the main console is in the OFF state, and the Power-on/IML key is pressed, a message appears on the screen of all unlocked and operational 3278-2A consoles on the system indicating that the CHG DPLY key should be pressed onthe console from which the Power-On/IML is to continue. The key is ignored if it is pressed on a console with the security lock in the OFF position. However, if the lock is turned to the ON position and the CHG DPLY key is pressed, the Power-on/IML will continue from that console. A high-pitched tone sounds for about one second everytime the audible alarm is activated, ------J -[ The audible alarm always sounds when you enter a character into the next to last character position on your screen. The cursor wraps from the last character position on the screen after a character is keyed into that last position. This is normal operation .. If you key another character after the cursor has wrapped, it will be entered into the first character position on line 1 of your screen. In this situation, you wouldn't want to key on line 1 because doing so would destroy the data already displayed there. In this case, the alarm is warning you. i j The computer program that you are working with also can activate the alarm. To do so, it sends a signal to your display. The user's guide for that program will tell you if the audible alarm will sound and, if so, the different reasons for sounding it. ---~~ _~....r-' The volume of the audible alarm is adjustable. The adjustment control is located at the outside of the screen contrast control. Generally, it has been set for your operating environment: To test the volume level, the next-to-Iast character position must be in an unprotected input field. If your display station does not have have an unprotected input field in this area of the screen, check the application program User's Guide or ask your supervisor for instructions to obtain one. When you have an unprotected input field in this area of this area of the screen, move the cursor and key in a character in the next-to-Iast position on the screen: then, listen to the level of the alarm. To check the sound level again, press the backspace key and, then, a character key. If the sound is not at the desired volume, adjust the alarm control and test the sound level again. When the volume setting is correct, press the ERASE INPUT key. EC 376695 16Aug79 EC 379586 19Nov79 @ IBM Corp. 1979 .. --"----- .~-. ---- -.---- ------.---_ .._------ -_ .._------- _. ._-- .----- -- ._---_.- - ----- .. -_._----" ----------. --_. _.,--- ....--- ... -..-- PN 5666359 1 of 1 - - " - - - - - _._---_.. _._-_ ... 44125 _-- --- ; OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOL I c (- ( ( ( { ( (~ ( () ( SYSTEM STATUS The system status information is applicable to each mode of screen operation. Lines 21-24 of the display contain information concerning the state of the system. Field 7 370 1 - Displayed when the processor is in 370 mode. 2 3 4 Line 21 Field 1 Unused. Field 2 VSE Displayed when the processor is in virtual storage extended mode. ~essage Area (20 lines) Field 8 19 2021 -1- -2- --3- --4- --5- -6MAN WAIT TEST LOAD SAVE MAN Displayed when the processor is in stop state. -7- 370 VSE Field 3 WAlT Displayed when the processor is in wait state. 22 ----8---- ---9/10--- TIMER:ON OPERATING OFF INSTR STOP MATCH STOP CLOCK STOP CHECK STOP MACH CHECK ----11---- 12--13- --14-DATA: XXXX ADDR: XXXXXX V-ADDR: R-ADDR: CSAR: -----15----- ------16----- ---17---- -----------------18-----------------------RATE: I-STEP CHK: NORM-C TOD: ENBL ADDR-COMP: STOP TYPE: ANYREF V-ADDR: XXXXXX NRTY-C TRWR 10-REF R-ADDR: HDST-C TRST D-STOR V-DATA: XXXXEQ/NE DSBL-C I-CNTR R-DATA: AE/AN Field 4 TEST Displayed when : H-STEP P-STEP C-STEP F-REPH 1. A control (Compare/Trace (OA), Check (OK), Operation Rate (00), or Display/Alter PSW and I/O (ODTC)) is not in its normal state. NORM NRTY H-ST DSBL CH CH CH CH I-C 1I-C 1I-C 1- I C 1- H H H H 2. The CE switch is on for maintenance or service. Field 5 23 LOAD Displayed during program load. This field becomes blank when the new PSW is successfully loaded. SAVE Displayed after a completion of a successful machine save/store status. It becomes blank on the next system reset (including an IPl). 24 25 Field 6 Unused. SYNC H-ST MWTR MBTR MICWRD LS-SRC LS-DES CH-SEQ CH-DAT CSW pppPSW " IIOP -----------19----------- --------20------------ -2Is- -2Ib- -------2Ic---------SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING BLOCK 4341 RC=XXXXXXXX Ext Code C< Message Area > LOG FAILURE IGNORED RETRY PENDING block message area -22- 23-24- -------------------------25---------------------- -------26--------XXXX XXXX . (CE Use Only) (CE Use Only) idld F:a A:xxxx D:hhhh hhhh hhhh hhhh 1:lili=hhhh E:dd ----SP trace---Display Console Status InformatIon INSERT MODE INHIBITED DISPLAY HODE USAGE CONFLICT PTR/KYBD HODE PTR-BUSY MANUAL CONTROL DISCONNECTED PTR-I NTV REQD PTR-CHECK TIMER: ON/OFF ON is displayed when the timer is on; OFF is displayed when " the timer is off. Field 9/10 OPERATING Displayed when processor is in operating state. STOP Indicators INSTR, MATCH, CLOCK, and CHECK display condition when the machine stops. INSTR STOP can be caused by pressing the STOP key. MACH CHECK Displayed when the processor fails to operate or when error retry is in progress. Field 11 DATA: , Displays contents at the related address (field 14) when "the processor is in instruction-stop or match-stop state. The field is blank if processor is operating. Fields 12-14 AODR: Indicates that the processor is in VSE mode. The address displayed on a stop is the location of the next instruction. V-AOOR: Indicates that the processor is in 370 mode and that it is operating with virtual addresses. R-AODR: Indicates that the processor is in 370 mode and is operating with real addresses. CSAR: Indicates that the processor is totally stopped (clock stopped). This occurs only in CE mode or momentarily during some manual functions. The value displayed is the address of the current control storage address placed in the CSARBU register. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379824 16Jan81 EC 379607 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 5666360 10f3 44135 ADDR-COMP: Displays the setting of the compare/trace control action selection. Field 15 STOP TRWR TRST SYNC H-ST MWTR MBTR RATE: Displays setting of the RATE control. I-STEP ... Instruction Step Pulse step (CE display) P-STEP Microword step (CE display) M-STEP C-STEP .. Clock step (CE display) When the repeat microword function (CE only) is on, RATE: f-REPM appears on line 22: where "f" represents the rate function (I, P, W, or C). A blank indicates a normal setting. '" Softstop Trace wrap .. Trace stop Sync (CE use only) ... Hardstop (CE use only) ... Trace microword (CE use only) .. Trace microbranch (CE use only) ANYREF .. 10-REF .. D-STOR ... I-CNTR '" MICWRD'" LS-SRC .. LS-DES .. CH-SEQ ... CH-DAT .. CSW pppPSW ... ooolOP .. CHK: Displays the setting of the check control. NORM-XX NRTY-XX HOST-XX DSBL-XX where: C Stop after Log is set. H if Channel Check is set. CH if both Stop after Log and Channel Check are set. Blank, if neither Stop after Log nor Channel Check is set. Any reference I/O reference Data store Instruction counter Microword (CE use only) Local store source (CE use only) Local store destination (CE use only) CHANNEL-SEQ CNT CHANNEL-DATA CSWs PSW SWAPS (ppp .. MCK, PCK, etc.) I/O operations (000" SIO, TIO, etc.) ADDRESS/DATA Displays the address for the compare or the data contents of that address if the compare is on data. V-ADDR: R-ADDR: V-DATA: R-DATA: EQ NE AE AN Field 17 TOD:ENBL Indicates that the Set Clock instruction is enabled. A blank indicates a normal setting where a Set Clock is inhibited (TOO is secured). ... .. .. ... .. .. Line 24 Field 19 SUPPORT PROCESSOR For detailed information, see "Messages, Support Processor" in the "Messages" section. This field is also used for block messages or errors. Field 20 TYPE: Displays the type of compare made. Field 16 XX = XX" XX .. XX = Line 23 Field 18 Line 22 Virtual address Real address Virtual data Real data Equal Not equal And equal And not equal Field 23 SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING Displayed when the screen is in manual mode and a I/O operation is performed to that address by the program in the processor. To leave manual mode, use the Z selection or the CHG DPLY key to allow the screen/keyboard to be used by the program. Note: In printer/keyboard mode, if SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING appears immediately after changing the device address or console mode and if the I/O operation is an immediate command (for example, alarm), instruction proceSSing may stop until the operator returns to the Program screen. Unused. Field 24 idid Same as YYYY if program is loaded. If data module is read, idid identifies the data module read. If an error occurs on read, idid identifies the module that was about to be read. Field 25 Field 218 Field 25 is blank with CE switch inactivated. BLOCK Displayed when a block or patch is invoked and stays displayed until it ends or is halted. F Interprets manual ops function selected. A Displays address (SP storage). Field 21b This field is for system 10; for example: 4341. D Displays data at the related address. I: iiii .. hhhh Interprets instruction counter address and the data at the related address. Field 21c If a data compare is chosen, the selected data and the characters EQ or NE are shown for the chosen address. If the address compare screen is reselected, the address reappears next to the SELECTION label. Field 22 YYYY Identifies the last program loaded in the support processor (module 10). RC (Reference Code) The eight-digit reference code is an error message from the operational code, diagnostics, or logout analysis routines. The reference code is used as an entry to the maintenance documentation and as a search argument for a symptom/fix file (RETAIN). The reference code appears brighter than the normal intensity. Once the ENTER Key is used, the reference code returns to normal intensity. When a new reference code (error message)· occurs, it appears intensified. The code is cleared on a system reset. In addition to the reference code, an extension (also eight digits) can be provided as required by the application using the reference code. The reference code extension has no fixed format. E:dd Interprets error code: AM AC DE FK OC PC BC Address match .. Boundary .. Data error Function key .. Operation code .. Program check Bus operation error Field 26 SP TRACE Displays SP trace information. It is blank unless activated from the CE panel by pressing keys A. B, and C. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379824 16.1an81 EC 379607 05Jun81 o A o n n {\ (\ o ~ \,,\, IJ () 0:·. ., o 0". ., o 00 o o o 00 o o 00 PN 5666360 44140 20f3 o o o o 00 o o o r c (' ( (" C (- ( ( (" (' (' ( (' ( (. (- •( u () (' (: ( ( ( (-" (- ( C: (-~ y (~ () c c' c Line 25 Contains the display console status information. For messages, refer to "Messages." Column 2 DISPLAY MODE PTR/KYBD MODE MANUAL CONTROL DISCONNECTED Column 20 INSERT MODE Column 35 INHIBITED USAGE CONFLICT PTR-BUSY PTR-INTV REQD PTR-CHK CONV-CHECK Notes: • The indicator pointer is displayed on line 25, position " as soon as power-on response is accepted by the system. This indicator is not displayed if the display device Test switch is on. • For more detailed information about these indicators, see "On-Screen Indicators." Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379824 16Jan81 EC '379607 OSJun81 PN 5666360 3013 44145 o • 0 (} 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 10 () 0 0 0 (}O 0 0 0 0) 0 0 0 (J () 0 0 () 0 • (e~' - (, (, ('" (~ (~ (' (-- ( - ----~--~---~- c: c\ ( -- ~~.------ ( (~- (' 0 0 , , I ( ( MESSAGES This section defines the following messages: System Messages Support Processor Messages UCW Messages Program Load Messages Diskette Build Messages On-Screen Indicator Messages Printer / Keyboard Indicator Messages These messages are displayed on lines 20 through 25 of the display console. To determine the line numbers refer to "Display Console." These messages indicate: Hardware Failures Operator Errors System Errors System States I/O Errors ACB VALUE CHANGED BY XXK: Assigned UCWs take a reserved storage area of 128 UCWs. After this boundary is passed, each block of 32 UCWs takes an extra 2K of user storage. This change is reflected in the Address Check Boundary generated at the next IML. ADDR COMP REMAINS: An address-compare match is still waiting to occur even though you issued the OBH command. Recovery: To set the address compare to normal, enter QAN. ADDR CUU ALREADY ASSIGNED: The address assigned in the Tn or Hn command was assigned to a non-native device via the UCW assignment screen. Recovery: Assign the device (Tn or Hn) to an unused address. ADDRESS ALREADY USED: The address you are trying to assign was previously assigned. Recovery: Ensure that proper diskette is installed and the perform a SP-IML. ADDRESS OUT OF RANGE: Address of the function selected for the screen (byte offsets, and so forth) is too high or too low; or the address is larger than the physical storage size. ALARM: Alarm was received and the audible alarm COMPARE/TRACE NOT RESET: The processor unit has sounded. Indicator is cleared by any of the following: stopped and the Compare/Trace function is still in effect. Recovery: Recovery: Start instruction processing (press START key) to continue with compare/trace function active; or reset Compare/Trace function if desired (see "Compare/Trace. ") Pressing a Program Function (PF) key at any time. Pressing the ENTER or CNCL key when PROCEED is not displayed. • System or selective reset condition. ALTER IGNORED: An alter attempt was made, but the machine is in a state (not a softstop, and so forth) that does not permit the alter to occur, or you have changed the SELECTION line on a full-screen alter. Recovery: Press the STOP key to softstop the machine and repeat the desired alter function. ALTER WILL BE IGNORED: An attempt to alter data on the current screen was ignored. because the current screen remains displayed after a successful fast-selection operation on another screen. Recovery: Pressing the ENTER key restores normal operation back to the displayed screen. BLOCK IS AT MATCH-WAIT: A block is running and is at a Match command waiting for an address compare. Another block or patch must not be activated at this time. Recovery: To halt the block enter OBH. ADDRESS TOO LARGE: Address specified is beyond Recovery: Correct the ADDR parameter and re-enter the function. Recovery: Ensure that proper diskette is installed and then perform a SP-IML. CONFG DATA ERR: UCWS: The number of UCWs defined on the diskette is not the same as in SP storage. Recovery: Ensure that proper diskette is installed and then perform a SP-IML. CONS PTR NOT CONFIGURED The console printer is not configured at the Program Load (OL) screen. Recovery: Configure the Copy key to a console printer on the Program Load screen. Typically the console printer is set to KO. A K1, K2, or K3 must be entered depending on which native device is the printer. The command must then be repeated. CONSOLE DISK FAILURE: Ten errors occurred on the same record on the disk during IML. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. Recovery: If failure persists or is accompanied by a reference code, go to Start MAPs. Recovery: Enter a title name in Log Title (Log 1/). CONSOLE DISK I/O ERROR: An error occurred during an attempt to read a program from the disk. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. CHANGES REQUIRE IML: A change to console mode or console address was made, but could not be communicated to the processor. This message also appears on the Mode Assist screen (OLI) if any changes to the fields are made. Recovery: To put the changes into effect, re-IML. CHANNEL 0 UNAVAILABLE: A function requires the local channel path (channel 0) between the SP and the PU, and that path is busy with a PU operation. Recovery: Retry the function. If the message continues to display, press the STOP key. A SP re-IML may be needed to clear a channel program loop to the operator's console, or a program reset may be required to clear a channel program loop to channel O. A program reset under these circumstances takes longer to complete than normal. Recovery: Press the RESET key. If the keyboard can be reset, the battery has failed, or the color convergence hardware has failed. (Refer to "3279 Display Terminal Maintenance Analysis Procedures [MAPs]. ") DATA BANK MODE ACTIVE: Remote Data Bank mode initiated. All PU operations are terminated and the SP acts like a 3275. When Data Bank mode is terminated, power off and then on. DATA LINK DISCONNECTED: The DISC key was pressed, and all remote service was terminated. DATA NOT ACCESSIBLE: The virtual storage address is not available to the display/alter function or the UCW data could not be accessed at this time because the processor is busy. Recovery: This virtual address cannot be used in the display / alter function at this time. Change the address, retry later, or discontinue the attempt to display/alter. If UCW data cannot be accessed now, retry later. DATA NOT ON TAPE: The diskette image is not found on the tape. CE LOG MUST HAVE A TITLE: A title must be entered to have the log displayed in the index. Recovery: Enter the correct address parameter. what is allowed. CONFG DATA ERR: CONSOLES: The configuration of the console defined on the diskette is not the same as in SP storage. CONV-CHECK: The color convergence of the console display is out of tolerance. Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs. CONTROL STORAGE FAILURE: • The control storage failed during IML. • An error in control storage was detected while running the Verification test (V1) of the Program Load screen. This error may be accompanied with a reference code. Recovery: Retry IML. If it fails again, IML the backup diskette. If the failure persists, or a reference code is displayed go to the Start MAPs. Recovery: Verify that the correct tape is being used and the correct drive number and part number have been entered. DEVICE BUSY: A function cannot be performed. Recovery: Try the function again. DEVICE CUU IS BUSY: PROCEED (keyboard is unlocked and waiting for a reply from the device that has the same address) status is present on a device pair in printer/keyboard mode when one of the addresses is changed. Recovery: Press the ENTER key on the display while in operating system mode, with the PROCEED indicator-on, and then rekey the changes. DEVICE Nx CONFIG ERROR: A device is not installed or not configured correctly (for example: a console instalied as a hard-copy device) on the System Configuration (OFS) screen. Recovery: Ensure that the device is installed or configured properly. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666361 1 of 5 44155 --------- - - - - ------------ DISCONNECTED: The display console is not logically connected to the 4341 Processor. The console is not available to the operating system nor for manual functions. This condition exists on the display console when no unit address is assigned (via the Program Load screen) to the display console. ENGINEERING DATA ERROR: The engineering level of the hardware is not compatible with the microcode. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. ERR :CSW=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX: An error occurred while the PU was transferring data from the tape unit. Recovery: Ensure that you have the proper EC level cards to match the diskettes. determine if the problem is with the tape drive, tape control unit, or the channeL Recovery: Ensure that the device is configured at the Program ENGINEERING DATA FAILURE: An error occurred while ERROR BUILDING DISKETTE: An error occurred while Load screen. resetting the PU hardware with defined values. trying to write onto the diskette. Recovery: Retry, or switch to the backup diskette. Recovery: Ensure that the diskette drive is operational and ERASE7title: A saved screen is about to be overlayed when verify that the diskette is good by running the Diskette Readability Test (QED). DISKETTE CHECK: A diskette or diskette drive failure occurred. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. Recovery: Check that the diskette drive is operational, and that the diskette is not damaged. If the error persists, or a reference code is displayed, go to the Start MAPs. DISKETTE NOT READY: The diskette drive latch is not closed. The diskette drive is not ready. The diskette is not inserted properly. This error may be accompanied with a reference code. Recovery: Ensure that the diskette drive door is closed and that the diskette is inserted properly. If the error persists, or a reference code is displayed, go to the Start MAPs. DISPLAY CONSOLE FAILURE: A display to the screen failed during IML. An error was detected from the console display. This error may be accompanied with a reference code. Recovery: Retry the IML; if error persists or a reference code is displayed, go to the Start MAPs. DISPLAY MODE: The display console is in the display mode as indicated on the Program Load screen. DONE - PUT IN ORIGINAL DISK: The data has been attempting to copy a screen on to the diskette. A second attempt to copy the screen on to the diskette overlays the oldest saved screen on the diskette. ERR - PUT IN ORIGINAL DISK: An error occurred during the transfer of data. Insert the original diskette (the diskette that was present when you first entered the transfer function). INCOMPATIBLE SELECTIONS: The combination of ERROR OR SLOW PRINTER: A printer error occurred, or the SP is waiting for a complete signal. then retry the function and check the printer's operation. ERROR WHEN STARTING PU: An error occurred when ENTER key. starting the processing unit. ERR - BLOCK AT MATCH-WAIT: The patch being transferred cannot be activated because a block is running and a match command is waiting for an address compare. ERROR WHEN STOPPING PU: An error occurred when trying to softstop the PU. Recovery: Run the SBA diagnostics to locate the problem. ERR - DISK ERROR: A diskette error occurred. ERR - NO SPACE IN LIST: The patch or block list space on the TO diskette is full. ERR - NOT FOUND IN LIST: A block or patch to be disk~tte PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN was pressed. INCOMPLETE COMMAND: The required fields for a function have not been fully specified. The cursor is placed ready for the missing input. INCOMPLETE INPUT: The required fields for a function have not been fully specified. The cursor is placed ready for the missing input. INHIBITED: All keys except the RESET, START, STOP, and INTR keys are inhibited. No mechanical keyboard lock prevents the use of the keyboard. That is, when input is inhibited, the keys are not physically locked. You can still press them normally, but there is no click when a key is pressed. The INHIBITED indicator appears if you: • Attempt to change protected data. o Attempt to press two keys at the same time. o I INVALID WITH M OR P: An attempt occurred to IML (M) or IPL (P) and at the same time to go to the Assist screen IS already active on the TO diskette. Cause an overrun condition by pressing keys faster than they can be processed. Insert a character into an input field that is full (no null characters). (I). is the correct one. ERR - PATCH IS ACTIVE: The patch being transferred EXECUTION TIME XX MINUTES: This is an informative message about the approximate run time for the selected diagnostics. FUNCTION KEY IGNORED: A function key other than does not follow the naming convention. Recovery: Ensure that the TO Recovery: Erase the entry and rekey the correct commanqs following the I on the SELECTION line. Recovery: Enter the missing fields. Recovery: Go to Start MAPs. Recovery: To halt the block, enter QBH. Mode and Assists selected is not permitted. Assists must be reset before setting VSE mode. Only one Assist can be specified at a time with 370 mode. A specific Assist cannot be. individually reset. All must be reset; then the new Assist combination must be entered. Recovery: Enter the missing fields. Recovery: Press the MODE SEL key to clear this condition; Recovery: To get more information about the error, press the ERR - PATCH EC NAME WRONG: The patch name command entered on the SELECTION line. When there are several duplicate commands, only the last is recognized. IML of the processor. Recovery: Go to Start MAPs. procedure by entering a different command or press the MODE SELECT key. Recovery: Press the ENTER key to continue. Recovery: Rekey the correct parameter after the last IML REQUIRED: A function was requested that requires an ERROR DURING DATA XFER: An error occurred while transferring data from the PU to the SP. Verify that the PU is operational. Recovery: If oldest copy is to be saved, exit from this transferred is not on the FROM diskette. exists and coupling is improper. The only duplicate address permitted is a console and printer in printer/keyboard mode. The cursor moves to the end of the SELECTION line. IML. Recovery: Perform an IML and retry function. transferred. Insert the original diskette (the diskette that was present when you first entered the transfer function). DUPLICATE DEVICE ADDRESS: A duplicate address Recovery: Check the unit status and the channel status to IML IN PROG: Displayed during the execution phase of Recovery: Select the correct function desired and rekey the Press one of the function keys (PF keys, ENTER, CNCL or PA2, REQ or PA1, MODE SEt. CHG DPLY or the DIAG key). correct command. COMPLETE~ IML execution is complete. Recovery: Ensure that you want to transfer this patch and, if IML you do, deactivate the patch on the TO diskette and repeat the operation. IML ERROR: An-error was detected while performing an Recovery: EDIT COMMAND ERROR: An invalid entry was placed in IML. the editing input area. Recovery: Re-IML. o Press the RESET key. The applIcation program issues a Write-command that specifies keyboard restore. (This also resets the PTR-BUSY, PTR-INTV REaD, or PTR-CHK indicator.) Recovery: Select the correct function (or blank) and retry. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 :) o o o 0000 0000 o 0 t'. • 000 .~ o o o 0000 PN 5666361 2 of 5 o o I 44 156 000 o (~ (~ (~ ,,,,,,,- (~' (" (' (' (,'" (~ INSERT MODE: The INSERT key was pressed to insert characters between existing characters. Recovery: Press the RESET key. (' ( (~ C" (" .,." 0 e INVALID OPERATION: The operation specified is not valid for the screen. The cursor is positioned under the operation character. Recovery: Enter a valid op code and retry the command. INTERNAL CONFG DATA ERROR: The modules on the diskette contain redundant configuration information that does not agree. The fields in conflict are marked with asterisks. Recovery: Key in a valid argument for the field. INVALID PROCESSOR 10: The machine serial number on the diskette does not match the serial number hardwired in the machine. The requested function is disabled. INTV-REQD: The 3287 Printer coupled as a hard-copy Recovery: Load the correct diskette and re-IML. If the error persists go to Start MAPs. device has become not-ready (end-of-form, power-off, or other check conditions are present). IPL COMPLETE: The IPL execution is complete. Recovery: Clear the check condition, and make printer ready. INVALID ADDRESS: The address field contains an invalid character, or the address specified is out of the valid range for this screen. The cursor is positioned under the address. Recovery: Enter a valid address and retry the command. INVALID BLOCK NAME: The block name must not begin with a P or be longer than eight characters. IPL DEVICE UNAVAIL-SELlN: For a valid UCW, the device is not attached, or the METER switch is off. It also appears when a OCM (machine reset) is selected, but the system is not hardstopped. Recovery: Check that the IPL UNIT AD DR is correct on the Program Load screen. Check any switching devices to ensure that the device is attached to the system. Check that the device control unit power is on, and that the METER switch is on. Recovery: Respecify the block name. IPL ERROR: An error occurred while performing an IPL. INVALID CHAR.CODE: Invalid character or an invalid combination of characters was used in the CHAR.CODE field. Recovery: Enter correct characters. INVALID INPUT: A function letter, an address, or data has an invalid character entered next to the SELECTION label. The cursor is under the first character in the error field. This message also appears if you enter more than the allowed number of characters on the SELECTION line. Recovery: Re-IPL. IPL I/O ERROR. US/CS=XXXX: An I/O error has occurred. The unit status / channel status is shown. Recovery: If US/CS=x2xx, xAxx, or xExx, check that the IPL device is powered on, ready, and physically attached. Retry the IPL. If the error persists, go to Start MAPs. IPL I/O ERROR: No UCW exists for the devices or no valid Recovery: Enter the parameter for the function desired and press ENTER. IPL record is on tape (for example, the drive is not at load point). INVALID INPUT, CE ONLY: The function letter requires the CE MODE switch to be in the CE MODE position. Recovery 1: Check that the IPL UNIT ADDR is correct on the Program Load screen. Check that the IPL device contains the correct disk or tape. Then retry an IPL. Recovery: Select the correct function letter, or set the CE switch to CE MODE and reselect the letter. INVALID NAME: The name is invalid; it has too many characters or no name was specified. Recovery: Specify a valid name. Recovery 2: Ensure that the tape is in a ready state and at load point. Then retry an IPL. (' IPL is invalid; for example, the instruction address in the current PSW is not an address in main storage. Recovery: Check that the IPL UNIT ADDR is correct on the Program Load screen. Check that the IPL device contains the correct disk or tape. (" (' KC INVALID WITH M OR P: An IML (M) or IPL (P) was attempted when the channel printer (KC) option was selected. (' ( ('~ (~ (- (- r' (" MAIN STG ADDRESS ERROR: • Recovery: Change the Copy key configuration to a null value by entering KO on the Program Load screen, or configure channel printer from a hard-copy device to the system diskette. An addressing error or a data content (pattern) error was detected during IML of the Main Storage test. • An error in main storage was detected while running the Verification test (V3) of the Program Load screen. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. KEY IGNORED: The SP is busy processing the previous Recovery: Press the PF9 key. function. Recovery: Delete excessive characters or lines. MANUAL CONTROL: The system is under control of the support processor microcode. In this mode, an SIO to the display console is accepted but held pending until the display console is available to the operating system. If an 510 is queued, the audible alarm is sounded, and SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING is displayed on line 23. LOG AREA ,. FULL: Log area is full. Recovery: Press the CHG DPL Y key to return to the operating system. Recovery,' Try the function again. LINES OR SIZE OVER MAX: The number of characters exceeds the available space or more than the allowed number of editing lines is requested. Recovery: Erase the screen and retry the save function. LONG IPL PROCEEDING: The IPL has taken about twelve seconds to IPL and the IPL is still in process. Recovery: If this condition is abnormal, press the MODE SEL key to exit the IPL. The user cannot IPL with polling off. Check the Check Control (OK) screen to determine if the 'P' selection (polling) is set to NO. If so, it must be set to YES. MACHINE NOT HARDSTOPPED: A function is selected that requires the machine to be in CLOCK STOP state, and it is not. Recovery: Enter OOM or OOC to hardstop the machine. For additional information, refer to 00 screens. MAIN CONSOLE NOT READY DURING POWER UP SEQUENCE: The main (primary) console failed to operate MODULE NOT FOUND: The requested display of a module does not exist on the diskette. Recovery: Enter the correct 10, or mount the desired diskette. MORE: More Saved Screens are on the next page. Recovery: To display the next page of Saved Screen area, press the Page Up key. MORE, PRESS ENTER: The data does not fit on the screen. Recovery: Press ENTER to continue the display on the next page. NAME2 LONGER THAN NAME1: NAME2 is longer than NAME1. on power-on. Recovery: Make NAME2 equal to or shorter than NAME1. Recovery: Press the CHG DPLY key on the console displaying this message. NATIVE DEVICE ADDR USED: The wrong screen was MAIN STG DATA CMP ERROR: • An addressing error or a data content (pattern) error was detected during IML of the Main Storage test. • An error in main storage was detected while running the Verification test (V2) of the Program Load screen. This error may be accompany by a reference code. IPL IN PROG: The execution phase of IPL is in progress. IPL PSW FORMAT ERROR: The PSW loaded during an ('~ Recovery: Press the PF9 key. used to assign or unassign a native device. Recovery: Use the Program Load screen to change any native device address. NO BLOCK AT MATCH-WAIT: No block is active (available to be halted). Recovery: No action is required. NO IML: No IML was performed. Recovery: Press the POWER ON/IML key. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 . ," •• -<-'- '- .. PN 5666361 3 of 5 44 157 (' c ~:- , .- ." NO SAVED SCREENS: The CE log or Saved Screens area is empty. POWER NOT UP: A function was selected, but no power is on the processor. Recovery: No action is required. Recovery: Press the POWER ON key, wait for POWER COMPLETE, and then retry the command. NO SPACE IN LIST: The list area is full. PRESS ENTER TO SAVE: Pressing ENTER saves the screen. Recovery: No action required. NOT A COLOR CONSOLE: A color display function was requested from a noncolor display unit. Printer power 'is off. Printer is in Test mode. Recovery: Informative message; no action required. Recovery: Press the RESE-T key. PRINTER HALTED: An informative message that the printer was stopped from copying. PTR/KYBD CONS ADDR ERROR: The address restrictions of printer / keyboard mode were not met. The cursor is positioned at the end of the SELECTION line. Recovery: No action required. NOT FOUND IN LIST: The Siock or Patch name was not found in the Index. PROCEED: A Read command is in progress. Only now can the operator enter data in the input area. Proceed is cleared when the Read command is ended by one of the following conditions: Normal ending caused by ENTER or CNCL key. NOT IMLED: (This is a dependent error; other commands must have certain parameters.) All IPL was attempted without a prior IML. The cursor is positi-aned at the end of the SELECTION line. A system or selective reset. A Halt Device or Halt I/O instruction issued to the device. Recovery: IML the Support Processor, and rekey the correct command and parameter. PRT /KYBD MODE: The display console was assigned a common address with a hard-copy printer (via the Program Load screen). OPERATION RATE NOT NORMAL: The Operation Rate switch is not set to NORMAL. PSW UNPREDICTABLE: A program reset made the PSW unpredictable. The PSW is set to zeros. Recovery: Set the Rate switch to- NORMAL (QON). Recovery: Display the current PSW to determine whether program execution should continue. If necessary, re-IPL. PAGING KEY IGNORED: • A paging operation (not required for this screen) was attempted, or • • The address to be generated by paging is either too high or too low for the function selected, or The previous command had a nonpaging error. Recovery: Press the RESET key and retry Copy key request. PATCH IS ACTIVE: The patch is active and cannot be edited. Press the RESET key, and then press the STOP and START key at the PU. Retry the Copy key request. Recovery: Press ENTER to return to the patch list screen. Power the printer off and on; then retry the Copy key request. PATCH ERROR: An error occurred while running a patch that was invoked after an IML. POWER COMPLETE: A power-up of the processor or a re-IML of the Support Processor was successful. Recovery: Rekey the correct command and parameter after the last command entered along the SELECTION line. Only the latter command is recognized. PU ALREADY INTIAUZED: An attempt was made to use the Copy function to a channel printer while the system was in an active IPL. This Copy function overlays the existing program within the system. Recovery: To effect the changes, press POWER ON/IML key and select option' M' when the Program Load (QL) screen appears. READY THE PRINTER: A print operation was attempted, but the printer (channel) was not ready. REFCODE LOGGED: A reference code was displayed and logged. Warning: If the machine has been IPLed, a QCLEAR is required. However, a loss of customer data can result with this sel~ction. Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs. REJECTED-BLOCK INVOKED: An inactive block was invoked, and an Address Compare command was issued. PU HARDSTOPPED: A function was requested, but the machine was hardstopped. Recovery: Halt the block (QBH) before issuing an Address Compare command. PU IS NOT SOFTSTOPPED: A function requiring the processor to be softstopped was invoked while the machine was running, and the attempt to softstop the processor was unsuccessful. PU NOT INITIALIZED: The selected function was not possible because no PU IML was performed. Recovery: IML the PU and try the function again. PUT IN FROM DISK, ENTER: Insert the diskette which contains the data to be transferred and press the ENTER key. Recovery: Press the RESET key. PUT IN TO DISK, ENTER: Insert the diskette which is to receive the data to be transferred and press the ENTER key. POWER INCOMPLETE: A function was selected before the power-on sequence of the processor was complete. RE-IML REQUIRED: Changes were made to the System Configuration (QFS) or Module Transfer (QFM) screen. Recovery: Ready the printer and retry the function. Recovery: If a copy is desired, enter a QCLEAR on the selection line and retry the Copy function. Recovery: Press the STOP key and perform the desired function. PTR-CHK: The printer in manual mode has an unrecoverable error. A requested function requires that the machine not be IPLed. Recovery: To protect the operator from accidentally overlaying storage, the Copy-to-line-printer function requires a specific clear reset. If a customer job is running, a clear reset aborts the job. A re-IPL is required after a clear reset if more programs are to be run. Recovery: Remove the machine from the hardstopped state and retry the function. PTR-BUSY: The printer is in manual mode and busy from a previous Copy key request or a SIO from the operating system. The Copy key request is ignored. 'QCLEAR' RESET REQUIRED: The channel printer (KC) or (QEWC) option was selected when the machine was IPLed. A Copy key request was performed, and no Copy key device was configured. The Copy request is ignored. NOT AVAILABLE: The requested function is not available for use, or no room is on the diskette currently mounted. The function cannot be performed. Recovery: No action required. PTR-INTV REQD: In manual mode, operator intervention is required to restore the printer to the ready condition. REMOVE PART OF SHARED UCW: Entire address range of shared devices was not removed. Recovery: Remove entire address range. REQUEST: A REQ (Request) key attention status was stacked because the device was busy executing a command. When the current operation is completed, the attention status is presented to the channel, and the REQUEST indicator is cleared. A system or selective reset also clears the REQUEST indicator. ROCF ACTIVE: The host system has an active session in process with the 4341 via the RSF link. ROCF MONITOR ACTIVE: The Remote Operator Console Facility is enabled and waiting for incoming calls from the host system. SAVED-title: A screen was successfully saved on the diskette. Recovery: Press the POWER OFF key and then the POWER ON key. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 ]0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o • • • 0.·0 0 . ~'" . o o o 00 00 PN 5666361 4 of 5 44158 o o 000 o (" (" (~ SEE ERROR MESSAGE: See the error message on line 20. SELECTION COMPLETE: The UCW directory was changed, and the device address was assigned. SERIAL NOS. DO NOT MATCH: The diskette image machine serial number does not match the processor serial number. SERIAL NUMB READY TO LOCK: The machine serial o ( STARTL NOT AVAILABLE: The test before a STARTL transfer begins- showed that the support processor or processing unit interfaces were not operational. Recovery: Re-IML the processor, and then restart'the STARTL command function. during IML or a Support Bus error was detected. Recovery: Re-IML. If the failure persists, go to the Start MAPs. Recovery: Use LOCKSERNUM to secure the serial number. SYNTAX ERROR: An error occurred in the editing fields. The cursor is positioned beneath the data in error. SOFTSTOP REQUIRED: The processor is in a hardstop or Recovery: Key in the correct data and pr..s.s ENTER. .,"tt SYSTEM ERROR: An internal error occurred in the processor. A reference code indicates the source: Recovery: Press the STOP key. With the correct command still on the SELECTION line, press the ENTER key. EC900060 = SP/PU COMMUNICATION ERR: A communication error occurred between the SP and PU. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs. SP/PU COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE: An IML failed because data was not transferred between the SP and the PU. Recovery~' Retry an IML. If the failure persists, go to the Start MAPs. EC90EC60 = Coding error (Ref. Code) MISCOMPARE~ Data in the SP does not compare with the data sent back from the PU. This error may be accompanied by a reference code. Recovery: Goto the Start MAPs. SP/PU TRANSFER ERROR: • • An error occurred during transfer of data from the SP to the PU while executing the Main Storage Address Verification test. An 'error occurred while transferring data from the SP to the PU. This error may by accompanied by a reference code. Recovery: Retry the test. If the test fails again ora reference code appears, go to the Start MAPs. ( ( TAPE NOT OPERATIONAL:, The specified tape drive is not operational. Becovery: Verify that the correct tape drive is being used, and that the tape unit and tape control unit are operational. command required a Trace or Data Compare to be reset, but the PU was in hardstop. The command is accepted, but the system continues to run the Trace or Data compare function. Recovery: Perform a system reset, or place the system in Instruction Step mode. Reenter the Normal Address Compare function. TRANSFER HALTED: A support processor-common adapter code interface failed during a transfer. Recovery: Return to the Module Transfer screen, and rerun the Module Transfer function. UPDATE OVER 1024 UCWs: More than 1024 UCWs Start or stop attempt failed (Ext. Code) were assigned. F4900060 = Diskette I/O error (Ext. Code) F8900060 = Console Display error (Ext. Code) FD900060 = Scan ring failed· to cycle properly (Ext. Code) USAGE CONFLICT: A previous request was not completed, or the START, STOP, INTR, MODE SEL, CHG DPLY, SPM/O, or DIAG key was pressed while another display console was already in manual control mode. ED900060 = Path from the SP to the PU failed (Ext. Codel Recovery: Retry the command function. If the error persists, go to the Start MAPs. Recovery: Press the RESET key to clear messages. To activate function keys for the display, locate the console that is in manual control mode, and press the CHG DPLY key. Now the function keys can be activated. WNG: CHECK ERROR: A CRC (CHECKSUM) error SYSTEM IS IMLED: The satelite system is IMLed a SP/PU DAT:A ( TRACE/DATA COMP NOT RESET: The entered SUPPORT BUS FAILURE: The PU logic reset failed number entered does not have a syntax error. running state, and an attempt was made to change a device address within the processor. The cursor is positioned at the end of the SELECTION line. ( re-IML changes the status. CURRENT PSW IS XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX, MACHINE IS CLOCKED STOP STATE, or MACHINE IS ERROR STOP"PED STATE is also displayed with this message. Their status" changes with a re-IML also. SYSTEM IS IPLED: The satelite system is IPLed a re-IPL changes the status. CURRENT PSWIS XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX, MACHINE IS CLOCKED STOP STATE, or MACHINE IS ERROR STOPPED STATE is also displayed with this message. Their status changes with a re-IPL also. SYSTEM RESET REQD: An attempt was made to use the occurred. Recovery: Enter the correct CRC value. WNG: CHECK ERROR (XXXX): A CRC (CHECKSUM) error occurred. Recovery: Enter the CRC value (XXXX) that is provided in the message. X OF PART OF SHARED RANGE: Unassigning a shared device did not unassign the entire range. Recovery: Unassign the entire range. MODE SEL or CHG DPLY key while the system was in a hardstop state and the console was busy with an Operating System operation. " Recovery: Perform a Program Reset (PROGR), Clear Reset (CLEAR) or an IPL. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666361 5 of 5 44159 { (' I o , 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o'o~, .. , - - - " < < - - -~ ~,~,------------------------,------------- ••; 0 ,""It: .•.......••.. • i>'. ; - , - ' ' .. , , ' •••• ; >" . . . . . . . . . : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C ( c o o ( ( ( (- ( (- ( MANUAL FUNCTIONS Time of Day Enable (Y) GENERAL SELECTION (Q) The General Selection screen is the first screen to appear when you initially enter manual functions. The General Selection (Q) screen is the main screen in the manual function. The Q-screen has two sections. The selections on the left half of the screen are immediate operations and, with the exception of the Problem Analysis and SP Storage Displays, do not produce another manual control mode screen. They execute their particular function and display the Q-screen. The selections on the right half of the screen have additional screens to complete their function. *GENERAL SELECTION* Y J PA PROGR CLEAR CM RES SAVE Select-ing the General Selection Screen (Q) The General Selection screen appears: Z X When MODE SEL is pressed When you enter Q in the SELECTION area (manual mode) • TIME OF DAY ENABLE switch has no additional menu. F L B TIME OF DAY-ENABLE INTERVAL TIMER-SWITCH CONFIGURATION PROGRAM LOAD BLOCK/PATCH PROBLEM ANALYSIS SYSTEM RESET-PROGRAM SYSTEM RESET-CLEAR MACHINE RESET A K 0 COMPARE/TRACE CHECK CONTROL OPERATION RATE RESTART D V DISPLAY/ALTER INSERT/EXTRACT E M I ERROR LOGOUTS POWER/TEMPERAT DISKETIE IPL RETURN TO PROG SYS SP STORAGE DISPLAY 4341 1. Key in the selector character shown on the left of the Fast Selection 2. Press ENTER. For the description of the error messages that can occur during the selection of a manual function, see Error Messages. Interval Timer switch has no additional display. 2. Press ENTER. The interval timer function is availahle when the system is operating in 370 or VSE mode. The Interval Timer switch is automatically set on when the system is IMLed. The timer can be turned off by entering a J following the SELECTION label and pressing ENTER on the keyboard. Whenever the switch is on, TIMER: ON is indicated on line 21 of the display console. Whenever the switch is off, TIMER: OFF is indicated on line 21. The cursor is next to SELECTION: and ready for input. To select one of the functions: Note: The appropriate action is carried out as soon as ENTER is pressed for characters y, J, PROGR, CLEAR, CM, RES, SAVE and Z. Interval Timer Switch (J) 1. Key in J next to the. SELECTION label. ==> SELECTION: Selecting a Manual Function Another display appears on the screen if you made a selection that appears to the right of the screen. This new display usually requires the same action as above, that is, selection of a displayed character, arid then pressing ENTER. 2. Press ENTER. The clock can be altered by the Set Clock instruction. After pressing the ENTER key, screen control is immediately switched to the Operating System screen. TOD: ENBL is indicated on line 22 of the display console for approximately six seconds, and then the TOD is automatically disabled. STORE STATUS When CHG DPLY is pressed (if las1 screen displayed in manual mode). required operation. 1. Key in Y following the SELECTION label. Once you are familiar with the manual selections, selector characters, subsequent displays and their associated parameters, you can execute a function in one step. This feature can be implemented from most manual selection screens. One fast-select method is the execution of a manual function directly from the General Selection screen. A second way is to switch between manual functions, and directly execute the function just selected. To initiate fast selection, the letter Q must always proceed the function being implemented. To perform fast selection: 1. Press MODE SEL (if system screen is present). 2. Press Q. 3. Key in character that represents manual function you want to perform. 4. Key in parameters for the manual function you have just selected. 5. Press ENTER. Note: Do not insert commas between characters. If the system finds a syntax error, the screen that represents the last correct letter is displayed. The manual functions compress the selection line input and ignore blanks entered into the system. The interval timer is alternately turned on or off each time that a J is entered. When the timer is activated, real main storage location 80 is decremented approximately every 30 ms. When the location goes negative, an interrupt is generated. If the timer is off, location 80 is available for use. Problem Analysis (PA) For information about Problem Anaiysis see: Volume 13/16, Section 14, "Problem Analysis (PA)." Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379807 22SepSO EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666362 1 of 2 44 165 .-~-- System Resets Program Reset (PROGR) Clear Reset (CLEAR) Note: If a Clear Reset is performed while a trace or stop-on-main-storage-data-compare (nonzero) functf;Jn is in effect, a false match stop occurs. '!"";~" Check Reset (Re-IML) Restart (RES) Store Status (SAVE) (370 Mode Only) The only reliable way of clearing an intermittent check is to re-IML the processing unit. This command is QLM. If another checkstop occurs, the error is probably not intermittent. However, most checks can be cleared either by the Program Reset (QPROGR) or Clear Reset (QCLEAR). RESTART has no additional display. This, function stores in hex and is allowed when running with Virtual Storage Control. STORE STATUS has no additional display. Machine Reset (eM) (Norma/) There is no display for Program Reset or Clear Reset. 1. Key in either PROGR (Reset-Program) or CLEAR (Reset-Clear) followin~ the SELECTION label. 2. Press ENTER. Keying in either PROGR OR CLEAR and then pressing ENTER: Clears pending interrupts or machine check conditions. Causes the following to stop: Execution of the present PU instruction (if any) All channels and their control units All a d a p t e r s , All I/O devices (channel and natively attached) Resets manual functions Time-of-Oay Enable Save Indicator Operation Control Rate (except I-step) A Program Reset does not affect the values of: PU timer Clock comparator General registers Floating-point registers Control registers Main storage' A Clear Reset initializes the control registers and clears to zero the values of any storage or registers whose contents can be modified by the system program. These include: Current PSW Processor timer Clock comparator General registers Floating-point registers Main storage Translate tables (VSE mode) Page management pointer (VSE mode) < 1. Key in RES following the SELECTION label. 2, Press ENTER. 1. Key in SAVE following the SELECTION label. If the machine is in stopped state, it starts with the program restart PSW. If the machine is in the operating state, the PSW exchange occurs at the end of the current instruction after all interrupts for which the PU is enabled are handled. The Machine Reset is a CE-only function to be used when directed by your FSC or Product Engineer. To return the console to the operating system: Press CHG OPLY or, To invoke the Machine Reset function from the General Selection screen: Key Z next to SELECTION and press ENTER. 2. Press ENTER. The following are stored in main (real) storage: • Processor timer - 8 bytes at '08' (216 dec.) • Clock Comparator - 8 bytes at 'EO' (224 dec.) • The current PSW - 8 bytes at '100' (256 dec.) 32 bytes at '160' (352 dec.) • Floating-point registers - 1. Key CM next to SELECTION. • General registers - 64 bytes at '180' (384 dec.) 2. Press ENTER. • Control registers - 64 bytes at '1 CO' (448 dec.) Note: The fol/owing happens: Machine Save (SAVE) (VSE Mode only) All scan rings are reset including those related to the clocks. In VSE mode, the Save function is called Machine Save. This function saves the above data as well as page 0 (virtual address 0 to 2048) in auxiliary storage for subsequent retrieval, by a Retrieve Status and Page software instruction (08). The refresh clock is turned on at the end of the routine. CAUTION Because the Refresh Clock is stopped, double-bit errors occur in main storage. Note: It does not: When Store Status or Machine Save is complete, SAVE is indicated on line 21 of the display console, and the system goes into a stopped state. Use the PU microcode. Clear or reset any arrays. Save any Manual Control settings. Return to Prog Sys (Z) Two optional variations to the machine reset are QCMrr and QCMLxxxx. RETURN TO PROG SYS has no additional display. 1. Key in Z following the SELECTION label. Machine Reset (CMrr) - One Ring 2. Press ENTER QCMrr resets specified scan rings. rr is the specified ring to be reset. In general, operational results are unpredictable. Machine Reset (CMLxxxx) - The screen is under control of the operating system. Note: The support processor transient area is released and the contents of the system mode (usually operating system messages) buffer is displayed. With Log QCMLxxxx resets machine latches from a specified machine check logout. xxxx is the same four digits as those specified to display the detailed error logout (QECOxxxx). The machine is placed in CK-CTRL=HAROSTOP automatically. All nonarray Insert/Extract screens may now be used. Note: Pressing the POWER ON/IML switch (with power up) does not reset the processor. Only the SP code is reloaded and normal processor operation can be continued. This switch clears up Channel 0 if it has failed due to an intermittent problem. The Reset button (logic reset) on the main frame near the diskette drive is similar to the SP re-IML, but no SP code is reloaded. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379807 22Sep80 EC 379837 28Jun82 ' 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o .. ' 0.000 Ii o o 0000 PN 5666362 2 of 2 o o 44 170 000 o ( ( ( « ( ( ( ( ( ( To select the SP Storage function from the Q-screen: 1. Key X next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Notes: • The next higher/lower 512 bytes of storage can be displayed by using the paging keys. • The address can be defaulted. • The display can be fast-selected by keying ax and the desired address (does not have to be 4 digits) from any screen. • To obtain a display of the dump of SP storage when using the SP stand-alone dump support option (QJD), key DUMP next to SELECTION instead of a hex address. • To return to SP STORAGE when in SP DUMP mode: ADRS' 2000 2020 2040 2060 2080 20AO 20CO 20EO +0 0814000F 243E04FO 800022CC 206604FO 706120C6 70CB0884 265604FO 21CE3600 +4 70613600 21CEIFC4 20742808 20740212 A080400F 706270CB 21FA0903 80007072 2100 0814000F 70613600 2120 243£04FO 21C£IFC4 2140 800022CC 20742808 2160 206604FO 20740212 2180 706120C6 A080400F 21AO 70CB0884 706270CB 21CO 265604FO 21FA0903 20EO 21C£3600 80007072 SELECTION: 2000 *SP STORAGE* +08 +OC +10 80007061 '20323600 40007061 707121B8 0804007B 70610008 20580201 0020FFEO 22F422CO 002022F4 000022F4 04F421BB 70610814 00807000 080400BF 083400E9 70711526 22C022CO 243E3600 800070CC 21CE3600 21CE3800 80007072 21CE0982 +14 20263600 22CC3600 3COOOOFF 0982243E 70CC0804 090822CO 40007070 243E04FO +18 10007061 800070Cl 22F6FFFF 04F021CE 00BF7070 3A002680 20FA3600 21C£8000 +IC 2026090C 207C3800 22F422CO 36002000 08340080 228604FO 400070CC 400070CC 80007061 707121B8 20580201 002022F4 70610814 083400£9 243£3600 21CE3800 20263600 22CC3600 3COOOOFF 0982243£ 70CC0804 090822CO 40007070 243£04FO 10007061 800070Cl 22F6FFFF 04F021C£ 00BF7070 3A002680 20FA3600 21CE8000 2026090C 207C3800 22F422Co 36002000 08340080 228604FO 400070CC 400070CC 20323600 0804007B 0020FF£0 000022F4 00807000 70711526 800070CC 80007072 40007061 70610008 22F422Co 04F421BB 080400BF 22C022CO 21CE3600 21CE0982 ( ( ( ( Microcode Level 154321 and Below To invoke the SP Storage Display from the General Selection screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key X next to SELECTION. 3. Key a four-digit hex address next to X. Notes: • To obtain a display of the dump of SP storage when using the SP stand-ll/one dump support option. leey DUMP next to X instead of a four-digit hex address. • This address can be defaulted. 4. Press ENTER. 5. Press ALT and use the PAGE keys to find desired address. ==> 4341 1. Key STaR next to SELECTION. 6. Press MODE SEL to exit the SP Storage Display screen. 2. Press ENTER Return to General Selection (a) ( SP STORAGE DISPLAY (OX) SP STORAGE (OX) Microcode Level 154322 (856091) and Above ( Notes: MICROCODE 154322 (856091) AND ABOVE • Each page contains 512 bytes of storage. • Any address entered must contain four hex digits. 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. .SP STORAGE DISPLAY. Return to Prog Sys (Z) 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. BYTE 2000 2020 2040 2060 2080 20AD 20CO 20EO +00 0814000F 243E04FO 800022CC 206604FO 706120C6 70CB0884 265604FO 21CE3600 +04 70613600 21CE1FC4 20742808 20740212 A080400F 706270CB 21FA0903 80007072 +08 80007061 707121B8 20580201 002022F4 70610814 083400E9 243E3600 21CE3800 +OC 20323600 0804007B 0020FFEO 000022F4 00807000 70711526 800070CC 80007072 +10 40007061 70610008 22F422Co 04F421BB 080400BF 22C022CO 21CE3600 21CE0982 +14 20263600 22CC3600 3COOOOFF 0982243E 70CC0804 090822CO 40007070 243E04FO +18 10007061 800070Cl 22F6FFFF 04F021CE 00BF7070 3A002680 20FA3600 21CE8000 +IC 2026090C 207C3800 22F422CO 36002000 08340080 228604FO 400070CC 400070CC 2100 2120 2140 2160 2180 21AO 21CO 20EO 0814000F 243E04FO 800022CC 206604FO 706120C6 70CB0884 265604FO 21CE3600 70613600 80007061 21CE1FC4 70712188 20742808 20580201 20740212 002022F4 A080400F'70610814 706270CB 083400E9 21FA0903 243E3600 80007072 21CE3800 20323600 0804007B 0020FF£0 000022F4 00807000 70711526 800070CC 80007072 40007061 70610008 22F422CO 04F421BB 080400BF 22C022CO 21CE3600 21CE0982 20263600 22CC3600 3COOOOFF 0982243E 70CC0804 090822CO 40007070 243E04FO 10007061 800070Cl 22F6FFFF 04F021CE 00BF7070 3A002680 20FA3600 21CE8000 2026090C 201C3800 22F422Co 36002000 08340080 228604FO 400070CC 400070CC ADDRESS: 2000 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379827 020ct81 MICROCODE 154321 AND BELOW ©IBM Corp. 1979,1981 PN 2676049 1 of 2 44175f - -- - - ----. - -. _.... _. ----_._.. ---.- .-.-. _.. ~---- - ----_._-- ._----- ---- . .- "'- ~.. .--~ -- _._----- - -~- • • • _ . - - ...- - ~ - •• ~-¥ ~ ~. --" - - - - - -..................... -<~...,.-- ...... -•. -- - ...--.--.. --.-----.~-,. ~--- ...- ...~-.- .• - CONFIGURATION (OF) *CONFIGURATION* The F-selection from the General Selection screen displays the Configuration screen menu. The menu shows the facilities available as subscreens from the Configuration screen. A subscreen is selected from the Configuration screen by first keying OF, or just F if you currently have the General Selection screen. S SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE P CONSOLE TEST PATTERN M MODULE TRANSFER Nine selection characters are on the Configuration screen, but only seven are major facilities: the System Configuration screen, Console Color Convergence screen, Console Test Pattern screen, Module Transfer screen, Remote Support Facility screen, Remote Operator Console Facility screen and the Tape-to-Diskette Build screen. The Remote Support Facility consists of selections: R, C, and D. For more information, refer to "Remote Support Facility." T TAPE TO DISKETTE BUILD (IBM AFE ONLY) To select the Configuration screen from the General Selection screen: Q GENERAL SELECTION Z- RETURN TO PROG SYS R REMOTE CONSOLE INITIALIZATION C REMOTE CONSOLE COMMUNICATIONS D DATA BANK INITIALIZATION B REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY SELECTION: .==> 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key F next to SELECTION. 4341 3. Press ENTER. Configuration screen is displayed. Model Group 2 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676049 I ') o 0 0 0 0 () o o () o o {) 0 0 0 I' . • o 0:" .;'" , o 0" , . o o o o 0·0 20f 2 o o I I 44180f I I j ,n ~.j 0'· i.' if). ~}, ( (.~. (: o o (' ( ( ( SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (QFS) *SYSTEM CONFIGURATION* The System Configuration screen is a CE-only function. To invoke this screen, the 4341 must be in CE mode. ~This screen can be selected from the Configuration screen or fast-selected from the General Selection screen. Changes are made by entering the required data, or by using the cursor. The use requirements are restrictive to prevent errors. Be careful when updating the configuration record. Fields displaying a colon (:) on the screen are alterable. INSTALLED: OPERATIONAL HARDCOPY: POWER LOGIC: CONSOLE LANGUAGE CODE: 00 ROCF AUTO-ANSWER MODEM: 000000 MAIN STORE SIZE: CONTROL STORE SIZE: The configuration record is stored on the system diskette and is updated each time a change is made. A support processor re-IML must be performed any time a change is made to the configuration record or if the diskette is changed. 04 MEG 64 KB LOCKSERNUM - LOCK SERIAL NUMBER Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS To select the System Configuration screen from the Configuration screen: SELECTION: S 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. CONSOLE DEVICES NO N1 N2 N3 X X X X X X X MODEL 4341 SERIAL NO.: 000000 DISKETTE PART NO. 0000000 EC 000000 REA 0000000 2. Key S next to F on the SELECTION line. X NUMBER OF CHANNELS: 06 CHANNEL 4 IN BYTE MODE: CHANNEL TO CHANNEL: I/O POWER-UP TIME-OUT: 02 MINS POWER GROUP: 00 ==> 4341 Note: The serial number update is a one-time occurrence. When entered, it becomes an unalterable field. It is important that the entered serial number be verified. Power Logic: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for POWER LOGIC, and key in the EC number of the power EC just installed. Press ENTER. Main Store Size: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for MAIN STORE SIZE, and key in the two-digit number representing the size of main storage. Press ENTER. Control Store Size: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for CONTROL STORE SIZE, and key in the two-digit number representing the size of control storage. Press ENTER. © IBM Corp. 1981 Power Group: Note: Using the Feature 8M machine history, determine what Documentation 8M is associated with the 4341. The charts on the fol/owing page indicate which Power Group Code matches the machine configuration. Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for POWER GROUP code, and key in the correct code. Return to General Selection (Q) 2. Press ENTER. Note: The following sections apply to the areas which can be altered. The serial number is now locked, and the lock serial number message is no longer displayed on the screen. I/O Power-Up Time-Out: Move the cursor to the value on the screen for I/O POWER-UP TIME-OUT, and key in the number of minutes (in decimal) that the power code waits for the channel I/O devices attached to the power sequencing relays to power up. (If I/O stepping is not complete in the specified time, the machine posts a reference code.) Press ENTER. 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. To update the configuration record: screen for SERIAL NO. and key in the machine serial number. When the entered serial number is verified, key in next to SELECTION :SLOCKSERNUM Press ENTER. ( ( ( Press ENTER. 3. Press ENTER. System Configuration screen is displayed. Serial No.: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the ( Console Devices Installed: Move the cursor to the location on the screen for CONSOLE DEVICES INSTALLED, and key in an X if installed or an _ if not installed. No device should be assigned unless it is installed. Operational field is for information only; it is not alterable. Hardcopy: Move the cursor to the location on the screen for HARDCOPY, and key in an X if a printer is installed and is to be flagged as a hard-copy device, or an _ if it is not installed. A hard-copy device can be console device one through three. Press ENTER. Console Language Code: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for CONSOLE LANGUAGE CODE, and key in one of the following values: 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC aD OE OF 10 11 U.S. English Canadian/French (See Note) Austria/German Belgium Brazil/Portuguese Denmark Finland France/ Azerty France/Qwerty International Italy Japan/English Norway Portugal Spain Spanish Speaking United Kingdom Sweden EBCDIC/World Trade Press ENTER. Note: The Canadian/French keyboard has the same character set and keyboard layout as the U.S. English, but with French nomenclature on the keys. ROCF Auto-Ans Modem: Move the cursor to the location Return to Prog Sys eZ) 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. on the screen displaying ROCF AUTO-ANS MODEM: and key in an X when an ROCF Auto-Ans modem is installed, or an if it is not installed. Press ENTER. Number of Channels: Move the cursor to the location on the screen displaying NUMBER OF CHANNELS: and key in the two-digit number representing the number of channels. Press ENTER. Channel 4 in Byte Mode: Move the cursor to the location on the screen displaying CHANNEL 4 IN BYTE MODE: and key in an X if channel 4 is to be used as a byte-multiplexer channel, or an _ if it is to be used as a block-multiplexer channel. This selection is valid only when the processor has been configured for six channels. Press ENTER. Note: Always check the Display / Alter UCW Directory (aDU) to verify the assignment. Channel to Channel: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for CHANNEL TO CHANNEL, and key an X next to it for desired assignment, or an if the existing value is to be deleted. Press ENTER. Model Group 2 EC 379827 020ct81 EC 379829 28Jun82 PN 2676455 1 of 2 44 185f C.' j --~-.- - ....,-. .-. Feature Title Power (;roup Code First Source Storage with Ferro Power Suppl ies: 21 BM 4154511 and one of the following: 5896667 or 4124111 or 4124111 First Source Storage with Switching Regulators: I 22 First Source 2 Meg (.5 Meg Card) Storage Group First Source 4 Meg (.5 Meg Card) Storage Group or 4124101 First Source 8 Meg (.5 Meg Card) Storage Group 4154511 and one of the following: 4154406 or 4154407 First Sourc.e Storage with Ferro Power Supplies: 23 First Source 4 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group First Source 8 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group or 4154408 First Source 12 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group or 4154409 First Source 16 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group 4154512 and one of the following: 4154406 or 4154409 --- First Source 2 Meg (.5 Meg Card) Storage Group First Source 8 Meg (.5 Meg Card) Storage Group 4154512 and one of the following: -5896667 or 4154408 - ~'. First Source 4 Meg (.5 Meg Card) Storage Group or 4124101 cr 4154407 , ..-- First Source Storage with Switching Regulators: 24 First Source 4 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group I First Source 8 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group First Source 12 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group First Source 16 Meg (1.0 Meg Card) Storage Group - - - _ .. _._. -- 4341 Model Group 2 Model Group-2 EC 379827 020ct81 EC 379829 28Jun82 () 0 o o 0000 0000 o o i' . . . PN 2676455 2 of 2 44 186f 0 0 0 0 o o 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 o r (", ( c- (~' ( ( ( ( ( ( f ( ( ( ( ~'".~( -. _... ---"-' "- - (- ( CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE (QFA) CONVERGENCE UTILITY To return to the General Selection (a) screen, press the MODE SEL key. However, because of interaction of some of the convergence positions, check all positions after the procedure is started. It is not necessary to adjust each position; advancing through each pattern position with the SPACE BAR performs the necessary action. After all thirteen positions have been adjusted, the pattern displays white in all positions (see test pattern diagram). This is the final check for convergence. • The convergence procedure cannot be directed to another console. You must be physically at that console and in manual mode to perform the procedure. Use the convergence procedure when setting up a color console, when the console has been moved to another area, or when color definition is in question. ENTER INITIALIZES UTILITY (MUST BE PRESSED 1ST) Convergence can be adjusted by using the keyboard to manually align a pattern .. By using two colors (red/green or red/blue), a pattern (-1-1-) is displayed at a location on the screen, any misconvergence can be easily seen. In a correctly converged screen, the two colors combine to show one pattern, in the color obtained by mixing the two primary colors (red/green combine into yellow, and red/blue combine into pink). A misconverged screen shows traces of the primary colors at the edge of the pattern or, if the convergence is bad, two separate patterns. The pattern is displayed at thirteen positions on the screen to allow all areas to be converged. At each of the thirteen positions, the pattern is first displayed in red/green, .and then in red/blue. CURSOR UP,DOWN, LEFT, OR RIGHT MOVES THE PATTERN SPACE BAR SELECTS NEXT POSITION OR COLOR Notes: • R KEY CHANGES PATTERN COLOR (RED/GREEN(-)REDBLUE) MODE SEL KEY EXITS UTILITY The CUl'$or positioning keys move the green (or blue) pattern towards the red until they coincide and a yellow (or pink) pattern is displayed. These keys are typematic and can be held down until the pattern is in the correct position. To select the Console Color Convergence screen from the Configuration screen: 1. Key A next to F on the SELECTION line. 2. Press ENTER. c ( The convergence procedure is used to optimize the 3279-2C color console primary color settings (red, green, and blue) to produce a pure compound color (white). If convergence is wrong; traces of each color are displayed at the edges of the white character. THIS UTILITY IS USED TO CONVERGE RED, GREEN, AND BLUE DISPLAYS INTO CORRECT ALIGNMENT. PATTERNS ARE SHOWN TW ICE AT 13 POS IT IONS ON THE SCREEN, IN RED/GREEN AND THEN RED/BLUE. THE 4 CURSOR KEYS ARE USED TO MOVE THE 2 COLOR PATTERNS TOGETHER INTO 1 COLOR, THE RED/GREEN MERGES INTO YELLOW AND RED/BLUE MERGES INTO PINK. Pressing the ENTER key advances the screen to the pattern display to start the adjustment. The ENTER key may be pressed at any time to restart the adjustment. If INHIBITED or any other symbol appears in the operator information area, press RESET and retry the action. c- Convergence Procedure The Console Color Convergence screen is used to align the color on a color display console. The initial display when making this selection is a description of the operation of the convergence procedure. • ( (13 ) ( 10) (2) -1-1- -1-1- -I~I(3) (8) -I-t- (9) -I-~- -1-1-/-1- -1-1- -1-1(1) (7) (6) The "R" key is used to reverse the color setting of the displayed pattern (red/green to or from red/blue). This allows the pattern to checked and adjusted at one position. Use he SPACE BAR to advance to the next adjustment position in the convergence procedure. The initial pattern at each position is displayed with the red/green colors. Pressing the SPACE BAR at this time changes the pattern to red/blue (the same as the "R" key). Pressing the SPACE BAR when the red/blue pattern is displayed advances the procedure to the next adjustment position, and displays the pattern in red/green. After the last position has been adjusted. pressing the SPACE BAR displays the pattern in white at all positions. If the SPACE BAR is pressed again. the procedure restarts at position one. (5) -~~I(l2} -l-t- (4) -1-1- ~ ,: , . ( 1l) -l-I- Note: Numbers in parenthesis indicate order of adjustment. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379607 05Jun81 EC 379814 020ct81 @ IBM Corp,. 1981 PN 2676425 1 of 2 44187 c Line Identification CONSOLE TEST PATTERN (QFP) TEST: 4341;AA PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED NOT PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED DISPLAY INSERT CK The Console Test Pattern screen provides a visual check for the display console colors, intensity, fields, and characters. To select the Console Test Pattern screen from the Configuration screen: PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED NOT PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED 4341 ;aa identifies the controller to which a display console is attached; aa a port number (00 through 03l. 1. Key P next to F on the SELECTION !.ine.· .2. Press ENTER. Line 2 ·3. Visually check all fields for correct characteristics. Protected and not Intensifie~ No data can be entered; the field is not intensified (blue on a 3279-2C, norma] green on a 3278-2A). 4. Move cursor under the CK field. 5. Press INSERT key. INSERT MODE displays in operator Wormation area. Protected and Intensified No data can be -entered; the field is intensified (white on a 3219-2C,high intensity on a 3278-2A). '6. Press keys A B, and C. DISPLAY INSERT -abck displays on line 4. INHtBITEDappears in_ operator information area. ==> SEl£CTION: 7. Press RESET. LIne 3 Note: Any character key may be entered on Jines 5 through 20 to check proper operation. .< 4341 S.· Press MODE SEL to exit from the Console Test Pattern I Line 1 screen. Not Protected and not Intensified Data can be entered; the field is not intensified (green on a 3279-2C, normal !;!reen on a 3278":2A). Not Protected and Intensified Data can be entered; the field is intensified. (red on a 3279-2C, high intensity on a 3278-2A).- NOte: The console test pattern cannot be directed to another . console. You must be physically at the console and in manual mode to peiform the test. Line 4 field 1 Display Insert CK Display and Insert fields are protected fields. CK is an unprotected field. field 2 Note: If the blanking circuit fails, a nondisplayable field (NON) appears preceding the DISPLAY field. 1 ine TEST: 4341 AA line 2 PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED line 3 NOT PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED NOT PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED Lines 5 to 20 line 4 DISPLAY INSERT Lines ~ to 20 are used to check all keyboard characters for proper operation. These lines are unprotected and not intensified. PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED CK - 3279-2C 3279-2C 1 ine field 3278-2A 4 Color Monochrome 9 b 1 9 b 9 2 2 bg w w 3 1 9 9 :g 3 2 b-g r w 4 1 9 b b I 4 2 9 9 9 I 1 1 1 2 2 9 bg -b r w 9 - green bright green blue red white Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379607 OSJan81 EC 379~14 020ct81 PN 2676425 44188 2 of 2 ) o 0000 O · 0 0·' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 --: .- .: \..' ..: ':". 0:···· 00 0 0 --. o o 0'000 o o o ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (; o ( (. MODULE TRANSFER (QFM) The Module Transfer screen moves the machine-dependent data module from one support processor diskette to another. When the EC is ready to be installed. take a stock EC disk to be updated with the data from the disk already there. The new disk then is unique for this particular system. Patches and Assists can not be transferred by the Module Transfer screen. The Module Transfer screen has two different input areas: the first is the area to the left of the module of MACHINE SENSITIVE DATA. and the other is for entering instruction type on the SELECTION line. The first area of input is on the full-screen area. The only inputs that are valid are "X" or " "(or blanks). For any other input. an INVALID message appears. The second area of input is through the normal manual function input that is on the SELECTION line. These commands are displayed on the screen. The module IDs are shown for each line and are taken from the disk that contains the Module Transfer CODE. If the two disks do not have the same module IDs. the transfer does not occur. The first selection is special in that only part of the total module shown is transferred. For the configuration data. the information unique to a disk (such as part number and EC number) is not transferred. For the reset data. only those bits that are machine sensitive are transferred to the reset data module. The Status Area of the Module Transfer screen shows the current status of the transfer taking place. The status area has four positions. The first shows the state of the transfer: S - selected for transfer; R - read from the disk and store either in main storage or in the support processor buffer; W write on the disk from the storage area; T - the module has been transferred completely. The second through fourth positions show any error that has occurred during a read or write portion of the transfer. The "0" is followed by an error indication. COMMANDS: SELECTION: M ( <: ( The transfer is completed regardless of the command used. size errors. or load address errors. However. the module in error is flagged as an error module and is not used again. Once the transfer is started. the microcode asks for the FROM disk. This allows you to use a different disk for' the FROM modules. S=SELECT R=READ & SAVE W=RETRIEVE & WRITE T=TRANSFER COMPLETE DSZ=SIZE DIFFERENT DLA=LOAD ADDRESS DIFFERENT D41=NOT FOUND INVP=INVALID INPUT MSTARTL MSTARTD ( STARTD only requires the support processor and uses a buffer of about 4K. If no selection errors occur. the code transfers modules from the disk to the buffer. You are then asked to swap the disks. The modules are then transferred from the buffer to the new disk. You are then asked to swap back to the old disk. The transfer then continues until all of the modules selected are transferred. *MODULE TRANSFER SCREEN* STATUS MACHINE SENSITIVE DATA (MODULE) X CLOCKS,IPU,STORE,CS .(8001-8004) CONFIGURATION,UCWS .(0001,20AO) X POWER/TEMP LOGS . . . ( 1024, 1026) X PU LOG CONTROL 1,2 . . (3050,3501) X PU LOGS 1-9 . . .(3061-3069) X SP LOGS . . . . . . . (3800) X REFERENCE CODES . . . (3900) X PROBLEM ANALYSIS DATA(2806-2808) X SAVED SCREENS/CE LOGS(9BXX) ERR MODS: STATUS INFO: ( ( START DISK-PU-DISK TRANSFER START DISK-SP-DISK TRANSFER At the end of the transfer. you are asked to replace the ORIGINAL disk because the transfer routine is reloaded to set up for another pass (if one is required). This message indicates the end of the transfer. However. you can continue and use a different disk (either another FROM or another TO). Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS ==> ALL LINES SELECTED 4341 7. Press ENTER. Note: Always check the System Configuration (QFS), Program Load (QU, and the Display / Alter UCW (QDU) assignment to verify the transfer. To invoke the Module Transfer screen: Warning: Do not press the Copy key during a Module Transfer; the transfer is not completed. If a transfer is desired. rekey the previous command. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON if you have not already done so. If you have not. you must select the Configuration screen first. 2. Key M on the SELECTION line. 3. Press ENTER. 4. After the Module Transfer screen is displayed. move the cursor to the module(s) that you do not want to transfer and place an next to that module. Ensure that an X is next to the module(s) that you do want transferred. 5. Press ENTER. The status area displays an S beside those modules which you have selected. Note: If an error occurs. INVP is displayed instead of S. 6. Key STARTL or STARTD next to the M on the SELECTION line. depending upon the type of transfer you wish to do. STARTL requires the processing unit to have been IMLed but not IPLed. Warning: If the machine has been IPLed. a QCLEAR is required. However. a loss of customer data can result with this selection. If no error occurs. the code transfers modules from the disk to the processor main storage. and asks you to swap disks. After the disk has been swapped. the modules from the processor storage are transferred to the new disk. One disk swap transfers all modules. The request for the ORIGINAL disk indicates that the transfer is complete. If a support processor-processing unit interface error occurs. the process stops. and the transfer must be restarted. Status Area Codes SZ LA 01 02 OF 21 31 41 4F 81 82 83 8F 9F From/to modules a different size From/to modules have a different load address Zero length Error during transfer of engineering data Diskette not ready Past end-of-file Address length. memory protect error Module 10 not found Write protect error Read error Adapter machine check UC machine check Cylinder index and master index different No current seek issued Notes: The status shows the last error encountered. When the ERR MODS area indicates 0001 (the status area displays WDSZ. and line 21 displays the message TRANSFER HAL TED), a machine serial number mismatch exists between the FROM and the TO diskettes. Model Group 2 © IBM Corp. 1981 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379829 28Jun82 PN 2676456 1 of 1 44191f (~ o "\. • .... c. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0" 0.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 C ------- --_.- .. -~------------.---- .~--~-~ ~ . _. ------~ -~----------------. C' . ;/' (' (' (- (~ (" ( C (- (" (' (' ('-' (-' (' 0 0 (-, <: PROGRAM LOAD (QL) The Program Load screen is the console function which controls the processing unit (PU) initial microcode load (lML) and the system initial program load (lPL). This screen can be invoked automatically from initial power-up or selected from the General Selection screen (Q). The System operates in two modes. One is the System/370 (S/370) emulate mode. The other is the Virtual Storage Extended (VSE) mode and is the normal 4300 mode. The parameters that have been set determine the mode that is invoked automatically at power-up. A function of the Program Load screen is to display the optional parameters. This function is similar to a configuration function because the parameters are changed and the configuration record is updated. The selected parameters are intensified on the screen. From the Program Load screen you can go to the Mode Assist (I) screen, the General Selection (Q) screen, or Return to Programming Systems (Zl screen. *PROGRAM LOAD* VI CS TEST V2 MS DATA V3 MS ADDR V4 SCOPE LP S SAVE STG Y NO CS LD PERFORM IML: M MODE-ASSIST MENU: *MODE* S/370 *ASSISTS* (NONE) PERFORM IPL: P IPL UNIT ADDR: U 191 RESET TYPE: Rl LOAD CLEAR R2 LOAD NORMAL CONSOLE MODE: Nl PTR/KYBD N2 DISPLAY CONSOLE ADDR: TO 01F Tl011 IML AT POWER-ON: Xl YES X2 NO T2 012 H3 DSC COPY KEY: K3 CONSOLE KD DISKETTE KC OOE CHNL PTR STATUS NO IML Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS (~' ('" / ,-,/' (-' (:/ (~\ / (, This screen is used to change the IML MODE and ASSISTS fields on the Program Load screen. The Mode and Assists (if any) that are selected (intensified) are loaded into the processor from the Program Load screen when the PERFORM IML: M function is invoked. System Mode (Wn) The SYSTEM MODE (S/370 or VSE) that is currently selected is intensified on the screen. To change the SYSTEM MODE, key in the corresponding code (W1 or W2) on the SELECTION line after the I. and press ENTER. Certain assists apply to only one system mode, Some assists are not selectable with others. If you attempt to select such mutually exclusive assists, the message INCOMPATIBLE SELECTION appears on the screen. ==> SELECT ION: Assists (On) 4341 1. Key L next to SELECTION. '1 2. Press ENTER. Notes: Any assist currently selected is intensified on the screen. To change the current assist selection, first reset all assists (see "No Assists (R)" description). Then select an Assist by keying the corresponding two digits and pressing ENTER. The assist selected is intensified on the screen. The mode and assist when none is currently specified can be selected in one operation by keying W1 and the two-digit assist code . The Program Load screen displays the state of the last successfullML. • . For more information about program load, see "Program Load (OL)-Parameter Details." (- (' MODEl ASSIST (QLI) To display the Program Load screen from the General Selection screen: • (- *PROGRAM LOAD* Notes: *MODE-ASSIST SELECTION* SYSTEM MODE: WI S/370 W2 VSE The Program Load screen displays the state of the last successful IML. ASS I STS: 01 VMA 02 VSl 03 MVS NO ASS I STS: R LOAD SCREEN: L PERFORM IML: M You must perform an IML to carryover the new Mode and Assist selected for IML. • Assists can not be transferred by the Module Transfer (QFM) screen. • Assists are valid in S/370 mode only. • VMA (01) and MVS (03) Assists combination is valid only when configured with SDK Control storage (Control Store Increment option, Model Group 2 only). Q GENERAL Z SELECT ION: SELECTION RETURN TO PROG SYS I No Assists (R) ==> 4341 This function resets the assists that are currently in effect (intensified). Any assist must be reset before another assist or mode can be selected. To clear an assist, key in R after the I on the SELECTION line and press ENTER. Model Group 2 © IBM Corp. 1981 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379829 28Jun82 PN 2676457 1 of 4 44 195f ( (; -----------, ~""""~""':!~ tt hf ... el:.>. load Screen (l) . Entering L on the SELECTION line returns the display to the Program Load screen. If another screen is displayed from the Mode/ Assist Selection screen, any changes made to the mode and assist fields are lost and the previous settings are loaded when the processor is IMLed. Perform IMl (M) Entering M on the SELECTION line returns the display to the Program Load screen and initiates the microcode. load that was last specified on the Mode/Assist Selection screen. A function of the Program Load screen is displaying the optional parameters. This function is similar to a configuration function because the parameters are changed and the configuration record is updated. The selected parameters are intensified on the screen. Anyone or all of the commands with parameters can occur in any order on the SELECTION line. The following describes the Program Load screen parameters: Perform IML (M) Generai Selection (Q) Keying M next to SELECTION and pressing ENTER IMLs the processor and loads the microcode for the mode selected on the Mode/Assist screen. Entering a Q on the SELECTION line changes the display to the General Selection screen. If this screen is displayed from the Mode/Assist Selection screen, any changes to the mode and assist fields are lost. You must perform an IML to carry over the new mode and assist selected for IML. IML at Power-On (Xn) Return to Prog Sys (Z) ) Reset Type (Rn) Program load (Ql)-Parameter Details Entering a Z on the SELECTION line returns the display to the Operating System (Display or Ptr/Kybd mode) screen. If this screen is displayed from the Mode/Assist Selection screen, any changes to the mode and assist fields are lost. You must perform an IML to carry over the new mode and assist selected for 1M L. ~- Power-on IML can occur only when the support processor is IMLed from a power-off condition, the CE/NORMAL switch is in NORMAL, and Xl has been previously selected. If the first screen is other than the Program Load screen, no automatic IML is performed regardless of the parameter setting. For an automatic power-on IML, key in Xl next to SELECTION. For no automatic Power-On IML, key in X2. The following shows the effect for an IML function. This parameter specifies the type of system reset taken. The reset is the one currently intensified on the screen. The reset type can be changed by entering the appropriate code (Rl or R2) following the SELECTION label and pressing ENTER. Once selected, the load clear (Rl) reset function remains active (intensified) only until a successful IPL is accomplished. A successful IPL or power-off changes the selection back to load normal (R2) reset function. At IPL time, a basic processor and an I/O system reset in the configured channels is performed. As part of the I/O system reset, pending interrupts are cleared, and a system reset is signaled to the I/O control units and devices configured to the channel. The first IML from power-off resets the entire processor. Subsequent IMLs reset everything except the TOO clock. When in VSE mode, and a re-IPL is being done with the RESET-NORMAL selected, there must be enough addressable virtual storage to load and initialize the program/system. If not, the program can be deSigned to detect the program check and issue VSE instructions to obtain more addressable virtual storage. This is required for a stand-alone dump when RESET-NORMAL is selected. If neither of these two options is available, the IPL must be performed with RESET -CLEAR selected. Notes: • If you select IML at power-on, do not perform any other function or press any key until the power-on and IML functions are complete. These functions cannot be aborted because microcode is involved in a very complex sequence. PSW 'PU Timer Clock Comparator Control· Registers General Registers Floating-Point Regs Storage Keys Main Storage TOO Clock (See Note) Channel DLAT Retry Local Store Trap/BAL Local Store Channel Data Buffer Channel Control Trace Control Store Swap Buffer Cache Retry PU DLAT Key Reset Directories Cache C C C I C C C C C C C C I C C C I C C C I I C C = cleared I = set to initial values Note: An IML, other than a power-on IML, resets everything except the TOO clock. The following shows the effect of reset for an IPL function. Clear (Note 1) PSW PU Timer Clock Comparator Control Registers GeneJal Registers Floating-Point Regs Storage Keys Main Storage TOO Clock The setting of this control is effective only when one of the Power On keys has been used. It is not effective if a power-up is selected from the QM screen. Perform IPL (P) C C Program (Note 1) C U I U U U U U(Note 2) U C C C C U Entering P after SELECTION'and pressing ENTER perform the initial program load. U = unchanged C = cleared I = set to initial values IPl Unit Address (Ucuu) Notes: The address must include a hex-digit channel number and a two-digit hex-character device number from which the program is loaded when the perform IPL (P) function is initiated. An example of an entry on the SELECTION line for the IPL device is: U191. 1. A PSW is loaded from the program, and the machine is left in a running state. 2. The virtual addressing tables (VSE mode) are not affected. Model Group 2 PN 2676457 2 of 4 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379829 28Jun82 - () o o o 00000000 o o ,I • 00000 o --~ 0000 44 200f ._------ o 0 000 o c ( (/ c' (' (' o Console Mode (Nn) Copy Key (Kx) Note: You must softstop the machine (press the STOP key) before changing this parameter. The COpy KEY is displayed on the screen to indicate the assignment of the COpy key. The three modes of assignment are: The N command allows the assignment of consoles to either printer/keyboard or display mode. If an N1 command is assigned, all consoles are assigned to the printer / keyboard mode, which provides the channel interface for 1052/3210 type of devices. This mode permits the optional coupling of a display console with a printer as a one-device address. To couple, assign the devices (display and printer) the same console address. Data that is on the display console is automatically printed on the printer when these devices are coupled together. When in printer/keyboard mode (N1), a maximum of two addresses can be assigned regardless of the number of terminals attached. The maximum configuration in printer/keyboard mode is two display consoles coupled with two printers. Any over two display consoles attached to the system must be disconnected (DSC). A printer cannot be assigned a console address without being coupled to a display console. An error message occurs if these restrictions are not observed. If an N2 command is assigned, all consoles are assigned to the display mode, which enables the channel interface for 3270-type of devices. This mode requires each device to have a unique device address - no sharing of addresses. This address has either a T or H device assignment with its accompanying unit number. Note: When changing between Display and Printer/Keyboard modes, key both console mode and address changes as one entry (for example: N1TOO10H3010). Console Address (Tn/Hn) Note: You must softstop the machine (press the STOP key) before making a change to this parameter. A terminal that is attached to the system causes a Tn or Hn to be displayed on the Program Load screen. The "T" designation indicates a display console; an "H" indicates a printer. The number "n" following the T or the H indicates the port to which the device is attached. Each attached terminal may be assigned a unit address if it is to be accessed by the programming system. The unit address must indicate channel zero (first digit is 0), and the unit portion must be an unassigned address on this channel. Notes: Console addresses cannot be assigned with the UCU/Device Directory Update function (QDUU). • • Any terminal may be assigned an address of "DSC" (for disconnected). A terminal that is disconnected has no address and is not available to the programming system. Assignment of terminal addresses depends upon the console mode (display or printer/keyboard). ( ( Invoking Procedures Channel Printer (KC cuu) The Program Load screen highlights the current selection. It displays only those devices physically attached and selected as installed on the System Configuration screen (QFS) or, if a channel-attached device, on the UCW Assignment (QDU) screen. IML Invoke Procedure (M) 1. Key the parameters sequentially (any order) next to SELECTION. Only those which require a change need to be entered. 2. Key M next to SELECTION. Note: This is necessary, to initiate the IML sequence, even if the parameters have not been changed. Warning: For the Diskette IKD) and Channel Printer IKC cuu) options: Before pressing the COpy key, wait until the input data is saved. Input data is saved by pressing the ENTER key after you have altered a screen. If you press the COPY key before the input data is saved, the input data can be lost. To invoke IML from a power-off condition: Note: If there are no errors, all command parameters are examined and executed, followed by an IML of the mode determined by the parameters. IML Invoke Procedure (Automatic) 1. Place CE MODE switch in NORMAL. Fast-Select JML/IPL (MP) 1. Key MP next to SELECTION. Notes: Either M or P may be entered first, but IML always executes before IPL. If P is keyed alone without a prior IML, an error occurs. IML executes with the existing parameter setting. Fast-Select IMLjlPL (Alternate) (QLM) To invoke IML or IPL from any screen: 1. Key QL next to SELECTION followed by any commands and parameters that may be required. 2. Key M or MP next to QL on the SELECTION line. 3. Press ENTER. Notes: All syntax and dependent error conditions are verified and then executed. Notes: When the commands are complete, the system returns to the Program Load screen and awaits further commands. The parameters must have been set during some previous power-up. Support processor powers up. Invoking Conditions Support processor does an SP-IML. Processing unit powers up. Diskette (KD): When the COpy KEY DEVICE is configured for Diskette mode (KD), the current screen is copied onto the diskette when the COpy key is pressed. Processing unit does an IML. Message NO IML, IML IN PROGRESS, IML ERROR, or IML COMPLETE is displayed. The existing status of that screen can be later viewed by using the Saved Screens (QEW) function. Commands are examined for syntax errors (correct parameters) first. Dependent commands are examined next. An error in either place returns control of the Program Load screen to the user. Only after all errors have been corrected are the commands executed. An IML is performed any time M appears on the SELECTION line and there are no errors. IPL Invoke Procedure (P) To invoke IPL from the Program Load screen: 1. Key the parameters sequentially (any order) next to SELECTION. Note: Only those parameters that require a change need to be entered. The Channel Printer (KC cuu) selection is operative when the machine has been IMLed but not IPLed. PreSSing the Paging key while using the Diskette (KD) or Channel Printer (KC cuu) options may require you to press the key twice after using the Copy key function. c c 2. Press POWER ON/IML. For the Channel Printer IKC cuu) option: If the machine has been IPLed, a QCLEAR is required. However, a loss of customer data can result with this selection. Notes: '/ 2. Press ENTER. 3. Press ENTER. is configured for channel printer mode (KC cuu), the current screen is printed by the assigned channel printer when the COpy key is pressed. ( '" ./ To invoke IML from the Program Load screen: Console Printer (Kn): When the COpy KEY DEVICE is configured for console printer mode (Kn), the screen indicates which console unit (not console address) has been assigned to print the hard copy when the COpy key is pressed. If you choose to remove the hard-copy device, key KO on the SELECTION line and, if no other changes, press ENTER. For example, if you want to assign a hard-copy device, key in K3 on the SELECTION line and press ENTER. Channel Printer (KC cuu): When the COPY KEY DEVICE ('~. To invoke IML and IPL from the Program Load screen: Console Printer (Kn) Diskette (KD) c 2. Key P next to SELECTION. Note: Examine the IPL Unit and IPL Reset type and key in any corrections that may-be required. 3. Press ENTER. Screen data can be changed only by way of the SELECTION line. Internal errors (logic or hardware) are indicated by reference codes. If IML or IPL detects an error, a message is displayed, control returns to the program load screen, and more commands can be entered. A SIGP instruction is used to change the console mode or device address in the processing unit, provided the processor is in a softstop state, not running or hardstopped. Notes: • Processing unit executes IPL and displays the message IPL COMPLETE. If P is keyed alone without a prior IML, an error occurs. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379829 28Jun82 PN 2676457 3 of 4 44 205f -----------~--- --- -~.-~----~-------,.-----~---~ --_.---_._---\\." •• ,-"";';,,,,~.~ .",v'~ Patches at IML Verification Tests (Vn) No Control Store Load (V) .coreloads in the processing unit can be Patched after every IML. The patch is accomplished by invoking a Block. This is a feature of the Block screen (OB). For procedures, see "Block Facility." Verification Tests are used only when directed by your Support Structure. At IML time, four tests can be run that ensure the proper operation of the component selected. This command causes the IML routine to skip the actual loading of control storage. The following commands are available and displayed only when the CE MODE switch is ON. The following shows the effect for the No Control Store load function: Valid Arguments/Commands PSW CPU Timer Clock Comparator Control Registers General Registers Floating-Point Regs Storage Keys Main Storage TOD Clock Channel DLAT Retry Local Store Trap/BAL Local Store Channel Data Buffer Channel Control Trace Control Store Swap Buffer Cache Retry PU DLAT Key Reset Directories Cache To set up a patch, enter a block into the system with the Block editing commands. (The Block must not contain 'ODD .. : commands that permanently alter the machine.) Next, place the name beside the coreload to be patched in the IML Patches screen (OBM). From now until the name is removed from the OBM screen for the coreload IMLed, the user is prompted with the question RUN PATCHES (Y /N)? after every successful IML. The status of the invoked block is displayed in the message area on line 20. If an error occurs, control is returned to the Program, Load screen, and the status display is changed to PATCH ERROR. Note: Errors occurring during IML cannot be patched with this method because a patch depends upon a successful IML. Status Messages V V V V 1 - Control store test 2 - Data test of main store 3 - Address test of main store 4 - Scope loop test To exit from any of these commands, press Program Function key 9. Save Storage (S) This selection reduces the resets done during a re-IML if the core load has not changed. Some of the arrays are not reset and main storage is not cleared. The following shows the effect for the Save Storage function: For information about program load status messages, see "Messages. " PSW CPU Timer Clock Comparator Control Registers General Registers Floating-Point Regs Storage Keys Main Storage TOD Clock Channel DLAT Retry Local Store Trap/BAL Local Store Channel Data Buffer Channel Control Trace Control Store Swap Buffer Cache Retry PU DLAT Key Reset Directories Cache C C C I C C C U U C C Return to General Selection Screen (Q) C C C I C C C C U C C C I C C C U C C C I I C To return to the General Selection screen from the Program Load screen: 1. Key 0 next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Return to Prog Sys (Z) To return to Prog Sys from the Program Load screen: 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. U = unchanged C = cleared I = set to initial values C I C C C I U U U U U U U = unchanged C = cleared I = set to initial values Model Group 2 EC 379825 OSJun81 EC 379829 28Jun82 o o o o () 00 o o 000 o o .. ~, 0000 00 o o 00 PN 2676457 4 Of 4 44 210f o o o ':-) , -'!h '~ )! o ( ( ( o ( ( ( S STOP COMPARE/TRACE (GA) *COMPARE/TRACE* The Compare/Trace screen is obtained from any other manual mode screen by entering QA following the SELECTION label and pressing ENTER. The Compare/Trace function provides t-he capability to: o o o *ACTION* Trace selected addresses and I/O operations and place them in an accessible area for later use. H HARD STOP Y SYNC PULSE M MICWD-TRACE B MI CBR-TRACE + ACCUMULATION SW Obtain sync pulses when specified operating conditions 'are encountered. The format of the Compare/Trace screen is different for the 370 and VSE modes in that the screen for 370 provides for specification of virtual or real addresses. *ADDR* *TYPE* N NORMAL S STOP T TRACE-STOP W TRACE-WRAP Stop when certain specified parameters are met. A ANY REFERENCE D DATA STORE I I/O REFERENCE C I NSTR COUNTER o I/O INSTRUCTIONS W CSW'S P PSW SWAPS M MICROWORD L LOCAL STORE-DST S LOCAL STORE-SRC H CHANNEL-SEQ CNT X CHANNEL-DATA SELECTION: MAN *op* 0- & % *V/R* V VIRTUAL R REAL NOTE: (DEFAULT) STOP r-A} QAS, f-D SOME TYPES ACCUMULATE. QAN = RESET. TEST d Storage Address 1-1 ==> I NSTR STOP I-C Control Storage Address Channel Data Address and Data Channel-Data. " The following address parameters are required after the appropriate Action and Type parameters have been selected. b Microword/Microbranch Trace parameters. + Accumulation Switch - n Normal - s Storage Address (Data compare not allowed)Requires a zero to six-digit address within the range of real or virtual storage. d Storage Address (Data compare - optional) Requires a zero to six-digit address within the range of real or virtual storage. t No extra parameters required. No Address - No address required. Allows a full Instruction Counter trace and an address/data compare. This provides the ability to stop a trace at a certain point. Local Storage Address (Data compare not allowed)Requires a three-digit address where: Digit, 1 = Local storage section number (0- 7) Digit 2 = An eight-byte area within the section (O-F) Digit 3 = Always zero. data compare, or trace) following the SELECTION label. 2. Press ENTER. Notes: @ IBM Corp._ 1981 When the machine is stopped because of the stop function, MATCH STOP is displayed on line 21. x 1. Key in the appropriate functions (for address compare, To exit the A-screen, key Q next to SELECTION, and press ENTER. V VIRTUAL R REAL Address Parameters To select a Compare/Trace function: Six fields arB associated with this display: Action, Type, , Addr, Op, Data, and V /R. The function selection under the Action field determines what parameters within the remaining five fields can be selected. FFFF This action parameter compares the address or data compare conditions as specified by the remaining parameter fields. Following a successful-compare, the system executes the current instruction, accepts all pending allowed interrupts, and enters the soft-stop state. - L } - l Local Storage Address L...S 2. Press ENTER. o *V/R* 4341 To select the Compare/Trace screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key A next to SELECTION. 0000- / FFFFFF To fast-select compare/trace functions from other manual mode screens, key QA followed by the desired compare/trace parameters. If the selection is accepted. the current screen remains displayed and the compare/trace parameters are displayed on line 22. However, if the selection is not accepted (such as entry error), the Compare/Trace screen is displayed. To avoid this situation, before using the compare/trace function, press the STOP key. When the WAIT indicator is displayed, wait approximatly 30 seconds, and then select the desired compare/trace function. • *DATA* When this function is selected, ADDR-COMP: STOP appears on line 22. = Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS The Compare/Trace screen is used by specifying one parameter from each field that can be required to perform the function desired: To invoke the function, enter the parameters on the SELECTION and press ENTER. Warning: An. error may occur if a compare/trace function is selected and an I/O program with long CCW strings or large data counts is in progress. If this I/O error condition (overuns, interface control checks) occurs, status data in the CSW and so forth are unpredictable. (- ( ( ( m Control Storage Address (Data compare not allowed) - Requires a zero to six-digit address within the range of control storage on a fullword boundary. o i/o Instruction Trace Address and Op Code section "0 I/O Instructions." w CSW Trace Address - p PSW Trace Type - h Channel Sequence Count Address and Count "H Channel-Seq Cnt." See See See "P PSW Swaps." No extra No extra parameters. Action Parameters Note: Each of the following action parameters show what applicable selections can be made and what address parameter is required to make the selection valid. N NORMAL When this function is selected, the Compare /Trace area is cleared on line 22. This action parameter is used alone to reset any "previously' selected compare/trace functions. Keying N when on the Compare/Trace screen or QAN from any other manual mode screen terminates any compare/trace function, and normal processing continues. T TRACE-STOP When this function is selected, ADDR-COMP: TRST appears on line 22. On a Type C (lnstr Counter) operation, this action' causes the instruction counter addresses to be stored in a trace area until the trace area becomes full (128 addresses). When the machine is stopped because the trace area is full, MATCH STOP (INSTRUCTION STOP if tracing a instruction) is displayed on line 21. Pressing the START key repeats the process. On Type A, 0, and I operations, the instruction counter address is stored only when the compare conditions specified by the remaining parameter fields are met. Processing continues following each compare until the trace area is full. TRACE-STOP QAT_=~T ...-1 Storage Address f-I f-C--t No Address f-L}-l Local Storage Address NORMAL QAN--1 "w CSWs." See "X ~NO L-S Extra Parameters Model Group 2 See EC 379825 OSJun81 PN 2676356 1014 44 2151 ( W TRACE-WRAP H HARD STOP Y SYNC PULSE B MICBR-TRACE When this function is selected, ADDR-COMP: TRWR appears on line 22. The hard-stop function can only be selected when the CE MODE is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP: H-ST is displayed on line 22. The sync pu1se function can only be selected when .the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP: SYNC is displayed on line 22. The microbranch trace function can only be selected when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, ADOR-COMP: MBTR appears on line 22. Following a successful compare, the current microword is completed, and no additional microwords are executed. (Refresh clocks continue to run.) MATCH-STOP appears on line 21. Hard stop is implied when CSAR is displayed on line Following a successful compare. the system generates a sync signal. This sync signal can be monitored at A2J4G03. The system does not stop. In this mode, the CSARBU trace array contains the address of the last 32 targets of microwords that caused a modular switch.· The addresses can be monitored by displaying this array by the Insert/Extra~ function QVAB. On a Type C (lnstr Counter) operation, this action causes the instruction counter addresses to be stored into the trace area. When the trace area becomes full, additional addresses are stored, and the oldest are dropped so that the trace area always contains the 128 most recent addresses. On Type A. D, and I operations, the instruction counter address is stored in the trace area only when the compare conditions specified by the remaining parameter fields are met. Processing continues following each compare. 21. • The microword that caused the match is at the control storage address last entered into the trace array (aVAB). This address is the one logically preceding the address. displayed in line 21. For an I-counter type match, a hard stop occurs before the instruction is executed. TRACE-WRAP D-+--d Storage Address . I/O Instruction Trace 1-1 CSW Trace f-C S ~t s Storage Address . Control Storage Address f-H--h Channel Sequence Count --X-x Channel Data Address < Warning: Some problems may occur when stopping on a MICROWORD. They occur when the MATCH-STOP interrupts communications between the SP and PU via the LCA. This can be recognized by the error message SP/PU COMMUNICATION FAILURE or CHANNEL 0 UNAVAILABLE. No Extra Parameters No Address --X--x Channe I Data Address f-L}- I Local Storage Address f-S Local Storage Address QAB~ ~b QAy--t=:}-d Storage Address f-H--h Channe I Sequence Count ~ - - p PSW Trace L}- I r-A} 1-0 C - t No Address MI CBR-TRACE f-L}- I Local Storage Address f-S HARD STOP Q.AH SYNC PULSE M MICWD-TRACE ThE! microword-trace function can only be selected when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP: MWTA appears on line 22. For each microword execution, the address, derived from the CSAR and the CSARBU, is stored into the CSARBU trace array after the array index has been incremented by 1. In this mode, the array contains the addresses of the last 32 microwords executed. The microword addresses can be monitored by displaying this array by the Insert/Extract function aVAB. The MICWD-trace function is the normal reset condition. That is, when the N-Normal action is selected, the MICWD-trace action is highlighted and is in effect although not displayed on line 22. + ACCUMULATION SW This selection, acts as a switch. YVhen selected and ACCUMULATION is on, the message SOME TYPES ACCUMULATE. QAN RESET ALL. appears on the screen. The next time it is selected. the message is erased. Once on, the mode is remembered even if the compare/trace screen is not being used. The mode applies to two basic areas of the Compare/Trace function: (1) type field selections for normal matches (storage, local storage. control storage. channel), and (2) the 10/CSW/PSW traces. Selections within these areas are. accumulative. ACCUMULATI ON SW QA+~ ~+ No Extra Parameters To recover: .If the screen displays MATCH-STOP: 1. Enter QAN to clear the address compare condition. 2. Press START to leave the CLOCK-STOP state. 3. Press the SP reset button• MI CWO-TRACE QA~ ~b No Extra Parameters • If the screen displays INSTR-STOP: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter QOM to stop the PU. Enter QAN to clear the address compare condition. Enter QON. Press START to leave the CLOCK-STOP state. Press the SP reset button. Model Group 2 If control is regained you can continuft; however, avold selecting a stop address that is in the I/O Input Set-up Trap. If the 8~ve procedures do notal/ow you to regain control, power down and then back up. EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676356 .L.. :) 0 o o 0 () 0 o o o 0'0 o 0,0 0 000 o o o o o o o 20f4, 442201 00 0' 0 c ( ... (' ( ( ( Accumulate Mode Nonaccumulate Mode D DATA STORE The following matrix shows which ACTION/TYPE combinations are reset or kept when a new ADDRESS/COMPARE selection is made. The letters (lowercase) are the address letters described in the section "Address Parameters". The following matrix shows which ACTION /TYPE combinations are reset or kept when a new ADDRESS/COMPARE selection is made. The letters (lowercase) are the address letters described in the s8ction "Address Parameters." When this function is selected, TYPE: D-STORE appears on line 22. . Note: If the same I/O operation is wanted on a/l or some of the channels, the selection must be made in accumulate mode the appropriate amount of times. P PSW SWAPS. Storage addresses of the same type cause a reset. I/O addresses of the same type do not cause a reset. Action and Type fields mayor may not reset depending on the restrictions listed below. Note: Even in nonaccumulate mode, four areas of compare/trace function may be accumulative; that is, selectio19s made in one area do not cause resets of the other areas. They are: This parameter causes the address, or both address and data, specified by the remaining parameter fields (Op, Data) to be compared to the storage address or address and data whenever a machine store (write) function occurs. Note: The following restrictions prevent the associated selections from accumulating. You are limited to: • Instruction trace (wrap or stop) • I/O, CSW, or PSW trace • Normal matching or data comparing. • Microword or branch tracing (CE only).. • A control storage address and a local storage address along with one real storage address or virtual storage address. • One data compare value. • A Trace-Stop or Trace-Wrap value, not both. • One C.. or CUU selection for each I/O Instruction Trace or CSW Trace channel. A Microword-Trace or Microbranch Trace, not both. • A Channel Sequence Count or Channel Data selection, not both. ( ( I I/O REFERENCE When this function is selected, TYPE: 10-REF appears on line 22. This parameter causes the transfer of data to and from I/O devices to be compared to the address and data specified by the remaining parameter fields. Note: For parameters A, D, and I. The address specified in the command is always converted to the next lowest doubleword (8 byte) boundary because the machine accesses eight bytes of storage simultaneouly. A compare occurs, if the address specified in a storage operation is anywhere within this doub/eword. NONACCUMULATE MDDE OLD Sett Ing One I/O (or ALL) mnemonics for each I/O Instruction Trace channel. • ( C INSTR COUNTER ldIR;R:R:K;R:R;K:K;K:R:R:K:K -------------------------------------------------------- When this function is selected, TYPE: I-CNTR appears on line 22. NltIR:K:K:R:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K SlmIR:R:R:K:R:R:K:K:K:R:R:K:K e -------------------------------------------------------- When used in conjunction with the S (Stop) function, this parameter compares the instruction counter with the address entered in the address field. When used with either trace function (T or W), the address cannot be specified. n g-----~-------------------------------------------------lpIR:K:K:K:K:K:R:R:R:K:K:K:K The result of a QATC or QAWC operation is displayed with the QDTt function. E ----------------------------------------.--------------WIIIR:R:R:K:R:R:K:K:K:R:R:K:K ACCUMULATE MODE OLD Setting I d" I R : K I K : K : K : K : K : K : K tloIR:K:K:K:K:K:R:R:R:K:K:K:K tilwIR:K:K:K:K:K:R:R:R:K:K:K:K -------------------------------------------------------- ~ K : K : K : K NltIR:K:K:R:K:K:KlK:K:KIK:K;K I " I I x I I b I R : R· : R : K : R : R : K : K : K : R : R : K : K R : R : R :.K : R : R : K : K : K : R : R : K : K R. : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : 1<. : R : K SlmIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:KlKlK:K:K -------------------------------------------------------~R IKIK'KIKiKIKIKIKIKIKIKIR :-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-: R = Reset e -------------------------------------------------------- M = Microword Trace E -------------------------------------------------------WllIR:K:K:K:K:K:KlK:K:KlK:KlK • • I I • I I I I I • I . K tloIR:K:K:K:K:KlKlK:K:K:K:K:K = Keep t -------------------------------------------------------f I w I R : K .: K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K n -------------------------------------------------------glpIR:K:K:K:K:KlK:K:K:K:K:K:K IhIR;K;K:K:KlKlKlKlK:RlR:KlK Type Parameters IxIR;K:K:K:KIK;K:KlK;R:RlK;K IbIR:K:KlKIK;K:K;K:K:KIK:RlK \..:.1.!...R II K II K II K II K II K If K II K II K II K II K II K II R :-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-: R = Re5et K = Keep M = Microword Trace A ANY REFERENCE When this function is selected, TYPE: ANYREF appears on line 22. This parameter causes the address, or both address and data, specified by the remaining parameter fields to be compared to the storage address or address and data whenever storage is accessed by the machine. o I/O INSTRUCTIONS' The O-type function is used with the Trace-Wrap action (W). The I/O instruction trace address and op code is placed in a 4Kb block of auxiliary storage that can be displayed with the QDTP function. ( (' (~ ( The P-type function is used with the Trace-Wrap action (W). The PSW trace type is placed in a 4Kb block of auxiliary storage that can be displayed with the QDTP function. The selection format for this function is: Type Condition b I M P S E L V All interrupts I/O PSW swaps Machine check Program check Supervisor call External interrupt Load PSW VM-assisted load PSW, SVC, or program checks where: b" Blank W CSWs The W-type function is used with the Trace-Wrap action (WI. The CSW trace is placed in a 4Kb block of auxiliary storage that can be displayed with the QDTP function. The selection format for this function is: Address Condition bbb c.. cuu All channels, all devices Specific channel, all· devices Specific device where: b Blank .. Don't care character cuu = Channel and unit address The selection format for this function is: Address Condition bbb bbb c.. bbb· c .. iii cuu bbb cuu iii All channels, all devices, all operations Specific channel, all devices, all operations Specific channel, all device, specific operation Specific device, all operations Specific device, specific operation where: .. b .. cuu .. iii Blank Don't care character Channel and unit address Valid I/O operation mnemonic C/O .. Clear I/O HDV .. Halt Device SIO .. Start I/O TIO .. Test I/O HIO .. Halt I/O TCH Test channel Note: Only CSWs stored as a result of an I/O interrupt are traced with this option. CSWs stored from an I/O instruction are only traced if the I/O instruction trace is active. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 .J PN 2676356 30f4 44 225f ( ~---.-~- . -- ... ---.-.-~.-.-.- .-~-~.-.-- - - . - .. -~~- --.-._. __. _ - - - M MICROWORD X CHANNEL-DATA OP Field DATA Field The microword-type function can. be selected only when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: MICWRD appears on line 22. . The channel data function can be selected only when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: CH-DAT appears on line 22. This field is used for address type or data compare operations. This field specifies up to two bytes of data to be compared at the address specified in the ADDR field. Any hexadecimal digit or digits comprising' the two- byte data compare field can be ignored by entering a period (.),as a "don't care" c\:1aracter. The control storage address backup (CSARBU) contains the address of the microword currently being executed. The . address specified in the ADDR field is loaded into the control storage address match register. When the CSARBU register and the CS address match register compare, a signal indicates a control storage match. If a hard-stop action is selected and a match occurs, MATCH STOP appears on line 21. The match address appears in line 21 opposite the CSAR label. The S (Stop) selection is also allowed. This function provides a hard stop or a sync pulse on a specific byte of channel data by specifying the channel number and byte of data. The type must follow the format: cdd where: c = Channel number dd = One byte of hex data In VSE (NORM only) mode, if data is not to be specified in the DATA field, the OP field is not used., ADDR Field In 370 and VSE (CE only) mode, if data is not to be specified in the DATA field, enter a V or R in the OP field to indicate whether the previous address specified in the ADDR field is a virtual or real storage address. If V or R is not specified, a default is assumed based on the mode selected. L LOCAL STORE-DST The local store-destination function can be selected only when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: LS-DES appears on line 22. The destination address specified in the ADDR field is loaded into the local storage address match register. When this register compares with the local storage address register, and data is written in that local storage element, a signal indicates a local store-destination address match. If a'stop action is selected and a match occurs, MATCH STOP appears on iine 21. The match address appears on line 22. o-FFFFFF The address field is displayed on line 22 provided a data compare operation is not in process. This field is used to enter the search address for all compare/trace functions. The characteristics for the address specified are: The field equal (=) option compares up to four hexadecimal digits (two bytes) of data specified in the DATA field for an equal condition. • The search address can be up to a six-digit hexadecimal number. The field not-equal (I) option compares up to four hexadecimal digits (two bytes) of data specified in the DATA field for a not-equal condition. • The maximum address value must be less than the machine capability. Five maximum values are checked: physical real main storage, custOmer accessible real main storage, virtual main storage, control storage, and local storage. • S LOCAL STORE-SRC The address specified in the command is always converted to the next lowest doubleword (8 byte) boundary because the machine accesses eight bytes of storage simultaneouly. A compare occurs, if the address specified in a storage operation is anywhere within this doubleword. The local store-source function can be selected only when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: LS-SRC appears on line 22. The source address specified in the ADDR field is loaded into the local storage address match register. When this register compares with the local storage address register and data is read in that local storage element, a signal indicates a local storage source address match. The bit equal (&) option compares all of the bits of the data specified in the DATA field for an equal (on) condition. The bit not-equal (%) option compares any of the bits of the data specified in the DATA field for a not-equal (off) condition. For .bit compare operations (& or % in OP field), only the bits that are on to comprise each he1(adecimal digit are tested for an equal (on) or not-equal (off) condition. For example, if the data compare field contained the digit "3" (bits - 0011), all digits containing the last two bits equal to "1" (such as 7, bits == 0111) compare equal. All other digits compare on a not-equal operation. . Note: The following restrictions apply to data compare operations. Data compare operations beginning on the last byte of a 2K page are not allowed. • On Type A, D, and I operations, missing a data compare is possible if sequential instructions change the same two, bytes of storage. • If a Clear Reset (see General Selection Screen) is performed while a trace or a stoP-Qn-main-storage data compare (nonzero) function is in effect, a false match stop occurs. • Data Contents Compare is performed by microcode and allows compares down to the halfword or bit. However, because the basic match hardware stops if a reference ill made to a daubleword, the deta in the target eddress may not actually have been referenced. V /R Field (370 Mode only) This field is used only in 370 or CE mode when the DATA field is specified to indicate whether the address contained in the ADDR field is a virtual (V) or real (R) address. Example: Main storage must be 2080 not 208 for 2080-7. Local storage must be 3FO not 3F for 3FO-7. If a stop action is selected and a match occurs, MATCH STOP appears on line 21. The match address appears on line 22. Addr Entered ASA4 ASA403 ASA2545E ASAFSFF=FFFF ASM4224 ASM000913 ASL224 H CHANNEL-SEQ CNT The channel sequence count function can be selected only . when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: CH-$EQ appears on line 22. This function provides a hard stop or a sync pulse when the channel reaches a given point of operation by specifying a channel number and a two-digit sequence count code. The tyPe must follow the format: cnn where: c . == Channel number nn = Sequence count In VSE or 370 mode, this field is used when compare data is to be specified in addition to an address. The options are to compare the data specified in the DATA field for, an equal or not-equal condition on any Type A, D, and I operations. On Type C operations, data can be compared only when using the STOP function. Data compare is not allowed on a Type C operation for trace-stop (T) and trace-wrap (W) functions. * Line 22 Display Contents of Match Regs 00000o 00000o 000400 000400 02545S FFFFEQ 004224 000910 000220 025458 ooF8FS** 004224 000910 000220 Max Addr FFFFFF* FFFFFF* FFFFFF* FFFFFF* ooFFFF* ooFFFF* oo7FS For real addresses, this address must be what is physically installed. ** In addition to the .hardware match register, microcode compares the two bytes starting at address FSj:F. . Model Group 2 ' EC 379826 05Jun81 PN 2676366 44 230f 40f4 ,c.) ",-' 0':'. ,~ \;l.--'I ~ 000 o 00 o ~' rO' o 000 o O~O 0"", 0 0 0 , , o O ,, r , , rO' <4.... o 00 o o ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( c ~!IIIIIII!I!!I"l 000 ( CHECK CONTROL (QK) The Check Control screen enables selecting the action to be taken by the PU when an interrupt occurs because of a machine check. MACHINE CHECK is indicated on line 21. Functions N, S, R, and D are mutually exclusive; functions C and H are independent. In CE mode, an additional selection list allows the service representative to halt SP functions that may interfere with testing and debugging. If one of the functions has been fast-selected, the current screen remains displayed with the last command entered redisplayed on the SELECTION line in a fast-select format. If any of the high-level checkers are turned on by a malfunction, an error latch is set, and the processor clock is stopped. The support processor continually monitors the status of the processor. Whenever the clock is stopped, the support processor posts a machine check and examines the check latches and other facilities to determine if the instruction is retriable. If the instruction is retriable, the support processor retries and then logs the machine check to the disk. If the retry is successful. the log counters are updated and processing continues. If the retry is unsuccessful or the instruction is unretriable, the support processor posts check stop on the screen. After the analysis is completed, the support processor invokes the proper routines to generate a reference code, and the system remains in the check-stop state. At this time, the reference code is posted both on the disk and on the screen. ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (' ( Check Control -- Fast-Selection "SP CONTROLS" "CHECK CONTROL" P ALL POLLING YES I ICNTR POLL ING YES NO NO L SP LOGS F REF CODES U PU LOGS YES YES YES NO NO NO E STOP WORD CKS M ELA-UNRECV MC o ELA-LOG DISPL YES YES YES NO NO NO V EMC ABC LOGS YES W EMC D LOGS YES NO NO N NORMAL 1. Key in letters in sequential order for the function desired following the SELECTION label. S HARD STOP Function R NO RETRY D DISABLE C STOP AFTER LOG-SWITCH H CHANNEL CHECKS-SWITCH N S R D C H (Normal) (Hardstop) (No Retry) (Disable) (Stop After Log Switch) (Channel Checks Switch) Entry Sequence QKN OKS QKR QKD QKC QKH SP Controls Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: To fast-select a check-control function: ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Function P I L F U E M (All Polling) (lCNTR Polling) (SP Logs) (Ref Codes) (PU Logs) (Stop Word Cks) (ELA Unrecv MC) o (ELA-Log Displ) V (EMC ABC Logs) W (EMC D Log) Entry Sequence QKP QKI QKL QKF QKU QKE QKM QKO QKV QKW 2. Press ENTER. The Check Control screen remains displayed if you enter a command on the SELECTION line and it has a successful completion. If you are on a screen other than Check Control, and you enter a Check Control command on the SELECTION line and it has a successful completion, a new screen is not displayed. The Check Control screen is displayed if the command is unsuccessful. Warning: An error may occur if a Check Control function is selected and an I/O program with long CCW strings or large data counts is in progress. If this I/O error condition (overuns, interface control checks) occurs, status data in the CSWand so forth are unpredictable. To avoid this situation, before using the Check Control function, press the STOP key. When the WAIT indicator is displayed, wait approximately 30 seconds, and then select the desired compare/trace function. To select the Check Control screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key K next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Check Control screen is displayed. To select a Check Control function: 1. Key in the desired function next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Check Control screen is displayed. Model Group 2 EC 379825 OSJun81 EC 379827 020ct81 C IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676459 10f2 44 235f SP Controls E STOP WORD CKS Note: These switches (states) must be set back to the YES. state after using (debugging). This CE-only function enables or disables the SP from going into a check-stop state when a PU stop word is executed. YES allows the check stop; NO does not allow a check stop. P ALL POLLING This CE-only function enables or disables all polling by the SP control program. This includes rings 20 and 23, CSAR polling, I-counter polling, and all other line 21 activity. Other SP programs that required pOlling for information on the state of the PU may not run normally if the PU is halted. I ICNTR POLLING This CE-only function enables or disables the I-counter polling which uses the SIGP ,(LCA interface) instruction. L SP LOGS This CE-only function enables or disables storing of SP logs on the disk. F REF CODES Check Controls H CHANNEL CHECKS-SWITCH With this switch on, an error detected in the channel hardware causes· machine check. Based on the retry setting, a machine check is posted. a N NORMAL The N (normal) function clears the check control area on line 22 of the display; or displays CHK: NORM-H if channel-checks hardware error stop is selected. The Channel Checks switch is alternately set and reset each time that the H-option is entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER key is pressed. When the switch is on, a -H is displayed following the Check Control indicator on a line 22. When on, the Channel Checks switch is active in all modes. This function does not alter the C (Stop after Log) or H (Channel Checks) switch setting. The following conditions cause a machine check if QKH is active. The system determines the handling of machine checks. M ELA-UNRECV MC This CE-only function enables or disables ELA execution whenever you have an unrecoverable machine check. o ELA-LOG DISPL This CE-only function enables or disables an attempt to update the PU error logging if you had a disk error. V EMC ABC LOGS This CE-only function enables or disables Electromagnetic Charge (EMC) logging for the A, B, and C latches. W EMC D LOGS This CE-only function enables or disables Electromagnetic Charge (EMC) logging for the D latch. This CE-only function enables or disables storing of reference codes on the disk. A program check that is detected by the hardware while the hardware is processing data after the CCW has been determined to be correct. S HARDSTOP The system enters the check-stop state when a machine-check.condition appears. When this option (OKS) is selected, the processor enters the stop state immediately when an error latch is set. No retry is permitted, and no reference code is generated. CHK: HDST is indicated on line 22 of the system console. • A protect check that is detected by the hardware while the hardware is· processing data after the CCW has been determined to be correct. • A chaining check that is detected when the hardware accepts more data than has been requested during data chaining. After a OKS stop, a reset (OKN) and a pressing of the START key resume normal operations. The machine-check condition is logged. Bad parity during output that is detected in the eight-byte channel data register after the move from storage. • R NO RETRY PU retry is inhibited when a machine check appears. CHKC: NRTY appears on line 22. Logging occurs normally. U PU LOGS This CE-only function enables or disables storing of PU logs on the disk. Bad parity during output that is detected in the two-byte channel-out register after the move from the channel data buffer. Bad parity during output that is put on the data-out lines after the move from the channel-out register. D DISABLE Q This option prevents the system from entering the check-stop state by inhibiting the error handling function. It also inhibits clock stop. The PU ignores all conditions that normally cause machine checks and attempts to continue processing without a retry. CHK:DSBL appears on line 22 of the system console. The clock/timer checks are not set because they affect the TOD clock. An invalid TOD setting would have to be corrected by the Extract function. Note: For a stop caused by a unrecoverable error, the system appears as though it had a OKS hardstop. GENERAL SELECTION The General Selection screen reappears on the system console. Z RETURN TO PROG SYS Releases manual operation controls within the support processor and returns the display console to the operating system. C STOP AFTER LOG-SWITCH If programs written for the System/360 are used on the 4341, an error log can overlay either instructions or data. The Stop After Log switch is used to avoid this by stopping the system after logging takes place. In this mode, the retry mechanism to correct errors is still available, but erroneous program execution because of logging is avoided. The Stop After Log switch is alternately set and reset each time that the C-option is entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER key is pressed. When the switch is on, a -C is displayed following the Check Control indicator on line 22. When on, the Stop After Log switch is active in all modes. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020ctS1 '------_._- ~) o o o 000 000 o o () o o () o 0 o o o 0 o o PN 2676459 44 2401 20f 2 000 o o o 0 1 f ( ( ( ( ( o ( OPERATION RATE CONTROL (QO) *OPERATION RAT~ CONTROL. ( ( ( « ( ( To fast-select an operation rate function: N NQRMAL . 1. Key in letters in sequential order for the function desired. 2. Press ENTER. I INSTRUCTION STEP Function M MICROWORD STEP N I M C P R C CLOCK CYCLE STEP Warning: Main storage is unpredictable with the use of Clock Cycle or Clock Pulse Step. However; a loss of customer data can result with these selections. P CLOCK PULSE STEP To select the Operation Rate Control screen from the General Selection screen: R REPEAT MICROWORD-SWITCH 1. Key 0 next to SELECTION. Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS 2. Press ENTER. 1. Key in the desired function following the SELECTION label. ( Operation Rate -- Fast-Selection The Operation Rate Control screen allows you to control the rate the PU executes an instruction. The selected operation rate is displayed on line 22. If one of the functions has been fast-selected, the current screen remains and the last command entered is redisplayed on the SELECTION line in a fast-select format. Functions N, I, M, C, and P are mutually exclusive. To select an operation rate control function from the O-screen: ( SELECTION: Entry Sequence (Normal) (Instruction Step) (Microword Step) (Clock Cycle Step) (Clock Pulse Step) (Repeat Microword-Switch) OON 001 OOM OOC OOP OOR ==> INSTR STOP 4341 2. Press ENTER. The function is now set, and an instruction is executed at the rate selected each time the START key is pressed. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 o IBM Corp. 1981 . PN 2676358 1 of 2 442451 Operation Rate Controls N NORMAL P CLOCK PULSE STEP Z RETURN TO PROG SYS After START has been pressed, the PU executes instructions at the normal machine speed. This function also clears the I, M, P, or C rate selection on line 22. The CE MODE switch must be on to perform this function. This function releases manual operation controls within the processor and. returns the display console to the operating system. This function does not alter the R (Repeat Microword-Switch) selection. RATE: N-REPM appears on line 22 if the R function has not been reset. The PU executes on clock pulse each time the START key is pressed, and then enters the hard-stop state. If the function is selected while the system is operating at normal speed, the system clock-cycle stops and then goes into clock pulse step. RATE: P-STEP appears on line 22. You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function. I INSTRUCTION STEP The PU executes one instruction each time the START key is pressed. The system accepts all pending allowed interrupts, and then returns to the stopped state. The STOP key and the I-function soft stop the system (no I-step, but the PU clock continues to run). If another function is selected, such as display/alter, it is accepted, and instruction step remains in effect. Changes in data can be seen on the display console as each instruction step is completed. Line 21 shows the address and the data at this address. RATE: I-STEP appears on line 22. M MICROWORD STEP The CE MODE switch must be on to perform this function. The PU executes one microword each time the START key is pressed, and then enters the hard-stop state. If the microword function is selected while the system is operating at normal speed, the system executes the current microword (PU clock stopped), and then goes into the hard-stop state. RATE: M-STEP appears on line 22. Restriction: The clock-pulse step function does not operate on a storage word. R REPEAT MICROWORD-SWITCH The CE MODE' switch must be on to perform this function. The PU must be placed in a hard-stop state before invoking this function. Stop the PU clock with the aOM function, for example. The PU executes the selected microword repeatedly after the START key is pressed. When the repeat microword function is on, RATE: f-REPM appears on line 22 (where "f" represents the rate function). When the function is off, RATE: f-STEP appears on line 22, except when the rate is normal. A desired microword loop can be selected two ways: 1. Hardstop on the word before the desired loop word by keying aOR. Set the desired operation rate and continue, or 2. Key in aVGxxxxx with the address of the desired loop word, and then key aOR. Set the desired operation rate and continue. You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function. C .CLOCK CYCLE STEP You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function. The CE MODE switch must be on to perform this fUnction. To reset this function: The PU executes one clock cycle each time the START key is pressed, then enters the hard-stop state. If the function is .selected while the system is operating at normal speed, the system executes the current clock cycle, and then goes into the hard-stop state. RATE: C-STEP appears on line 22. You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function. Restriction: The clock-cycle step function does not operate on a storage word. 1. Key in R. 2. Press ENTER . Q GENERAL SELECTION The General Selection screen reappears on the display console. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 - :) 0 ,j () 0 () 0 0 -- . 0 0 0 () 0 0.00· -. 0 0 0 00 0 . a PN 2676358 2 'of 2 44 250f ----- 0 '0"0' 0"0 0 0 0 -- ( (~ ( ~ c' ----~------- (' (~ -------- , (- -~------- ( ( ----~~'" ( (' ------- ( (' (" c (:~- ( (' ( (-~ (' ,.,' (~ (" (' ( (~ (' ( DISPLAYI ALTER SCREENS DISPLAY/ALTER (D-SCREEN) The display I alter function lists a menu that can be invoked by selecting the D-screen. Most display I alter functions use the local channel adapter to transfer data to and from the hardware. Because most display I alter functions use the LeA, the machine must not be hard-stopped for most of the display I alter code to run. The function list is redisplayed each time a new function is selected. As a result, the output area is cleared for the next function. Selections S, A. U, LX, W, and D are not selectable on the customer screen. The two ways to select a screen are: key a character next to the character on the SELECTION line (a subscreen is called up), or key a and the facility or facility with its subscreen. For example, aDL bypasses the General Selection and bypasses the Display I Alter screen and displays the Local Storage subscreen. The alter function and the display screens are much the same. The full-screen data can be changed by using the cursor and rekeying data, but the characters on the SELECTION line must be unchanged. In full-screen altering, blanks, hex zeroes, and periods are "don't care" characters. For Fast Select Alter, the period is a "don't care" charader. The hex zeroes and blanks are compressed out (deleted) from the SELECTION line when fast altering. On a full-screen alter, the cursor moves to the first data position if an invalid character is entered. On Fast Alter, the cursor moves to the right of the op code if an invalid character is entered. Any invalid character prevents an alter operation (full screen or Fast Select). *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: ==> I NSTR STOP 4341 DISPLAY/ALTER D-SCREEN (QD) Most displays and alters can be performed by two means: screen select and fast-screen select. To select the Display I Alter screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key in D following the SELECTION label. 2. Press ENTER. The display I alter image appears on the screen and the program stops. The items listed on the screen show those areas of the system that can be displayed and altered. You can now select one of the set. After you have chosen a display I alter function, the display I alter image remains on the k:lft portion of the screen, and the selected facility appears on the right portion. ' EC 376695 16Aug79 EC 379598 15Apr80 @ IBM Corp. 1979 PN 5666369 101-2 44255 (' (" .TRANSLATION The translate function is applicable to many of the display / alter functions. If you select the translate option, all full-screen input areas are eliminated (alter is inhibited), and the function is in translate mode. You may now page the data and it stays in translate mode. A command from the SElECTION line without the translate op code restores the screen input areas and allows full-screen alters. To use the Translate op code, which converts hexadecimal to EBCDIC character format: 1. Key the D / A function and parameters (if any) plus T. 2. Press ENTER. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL RE.G ISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: L100T *10 *12 *14 *16 LOCAL STORAGE 2 4 6 0 2 4 , F5F9 F2F0 F0Fl F5F4 *11 F0F3 F8Fl F5F5 F5F3 5 9 2 0 0 1 5 4 0 3 8 1 5 5 5 3 F0F0 F0F4 F1F7 F7F9 *13 F5F7 F1Fl F9Fl F0F6 o0 0 4 17 79 5 7 1 1 9 1 0 6 FAF0 F3F4 F4F0 F9F5 *15 F2F5 F7F0 F0F0 F0F0 034409525000000 F0F3 F4F4 F0F4 F1F7 *17 F3F0 F0F6 F0F0 F1F0 o3 44 04 17 3 0 0 6 0 0 10 o *18 F1F0 10 *IA F0F0 o0 *IC 4040 F0F0 0 0 F0F0 0 0 4040 F0F0 0 0 F0F0 0 0 4040 F0F0 0 0 F0F0 0 0 4040 *IE F3F3 F2F3 F4F3 F5F3 3 3 2 3 4 3 5 3 ==> *19 F0F0 o0 *IB F0F0 o0 *10 4040 F0F0 0 0 F0F0 0 0 4040 F0F0 0 0 F0F0 0 0 4040 F0F0 0 0 F0F0 0 0 4040 *IF F6F3 F7F3 F9F3 F3F3 6 3 7 3 9 3 3 3 INSTR STOP 4341 DISPLAYfALTER HEX CALCULATOR (00-) - -,. The hex calculator function converts two hex addresses arithmetically to one hex address. One address can be added or _subtracted with another. This function uses two oparands '"---,0-:-6 digits) and can be defaulted to 000000. Both operands remain a constant unless a new operand is rekeyed. The only op codes are (+) and H. Plus (+) adds the second operand to the first operand. Minus H subtracts the second from the first. An example is shown on the hex calculator function. The result is displayed next to the message indicator. Display Hex Calculator To display the hex calculator. function from any D-screen: 1. Key aD= next to SELECTION followed by: (a) operand one (if any) (b) op code (if any) (c) operand two (if any) 2. Press ENTER. Notes: Fast-Selection Hexadecimal Calculations *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: = 777342 + 2BCE The operands and result are displayed next to the message indicator. The hexadecimal calculator is a normal function of the Display / Alter (D) screen. However, hexadecimal calculations may be made from any other manual mode screen by keying aD= followed by the problem (no spaces between characters) and pressing ENTER. The same screen remains displayed and the calculation result is shown to the right of the SELECTION entry. If an entry error is made, INVALID INPUT is displayed and the cursor is positioned under the first invalid character encountered. The same screen remains displayed . ==> 779F10 = 777342 + 002BCE 4341 The hex calculator function can be fast-selected from any screen and that screen remains. • By keying QD=, the last calculation is restored on the SELECTION line. • Each operand is retained until it is replaced; thus, either can be used as a constant. EC 376695 16Aug79 EC 379598 15AprSO PN 5666369 20f2 ---- 3000000000 o 00000 o o 44260 - 00 000 0000 o :0' 0 0 (' ( c' ( ( DISPLAYfALTER GENERAL REGISTERS (ODG) Fast Alter General Registers ( ( DISPLAYf ALTER CONTROL REGISTER (ODC) ODC rb op data. Key next to SELECTION as follows: 1. ODG selects the General Register screen. To select the general register function from the D-screen: 2. Key the register number (r) plus byte number (b) in hexadecimal. 1. Key G plus the register number and register byte number next to SELECTION. The register values are O-F (hex); the byte values are 0-3 (hex). Both may be defaulted to Display Control Registers Key next to SELECTION as follows: To select the control register function from the D-screen: 1. ODC selects the Control Register screen. 1. Key C plus the register number and register byte number 2. Key the register number (r) plus byte number (b) in where: 2. Press ENTER. Sixteen general registers of four bytes each are displayed. Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. &. Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. Alter General Registers 1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above. / 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 3. Key in the op code: where: 2. Press ENTER. Sixteen control registers of four bytes each Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. are displayed. Alter Control Registers &. Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above. / Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 2. Move the cursor to the location(sl to be altered and key in the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. 4. Key data. 4. Key data. 5. Press ENTER. 5. Press ENTER. Notes: Notes: • Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • An invalid character prevents the alter function. • The Translate option is applicable to the General Register display. • The paging keys are not applicable to this screen. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: G00 hexadecimal. next to SELECTION. The register values are O-F (hex); the byte values are 0-3 (hex). Both may be defaulted to zero. 3. Key in the op code: zero. Save General Registers All data in the general registers can be saved by the Block function. The byte character is ignored for a save function. An example of how you can save the general register data is QDGrb? GENERAL REGISTERS 0 0002 70B0 1 3BCE 5A40 2 0035 3A04 3 5A40 0020 4 2CEA 5A40 5 002E 2CEA 6 6200 0040 7 5A01 0800 8 0000 7006 9 2CEA A800 A 2EBE 3AB0 B 3AB5 0000 C 0002 3B04 0 5A01 0100 E 0000 7006 F 2CEA A800 ==> INSTR STOP 4341 • Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • An invalid character prevents the alter function. Save Control Registers The Translate option is applicable to the Control Register display. • The paging keys are not applicable to this screen. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: C00 All data in the control registers can be saved by the Block function. The byte character is ignored for a save function. An example of how you can save the control register data is ODCrb? CONTROL REGISTERS 0 0002 70B0 1 3BCE 5A40 2 0035 3A04 3 5A40 0020 4 2CEA 5A40 5 002E 2CEA 6 6200 0040 7 5A01 0800 8 0000 7006 9 A 2CEA A800 2EBE 3AB0 B 3AB5 0000 C 0002 3604 0 5A01 0100 E 0000 7006 F 2CEA A800 ==> INSTR STOP 4341 EC 37669516Aug79 EC 379598 15Apr80 @ IBM Corp. 1979 (- ( Fast Alter Control Registers QDG rb op data. Display General Registers ( •. PN 5666370 1 of 2 44265 -----~----.------ ----~ _._- DISPLAY/ALTER FLOATING-POINT REGISTERS (QDF) Display Floating-Point Registers To select the floating-point register function from the D-screen: 1. Key F plus the register number and register byte number next to SELECTION. The register values are 0, 2,4, or 6; the byte values are 0-7 (hex). Both may be defaulted to zero. 2. Press ENTER. Four eight-byte registers are displayed. Alter Floating-Point Registers 1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above. Fast Alter· Floating-Point Registers *0 ISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: F00 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in QDF rb op data. FLOATING POINT REGISTERS 0 0002 70B0 3BCE 5A40 2 0035 3A04 5A04 002D 4 2CEA 5A40 002E 2CEA 6 6200 0040 5A01 0800 Key next to SELECTION as follows: 1. QDF selects the Floating-Point Register screen. 2. Key the register number (r) plus the byte number (b) in hexadecimal. The register number is 0, 2,4, or 6; the byte number has a value of 0-7 (hex). Both may be defaulted to zero. 3. Key in the op code: where: Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. & Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. / Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. ==> I NSTR STOP 4341 the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. 4. Key data. 5. Press ENTER. Not88: • Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • An invalid character prevents the alter function. • The Translate option is applicable to the Floating-Point Register display. • The paging keys are not applicable to this screen. Save Floatin~Point Registers All data in the floating-point register can be saved by the Block function. The byte character is ignored for a save function. An example of how you can save the floating-point register data is QDFrb7. EC 376695 16Aug19 : PN: 5666370 EC 379598 T5Apr80 2O'f2 :30000000 o o o o 00 000 0 0 00 o o o o o o o 44270 000 ( ( ( ! ( ( ( ( ( ( (, ( C. () 0 0 ( ( ( ( DISPLAY / ALTER CURRENT PSW (ODP) Display Current PSW To select the PSW function from the O-screen: 1. Key P and a PSW byte number in hexadecimal next to SELECTION. The byte number may be 0-7 (hex) or defaulted to zero. 2. Press ENTER. The eight-byte PSW is shown in binary except for the hexadecimal address. Alter Current PSW 1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above. 2. Move the cursor to the locatlon(s) to be altered and key in the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. Data is binary; address is hexadecimal. • An invalid character prevents the alter function. • Fast-alter data is hexadecimal up to a maximum of eight bytes (16 characters). CURRENT PSW 47C9 2300 0017 C123 BC: CHNLMSK.E EC: R TIE 0100 0111 Key next to SELECTION as follows: 1. QOP selects the PSW screen. 2. Key the byte number (bl whose values are 0-7 (hex). The byte number may be defaulted to zero. 3. Key in the op code: where: Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. & Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. / Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. PSW.KEY CMWP 1100 1000 INSTRUCTION ADDRESS: S 0 CC PROG.MASK 10 0011 C> ( 17C123 BYTE 1 Bit 0 Storage protect key Unassigned Per (R) Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned OAT (370 mode only) I/O mask External mask 2 3 4 7 1 Storage protect key 2 Storage protect key 3 Storage protect key 4 EC mode (0)(=1) 5 MC mask (M) 6 Wait(W) 7 Problem state (PI BYTE 2 Bit ADDRESS IN HEXADECIMAL OTHER DATA IN BINARY o Address Space Control (S) 1 Unassigned 2 Condition code 3 condition code 4 Program mask 5 Program mask 6 Program mask 7 Program mask ==> I NSTR STOP (Extended Control Mode) *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: PI 370 = D7Cl 0000 2317 C123 PSW.KEY CMWP 1100 000 1 INSTRUCTION ADDRESS: 17C123 ADDRESS IN HEXADECIMAL OTHER DATA IN BINARY Bit Bit PROG.MASK 0011 Channel mask Channel mask Channel mask channel mask Channel mask Channel mask o Channel mask External mask 6 Wait (WI 7 Problem state (PI BYTE 2 1 2 3 4 5 Protection key Protection key Protection key Protection key BC mode (=0) MC mask (M) BYTE 3 Bit Bit 0 Interruption Code o 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Interruption Interruption Interruption Interruption 5 Interruption 6 Interruption 7 Interruption Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Interruption Interruption Interruption Interruption Interruption Interruption Interruption Interruption Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code BYTE 4 ==> INSTR STOP Bit 4341 (BaSic Control Mode) lLC CC 00 10 BYTE 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CURRENT PSW BC: CHNLMSK.E R TIE EC: 110 1 0 111 BYTE 0 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Inst length code Inst length code Condition code Condition code Fixed-point overflow mask Decimal overflow mask Exponent overflow mask Significance mask Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020ct81 IBM Corp. 1981 (. C· ( PSW Screen label (BC Mode) 5. Press ENTER. All data in the PSW can be saved by the Block function. The byte character is ignored for a save function. An example of how you can save the current PSW data is QOP7. ( Bit 5 6 4341 4. Key data to the maximum of eight bytes (16 characters). Save Current PSW C {) 1 Two screens are displayed to illustrate the differences between BC and EC PSWs. aDP b op data. ( BYTE 0 The paging keys are not applicable to this screen. Fast-Alter Current PSW ( PSW Screen label (EC Mode) *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K PAGE DESCRIPTION V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: PO MAN 370 Notes: • ( PN 2676357 1 of 2 44275f ( ( ----- ---~-~------.--.-----.---- ------------"----- DISPLAY/ALTER STORAGE KEY (QDK) --- ._--- . __ ."" -------------_._--- ------------ - --_._--_ ... Fast-Alter Storage Key Note: In 370 mode, aDK is labeled Storage Key; in VSE mode, it is labeled Page Description. ·D I SPLAY/ALTER. GENERAL REGISTERS CONTROL REGISTERS FLOATING POINT REGISTERS CURRENT PSW K PAGE DESCRIPTION V VIRTUAL STORAGE Ii REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: KOOOOOO To select the storage key function from the D-screen: 1. Key K and the six-digit address next to SELECTION. The VSE address values are O-FFFFFF (hex). The 370 address is 0 to one less than the address check boundary. The address may be defaulted to zero. 2. Press ENTER. Key data next to SELECTION as follows: STOR.KEY 0000 1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above. PR01i.BITS 000 ADDRESS:OOOOOO CA 11 1. QDK selects the Storage Key screen. address may be defaulted to zero. FRAME INDEX:OOOO 3. Key in the op code: PAGE-CAPACITY-COUNT (PCC) EXISTING-FRAME-CAPACITY-COUNT (EFCC) AVAILABLE-FRAME-CAPACITY-COUNT (AFCC) FREE-FRAME-CAPACITY-COUNT (FFCC) where;· 2000 03E7 03E7 :0000 Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. ADDRESS, FRAME INDEX, AND CAPACITY COUNTS IN HEX, OTHER DATA IN BINARY VSE 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) of bit data and key in new data This d~na is bits 0 or 1. Leave the selection FRC 100 2. Key in the address whose values are O-FFFFFF (hex). The = Alter Storage Key aDK address op data (bit) PAGE DESCRIPTION G C F P Display Storage Key ==> I NSTR STOP & Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. / Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 4. Key data whose digit values are in bit mode. Bits (370 and VSE) 4341 unchanged and press ENTER. 0-3 4 Notes: The key data is in bit format. are in hex. "-------~ (Key field) O-F Fetch protection bit Reference bit Change bit 5 6 The address and frame (VSE Mode) Bits (VSE only) Other than bit data prevents the alter function. 7-9 = The next higher/lower 2K boundary can be displayed! alterM by using the paging keys. Note: Connected and Addressable bits (CA) are non-alterable. Two screens are displayed to illustrate the differences between 370 and VSE mode. Program bits 5. Press ENTER. "'DISPLAY/ALTER'" GENERAL REGISTERS CONTROL REGISTERS FLOATING POINT REGISTERS CURRENT PSW STORAGE KEY VIRTUAL STORAGE REAL STORAGE TRACE AREA BLOCK.SAVE AREA AUXILIARY STORAGE UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY LOCAL STORAGE EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: KOOOOOO Save Storage Key G C F P K V M T S A U L X STORAGE KEY HEX ADDRESS:OOOOOO BIN KEY:ll01 The data of Key In Storage can be saved by the Block function. An example of how you can save the key in storage data is QDKxxxxxx? BIN FRC:OOO = ==> I NSTR STOP 4341 (370 Hode) Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379827 020c:t81 PN 2676357 44 2801 2 of 2 J o 0,' ,( - , o 00 o o o 0:,- n "U o 00 00 o . . 'I o o o 0 o ~) o o {) o ,...,.-~ (I ,,-p { 1'~~:. ( "'-_ JI' I O C',.· t , ( c c c ( ( ( .. ( DISPLAY/ALTER VIRTUAL STORAGE 370/VSE (ODV) Display Virtual Storage 370/VSE To select the virtual storage function from the D-screen: 1. Key V and the six-digit address next to SELECTION. The address values are O-FFFFFF (hex). The address may be defaulted to zero. 2. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of data containing the selected address is displayed. Nota: The virtual storage address can be modified by placing II (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address kfllYed next to SELECTION. An example is shown on both screens. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until a new value has been entered or you select another screen that is not a Display/Alter screen. You can kfIIY in the Adjust Value alone or with an address. No address entered defaults to zero. The data appears in the normal lIT. lIS though it were at the selected address, but the data is actually that data located at the adjusted address, even though the IIIIIdress under label ADRS is that from the address on the SELECTION line. You can key a new address OT USB the PAGE key, and you still get the data from the IIIIIjusttKl address. The address plus the AdjustedValue might CBUSB the screen to have a twos-complement negative number. 1. Perrorrn steps 1 and 2 of display above. 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. Notas: Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • An invalid character prevents the alter function. • The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be displayed by using the paging keys. • • The Translate option is applicable to the Virtual Storage display. Error message DATA NOT ACCESSIBLE is displayed when the selected virtual address does not exist in real storage. VIRTUAL STORAGE ADJUST=+0003A0 REAL=000000 ADRS +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E FFFFE0 8012 3465 0000 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340 FFFFF0 0000 0000 000C 0000 0000 0550 0DA0 0000 000000 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000010 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 0A67 F000 0000 QDV address op data. Key data next to SELECTION as follows: 1. OOV selects the Virtual Storage screen. 2. Key in address O-FFFFFF (hex). The address may be defaulted to zero. 3. Key in the op code: 000020 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000030 0000 0000 000A 00B5 4346 0000 0000 0000 000040 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 where: Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. & Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. / Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 000050 0000 A4E4 0360 0000 0000 0000 0330 0000 ==> VSE I NSTR STOP 4341 4. Key data in hexadecimal. 5. Press ENTER. Save Virtual Storage 370/VSE Eight bytes of da~ in virtual storage, starting with the -address in the save area. can be saved by the Block function. An example of how you can-save the virtual stor~ data is OOVxxxxxx? Nota: You can use the ? op -code to vtuify if dt1t~ exists at the address before alteringthM dllta. This f.eBture is very helpful while running a block, but it can be used lit lIny time. After the 7, enter any number of digits for the data thllt would be at that address. You can alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code, such as (=). If the data at that address does not matCh, no alter .occurs. If you have no match, and the data you are matching and the data which you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur. An example of how this command is used is: OOVlOOOOO(?F1 F2F3.... =F5F6F7 .... I I I I I I I I I I I I 1979 -------------_ . _--_. _.__ ._.- -_. _..---_._._.- -.._. ._- _._---= Alter Data Compare data Match address EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379598 15Apr80 @ IBM Corp. c Fast Alter Virtual Storage 370/VSE *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K PAGE DESCRIPTION V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: V000000+3A0 Alter Virtual Storage 370/VSE • (~ -... .. PN 5666372 1 of 2 44285 --~----- ----------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---------- Fast Alter Real Storage 370 DISPLAY/ALTER REAL STORAGE 370 (QDM) *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: M000020-10 Display Real Storage 370 To select the real storage function from the O-screen: 1. Key M and the six-digit address next to SELECTION. The address values are zero to one less than the address check boundry. In CE mode, the address range is all of real storage. The address may be defaulted to zero. 2. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of data containing the selected address is displayed. Note: The real storage address can be modified by placing a (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address keyed next to SELECTION. An example is shown.on the ODV screens. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until a new value has been entered or you select another screen that is not a Display I Alter screen. You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an address. No address entered defaults to zero. The data appesrs in the fJOI'ma/ area lIS though it were at the selected address, but the data is actually that data located at the adjusted address, even though the atfdress under label AORS is that from the address on the SELECTION line. You can key a new address or use the PAGE key, and you still get the data from the adjusted address. The address plus the Adjusted Value might cause the screen to have a twos-complement negative number. REAL STORAGE ADJUST=+0003A0 ACB=lC0000 ADRS +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E 000010 8012 3465 0000 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340 000020 0000 0000 000C 0000 0000 0550 0DA0 0000 000030 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000040 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 0A67 F000 0000 Key data next to SELECTION as follows: 1. OOM selects the main storage screen. 2. Key in address O-FFFFFF (hex). The address may be defaulted to zero. 3. Key in the op code: 000060 0000 0000 000A 0085 4346 0000 0000 0000 where: Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. 000070 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 & Means ANO the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. I Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 000050 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000080 0000 A4E4 0360 0000 0000 0000 0330 0000 ==> INSTR STOP 4. Key data in hexadecimal. 4341 5. Press ENTER. Save Real Storage 370 Eight bytes of data in real storage, starting with the address in the save area, Can be saved by the Block function. An example of how you can save the real storage data is QOMxxxxxx7. Note: You can use the 70p code to verify if data exists at the address before altering that data. This feature is very helpful while running a block, but it can be used at any time. After the 7, enter any number of digits for the data that would be at that address. You can alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code, such as (=). If the data at that address does not match, no alter occurs. If you have no match, and the data you are matching and the data which you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur. Alter Real Storage 370 1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above. 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in -the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. Notes: • ODM address op data. An example of how this command is used is: Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • .An invalid character prevents the alter function. • The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be displayed by using the paging keys. . • The maximum selected address must be 1 less than the ACB (Address Check Boundary). • The Translate option is applicable to the Real Storage display. OOMxxxxxx7F1 F2F3.... =F5F6F7 .... I I I I I I I I I I I I Compare data Match address EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379598 15Apr80 :) 0000 00000 o 00000 00 o o 00 Alter data PN 5666372 20f2 o o o o o 44290 i I 00 o 0 (, ( ( ( , ( ( O· (" ( ( Display Trace Area (T) To select the Trace function from the D-screen: 1. Key T next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Trace screen menu is displayed. « (- *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: T To select the Instruction Counter Trace from the T -screen: *TRACE AREA* *INSTRUCTION COUNTER TRACE* TI DISPLAY TIX CLEAR *PSW AND I/O TRACE* TC TRACE CONTROLS '1. Key TI next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Instruction Counter Trace screen is displayed. The Instruction Counter Trace area (Til contains up to 128 instruction addresses resulting from using the Trace-Stop (OAT), Trace-Wrap (OAW), or the Instruction Step (001) functions. The total 128-address trace area is divided into two 64-address pages. TP DISPLAY TPX CLEAR TS SAVE IFCC TSX CLEAR SAVED IFCC TF DISPLAY SAVED IFCC *1/0 DEVICE STATUS* TM DISPLAY TMX RESET SAMPLE COUNT ==> I NSTR STOP 4341 The addresses are arranged from left to right, top to bottom. The newest address is displayed at the beginning of page 0 with the oldest at the end of page 1. The trace area always contains the most recent addresses up to a maximum of 128 addresses. When the list becomes full, each new address is inserted into the first position of page 0, all addresses are advanced, and the oldest is dropped from the bottom of page 1. The current page containing the first 64 addresses (CURRENT) is always displayed first. Addresses over a count of 64 are displayed on the second page (PREVIOUS) of this screen. Selecting TIO at the SELECTION line displays the current page (page 0). Selecting Til at the SELECTION line displays the previous page (page 1). The Page-Up and Page-Down function keys can also be used to go from page to page. Addresses displayed followed by a V denote a virtual address. An address followed by an R denotes a real address. An address that cannot be determined to· be either virtual or real is denoted by an X. An address resulting from a Branch instruction is followed by a B. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT' PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: TI-1220 CURRENT 007854 VB 005982 V 005974 V 00143E V 066662 V 06665C V 0044AE VB 00449E V I-COUNTER TRACE 007850 V 00784C 005980 V 00597C 005970 VB 001444 00142A V 001436 06665E V 06665C 06665A V 06665C 0044A8 RB 0044A6 00449A R 004496 00498C X 012344 R ADJUST=+OOOOOO V 00784A VB V 005978 V V 001440 V X 066666 X VB 06665A V V 06665A VB V 0044AO V V 004490 V .j, ~1 ·1 I Clear Instruction Counter Trace (TIX) To clear the Instruction Counter Trace Screen: 1. Key TIX next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Instruction Counter Trace screen is cleared. B=RESULT OF BC OR BCR R=REAL V=VIRT X=UNKNOWN ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379825 OSJun81 C IBM Corp. 1981 ( Display Instruction Counter Trace (TI) DISPLAY / ALTER TRACE AREA (QDT) The T -selection from the Display/Alter screen causes the trace area menu to be displayed. The menu shows the selections available for the Trace function. ( PN 2676409 1 of 4 44 295f Display PSW and I/O Trace Controls (TC) Display PSWand I/O Trace (TP) To select the PSW and I/O Trace Controls function from the T-screen: *DISPLAY/ALTER* GENERAL REGISTERS CONTROL REGISTERS FLOATING POINT REGISTERS CURRENT PSW STORAGE KEY VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z REtURN TO PROG SYS SELECT I ON: TC G C F P K V 1. Key TC next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. PSW and I/O Trace Controls screen is displayed. The PSW and I/O Controls (TC) screen provides the capability to set controls for the PSW and I/O trace. The results of the traces are displayed on the PSW and I/O Trace Display (TP) screen. The PSW and I/O Trace Controls screen provides the same capability as the I/O instructions (0), PSW swaps (P), and the CSWs (W) trace options as on the Compare/Trace (QA) screen. To select the PSW and I /0 Trace screen from the T - screen: VM N 1. Key TP next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. PSWand I/O Trace screen is displayed. * I/O TRACE CONTROLS * CHANNEL UNIT CSW OPS IF 0 N SIO Y = YES/ALL N = NO/NONE OPS = CIO HDV SIO TIO HIO TCH o To set a selection in the PSW trace control area, key a Y for YES, or N for NO, over the existing setting. To set all the selections to YES or NO, key the appropriate letter under the selection ALL:. * PSW TRACE CONTROLS * LOAD I/O MCK PCK 'svc EXT Y N N Y Y N ALL: 91 N SIO 2 Y Y Y 3 80 N HIO 4 N N N 5 N N N The PSW and I/O Trace screen displays the traces made with the selections on either the PSW and I/O Trace Controls screen (TC) or the Compare/Trace (QA) screen. The PSW and I/O operations selected are traced and recorded on this screen. This screen also displays the current Interface Control Checks (lFCC). The interface control checks trace is always active and is not affected by any selections made from the Compare/Trace (QA) screen or the PSW and I/O Trace Controls (TC) screen. The Page-Up and Page-Down function keys can be used to increase or decrease page numbers. ==> I NSTR STOP To set a selection in the I/O trace control area, key in the appropriate selections where: UNIT column: a two-character unit address, Y for all or N for none. CSW column: Y activates CSW store trace because of device activity rather than I/O instructions; N deactivates CSW store trace. OPS column: A specific I/O op code mnemonic, Y for all I/O operations or N for none. 4341 Clear PSW & I/O Trace (TPX) To clear the PSW and I/O Trace screen: 1. Key TPX next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. PSW and I/O Trace screen is cleared. All selectable fields are highlighted. To make a change to a field, key in the desired setting in place of the existing one. *0 I SPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE . X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: TP To return Trace functions to their normal (reset) state, an N under the selection ALL resets PSW traces. An N in the Unit column resets Channel I/O Trace. Or, the QAN function can be used to reset the trace functions. Note: Using the DAN function resets any previously selected Trace function, whether it was selected from the Compare/Trace (OA) or the Trace Controls (ODTC) screen. o PSW & I/O TRACE PSW LOAD ADR=OOOO 0000 DEV=10C PSW I/O PSW MCHK INT=OOOO 0101 OPS SIO CC=O DEV=2B4 OPS HIO CC=l DEV=119 OLD=OOOO 0000 NEW=OOOO 0000 OLD=FEOO 010C NEW=OOOO 0000 OLD=070C 0000 NEW=0008 0000 CCW=0202 334C CAW=0006 304C CSW= •••••.•• CNT=OOOO 0002 0000 0000 0007 0000 0004 OOOE 0000 0000 0000 7622 3466 4444 3922 0050 0100 OPS CLRIO CC=3 DEV=lll CC=2 DEV=3AD OPS TCH IFCC DEV=323 CSW=3000 0200 0002 0029 CSW BUSIN=21 BUSOUT=ll CN=OC ENG=35 33 06 SF 47 TAGIN= REQ OPL DIS ADR SEL STA SRV/DAT TAGOUT= ADR CMD OAT SRV SUP OPL SEL INTERFACE CLEANUP TIMEOUT ==> I NSTR STOP 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379825 05Jun81 :)0 0 0, . 1 \0... " o o o o 00 0 1 o o 0,0 00 00 o 00 o o o PN 2676409 20f 4 44 296f 0 0 00 o ,f~ '''L)V ( ( ( ( ( c- ( ( o (. ( ( ( ( 1. Key TF next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Saved IFCC save area is displayed. The Saved IFCC screen displays the saved interface control checks that have been saved to the diskette by using the Save IFCC (TS) function. The Page-Up and Page-Down function keys can be used to increase or decrease page numbers. Save I FCC ITS) When the Save IFCC (TS) function is invoked, the IFCC save area is cleared, and the current interface control checks in the trace area are transferred to the IFCC area on the diskette. This function invoked from inside a Block saves the latest interface control check in the trace area without clearing the diskette area. ( ( (, (- ( Display I/O Device Status (1M) Display Saved I FCC (TF) To select the Saved IFCC screen from the T -screen: ( *0 I SPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: TF o SAVED IFCC PAGE 00 IFCC DEV=341 CSW=3000 0200 0002 0029 BUSIN=21 BUSOUT=ll CN=OC ENG=35 33 06 5F 47 TAGIN= REQ OPL DIS ADR SEL STA SRV/DAT TAGOUT= ADR CMD OAT SRV SUP OPL SEL INTERFACE CLEANUP TIMEOUT OPS SIO IFCC DEV=311 CSW=0202 0000 OOOE 3922 BUSIN=21 BUSOUT=ll CN=OC ENG=35 33 06 5F 47 TAGIN= REQ DPL DIS AOR SEL STA SRV/DAT TAGOUT= ADR CMO OAT SRV SUP OPL SEL INTERFACE CLEANUP TIMEOUT OPS TID IFCC DEV=323 CSW=3000 0200 0002 0029 BUSIN=21 BUSOUT=11 CN=OC ENG=35 33 06 5F 47 TAGIN= REQ OPL DIS AOR SEL STA SRV/DAT TAGOUT= ADR CMO OAT SRV SUP OPL SEL INTERFACE CLEANUP TIMEOUT CSW ==> I NSTR STOP To select the I/O Device Status screen from the T - screen: . 1. Key TM next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. I/O Device Status screen is displayed. The I/O Device Status screen displays the status of devices that have not completed their final operation when a sample (examination of UCWs) is taken. Each time the ENTER key is pressed, another sample (examination of UCWs) is taken. The results, any outstanding devices, are displayed. If a device has had outstanding status since the last sample count reset, that device is intensified on the screen. Use the I/O Device Status screen to identify suspected device(s) that may be having device or system problems. A number of samples is required to determine this. Once the suspected device(s) are identified, perform a full I/O Trace on that particular device(s) to ensure more reliable diagnostic results. Notes: 4341 • During command-chained operations~ channel-end (CE) is outstanding until channel-end is received for the last command in the chain. • Device-End (DE) status for devices with shared subchannels cannot be determined. • During Halt and Clear instructions, the indications CE and DE are unpredictable. • Any status accepted into the UCW, but not yet presented to the operating system, is reflected as completed. Clear Saved I FCC ITSX) To clear the Saved IFCC save area: 1. Key TSX next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. IFCC screen is cleared. *0 I SPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS ~ CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT I ON: TM *1/0 DEVICE CUU STATUS 033 CE/DE 33C DE STATUS* CUU STATUS 150 DE 344 CE/DE CUU STATUS 18E CE/DE 4El CE/DE SAMPLES=03 CUU STATUS 230 CE/DE Reset Sample Count (TMX) To reset the I/O Device Status sample count: 1. Key TMX next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. I/O Device Status count is reset and a new sample is performed. o CE - DEVICE OWES CHANNEL END FOR FINAL OPERATION DE - DEVICE OWES DEVICE END ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676409 30f 4 44 297f (- Definition of Terms SIO Start I/O The fields are defined by: SVC Supervisor call TAGIN Interface adapter tags in. where: REQ = Request in OPL = Operational in DIS = Disconnect in ADR = Address in SEL = Select in STA = Status in SRV = Service in OAT = Data in TAGOUT Interface adapter tags out. where: ADR = Address out CMD = Command out OAT = Data out SRV = Service out SUP = Suppress out OPL = Operational out SEL = Select out TCH Test channel TIO Test I/O instruction VM Virtual machine assist ADR Address of the Load PSW instruction BUSIN Data input bus BUSOUT Data output bus CAW Channel address word CC I/O instruction condition code CCW Channel command word CE Channel-end CN Catalog number CIO Clear I/O instruction trace control CLRIO Clear I/O instruction CNT Number of times this entry has been repeated without any intervening entry (CNT 0=1 •... CNT 1=2) CSW Channel status word. Entries with .... : are showing the changed part of the CSW. DE Device-end DEV I/O device address Condition Codes: ENG For engineering use: byte 0 - catalog number byte 1 - CHCMDR byte 2 - CHSYNCO byte 3 - CHDATAO byte 4 - CHSYNC1 byte 5 - CHDATA2 Condition Code Setting 0 Mask Bit Value 8 1 4 2 2 3 Input / Output Instructions: Clear I/O EXT External PSW HIO Halt I/O instruction I/O Input/ output IFCC Interface control check Start I/O No oper in progress Interruption pending Interruption pending Successful INT Interruption COde (EC mode only). In BC mode. the interruption code is in the old PSW. Channel 10 10 stored CSW stored MCK Machine check PSW trace control Test Channel Available MCHK Machine check Test I/O Available Interruption pending CSW stored NEW PSW after the PSW swap OLD PSW before the PSW swap PCK Program check PSW Program status word Halt Device Halt I/O CSW stored CSW stored CSW stored CSW stored Channel busy Channel working Burst op stopped Channel busy Channel busy Burst mode Channel busy Not operating Not operating Not operating Not operating Not operating Not operating Not operating Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676409 L- ~o ",,'), , \'-.. ."C --", "li .' a 00 o o 0 O} o o 0 0 0 000 o o 0', 0"," ;, ',I 44 301'1 40f4 -------- o o o o 00 o c ( ( ( (- « ( o ( ( ( ( ( ( To select the block save function from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key S with a one-digit address next to SELECTION. This is the number of a page of the save area. The address may be defaulted to zero. 3. Press ENTER. A 16-item section of Block Save is displayed. Notes: • • The next higher/lower 16 entries can be displayed by using the paging keys. "DISPLAY/ALTER" GENERAL REGISTERS CONTROL REGISTERS FLOATING POINT REGISTERS CURRENT PSW STORAGE KEY VIRTUAL STORAGE REAL STORAGE TRACE AREA BLOCK SAVE AREA AUXILIARY STORAGE UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY LOCAL STORAGE EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: SO G C F P K V M T S A U L X AREA ADDRESS 04 004672 004672 DATE: 00/000 00:00 PAGE 0 DATA ASAS ASAS FFOO 0000 4000 2222 3AOO 2680 2890 04FO 0007 0000 00/000 00:00:00 ( t t. Type Description S ODA ODC ODD ODF ODG ODK ODL ODM ODP ODW BLOCK VARIABLE SAVE AUXILIARY STORAGE CONTROL REGISTERS CONSOLE DISK FILE FLOATING-POINT REGISTERS GENERAL REGISTERS STORAGE KEY LOCAL STORAGE REAL STORAGE CURRENT PSW SP STORAGE VIRTUAL STORAGE CSAR BACKUP TRACE CONTROL STORE CHANNEL DATA BUFFER L1 DIRECTORY ODV OVAB OVAC OVAD OVAF ==> I NSTR STOP OVAG 4341 Alter Block Save Area OVAH OVAL OVAN OVAP OVAR OVAS OVAT Note: The block save area cannot be full-screen altered. Note: The block save area cannot be fast-altered. SAVE TYPE QDG QDP QDM QDK TOO o SAVE AREA EMPTY message indicates the save area was not used during the last Block activity. Fast-Alter Block Save Area ( Save Area Type' Field Description DISPLAY/ALTER BLOCK SAVE AREA (ODS) Display Block Save Area ( Save Screen Label Type Description Type Address Data Type of information saved Address of stored data Hexadecimal data. OVAU. OVAY OVB OVC OVH OVI OVK OVM OVR OVX L1 CACHE DATA CHANNEL DLAT LOCAL STORAGE CHANNEL CONTROL LOCAL STORE RETRY CACHE RETRY DATA SWAP BUFFER TRAP/BAL STACK PU DLAT KEYSTACK ARRAY CONTROL STORAGE HARDWARE CHANNEL INTERFACE CHANNEL HARDWARE PU HARDWARE CHECK LATCHES MAIN STORAGE HARDWARE SCAN RINGS EXTERNAL REGISTERS Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676355 44 305f @ IBM Corp. 1979, 1981 10f2 t. , DISPLAY/ALTER AUXILIARY STORAGE (QDA) Display Auxiliary Storage To select the auxiliary storage function from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key A and a six-digit address next to SELECTION. The address is a value of zero to one less than the main storage size minus the address check boundry size. The address may be defaulted to zero. 3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of data containing the selected address is displayed. Alter Auxiliary Storage Fast~Alter *DISPLAY/ALTER* GENERAL REGISTERS CONTROL REGISTERS FLOATING POINT REGISTERS CURRENT PSW STORAGE KEY VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AOOOOOO G C F P K V AUXILIARY STORAGE ADJUST=+0003AO ACB=ICOOOO ADRS +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E 000010 8012 3465 0000 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340 QDA address op data. 000020 0000 0000 OOOC 0000 0000 0550 ODAO 0000 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 000030 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2. QDA selects the Auxiliary Storage screen. 000040 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 OA67 FOOO 0000 3. Key in the address. The address may be defaulted to zero. 000050 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Key data next to selection as follows: 4. Key in the op code: where: Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. 000060 0000 0000 OOOA 00B5 4346 0000 0000 0000 000070 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000080 0000 A4E4 0360 0000 0000 0000 0330 0000 ==> INSTR STOP 1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of display above. 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press ENTER. Auxiliary Storage & Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address Ideation. / Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 5. Key in data in hexadecimal. 4341 6. Press ENTER. Note: You can enter as much data as can fit the SELECTION line, provided you do not cross the 128-byte boundry. Notes: • Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • An invalid character prevents the Alter function. Save Auxiliary Storage The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be displayed by using the paging keys. Eight bytes of data in auxiliary storage can be saved by the block function. An example of how you can save the auxiliary storage data is QDAxxxxxx? The Translate option is applicable to the Auxiliary Storage display. The auxiliary storage address can be modified by placing Note: You can use the 7 op code to verify if data exists at the address before altering that data. This feature is very helpful while running a block, but it can be used at any time. After the 7, enter any number of digits for the data that would be at that address. You can alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code, such as (=). " the data at that address does not match, no alter occurs. " you have no match, and the data you are matching and the data which you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur. a (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address keyed next to SELECTION. An example is shown on the QDV screen. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until a new value has been entered or you select another screen that is not a Display/Alter screen. You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an address. No address entered defaults to zero. The data appears in the normal area as though it were at the selected address, but the data is actually that data located at the adjusted address, even though the address under label ADRS is that from the address on the SELECTION line. You can key a new address or use the PAGE key, and you still get the data from the adjusted address. The address plus the Adjusted Value might An example of how this command is used is: QDAxxxxxx?Fl F2F3 .... =FSF6F7.,... I I I I I I cause the screen to have a twos-complement negative number. I I I I I I Alter data Compare data Match address Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676355 2012 ------- '), 0 0, o 000 o o o o ,("" 0·', 0',', V(J '\!. , , (f) ~ o o ,0 o o 00 o o C) o 44 3101 L------ - -- () 00 0" :1' ((1\ , ~/ (- DISPLAY/ALTER UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY (aDU} (GRP 2) Display UCW/Device Directory Facilities To select the UCW /Device Directory Facilities from the D-screen: 1. PI,ce the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key U next to SELECTION. 3. Press ENTER. Alter UCW/Device Directory Note: The UCW/Device Directory Facilities cannot be altered. (- *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: U (- <. ( ( ( ( . ( ( ( ( ( ( *UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY* UU UPDATE DIRECTORY UC COMPRESSED DIRECTORIES DISPLAY UE EXPANDED DIRECTORIES DISPLAY ==> INSTR STOP 4341 DISPLAY UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY UPDATE (aDUU) To select the UCW /Device Directory Update screen from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key UU next to SELECTION. 3. Press ENTER. Alter UCW/Device Directory Update Note: To alter the UCW /Device Directory Update screen, refer to UCW Assignment Procedure. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UU 380-387 SL *UCW DIRECTORY UPDATES* LASTREF=OOF CHANNEL: O-BYTE I-BLOCK 2-BLOCK 3-BLOCK 4-BLOCK 5-BLOCK FORMAT: UU XXX -YYY CHARACTERISTICS XXX STARTING DEVICE ADDR -YYY ENDING DEVICE AD DR (OPTIONAL) CHARACTERISTICS (OPTIONAL, ANY ORDER) S SHARED UCW L SELECTOR MODE -BLOCK ONLY o DATA STREAMING MODE -BLOCK ONLY X UNASSIGN DIRECTORY PU-IML REQUIRED AFTER UPDATES ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Use with microcode EC 856091 and above EC 379822 22SepSO @ IBM Corp. 1980 PN 2676430 1 of 2 44313 ._._-- _..---_._.•. _ - - - - - - - ------- - - - .. UCW COMPRESSED DIRECTORIES (QDUC) *0 I SPLAY/AlTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE H REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXiliARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY l lOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FilE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UC This screen is used to verify any changes made while using the update screen (QDUU) in-the assignment procedure. Display UCW/Device Directory-Compressed Directories Display To display the UCW /Device Directory-Compressed DireClQries Display from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key UC and a three-digit device address (OOO-5FF) next to SELECTION. Note: The three-digit device address may be defaulted to 000. 3. Press Enter. *UCW DIRECTORIES DISPlAY* REF CHARACTERISTICS CUU 003-006 010-013 BYT 010 003 BYT BYT,SHR 060-067 014 150-15F 015-024 BlK 240-243 025-028 SEl 280 029 BlK,DST SEl,SHR 380-387 02A SEl,SHR 388-38F 02B 4B8 02C 4CO-4C5 020-032 503-506 033-036 51A 037 520-527 038-03F INV BlK,DST BlK SEl BlK ==> INSTR STOP Note: The message MORE, PRESS ENTER appears if there is more data than can be displayed on one page. 4341 Alter UCW/Device Directory-Compressed Directories Display Note: The Compressed Directories Display screen cannot be altered. If you need to alter, it must be done by way of the Update screen (ODUU). *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY l lOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STPRAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UEOFO UCW EXPANDED DIRECTORIES (QDUE) This screen is used to verify any changes made while using the update screen (QDUU) in the assignment procedure. Display UCW/Device Directory-Expanded Directories Display To display the UCW /Device Dir:ectory-Expanded Directories Display from the D-screen: 1. Place the ce MODE switch ON. 2. -Key UE and a three-digit device address (OOO-5FF) next to SELECTION. Note: The three-digit device device address may be defaulted to 000. *UCW DIRECTORIES DISPLAY· CHARACTER IST ICS CUU REF INV OFO 007 INV OF 1 008 BYT OF2 003 INV OF3 004 OF4 005 INV INV OF5 006 BYT OF6 001 OF7 002 BYT OF8 OF9 OFA OFB OFC OFD OFE OFF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF 009 UNA UNA UNA UNA UNA UNA INV BYT HEX 01CO 0200 OOEO 0100 0140 0180 0060 OOAO 0300 0300 0300 0300 0300 0300 03CO 0260 ==> INSTR STOP 3. Press ENTER. 4341 Note: The message MORE, PRESS ENTER appears if there is more data than can be displayed on one page. Alter. UCW/DeviceDirectory-Expanded Directories Display Use with microcode EC 856091 and above EC 379822 22Sep80 PN 2676430 Note: The Expanded Directories Display screen cannot be altered. If you need to alter, it must be done by way of the Update screen (ODUU). o 44314 20f2 00000000000000000000000 0000000000 --------_._---------------_._- ---_ .... _--_. .- --"---~------ --- ---- -- -~---- .. _--_... . ... _-_ ... _------------._ .. - --'"- - - - - - , - - - --._----- .. _-- .... _---.--_._.-._----------------- ( (' (- Oisplay / Alter UCW/Device Directory 'TaSks (GDU) . Display UCW/Device Directory Tasks The U-selection from the Display / Alter screen (llD1 displays the UCW /Device Directory Tasks screen. This directoTY provides you with selections available for the UCW Assignment procedure. To select the UCW /Device Directory Tasks scr'6en from the Display/Alter (QD) screen: 1. Key U next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. UCW /Device Directory Tasks screen is displayed. Note: Thi5SI:Teen cannot be alter-ed. C· . ' ..•• (- ( (- ( (~' Display/Altar Change UCW Directory (QDUU) '*D15PiAY /ALTER* 1> JiEftIRAL REGI ST:ERS C tONTROL REGIstERS F fLOATI~G POINT REGISTEE P tURRENT PSW KSTORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORA RUG SYS SllECTION: U *utW/DEVltE DIRECTORY TASKS· Display Change UCW Directory U tHANGE UCW DIRECTORY The Change UCW Directory screen is used to modify the UCW Directory by adding or deleting UCW addresses, or to modify the type of UCW address in the directory. C DISPLAY UCW DIRECTORY E 'DISPLAY EXPANDED UCW DIRECTORY To select the Change UCW Directory screen from the UCW /Device Directory Tasks screen: 1. Key U next to SELECTION: U. 2. Press ENTER. Change UCW Directory screen is displayed. Notes: => • To Change the UCW Directory, refer to Volume 13/16, Section 14, "ucw Assignment." ~ The paging keys are not applicable for this function. 4341 Display/Alter UCW/Devic.e Directory Tasks (QDU) Screen *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REG ISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOAT ING PO JNT REG ISTStS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S -BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTOR¥ L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS WSP STORAGE D tONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q ~ENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UU 380-387 SL *CHANGE UCW DIRECTORY. FORMAT: CXX -CYY CHAR. CODES (XX = STARTING DEVICE ADDRESS -CYY = ENDING DEVICE ADDRESS (OPTIONAL) CHANNEL~ O-BYTE 3-BLOCK I-BLOCK 4-BLOCK Z-BLOCK 5-BLOCK CtiAR.CODES (OPTIONAL, ANY ORDER) S SHARE'D UCW L SELECTOR MODE -BLOCK ONLY o DATA STREAMING MODE -BLOCK ONLY X REMOVE DEVICES .ONE ENTRY ~UST COVER ALL ADDRS FOR ANY CTL UNIT .PU-IMLREQUIRED AFTER CHANGES -USE LOAD SCREEN ==> 4341 OispJay / Alter Change -UCW Dif"-ectory (GDUU) Screen Model Group 2 EC 379827 020ct81 EC 379829 28Jun82 ©IBM Corp. 1981 .- - PN2676430 1 of 2 44 31Sf -----~-.-- -------------------- ---~-----~-.- Display/Alter Disp.ay UCW Directory (ODUC) Display UCW ;Directory This screen is· used...ta,~rify any changes made while using the Change UCW -9irecmry screen (GDUU}jn the UCW Assignment procedure. To select the IJ.CWlJirectory from the UCW / DeviceDirectory Tasks-screen: 1. Key C and-a three-digit device address (OOO-5FF) next to SELECTION:. U~ Note: The defaaltactdress is zero. 2. Press ENTER The UCW Directory screen is displayed. Notes: The message MflEfE,.PRESSENTER appears;( there is more data .. thancan be'displayed on one page. *-0 I SPLAY /ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOAT ING PO I NT REG I STERS PCURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VI RTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEV I CE 0 I RECTORY L lOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REG I STERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UC .-.~~-----. -.-.--~---- Display/Alter Display Expanded UCWDirectory (QDUE) *OISPLAY ItC'W D:fRECTOR"Y* CXX-CYY REF CI+AAACTER I ST I CS 000 010 BIT, SHR 301-305 011 BLK.SHR 306->OF 012 I!LK,.SHR 310-HF 0 11-0Z2.. S:EL~DST Display Expanded UCW Directory This screen- is used to verify any CllallgeS made while using the Change UCW Directory screen (QDVU) in the UCW Assignment procedure. To select the Expanded UCW Directory from the UCWIDevice Directory Tasks screen: 1. Pface CE MODE switch 2. . PU-I ML REQU I RED AFTER CH"ANGES -USE LOAD SCREEN: => Ke-r Eand a three-digit device address (OOO-5FF) next to SEtECTLON; U. Not&: The default address is' zeF(L 3. Press ENTER. The Expanded. UCW Directory screen is displayed.. 4141 This screerr canllGtbe. altered. OIl. Notes:.. The message MORE, PRESS ENTER appears if there is more data than can be displayed on one page. This screen cannot be altered. Display/Alter UCW Directory (ODUC) Screen Return to General Selection· (0) To return to the General Selection (Q) screen: *OISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UE300 *OISPLAY UCW DIRECTORY* CXX-CYY REF CHARACTER I ST I CS HEX 300 OOC UNA 0310 301 011 BLK.SHR 0472 011 BLK:.SHR 0472 302 303 011 BLK, SHR 0472 304 011 BLK,SHR 0472 305 OTI BLK,SHR 0472 306 012 BLK, SHR 04B2 307 012 BlK, SHR 04B2 308 012 BLK, SHR 048.2 309 012 BLK,SHR 04B2 30A 012 BLK .. SHR 0482 30B 012 BLlt, SHR 0482 30C 012 BLK...SHR 04.B2 300 012 BLK.. •. SHR 04B2 30E 0 12 BLK~SHR 04B2 30F 012 BLK,SHR 04B2 . PU-I ML REQU I RED AFTER CHANGES -USE LOAD SCREEN==> MOH, PRESS ENTER 1. Key Q next to SELECTtON. 2. Press. ENTER. General Selectiorr (aJ screen is displayed. Return to ProgSys (Z) To return to the Prog Sys(Z) screen: 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press· ENTER. Prog Sys (Z) screen is displayed. 4341 Display/Alter Expanded UCW Directory (ODUE) Screen Model Group Z EC 379827 020ctSf EC 379829 - 28.:Jun82.: 00 o o 0000 0000 o o ... , 0.000 PN 2676430 Zof2 44 320f 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o ( ( '" / ( ( ( ( ( ( ( DISPLAY/ALTER LOCAL STORAGE (QDL) o (' ( "DISPLAY/ALTER" G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXiLIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: L100 To select the local storage function from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key L and a three-digit device address next to SELECTION. The first digit is the number of a local storage section with values of 0- 7 (hex). The second digit is a row within local storage with a value of O-F (hex), and digit three is a byte offset with a value of 0-7 (hex). The address may be defaulted to zero. If a single digit is entered, it is a section number. 3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of local storage is displayed which contains the selected address. Alter Local Storage LOCAL STORAGE It 6 4 6 0 2 0 2 "10 C509 E240 40Cl 05C4 "11 40C3 CaCl D505 C503 1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of display above. QDL XYZ op da,ta. Key data next to selection as follows: ,. Place the CE MODE switch ON. "12 40FO 4004 C107 07C9 "13 05C7 l1Cl F9Fl 60F6 *14 7A40 C3E4 E460 09C5 "15 C640 4040 4040 F07A *16 40C3 E4E4 6004 C1D7 "17 0300 0036 1040 1100 where: ·18 0140 4040 4040 4040 ·,9 4040 4040 4040 4040 X is a hex digit of local storage section with a value of 0-7 (hex). *lA 4040 4040 4040 4040 ·IB 4040 4040 4040 4040 Y ·,C 4040 4040 4040 4040 ·,0 4040 4040 4040 4040 Z represents a byte offset digit with a value of 0-7 (hex). ·IE 4003 C27F C44F C55F ·,F C66F C77F C94F 4A5F The address may be defaulted to zero. 2. OOL selects the Local Storage screen. 3. Key in the address XYZ: where: Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line into the address location. & Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. / Notes: • An invalid character prevents • The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be displayed by using the paging keys. • Care should be taken as data is changing in local storage while this function operates. • The Translate option is applicable to the Local Storage display. ~he is a hex digit representing a row of local storage with a value of O-F (hex). 4. Key in the op code: => I NSTR STOP 4341 2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in the new data. Leave the selection line unchanged and press ENTER. Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with the data in the address location. 5. Key in data in hexadecimal. alter function. 6. Press ENTER. Save Local Storage Eight bytes of data in local storage can be saved by the Block function. An example of how you can save the local storage data is ODLxxx7. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 @ IBM (' Fast Alter Local Storage Display Local Storage • ('\ ( Corp. 1979, 1980 -" - .- -,. -",,=--=-=--=====~~-". PN 5666376 1 of 1 44325 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOCOCOOOOOOOOOOOL I - - - - - - - ( ( (' ( DISPLAY / ALTER EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QDX 0-5) (GRP 2) Display External Registers To select the external register function from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key, X and a one-digit address next to SELECTION. Note: Use 0-5 for particular channel desired; the address may be defaulted to zero. 3. Press ENTER. A 64-byte section of the external registers is shown of which the data at the selected address is included. Alter External Registers The External Register screen cannot be altered. • Data is displayed in hexadecimal. • The next higher/lower 64-byte section can be displayed by using the paging keys. *0 ISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: XO . ==> ( 370 mode Can source other externals LCA meter in Microword channel control check Storage busy Valid transfer-in-channel (TIC) Valid command chain CCW Valid chain data CCW CHSTAT: This byte contains hardware set channel status indicators. The channel external address is 6,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 INSTR STOP ( CHCOMONR: This byte contains the channel control bits in the common register. The channel external address is 2,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14. ( Spare = 0 I ncorrect length latch Prog or Prot check latch Spare = 0 Channel data length latch Channel control check latch Spare = 0 Chaining check latch 15. W2: This byte contains the shift length value when W2 register is specified as a length parameter. It mey also serve as a loop counter. The PU external address is 2.0. 16. Save External Registers 2. SIR: This byte contains data which determines the number of bits or bytes that are to be shifted. The PU external address is 0,0. 3. INTS: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,1 . Bit 0 . Channel 0 interrupt request 1 Channel 1 interrupt request 2 Channel 2 interrupt request 3 Channel 3 interrupt request 4 Channel 4 interrupt request 5 Channel 5 interrupt request 6 Unused 7 Reset ADDRMATCH 4. INDIRO: This byte contains the address that is the R1 field of the current instruction. The external address is 0,2. 5. CHKEY: Bits 0-3 are key bits; 4-7 are unimplemented bits, sourced as zero. The external address is 0.4. 6. CHSAR: Three-byte address invoked when the channel is used. The external address is 0, 5-7. 7. CHSYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync 0 register. The Channel external address is 1,0. IBM Corp. 1980 ( ( 4341 1. CHDLR: Contains the count value of the channel data length register. The channel external address is 0,0. @ ( PU *EXTERNAL REGISTERS* 0 1 4 5 6 7 2 SIR INT5 INDIRO CHKEY ---CHSAR--40 00 FO* 00 lFE040 WI MNTR STAT1 ----LtBU--00 00 SO lFDFOO* W2 INT4 STAT 2 CTRLO ----SAR2--OS* CO 02 00 000090* PSWO PSWI PSW2 ----SAR1--00 00 000200 00 INT3 STATO ----ICTR--00 02 000200 ICYC INT2 INDIRI --DCRMNT-NIB 94 10 IE FFFFFO FO OP NIB1BF INTI RETRY --TODHI-47 42 000010 FO 00 HREG INTO --TODLO-------D2FBS24 00 SS CHANNEL o AND (*) FIELDS USED TO DISPLAY SCREEN Note: The External Register screen cannot be fast altered. Note: The External Registers screen cannot be saved. ( CHANNEL 0 1 CHDLR 40 CHSYNCO CHDATAO 50 OC CHCOMONR CHSTAT SO 00 CHACMDR CHIMODE EO 40 CHSYNCI CHDATA2 15 AF CHCMDR CHDRSTA 00 00 CHSDBAR CHMISC 02 00 Label Identification Fast Alter External Registers ( 13. Notes: • ( ( ( (: 8. CHDATAO: This byte is the first byte of the channel data register. It is assigned to contain the channel address protect key. It is assigned to obtain device address, device status, interface status and other information from the interface adapter. The channel external address is 1,1. 9. WI: This byte contains the shift length value when WI register is specified as a length parameter. The PU external address is I, O. CPUTIA CCOMPIA ITIMIA 3 Pending machine check interrupt 4' Retry interrupt force 5 Execute transaction in process 6 Restart request 7 Full I-counter trace active Bit 0 1 2 10. MNTR: Monitor external senses certain system status information. The external address is 1,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Start I/O count SVC interrupt I/O interrupt Page fault interrupt UnaSSigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned 17. 3 4 5 6 7 Wl (4) = 0 W2 (0-4) = 0 Invalid decimal format (cumulative) True/complement decimal Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned ACB check enable STA T2: This byte contains status conditions relative to arithmetic, branch, shift. atc. of ALU. The external address is 2,2. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 . STAT1: This byte contains conditions (status) relative to ALU. The external address is 1,2. Bit 0 1 2 INT4: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 2,1. Working stat 0 Working stat 1 Working stat 2 Working stat 3 Channel working stat 0 Channel working stat 1 Instruction length counter Instruction length counter 18. CTRLO: System control register 0 19. SAR2: Three bytes contain the address of operand 2 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. 12. L IBU: Three bytes contain the cache backup address; The external address is 1,5-7. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above ~~~~~~ 20. CHACMDR: One-byte command from the channel asynchronous command register to the channel. The external address is 3,0. 21. CHIMODE: This byte contains gating controls for ACB checking and hardware set latches for PCI and CDA controlling. The Channel external address is 3,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 22. 23. Block-multiplexer mode latch Byte-multiplexer mode latch Enable ACB check latch Hi-speed mode latch Internal interrupt request latch Implement spare latch PCllatch CD prefetch latch CHCMDR: Command register content for this channel. The external address is 5,0. SAR1: Three bytes contain the address of operand 1 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. 26. CHSYNC1: This byte contains conditions as trap addresses, flags, timeout values, etc. The channel external address is 4,0. 27. CHDATA2: This byte contains the sequence count from the channel. The channel external address is 4,1. 28. INT3: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 4,1. BitO ITIMIB 1 . Interrupt key 2 External signal 2 3 External signal 3 4 External signal 4 5 External signal 5 6 External signal 6 7 External signal 7 5 6 7 33. B!t 0 ALU overflow 1 Negative result . 2-Recomplement . 3 Destination = 0 4 ALU carry 51-bit carry 6 Z /*= 0 7 ALU size exception 35. 37. NIB: This byte is the second byte of the NIB. The external address is 5,7. 38. CHSDSAR: Used to address the channel data bus when transferring and receiving data from storage. The channel external address is 6, O. 39. CHMISC: Uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify data in parity, output, ISB and first character transferred. The external address is 6,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Unused Unused Unused Unused Last character mark, valid register Number of bytes ready to channel Number of bytes ready to channel Number of bytes ready to channel data in data transfer across transfer across 370 mode Unconditional I-cycle store error Conditional I-cycle store error Successful branch Execute PU retry mask IB empty Operate latch Signal DIAGM ITIMWRPA ADRMATCH ISTRSTEP Pending machine check interrupt Decrementer adjustment CCOMPIB CPUTIB INDIR1: This byte contains the address which is the R2 or X2 field of the current instruction. The external address is 5,2. 01 parity check Output ISB First character transferred Spare Spare Spare Spare 40. OP: Contains the first byte (byte 0) of the current instruction. It implies 256 op code possibihties. It is driven by the NIB. The PU external address is 6,0. 41. INT1: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 6,1. transfer across Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42. INT2: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 5,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 STATO: This byte contains status conditions of various condition~ in ALU. The external address is 4;2. DCRMNT: This byte contains the decrementer count. Counts down at a rate of one per microsecond. Used to implement system clocks. ICYC: Byte (I-cycle control register) contains status information of I-cycles. It contains I-cycle function and flags. The PU external address is 5,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 34. Data transfer Sequence count I/O instruction load UCW load Misc CCW fetched Interface adapter Interface controller 36. CHDRSTA: Channel data register status. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 PSW1: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display/Alter function Current PSW for byte and bit . significance. The PU external address is 3,1. 25. 29. 31. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - - - ... -•. -----.--- --==--~~-~.-. ICTR: Three bytes contain the starting address of the next instruction. The external address is 4, 5-7. PSWO: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function Current PSW for byte and bit significance. The PU external address is 3,0. PSW2: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function Current PSW for byte and bit significance. The external address is 3,2. _... 30. 32. 24. .....- - - - . 0 1 2 3 4 5 NIBISF: This byte is the second byte of the NIB buffer. The external address isS,7. 45. HREG: This byte contains eight bits that act as status conditions for taking traps. The external address is 7,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 46. Spare Odd branch address - trap level 0 L1 miss - trap level 0 ACB check - trap level 0 DLAT miss - trap level 1 Storage protect check - trap level 1 Block channel traps Channel trap - trap level 2 INTO: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,3. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Interrupt pending PER Pending channel interrupt Pending external interrupt MSVP request Execute interrupt Decrementer = 0 ITIMWRP 47. TODLO: This byte contains the low seven digits of the time-of-day clock and is set by the Store Clock instruction. interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt external interrupt RETRY: This byte contains eight bits that indicate the status conditions relative to a retry operation. The external address is 6,2. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 43. Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Unused Channel 44. _,., Hardstop Sequential processing Instruction processing SS operation Refresh in progress Retry in progress Unretriable section of code System operation TODHI: This byte contains the high six digits of the time-of-day clock and is set by the Store Clock instruction. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above EC 379822 22Sep80 PN 2676431 20f2 44328 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~-.--------.--.-.~--~------.---.--------.--.--.--- .... ~----.------------.------.-.- ..-- .. ----.. ------ .. -----.-----.---.---------.-----~------ ..-------------------... _-------------------------------------- ( ( ( ( ( DISPLAY/ALTER EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QDX 0-5) (GRP 2) ( ( o ( ( ( ( 13. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: XO Display External Registers To select the external register function from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key X and a one-digit address next to SELECTION. Note: Use 0-5 for particular channel desired; the address may be defaulted to zero. 3. Press ENTER. A 64-byte section of the external registers is shown of which the data at the selected address is included. CHANNEL PU *EXTERNAL REGISTERS* 0 1 2 4 567 SIR INT5 INDIRO CHKEY -.-CHSAR--40 00 FO* 00 lFE040 CHDATAO WI MNTR STAT 1 ----L1BU--OC 00 00 80 lFDFOO* CHSTAT W2 INT4 STAT2 CTRLO ----SAR2--00 00 08* CO 02 000090* CHIMODE PSWO PSWI PSW2 ----SAR1--40 00 00 00 000200 CHDATA2 INT3 STAT 0 ----ICTR--AF 02 00 000200 CHDRSTA ICYC INT2 INDIRI --DCRMNT-NIB FFFFFO 00 94 10 IE FO CHMISC OP INTI RETRY --TODHI-NIB1BF 47 00 00 42 000010 FO HREG INTO --TODLO-------D2FB824 00 88 CHANNEL o AND (*) FIELDS USED TO DISPLAY SCREEN 0 CHDLR 40 CHSYNCO 50 CHCOMONR 80 CHACMDR EO CHSYNCI 15 CHCMDR 00 CHSDBAR 02' 1 4341 The External Register screen cannot be altered. The next higher/lower 64-byte section can be displayed by using the paging keys. 16. Label Identification Note: The External Register screen cannot be fast-altered. Save External Registers Note: The External Registers screen cannot be saved. 1. CHDLR: Contains the count value of the channel data length register. The channel external address is 0.0. 9. W1: This byte contains the shift length value when WI register is specified as a length parameter. The PU external address is 1. O. 10. 2. SIR: This byte contains data which determines the number of bits or bytes that are to be shifted. The PU external address is 0.0. 3. INT5: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The external address is 0.1. Channel 0 interrupt request Channel 1 interrupt request Channel 2 interrupt request Channel 3 interrupt request Channel 4 interrupt request Channel 5 interrupt request Unused Reset ADDRMATCH 5 6 7 11. 3 .4 5 6 7 6. CHSAR: Three-byte address invoked when the channel is used. The external address is 0, 5-7. 7. CHSYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync 0 register. The Channel external address is 1,0. 8. CHDATAO: This byte is the first byte of the channel data register. It is assigned to obtain device address, device status, interface status and other information from the interface aqapter. The channel external address is 1,1. 12. 5 6 7 Wl (4) = 0 W2 (0-4) = 0 Invalid decimal format (cumulative) True/complement decimal Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned ACB check enable CPUTIA CCOMPIA ITIMIA Pending machine check interrupt Retry interrupt force Execute transaction in process Restart request Full I-counter trace active 17. STAT2: This byte contains status conditions relative to arithmetic, branch, shift, etc. of ALU. The external address is 2,2. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 STAT1: This byte contains conditions (status) relative to ALU. The external address is 1.2. Bit 0 1 2 5. CHKEY: Bits 0-3 are key bits; 4-7 are unimplemented bits, sourced as zero. The external address is 0,4. Start I/O count SVC interrupt I/O interrupt Page fault interrupt Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned INT4: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 2,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 MNTR: Monitor external senses certain system status information. The external address is 1.1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 4. INDIRO: This byte contains the address that is the Rl field of the current instruction. The external address is 0.2. @IBM Corp. 198' Spare = 0 Incorrect length latch Prog or Prot check latch Spare = 0 Channel data check latch Channel control check latch Spare = 0 Chaining check latch 15. W2: This byte contains the shift length value when W2 register is specified as a length parameter. It may also serve as a loop counter. The PU external address is 2,0. Data is displayed in hexadecimal. Fast-Alter External Registers 370 mode Can source other externals LCA meter in Microword channel control check Storage busy Valid transfer-in-channel (TIC) Valid command chain CCW Valid chain data CCW CHSTAT: This byte contains hardware set channel status indicators. The channel external address is 6,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ==> Notes: o 6 7 14. ,, CHCOMONR: This byte contains the channel control bits in the common register. The channel external address is 2,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 INSTR STOP Alter External Registers . ( ( 6 7 18. Working stat 0 Working stat 1 Working stat 2 Working stat 3 Channel working stat 0 Channel working stat 1 Instruction length counter Instruction length counter CTRLO:System control register 0 19; SAR2: Three bytes contain the address of operand 2 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. L1BU: Three bytes contain the cache backup address. The external address is 1. 5- 7. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676431 1 of 2 44 329f \ , ---~-------~---. -.-------.-------~------~-------"------ -.-~----- --- _._..__. ----- 20. CHACMDR: One-byte command from the channel asynchronous command register to the channel. The external address is 3,0. 21. CHIMODE: This byte contains gating controls for ACB checking and hardware set latches for PCI and CDA controlling. The Channel external address is 3,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 22. ---.----------------------~~ Block-multiplexer mode latch Byte-multiplexer mode latch Enable ACB check latch Data stream mode latch Internal interrupt request latch Implement spare latch PCllatch CD prefetch latch 24. PSW2: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and bit significance. The external address is 3,2. 25. SAR1: Three bytes contain the address of operand 1 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. 26. CHSYNC1: This byte contains conditions as trap addresses, flags, timeout values, etc. The channel external address is 4,0. 27. CHDATA2: This byte contains the sequence count from the channel. The channel external address is 4,1. 28. INT3: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 4,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 29. 31. CHCMDR: Command register content for this channel. The external address is 5,0. The types of commands are: Data transfer Sequence count I/O instruction load UCW load Misc CCW fetched Interface adapter Interface controller ITIMIB Interrupt key External signal External signal External signal External signal External signal External signal 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 6 7 Bit 0 ALU overflow 1 Negative result 2 Recomplement 3 Destination = 0 4 ALU carry 51-bit carry 6 Z /*= 0 7 ALU size exception 35. 37. NIB: This byte is the second byte of the NIB. The external address is 5,7. 38. CHSDBAR: Used to address the channel data buffer when transferring and receiving data from storage. The channel external address is 6, O. 39. CHMISC: Uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify data in parity, output, ISB and first character transferred. The external address is 6,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Unused Unused Unused Unused Last character mark, valid register Number of bytes ready to channel Number of bytes ready to channel Number of bytes ready to channel data in data transfer across 41. INT1: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 6,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 370 mode Unconditional I-cycle store error Conditional I-cycle store error Successful branch Execute PU retry mask IB empty Operate latch 42. Signal DIAGM ITIMWRPA ADRMATCH ISTRSTEP Pending machine check interrupt Decrementer adjustment CCOMPIB CPUTIB INDIR1: This byte contains the address which is the R2 or X2 field of the current instruction. The external address is 5,2. 0 1 2 3 4 5 NIBIBF: This byte is the second byte of the NIB buffer. The external address is 6,7. 45. HREG: This byte contains eight bits that act as status conditions for taking traps. The external address is 7,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 INTO: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,3. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 47. interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt Spare Odd branch address - trap level 0 L1 miss - trap level 0 ACB check - trap level 0 DLAT miss - trap level 1 Storage protect check - trap level 1 Block channel traps Channel trap - trap level 2 Interrupt pending PER Pending channel interrupt Pending external interrupt MSVP request Execute interrupt Decrementer = 0 ITIMWRP TODLO: This byte contains the low seven digits of the time-of-day clock and is set by the Store Clock instruction. el ---- ---~--~- Hardstop Sequential processing Instruction processing SS operation Refresh in progress Retry in progress Unretriable section of code System operation TODHI: This byte contains the high SIX digits of the time-of-day clock and is set by the Store Clock instruction. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 "~_ '<., . '''-' r)OI'~)OOO"Oi .i . i I.. " \;l j C,.1 \: It ~; . . Ii'.'" .' O')'O~)~)O'OOO" O£)OOOO'O' . . ~ ./.: .i' .'. .it .. PN 2676431 (~J) ['l " . O~~)O· . .. ' 44 330f 2 of 2 U OO()O I,. .... :. ( ( ( ( DISPLAY/ALTER SP STORAGE (QDW) Display SP Storage To select the SP Storage function from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key Wand a four-digit address next to SELECTION. The four digits represent an SP address and range from 0 to FFFF. The address is defaulted to zero if no address is entered. 3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of SP storage containing the selected address is displayed. Alter SP Storage Notes: • There is no full-screen alter for SP Storage. • Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal. • The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be displayed by using the paging keys. • The Translate option is applicable to the SP Storage display. • The SP storage address can be modified by placing a (+) to add or (-) to subtract from the address keyed next to SELECTION. An example is shown on the aDV screen. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until a new value is entered or you select another screen that is not a Display/Alter screen. You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an addrflss. No address entered defaults to zero. The data appears in the normal area as though it were at the selected address, but the data is actually that data located at the adjusted address, even though the address under label ADRS is that from the address on the SELECTION line. You can key a new address or use the PAGE key, and you still get the data from the adjusted address. The address plus the Adjusted Value might cause the screen to have a twos-complement negative number. • The SP Storage function can be altered only by the Block function. © IBM Corp. 1979 ( (/ ( Fast Alter SP Storage *0 ISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: W0000 SP STORAGE +0 ADRS 0000 1234 0010 +2 5678 AOJUST=+0000 +4 +6 +8 9000 0010 0001 +A 0380 +C 0191 +E 0000 Note: There is no fast alter for SP storage. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Save SP Storage. 0020 4004 lC00 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0030 FE82 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0040 0000 0000 A800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0E0F 0050 1011 1213 F6F7 F800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0060 800F 8000 0000 0000 9999 9999 9999 0000 0070 A0C4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Eight bytes of SP storage can be saved by the Block function. An example of how you can save SP storage data is QDWxxxxxxxx? Note: You can use the 7 op code to verify if data exists at the address before altering that data. This feature is very helpful while running a block. After the 7, enter any number of digits for the. data that should be at that address. You can alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code, such as (=). If the data at that address does not match, no alter occurs. If you have no match, and the data you are matching and the data which you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur. An example of how this command is used is: QDWxxxxxxxxF1 F2F3.... =F5F6F7 .... I I I I I I I I Atter data I I Compare data I I Match address EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379598 15Apr80 ,----_.__._-_._-- PN 5666377 1 of 2 44335 - ---- -~--~-- DISPLAY/ALTER CONSOLE DISK FilE (QOD) Fast Alter Console Disk File *0 ISPLAYjALTER* GGENERALRE.G ISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOAT I NG POI NT REG ISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE o CONSOLE DISK FILE HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: 0900000047 Display Console Disk File To select the Console Disk File function from the O-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key 0 and a four-digit module 10 and four-digit byte offset next to SELECTION. The console module 10 has values of 000l-FFFE (hex). The byte offset is defaulted to zero. 3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte section of data is shown based on the selected module 10. Alter Console Disk File 10=9000 AOJUST=+0000 +2 BYTES +0 +4 0000 8012 3465 0000 Note: There is no fast alter for Console Disk File. 0010 0000 0000 000C 0000 0000 0550 0DA0 0000 Save Console Disk File 0020 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0030 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 0A67 F000 0000 Eight bytes of data of the Console Oisk File can be saved by the Block function, beginning with the starting address. An example of how you can save the console disk file data is QOOxxxxxxxx? 0040 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0050 0000 0000 000A 00B5 4346 0000 0000 0000 0060 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0070 0000 A4E4 0360 0000 0000 0000 0330 0000 ==> I NSTR Notes: STOP Note: You can use the 7 op code to verify if data exists at the address before altering that data. This feature is helpful while running a block. After the 7, enter any number of digits for the data that should be at that address. You can alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code, such as (=). If the data at that address does not match, no alter occurs. If you have no. match, and the data you are matching and the data which you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur. 4341 There is no full screen alter for the Console Disk File. • LAODR=2000 ' FLS IZE=07D2 +C +E +A +6 +8 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340 An example of how this command is used is: Data is displayed in hexadecimal. The Translate option is applicable to the Console Disk File display. The Console Disk File address may be modified by placing a (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address keyed next to SELECTION. An example is shown on the ODV screens. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until a new value is entered or you select another screen that is not a Display/Alter screen. The Adjust Value also is reset if new Module IDs are selected. You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an address. No address entered defaults to zero. The data appears in the normal area as though it were at the selected address, but the data is actually that data located at the adjusted address, even though the address under label ADRS is that from the address on the SELECTION line. You can key a new address or use the PAGE key, and you still get the data from the adjusted address. The address plus the Adjusted Value might cause the screen to have a twos-complement negative number. , ," , ," , , , Compare data QOOxxxxxxxxFl F2F3 .... =F5F6F7 .... The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary of a disk file can be displayed by using the paging keys. , , Match address Console Disk File Labels Type Description 10 Module 10 of the file Address adjust value Load address of the module Linked file size of the module AOJUST LAOOR FLSIZE , Alter data ,.,:' The Console Disk File function can be altered only by the Block function. EC 379586 19Nov79 EC 379598 15Apr80 PN 5666377 44340 2 of 2 () o o 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0,·,'. " o 00 ~ 00 o o 00 o o 00 o o o ,0 00 ( ( ( ( ( ( (~ "" ,'". (" ( (. ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT SCREENS The insert/extract function is a form of the display/alter function, except that it uses scan rings. Therefore, insert/ extract is slower than display / alter. The insert/extract function is used in CE mode only. Each screen can have up to six functions: Display Alter Fast-Alter Paging Save from a Block Alter from a Block For many screens, entering the Fast-Alter command with nothing after the op code (for example, QVI22=) causes the data at the specified address to be shown on the SELECTION line after the op code. This is useful as a check when performing fast-alter using screens without full-screen alter. ( (, ( ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT (QV) The Insert/Extract Facilities screen (QV) lists facilities on the left portion of the screen. *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* INSERT/E~TRACT ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE MMS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING WCOMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: To select the QV screen: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key QV next to SELECTION. 5. Press ENTER. Notes: The PU clock can be stopped by the W-command. The clock can be stopped after invoking the QV facilities screen, but must be stopped prior to invoking any facility screen other than QVS or QVW. ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 The insert/extract function must be executed when the PU is in the hard stop state with the exception of the Status Scan Ring (QVS) screen and the W-command (QVW). These can be executed in any state. Use the Operation Rate screen functions (QOM or QOC) to hardstop the PU, or if necessary use the W-command (20 or 2E). The CLOCK STOP message is displayed in the system status area to indicate this state. To return the processor back to its normal state: If QOM or QOC was used, enter QON next to SELECTION and press ENTER. This resets any previously selected state and the processor remains in the hardstop state. Pressing the START key resumes normal operation. If W2D or W2E was used, enter W2F next to SELECTION and press ENTER. This resets any previously selected state and the processor remains in the hard stop state. Entering W30 and pressing ENTER resumes normal operation. Be careful when using the W-command. Although it can be issued in any state, the PU may have to be set to a particular state for this command to function properly. The START key is disabled during the insert/extract function, except after the ENTER key has been pressed. If the scan data has been altered and the START key is pressed instead of ENTER, the alter is voided, and the screen data is redisplayed along with an error message. However, the alter occurs if the fast-alter function is performed. The screen can be displayed regardless of parity errors. The facilities are always parity corrected, when any of them is altered (updated), except in hardware fault conditions. Bad parity fields are intensified on the screen. The Insert/Extract screens can also be displayed by selecting Q % (for example Q % Bxx instead of QVBxx). This eliminates all clock status checking. Any insert/extract selection can then be made regardless of the state of the three clocks in the processing unit. Note: This feature should be used only if the state of the clocks is known. The scanning process alters a ring if the clocks are running. Model Groups 1 and 2 @ IBM Corp. 1979. 1981 EC 379604 05Dec80 EC 379607 05Jun81 PN 5666378 1 of 2 44345 ---,I I Display Arrays Facilities To select the Arrays facility from the nv screen: 1. Key noc or nOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key A next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: Fourteen arrays are displayed on the right portion of the screen. , This screen does not appear if the Fast Alier function is executed. A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q. GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: A AL AP AD AN PU LS PU RETRY LS CHNL DATA BUFFER CHNL CONTROL AS AC AT AB AU AH AY AF AG AR SWAP BUFFER COtrrROL STORAGE TRAP/BAL STACK CSAR BACKUP PU DLAT CHNL DLAT KEY LI DIR LI CACHE DATA CACHE RETRY DATA I An Array screen contains addresses and data. Each address is associated with a group of data called an element. A element is the logical unit of an array. The address of the element appears on the screen directly to the left of it. This address is in hexadecimal with a zero origin. ARRAYS *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* • I Array Addressing INSERT/EXTRACT ARRAYS (aVA) I Arrays can also be addressed to the byte level by concatenating a digit to the right of the element address. This digit is the subscript or offset of the byte postion within the element. Byte subscripts ate in hexadecimal and with a zero origin. These numbers appear on the top of the screen as a row of values. Example: ARRAY ELEMENT ADDRESS ==> BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE o 1 2 ) 4 5 6 7 000 001 002 00) 004 005 CLOCK STOP 4341 lOA lOB 10C 100 10E 10F xx To obtain address of byte XX: 1. Element address = IOF 2. Byte subscript into element = 7 3. Address of byte XX = 10F7 To display an Array screen that has more than one page, an address js required on the SELECTION line. This address consists' of the minimum number of most significant (left side) digits of an element address sufficient to define a page of the array. A specific element address can be specified. The address is truncated to the minimum information needed to display a page of the array. The displayed page COntains the specific element address specified. Notes: To perform a Screen Alter (for example, to place data in the input fields), you must always leave the address on the SELECTION line. If the address is erased or changed, the alter is not successful. To perform a Fast-Alter (i.e. address and data on the SELECTION line), the full element address must be specified. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379604 050ec80 EC379607 06Jun81 , r) ',-- o o 00 o o 0 0 0 o o o 0000 o 00 0" o o 0 0 :.~, " o PN 5666378 44350 20f2 o o o o 0·' ., o o o ---_. (~ (- (, (- ( ('- ( (' ( ( (-- -_ _-.. (' - - - - - - - . - - - -- (- ('- - - - - - - .. ~ _.- . ('. (~' ('- ·INSERT/EXTR~CT· To display the local Store array from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key ace or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AL plus a block number (0 through 7 hex) next to SELECTION; the block number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: o toe", $lor. is displryed a block at a tima. o The data is displryed in hex. o The full $Crean ".. a two-digit number to the left of the data. This is the block number and a lin. number. o A S K I B M H C ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE CS HARDWARE MS HARDWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING WCOMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS LOCAL STORE (QVAL) 0 2 4 00 0000 0000 0000 1. Display the selected block as in the preceding steps. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and key in the new data. 6 0000 a *01 0000 2 0000 4 0000 6 0000 02 0000 0000 0000 0000 *03 0000 0000 0000 0000 Olt 0000 0000 0000 0000 *05 0000 0000 0000 0000 3. Press ENTER. 06 0000 0000 0000 0000 *07 0000 0000 0000 0000 4. Key OVA (Arrays screenl next to SELECTION followed by: clock. (1) 08 0000 0000 0000 0000 *09 0000 0000 0000 0000 OA 0000 0000 0000 0000 *OB 0000 0000 0000 0000 OC 0000 0000 0000 0000 *00 0000 0000 0000 0000 SELECT OE PROG SYS SELECTION: ALO 0000 0000 0000 0000 *OF 0000 0000 0000 0000 Q GENERAL Z RTRN TO 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU (2) (31 (41 (51 L identifies the array as local store. 0-7 represents a digit of a block number. O-F represents a digit of a line number within the block. Op code • (MOVEI, 8& (AND), / (OR). Hex data 5. Press ENTER. ='"'> E....p/o, CLOCK STOP d... Op cod. Una number Block number Local store To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities one of the array subscreens: screen or from 1. Invokfl steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter local Store. Notes: 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. o SfJ11C8S batwean charsctar. ar. de/tiled befor. the command i. analyzed. Save Local Store o Up to 16 digit. can be "'tered. The antire screan, with cheng••, i. written bllck into the arrry. Eight bytes (18 digits), an element, of local store can be saved by the Block function. The local Store array has 128 elements. The format is: aVAI.xx? • The mi.pllICemant or absartt:e of en op cod. fJ'oduces en error, and altaring dt/lllS not OCI:ur. o The op cod. MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or OR. with the data in the selected loctttion(s). o A parlod (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. When the oparation is eXlICuted, thet digit i. unaffected. o A W-command also $lops the PU clock. CD IBM Corp. 1919, 1980 t _ av'l::~.3 (4) (3) (2) (1) 4341 EC 379598 15Apr8O EC 379807 22Sep8O . (''\ (' (~ ( To fast alter from any screen other .than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (aV) or one of the array subscreens (OVAl: This arrry can be paged. Alter Local Store c (' (' ( Fast Alter Local Store INSERT/EXTRACT LOCAL STORE (OVAL) Display Local Store ("- PN5666379 10f2 44 355 C c\ (-~ ( I~ ~-------~----~~~ ---~-----~---~ ----~--.--~ -.---~---~.~-~-~ ~----'-~~-~ INSERT/EXTRACT PU RETRY LOCAL STORE (QVAP) 5. Press ENTER. Example: Display PU Retry Local Store To display PU Retry Local Store array from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTiON to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AP plus an array number (0 or 1) to select the first or second array. followed by a 0 or 1 to select the first or second half of the arrey. The array number and the first or SCICOnd half of the arrey can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. FFBIT 1 OTHERFF 18F8 FA18 7DCO 1_7F REFBIT 4 6 LIN 0 4 2 6 0000 01B8 *001 0000 0000 0000 01B8 Q GENERAL OOE SELECT TO PROG SYS SELECTION: APOO Z RTRN Notes: • *INSERT/EXTRACT*LS RETRY (QVAP) 1 LIN 0 2 0000 0000 A ARRAYS 000 S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 002 0000 0000 IPU HARDWARE 00_ 0000 0000 8 CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE 0000 0000 H CHANNEL HARDWARE 006 C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS 0000 0000 R SCAN RING 008 Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC OOA 0000 0000 T ADDRESS TRANSLAT 0000 0000 G SET CSAR ADDRESS OOC 0000 0000 • Dat. is entared .nd displayed in hex. This arrey can be paged. 01B8 *003 0000 0000 0000 0188 0000 01Ba *005 0000 0000 0000 0188 0000 01B8 *007 0000 0000 0000 0188 0000 01B8 *009 0000 0000 0000 0188 0000 01B8 *OOB 0000 0000 0000 01B8 Not..: 0000 01B8 *000 0000 0000 0000 01B8 • 0000 01B8 *OOF 0000 OUOO 0000 01B8 Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is a'18lyzed. When the operation is executed, ther digit is unaffected. • Up to 16 digits, an eltHnfInt, can btl altlH'ed. The entire screen, with chang... is written back into the arrllV. • The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an IH'ror and aftaring d,.. not occur. • The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s}. • A period (.) serves . . . digit place holder in the d.t..~ When the oper.tion is executed, this position is unaffected. the preceding steps. • A W-commend also stops the PU clock. 2. Move the CUntOl' below the location(s) to be altered. and key the new data. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. To fast all8r from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from one of the arrays subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter PU Retry Local Store." ==> _3_1 Alter PU Retry Local Store 1. Displey the selected array of PU,Retry Local Store as in (4) Une number (3) Un. number (2) Arrey (1) PU Retry LS arrey 0000 PU Rtltry Local Store is mllde up of two arreys. Each arrey has 32 /ina (00-1F), and each /ine is eight bytes fong (0-7). • 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: Fast Alter PU Retry Local Store To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the array (OVA) subscreens: (1) P identifies the array as PU Retry Local Store. (2) (3) 0 for the first array. 1 for the second array. (4) (5) (6) 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU Label Identification 0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number. O-F r6presents a low-order digit of a line number. Op code· (MOVE). 8& (AND). / (OR). Hex data. LIN: Identifies. left to right. displeyed array of Local Storage clock. Retry and a two-digit line number. Zero identifies the first arrey: one identifies the second arrey. These eight bytes are sometimes called elements. 3. Press ENTER. Save PU Retry Local Store QVAP~'~.I~F~ttf~.F,:ex data L(5) Opcode Eight byt.. (18 dig~). an element. of PU Retry Local Store can be saved by the Block function. PU Retry Local Store hn 64 elementa. The format is OVAPxxx1. FFBIT and OTHERFF: Addresses one of the two Local Store Retry arrays used to save Retry data. The first digit in the array defines the Local Store Ratry array. REFBIT: Addresses one element in the active Local Store Retry array where a doubleword is saved from the Local Stor,; array. The sacond and third digits of the array element add;ess define the element. Example: FFBIT OTHERFF o a o 1 a t 1 Bit position of an 'ON' Bit in REFBIT -. Element Address Currently Used to Save Retr'f Data xx x'20'+xx x'20'+xx xx 1 Oxx lxx lxx Oxx where 00 $ xX.$ 'IF' EC 379598 15AprBO EC 379807 22SepBO i J 0000000 f e I o o o o 0000 PN 5666379 2 of 2 44 360 I I ~' )j., 00 o o 000 o o 00 o o o .< O 0 ,' ,!, I ( (~ ( (", (' (' '.->-' (,' (' ,- (" ( f (- ( (,' C~( (~" (" <. f' (' INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL DATA BUFFER (aVAD) (- ( ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE CS HARDWARE MS HARDWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING V CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS To display the Channel Data Buffer from the Array (OVAl screen: 1. Kay OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Kay AD plus a channel number (0-5) and a line number (0- F) next to SELECTION. The channel and line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRM TO PROG SVS SELECTION: ADOO Alter Channel Data Buffer Example: , CHANNEL DATA BUFFER (QVAD) . ADRS 0 4 2 A S K I B M H C Display Channel Data Buffer CHANNEL 0 (- ( (" QVADO~'~S-~F[:~::~ex data L(S) Opcode 0000 0000 8 0000 A 0000 C E 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00011 0000 To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen the array subscreens: 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Channel Data Buffer." 5 , 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ODeD 0000 Nom.: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 • Spaces between cherecters are deleted bllfore the command is analyzed. 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 • Up to 16 digits CIIIJ be altered. The entire screen. with changes. is written back into the array. • The misplBCtNTIIHJt or abs_ of an op code produces an error, and altering dOllS not otY.ur. • The op code MOVES the data to. ANDs with. or ORs with the d.t. in the se/ected location(s). . ==> 4341 To alter the Channel Data Buffer from the Array (OVA) (4) Un. number (3) Une number (2) Chennel number (1) Chsnnsi Data Buffer array or one of A period (.J is • digit place holder in tllll data. When the oper.tion is executed. this digit is unaffected. screen: 1. Display the selected channel data buffer as in the preceding stepa. Fast Alter Channel Data Buffer 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. To fa,t altar from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen IOV) or one of the Array (aVA) subscreens: Notes: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. • Data Is entered and displayed in hex. 2. Kay OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop thePU clock. • Sixteen lines of eight bytes ate displayed by using an eddrtlS!l value of 0 or 8. The first 16 lines are addrllSSllbie by selecting the first line (00). The second '6 lines are addressable by selecting the 17th line (address 80). For Display/Alter, only one digit of the line number is required. For Save or Fast Select. both digits of the line number are required. • (, 0000 0 Note: Rllfer to tllll"/nSlH't/ExtrllCt Control Stofe (QVAC)" and rtNillW the Warning before proceeding with this procedure. kay in the naw data. ( 5. Press ENTER. *INSERT/EXTRACT* 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and ( 4. Key aVA (Arrays screenl next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 3. Press ENTER. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. • A doulJ/eword on a doub/aword boundary can be altered with a fast-BIter command. 0 identifies the array as Channel Data E:uffer. 0-5 identifies which channel is selected. O-F represents a high-order digit of a line. 0 or 8 represents a low-order digit of aline number. Op code • (MOVE). Sa (AND). / (OR). Hex data. Label Identification CHANNEL: Identifies the channa! is selected. ADR5-vertical: Represents a high-order. addressable line number. ADR5-horizontal: Represents a low-order, addressable line number. This e,,1IY can be paged. Save Channel Data Buffar Eight bytes (16 digits) of the Channel Data Buffer can be saved by the Block function. The format i~ QVADcxx? EC 379598 15AprSO EC 379807 22Sep80 o IBM Corp. 1979, 1980 i I PN 5666380 44365 10f2 ,.i' . t I- " (~ ('- C Fast Alter Channel Control INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL CONTROL (aVAN) *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* Display Channel Control To display the Channel Control from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AN next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. . Alter Channel Control A S K I B M ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS !N SYSTEM PU HARDWARE CS HARDWARE MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS CHANNEL CONTROL 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. CHANNEL 0: 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHANNEL 1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHANNEL 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHANNEL 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHANNEL 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHANNEL 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SElS:CTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) N identifies the array as channel control. (2) (31 (41 (51 0-5 identifies which channel is selected. 0-1 represents a digit of a line number. Op code • (MOVE). 8& (ANDI. / (ORI. Four bytes of hex data (eight digits max). 5. Press ENTER. Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AN To alter the Channel Control from the Array (OVA) screen: To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscroens: (QVAN) Example: QVANOI-FI••F2.F L-(5) Hex data Op code ~~ ==> 4341 1. Display channel control as in the preceding steps. L-(4) (3) (2) (I) 2. Move the euraor below the location(s) to be altered. and key the new data. U". number Chan"" number Chan"" Control array 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. Notes: To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from (';'e of the Array sublereens: • Data is entered and displayed in hex. 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Channel Control." • Label CHANNEL identifies each of six channels and the first two lines of four bytes each. Notes: • This array cannot be paged. • Spaces between characters are deleted btlfore the command is analyzed. • Up to eight digits can be altered. The entire scrHn, with changes, is written back into the array. • The misplllCement or absence of an op code produces an error, and altering does not occur. Save Channel Control Four bytes (eight digitsl of channel control can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVANcxl. ," The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the _Iacted location(s). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the oparation is eXlICuted, this digit is unaffacted. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep8O I I ! "I • I f ~ I 3000000000000000 '. .~ PN 5666380 44370 2012 l! ,~ ! ~ 0000000000000000 (-- C (-- (" (" ./ ( (~' (" (' (- ('- f (- (- C ( ( (- INSERT/EXTRACT SWAP BUFFER (QVAS) To display the Swap Buffer from the array (OVA) screen: 1, Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AS and the line number (O-F) next to SELECTION. If the line number is not speCified it defaults to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Swap Buffer To alter the Swap Buffer from the array (OVA) screen: (' (- ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (-' ( (\ Fast Alter Swap Buffer * INSERT IEXTRACT Display Swap Buffer (, SWAP BUFFER (l 2 (Q.VAS) 4 6 4 6 To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. a a 0000 0000 0000 0000 *1 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 *3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 *5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 *7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 *9 0000 0000 0000 0000 A 0000 0000 0000 0000 *8 0000 0000 0000 0000 C 0000 0000 0000 0000 *0 0000 0000 0000 0000 Q. GENERAL SElECT E Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AS 0000 0000 0000 0000 *F 0000 0000 0000 0000 A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS ==> 1. Display the Swap Buffer as in the preceding steps. 2. Key ooe or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) = S. Press ENTER. III Example: QVASF"F1 ..F2F.3 4341 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and key in the new data. S identifies the array as Swap Buffer. O-F represents a line number. Op code (MOVE). lit (AND). / (OR). Hex data. I 141 HOK dat. (3J Op code (2J Une number . (1 J Swap Buffer array 3. Leave the selection line unchanged. and press ENTER. To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from one of the array subscreens: Notes: 1. Invoke steps 4 and S of It Fast Alter Swap Buffer." o Data is entered and displayed in hex. Notes: o Only the first 16 lines (O-FJ are addressable. o o Sixteen lines of the Swap Buffer are displayed. Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. o This array c:annot be paged. o Up to 16 digits can be altered. The entire screen. with changes, is written back into the array. o Save Swap Buffer o Eight bytes (16 digits) of the swap buffer can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVASx7. o o The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error, and altering does not occur. The op code MOVES the data to. ANDs with, or DRs with the data in the selected location(s}. A period (.J is a digit place holder in the hex data. When the operation is executed. this digit is unaffected. A W-command also stops the PU clock. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 @ IBM Corp. 1979. 1980 PN 5666381 1 of 3 I 1 44 375 I -1 ! I ----------- - --~---------------------------------~-----~- . . ~ ·4 Fast Alter Control Store INSERT/EXTRACT CONTROL STORE (QVAC) *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* . Display Control Store To display Control Store from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AC and a one-to-five-digit hex address next to SELECTION. The address can be defaulted to zero. See Notes. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Control Store To alter Control Store from the Array (OVA) screen: A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE 101 loiS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q. GENERAL SELECT CONTROL STORE (Q.VAC) ADRS 0 4 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 8 0000 A 0000 To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Elltract facilities screen (aV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: C 0000 E 0000 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 0002 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 3. Press ENTER. 0003 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0004 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0005 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0006 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0007 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Note: Before continuing, read Control Store (OV AC) Warning. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: ACOOOOO 1. Display the data at Control Store address as in the above steps. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and key in the n_ data. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. ==> 4341 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) C identifies the array as control storage. 0- F represents a digit of the address. 0- F represents a digit of the address. O-F represents a digit of the address. O-F represents a digit of the address. 0.4.8, or C represents a digit of the address. Op code" (MOVE). & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. Ex_~" ~lr~Ft!,~f~ex data L-m Opcode Not. .: • Data is entered and displayed in hex. • Control Store is displayed on a.quadword (t6-byte) boundary with the selected address in the first line. . .....- ~ • Eight quadwords (16 bytes) are displayed per screen selection. ..... ,., The control store address must be no greater than the size specified in the Configuration screen. , (B) Address digit (5) Address d~g~t (4) Address digit (3) Address d~g~t 12} Address digit (1) Control Store array To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Control Store." This array can bfI paged. label Identification Save Control Store A doubl_ord (8 bytes) of data in Control Store can be saved by the Block function. The exception is a last word of a page. In which case eight digits can be saved and zero filled for the remaining eight digits. The format is aVACxxxxx? ADRS-vertical: Represents up to a four-digit addressable line number. ADRS-horizontal: Represents a single-digit of an addressable line number. Note: The save address must be on a word boundary. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22SepSO a PN 5666381 2 of 3 44380 t 000000000 0000000 00000 000000000 ( (-' ( (' ( "- -- (-- ( ( - Control Store (QVAC) Warning Warning: If you have a screen filled with FFs or most of the screen filled with FFs. use the following steps to avoid entering invalid data into the control store array. 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Press the START key several times. 4. Press ENTER.- The screen should be redisplayed correctly. Notes: • If you have doubts about the validity of your control store data after you display. re-IML the processor. • When the PU is forcing II trapword. control storage cannot be displayed because all positions may show up as Fs. The write operation still works: so be careful not to cause an alter that writes the Fs back into the array. By microword-stepping one or more times and redisplaying by pressing the ENTER key again. the screen can be corrected. However. this condition does not occur if the machine is first softstopped and then hardstopped by going into microwordCstep operation rate (OOMI. Note that Control Store screen is not affected by microword-stepping. but the other arrays and facilities may be. ( (- ( c' ( Label Identification *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* CONTROL STORE (Q,VAC) ADRS 09F8 0 FFFF 2 4 FFFF FFFF 6 FFFF 8 FFF- A FFFF C FFFF E FFFF ADRS-vertical: Represents up to a four-digit addressable line number. 09F9 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FrFF 09FA FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF ADRS-horizontal: Represents a single-digit of an addressable line number. 09FB FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF r:-FFF' FFFF FFFF FFFF 09FC FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 09FD FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 09FE FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF 09FF Q, GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AC09F80 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA·CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 This array can be fast selected by keying OVAC and O. 4. 8. or C and - next to SELECTION and pressing ENTER. RNd Warning above before attempting. • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • Up to 16 digits can be altered. The addresses are variable such that the first four digits may be used or eliminated as needed. However. the fifth digit /0. 4. 8. or CI must always be used. The address is padded with zeroes and right justified if the full five-digit address is not used. Last word of a page address (for example. 7C or FCI alters only eight digits. The entire screen. with changes. is written back into tha array. The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and altering does not occur. Th/fJ op code MOVES the data to. ANDs with. or DRs with the data in the selected location(s). The address must be on a word boundary and not exceed the size specified in the Configuration screen. • A period (.1 is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is e1Cecuted. this digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 I PN 5666381 3 of 3 44385 oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT TRAP/BAL STACK (QVAT) ( ( 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. PIWIS ENTER. 3. Key AT next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Trap/BAL Stack To alter Trap/SAL Stack from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display the Trap/SAL Stack screen as in the preceding A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE MMS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS III (QVAT) 0 TRAPO ADDR 000000 STATO B4 STAT2 BF INDIR1 A9 TRAP1 000000 B4 BF A9 2 TRAP2 000000 B4 BF A9 3 BAL 000000 B4 BF A9 LN To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter Trap/SAL Stack. Notes: 000000 5 BAll 000000 • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. 6 BAL2 000000 • Up to 72 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. • The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and altering does not occur. • The op code MOVES the data to, AlVDs with, or DRs with the data in the selected location(s). • Data left to right: Trap Address (six digits), Status 0 (two digits), Status 2 (two digits) and I-reg 1 (two digits). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AT ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. Notes: • This array cannot be paged. Save Trap/BAL Stack Fast Alter Trap/BAL Stack To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Three bytes of the address and three bytes of the status information can be saved by the Siock function. The format is OVATx7. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU . clock. 3. Press ENTER. Dp code Une number Trap/SAL array BALO 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key the new data. Control store trap and SAL return addresses are displayed, as well as status 0, status 2, and I-reg 7 bytes. Hexd"" L(4) (3) (2) (7) 4 steps. • (' Example: QVAT3-F7 .. F2F3 *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* TRAP IBAL STACK To display Trap/SAL Stack from the Array (OVA) screen: ( 5. Press ENTER. (GRP 2) Display Trap/BAL Stack . 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION fonowed by: (1) (2) (3) . (4) T identifies the array as Trap-SAL. A line number can have the value of 0-6. This range is dependent upon the machine's control store size. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. • SAL0-3 can be altered only on machines with Control Store Type 2. Label Identification LN: An addressable line number. ADDR: Control store address used for returning from TRAP or SAL. STATO: Status register O. Contains ALU information. STAT2: Status register 2. Contains microword type information. INDIR1: Indirect register 1. Contains information used for addressing local store. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above o IBM Corp. 1980 --- --_.,.... "~ _ _--_ .. ....- --------- ------- ... .. _-- ..... _._---_. . :.... ,- ....: :~ -:'-':.'~.:... ".... .. ~ " .... ..... ,." __ ._ .. __._- --.--~------- --~---- .-.-------------.. -.----.-----.---~ ~ 10000000000000000000000000000000000 I ( f ( ( ( ( ( u (' f INSERT/EXTRACT TRAP/BAL STACK (QVAT) To display Trap/SAL Stack from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AT next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Trap/SAL Stack TRAP/BAL STACK A ARRAYS LN S STATUS SCAN RING 0 K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE 2 H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE 3 X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS (1) (2) STAT 0 B4 STAT 2 40 INDIR! A9 TRAPO ADDR 0028F8 TRAPI 0028F8 B4 40 A9 TRAP2 0028F8 B4 40 A9 BAL 0028F8 B4 40 A9 (3) (4) 5. Press ENTER. II' 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast-Alter Trap/SAL Stack." ==> 434! Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • Up to 12 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. (56K Control Store Example) The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and altering does not occur. Control store trap and BAL return addresses are displayed, as well as status 0, status 2, and I-reg 1 bytes. The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). This array cannot be paged. • Three bytes of the address and three bytes of the status information can be saved by the Siock function. The format is OVATx? Fast-Alter Trap/BAL Stack To fast-alter from any screen other than the Insert/ Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. Hex data Op code Line number Trap/BAL array To fast-alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AT 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. Save Trap/BAL Stack T identifies the array as Trap-SAL. A line number can have the value of 0-6. This range depend s upon the control storage size of the machine. Op code = (MOVEl, & (AND). / (OR). Hex data. L(4) (3) --(2) (1) 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key the new data. • \ Example: QVAT3=F1..F2F3 1. Display the Trap/SAL Stack screen as in the preceding steps. Notes: ( (, (QVAT) Q GENERAL To alter Trap/SAL Stack from the Array (OVA) screen: ( 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: ~INSERT/EXTRACT~ Display Trap/SAL Stack ( ~INSERT/EXTRACT~ A S K I B M H C X R Y W T G TRAP/BAL STACK ARRAYS LN STATUS SCAN RING 0 CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE CS HARDWARE MS HARDWARE 2 CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE 3 EXTERNAL REGS SCAN RING 4 CLOCK SCAN RING COMMAND SBA-CAC 5 ADDRESS TRANSLAT SET CSAR ADDRESS 6 (QVAT) TRAPO AD DR 000000 TRAP! 000000 STATO B4 B4 STAT2 BF INDIR! A9 A9 BF TRAP2 000000 B4 BF A9 BAL 000000 B4 BF A9 BALO 000000 BAL! 000000 BAL2 000000 Data left to right: Trap Address (six digits), Status 0 (two digits), Status 2 (two digits) and I-reg 1 (two digits). · A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. · · BALO-3 can be altered only on machines with 64K Control storage. A W-command also stops the PU clock. Label Identification LN: An addressable line number. Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECT I ON: AT ADDR: Control store address used for returning from TRAP or SAL. ==> CLOCK STOP 434! STATO: Status register O. Contains ALU information. STAT2: Status register 2. Contains microword type information. (64K Control Store Example) , INDIR1: Indirect register 1. Contains information used for addressing local store. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676433 1 of 1 44 3951 , () 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 o{) 0 00 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 C ( ( ( ( ( ( f INSERT/EXTRACT CSAR BACKUP (QVAB) To display CSAR Backup from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AB next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Alter CSAR Backup To alter CSA!=! Backup from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display the CSAR Backul1 screen as in the above steps. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key the new data. ( ( ( ( CSAR BACKUP TRACE (QVAB) CSARBU REG: 000000 TRACE ADDR: 01 00 001CBC .•01 001CBC .02 001CBC .03 001CBC To fast-alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 04 001CBC .05 001CBC .06 001CBC .07 001CBC 08 001CBC ·09 001CBC .OA OOICBC *OB 001CBC 2. Key QOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. OC 001CBC .00 001CBC .OE 001CBC *OF 001CBC 10001CBC .11 001CBC *12001CBC ·13001CBC 14 001CBC .15 001CBC ·16 001CBC *17 001CBC 18 001CBC .19 001CBC *IA 001CBC .IB 001CBC Q GENERAL SELECT IC 001CBC Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AB .10 OOICBC *IE OOICBC *IF OOICBC A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) B identifies the array as CSAR BACKUP. 0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number. O-F represents a low-order digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND), / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. Example: QVAB1F=F.. 1 ~~~~ ~ ==> Hex data Op code Line number C ( 2 ) Line number (1) CSAR Backup array 4341 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. Notes: « Fast-Alter CSAR Backup .INSERT/EXTRACT. Display CSAR Backup ( o Neither the CSARBU Reg nor Trace Addr can be altered. To fast-alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the Array subscreens: o All of the trace array is displayed an one screen. 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast-Alter CSAR Backup." The addresses of the last 32 PU microwords executed are displayed, Notes: o CSARBU label points to the mast recent entry. The trace array contains the addresses of the last 32 microwords executed if QAM has been selected, or the addresses of the last 32 targets of micra words that caused a module switch if QAB has been selected. o o Only four digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error, and altering does not occur. The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location (s). Save CSAR Backup Three bytes (1 line) of the CSAR Backup array can be saved by the Block function. The format is: QVABxx? Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676354 1 of 1 44 397f D 0 0 0 0 (~ t) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0; 0 00.0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 G 0 10 0 0 GO 0 C ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (- ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT PU DLAT (aVAU) (GRP 2) Display PU DLAT 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Preas ENTER. 3. Key AU and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Alter PU DLAT To alter PU DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display the PU DLAT screen as in the preceding steps. A S K I ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Example: QVAU1F=F.. FF.3 L-(5) L-(4) (3) (2) (1) ~~ PU DLAT (QVAU) -FF -FFF8-F -1-7-1-FF -FFF8-F -1-7LN VA RA KEY FP S LRU VA RA KEY FP S 00 00 0000 0 0 0 0 00 0000 a a a 01 00 0000 0 a 0 a 00 0000 0 a a 02 00 0000 0 0 0 0 00 0000 0 a a a a 03 00 0000 0 0 0 00 0000 0 04 00 0000 a a a a 00 0000 a a a 0 05 00 0000 a a a a 00 0000 a a a 06 00 0000 a 0 0 a 00 0000 a 0 Q GENERAL SELECT 07 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AUOO 00 0000 a 0 0 a 00 0000 0 a a • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • Up to 19 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. • The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error, and altering does not occur. • The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORB with the data in the selected location(s). • The maximum value for each position is indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (aVAU). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. a ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 One eight-line portion of the DLAT is displayed per screen. This array can be paged. Save PU DLAT 3. Press ENTER. Fast Alter PU DLAT To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1, Place the CE MODE switch ON. One line (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function. The format is: OVAUxxi'. Hex data Op code Line number Line number PU DLAT array Notes: Notes: • (\~f To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. An alter updates a double entry (both sets of addresses) plus the LRU (least recently used). " , • • ," 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter PU DLAT. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key the new data. • ( 5. Press ENTER. *1 NSERT /EXTRACT* To display PU DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen: (.( ( (1) (2) (3) 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. Label Identification 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (4) (5) U identifies the array asPU DLAT. 0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number. O-F represents a low-order digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. VA: An eight-bit virtual address. RA: An l1-bit real address. KEY: Key in storage. FP: A fetch protect bit. S: Valid/invalid status. LRU: The least recently used DLAT quadrant. Use with microcode EC 856091 and abbve @ IBM Corp. 1980 -.' ~.-." ,", '-,;' .. (~ 0000000000000000000000000000000000 - . _... _........_ ..- ... _ ..... _._.... . _ ........._.......... . ....... (- (- ( (- ( (- (' INSERT/EXTRACT PU DLAT (QVAU) (GRP 1) 5. Press ENTER. Example: *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* Display PU DLAT To display PU DLAT from the Array (aVA) screen: 1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AU and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. c c' ( A S K I B M H C ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HAROWARE CS HARDWARE MS HAROWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMANO SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS PU DLAT (QVAU) -FF-3FF8-F-I-7-1-FF-3FF8-F-I-7LN VA RA KEY FP S LRU VA RA KEY FP S 00 00 2018 8 1 6 0 80 2018 7 1 4 01 00 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 02 00 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 03 00 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 QVAU~'~F~i~:) Hex data L- (4) Op code , (3) Line number (2) Line number (1) PU DLAT array To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter PU DLAT." 04 00 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 Notes: 05 00 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 • 06 00 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. SELECT 07 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AUOO 00 • 2018 8 6 0 80 2018 7 4 Up to 17 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. • The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error, and altering does not occur. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key the new data. • The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. • The maximum value for each position is indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (QVAU). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. 4. Press ENTER. Alter PU DLAT Q GENERAL To alter PU DLAT from the Array (aVA) screen: 1. Display the PU pLAT screen as in the preceding steps. ==> 4341 Notes: • One eight-line portion of the DLAT is displayed per screen. • An alter updates a double entry (both sets of addresses) plus the LRU (least recently used). • This array can be paged. Fast Alter PU DLAT To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (aV) or one of the Array (aVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Save PU DLAT One line (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function., The format is: aVAUxx7. . 2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key aVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) U identifies the array as PU DLAT. 0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number. O-F represents a low-order digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. Label Identification VA: An eight-bit virtual address. RA: An II-bit real address. KEY: Key in storage. FP: A fetch protect bit. s: Valid/invalid status. LRU: The least recently used DLAT quadrant. Use with microcode EC 154322 and above @ IBM Corp. 1979. 1980 EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 PN 5666383 1 of 1 44405 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: ( c ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( *INSERT/EXTRACT* To display Channel DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. PMSS ENTER. 3. Key AH next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Channel DLAT . ( (' Fast Alter Channel DLAT INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH) (GRP 2) Display Channel DLAT ( ( CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH) DATA A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS EVEN(O) VA RA To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA): -FFF-FFFS-lCCW 000(1) S VA RA S EVEN(2) VA RA 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 000(3) S VA RA S CHANNEL 0: 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. CHANNEL 1: 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 3. Press ENTER. CHANNEL 2: 000 0000 000 0000 0 000 0000 000 0000 CHANNEL 4: 000 0000 a a CHANNEL 5: 000 0000 000 0000 0 000 0000 a a a a 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: 000 0000 a a a 000 0000 CHANNEL 3: a a a a 000 0000 000 0000 000 0000 0 000 0000 000 0000 000 0000 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) H identifies the array as Channel DLAT. 0-5 identifies which channel is selected. 0-3 represents which DLAT is selected. Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND). / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. To alter Channel DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display the Channel DLAT screen as in the preceding steps. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and key in the new data. Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AH Example: QVAH03=F1 .. F21 IIIIL:~~:':: ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 (3) Une number (2) Channel (1) Channel DLAT array 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. Notes: To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: . • Each channel has two data entries and two CCW entries. 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter Channel DLAT. • The line 1 label identifies a mask for each entry. Notes: • This array cannot be paged. • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. Save Channel DLAT • One DLAT (8 digits) can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. One line (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVAHcx7. • The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and altering does not occur. • The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs with the data in the selected location(s). . • The maximum value for each position is indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (OYAH). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU cloclc. Label Identification VA: A 12-bit address. RA: A 11-bit address. s: A valid bit. Use with microcode EC 856091 and abOve C IBM Corp. 1980 ( oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc , .-~.---~ .-~~-.----------.. ..---~ --"._- .. -~-----~-- ----~ ----- - - - - - - ~----.-,---------- ( ( { ( ( ( « ( ( ( ( ( *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* To display Channel DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AH next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Channel DLAT To alter Channel DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display the Channel DLAT screen as in the preceding steps. ( (0' '.,J'- C ( .... (' (~ Fast Alter Channel DLAT INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH) (GRP 1) Display Channel DLAT ("' ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AH CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH) EVEN(O) RA VA CHANNEL CHANNEL DATA 000(1) RA S VA To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA): CCW 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON, S 000(3) RA VA 000 0000 a 000 0000 0 000 0000 a 000 0000 EVEN(2) RA S VA S 000 0000 0 1: a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0.000 0 2: 000 0000 0 CHANNEL 0: CHANNEL -FFF-3FFB-l- 3: CHANNEL 4: CHANNEL 5 : 000 0000 000 0000 0 000 0000 0 000 0000 0 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: a a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 0 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 a 000 0000 (1) H identifies the array as Channel DLAT. (2) (3) 0-5 identifies which channel is selected. (4) (5) 0-3 represents which DLAT is selected. Op code = (MOVE). &. (AND). / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. Example: DV AH03=F1 .. F21 ~~~~ ~ ==> Hex data Op code Element number C ( 2 ) Channel (1) Channel DLAT array 4341 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and key in the new data. 3. leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. Notes: To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: • Each channel has two data entries and two CCW entries. 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Channel DLAT." The line 1 label identifies the maximum value for each entry. Notes: • This array cannot be paged. • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • One DLAT (7 digits) can be altered. The entire screen with changes, is written back into the array. Save Channel DLAT The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and altering does not occur. One element (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVAHcx? The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs with the data in the selected location(s). The maximum value for each position is indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (DVAH). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Label Identification VA: A 12-bit address. RA: A 11-bit address. s: A valid bit. Use with microcode EC 154322 and above EC 379807 22Sep80 PN 2676436 1 of 1 © IBM Corp. 1980 44409 (: (:0, ooooooooooooooo&.~oooooooooooooooc ---~~--------~-.----------- -~~~----------~-~~ ~ - ~~-~--~----~-----~- ( ( ( ( (' ( ( ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT KEY (QVAY) (GRP 2) . (~ 5. Press ENTER. Example: OVAY1FFF-F.11 *INSERT/EXTRACT* KEY (QVAY) KY FRC LIN A ARRAYS 0000 o 000, S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0004 o 000 I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE 0008 a 000 M MS ,HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE OOOC o 000 C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING 0010 o 000 Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC 0014 o 000 T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS 0018 a 000 Display Key To display Key from the Array (OVA) screen: '1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. P,.a ENTER. 3. Key A Y and a three-digit line number (000-1 FF) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to 000. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Key Q GENERAL SELECT 001C Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AYOOO To alter Key from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display the Key screen as in the preceding steps. o 000 -F-"'LIN KY FRC *0002 a 000 LIN *0001 KY FRC o 000 *0005 o 000 o 000 a 000 *0006 o 000 o 000 a 000 o 000 **009 *OOOD *0011 *0015 *0019 *OOlD *OOOB *OOOE o 000 a 000 o 000 *0012 a 000 *0013 *0016 o 000 *0017 a 000 *OOlE o 000 *001B *OOOA *OOlA ==> ~~ l:~~ ~:x::::/ata LIN KY FRC *0003 o 000 *0007 *DOOF *001F o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 4341 L(5) Line number (4) Line number (3) Line number (2) Line number ~--(1) Keyarray To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extract screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter Key. Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • One hex digit and up to three binary bits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. • The misplacement or absence of an op code prodUCtlS an error and no altering occurs. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. • The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs with the data in the selected location(s). Notes: • • Each arrBy has 8192 entries, each with a four-bit key plus three status bits. The maximum value of each digit/bit position is indicated on line 1 of the DispiByIAiter screen (OVAY). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and key in the new data. • The line one label identifies the maximum value of each entry. • Each dispiBy contains 32 entries beginning with the one selected. • This a"By t$n be paged. Save Key One line (left justified) can be saved by the Block function. The format is aVAYxxx""l. operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. Fast Alter Key To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the array subscreens (OVA): 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. ' Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER; 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2! (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Y identifies the array as key. 0-1 identifies the first digit of a line number. O-F identifies the second digit of a line number. O-F identifies the third digit of a line number. O-F identifies the fourth digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE). & (AND), / (OR). Hex data (1 digit); bit data (3 bits). • A W-command also stops thePU clock. • This arrBy can be paged. Label Identification LIN: An addressable line number. KEY: Key in storage. F: Fetch protect. R: A reference bit. C: A change bit. Use with microcode EC 856091 and abOve @ IBM Corp. 1980 0000000000000000000000000000000000 1 (' ( (,' (" (," (~ (" (' (: ( ( (" ( ("-- ("', ('; (" (- (- Example: .1 NSERT/EXTRACT. A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SVSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING V CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Display Key To display Key from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AY and a three-digit line number (000-07F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to 000. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Key KEY (Q.VAY) LIN KY FRC a 000 0000 LIN ·0001 0004 o 000 ·0005 o 000 ·0006 0008 o 000 ··009 0 000 OOOC o 000 ·0000 a 000 o 000 o 000 a 000 ·0011 0010 0014 0018 Q. GENERAL SELECT OOIC Z RTRN TO PROG SVS SELECTION: AVOOO To alter Key from the Array (OVA) screen: -F-ll1KY FRC LIN KY FRC o 000 ·0002 o 000 LIN KY FRC ·0003 o 000 ·0007 ·OOOA a 000 o 000 o 000 ·OOOE 0 000 ·OOOF ·0012 0 000 ·0013 ·0015 o 000 o 000 ·0016 o 000 ·0017 ·0019 0 000 ·OOlA 0 000 ·0018 ·0010 o 000 ·OOIE o 000 ·OOlF 1. Display the Key screen as in the preceding steps. (-- (" C (: ,/ ·0008 o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 o 000 a 000 ==> QVAYiWf;~l ~;x~~ d." L.: (5) Line number (4) Line number (3) Line number (2) Line number L.---(1) Key array To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extract screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Key." Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • One hex digit and up to three binary bits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. 4341 2. Move the cursor below the location{s) to be altered, and key in the new data. The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and no altering occurs. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. • Notes: The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). The maximum value of each digit/bit position is indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (QVAY). • Each array has 2048 entries, each with a four-bit key plus three status bits. • The line one label identifies the maximum value of each entry. • Each display contains 32 entries beginning with the one selected. • (' (' 5. Press ENTER. INSERT/EXTRACT KEY (QVAY) (GRP 1) Fast Alter Key 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the array subscreens (OVA): This array can be paged. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Save Key 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. One line (left justified) can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVAYxxx? (1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Y identifies the array as key. 0 identifies the first digit of a line number. 0- 7 identifies the second digit of a line number. O-F identifies the third digit of a line number. 0- F identifies the fourth digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data (1 digit); bit data (3 bits). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. This array can be paged. Label Identification LIN: An addressable line number. 3. Press ENTER. KEY: Key in storage. F: Fetch protect. R: A reference bit. C: A change bit. Use with microcode EC 154322 and above EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 . ~ _ . _ ~ , , .. _ _ . ~ ~ .. ~ _ ~ . _ , ~ ~ ~ w ~ _ . ~ u ~ ~ . _ " ' _ _ _.--"--_ ___." --_.... _ @ IBM Corp. 1979, 1980 ~ ( (" . r' (' _______ _ ."-~==--'---,-'-.,,--'---~-,.-- . PN 5666384 1 of 1 44415 (" o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0·0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C - - - - ...... ~ (' ( ( (' ( ( ( To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: INSERT/EXTRACT l1 DIRECTORY (QVAF) (GRP 2) *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* Display l1 Directory To display L1 Directory from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SElECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Pr.s ENTER. 3. Key AF and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Alter l1 Directory To alter L1 Directory from the Array (OVA) screen: Ll DIRECTORY (QVAF) B-FF,I-FF,M-FF,LRU-7F,RA-FFF8 LN 0 B i M LRU RAO RAI RA2 RA3 1 RA4 RA5 RA6 RA7 00 00 00 00 40 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter L 1 Directory. Notes: 01 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. 02 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 • 03 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Up to eight groups, each group consisting of four hex digits and three binary digits, plus two LRU digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. 04 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 as 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and no altering occurs. 06 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). Q GENERAL SELECT 07 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AFOO 00 00 00 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1. Display the L 1 Directory screen as in the preceding steps. • The maximum value of each digit bit position is indicated on line 1 of the Display / Alter screen (QV AF). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-commsnd also stops the PU clock. ==> CLOCK STOP 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key in the new data. 4341 This array can be paged. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. • Notes: • The bit position in the B, /, and M fields determines with which real address fields that bit is associated. Eight of the 32 entries are displayed on each screen. The addresses are line number ()(), 08, 10, or 78. • ( ( ( ( The line one label indicates the maximum value of each entry. Fast Alter l1 Directory Each line of four entries covers a 256-byte block of cache. To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (QV) or one of the Array subscreens (QVA): This array can be paged. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Save l1 Directory One line of nine bytes can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVAFxxx? 2. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 4. Key QVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) F identifies the array as L 1 Directory. 0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number. 0- F identifies the low-order digit of a line number. 0-1 identifies a portion of the line. Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND), / (OR). Hex data 5. Press ENTER. 3. Press ENTER. Example: QVAF~1~F~0=~r!:f~·~:: data (5) (4) (3) (2) Op code portion of line Line number Line number (1) L 1 Directory array label Identification IN: An addressable line number. B: 64 bytes of the directory are flagged as bad. I: An invalid status. M: A modify status. LRU: The least recently used quadrant of the directory. RAO: A real address in the directory quadrant number zero. .RA 1: Same as RAO, except quadrant one. RA2: Same as RAO, except quadrant two. RA3: Same as RAO, except quadrant three. RA4: Same as RAO, except quadrant four. RA5: Same as RAO, except quadrant five. RA6: Same as RAO, except quadrant six. RA7: Same as RAO, except quadrant seven. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above EC 379822 22Sep80 @ IBM Corp. 1980 PN 2676438 1 of 1 44417 ( (' oooooooooooooooooooooooccooooooooc \j 1.1 !i1 (I i c- ( c (~ INSERT/EXTRACT L1 DIRECTORY (QVAF) *INSERT/EXTRACT* Display L1 Directory To display L1 Directory from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AF and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Alter L1 Directory To alter L1 Directory from the Array (OVA) screen: A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN R1NG W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Example: L1 ,DIRECTORY (QVAF) B-FO,I-FO,M-FO,LRU-3F,RA-3FF8 LN 0 B I M LRU RAO RA1 RA2 RA3 00 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 (4) (3) (2) (1) 0000 0000 0000 0000 02 00 00 00 00 0000_0000 0000 0000 03 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 04 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter L1 Directory." 05 00 00,00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 Notes: 06 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 o Q GENERAL SELECT 07 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AFOO 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 o ==> 4341 o 3. leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. o o o The line one label indicates the maximum value of each entry. Fast Alter L1 Directory Each line of four entries covers a 256-byte block of cache. This array can be paged. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Save L1 Directory One line of nine bytes can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVAFxxx? 2. Key OOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) F identifies the array as L1 Directory. 0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number. 0- F identifies the low-order digit of a line number. 0 required to make address (three digits). Op code = (MOVE). &. (AND). / (OR). Hex data Up to four groups, each group consisting of three hex digits and three binary digits, plus two LRU digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and no altering occurs. The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). o The maximum value of each digit bit position is indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (QVAF). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. o A W-command also stops the PU clock. o This array can be paged. • The bit position in the S, I, and M fields determines with which real address fields that bit is associated. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens IQVA): Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. o Notes: The addresses are line number 00, OB, 10, or 1!J. 0 . Line number Line number L1 Directory array 00 00 00 00 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and key in the new data. o QVAF~'F~0=~t.!~6~F~ex data L (5) Op code 01 1. Display the L1 Directory screen as in the preceding steps. Eight of the 32 entries are displayed on each screen. c 5. Press ENTER. (GRP 1) o (/ ( (' The second digit of the S, I, and M fields is always zero. Label Identification 3. Press ENTER. LN: An addressable line number. RAO: A real address in the directory quadrant number zero. B: 64 bytes of the directory are flagged as bad. I: An invalid status. M: A modify status. RA1: Same as RAO. except quadrant one. RA2: S~me as RAO. except quadrant two. RA3: Same as RAO. except quadrant three. LRU: The least recently used quadrant of the directory. Use with microcode EC 154322 and above EC 379807 22Sep80 PN 2676439 @ 1of·1 IBM Corp. 1980 .~~~~-.------- .. ---. .. --.--.. -.--.'=.-~~~= 44419 • oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc c (' ( (' (' ( (" ( (~ ( ( ( (, INSERT/EXTRACT L1 CACHE DATA (QVAG) (GRP 2) To display L1 Cache Data from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AG and a two-digit line number (OO-7F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Alter L1 Cache Data To alter L1 Cache Data from the Array (OVA) screen: <. (: , Ll CACHE DATA (QVAG) LN 0 2 4 000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 LN *001 0 0000 2 0000 4 0000 6 0000 002 0000 0000 0000 0000 *003 0000 0000 0000 0000 004 0000 0000 0000 0000 *005 0000 0000 0000 ·0000 006 0000 0000 0000 0000 *007 0000 0000 0000 0000 008 0000 0000 0000 0000 • 009 0000 0000 0000 0000 OOA 0000 0000 0000 0000 *OOB 0000 0000 0000 0000 DOC 0000 0000 0000 0000 *000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ODE Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AGOO 0000 0000 0000 0000 *OOF 0000 0000 0000 0000 A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA): 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) G identifies the array as L1 Cache Data . 0-7 identifies the high-order digit of a line number. O-F identifies the middle digit of a line number. O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. ==> Example: 4341 1. Display L1 Cache Data screen as in the preceding steps. QVAG~7F~F~lS~:~ex data (5) Op code (4) (3) (2) (1) 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and key in the new data. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. Notes: • 2048 eight-byte entries are contained in the array. All can be displayed. • Sixteen entries can be displayed beginning with the one addressed. • This array can be paged. Line number Line number Line number L1 Cache Data array To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter L1 Cache Data." Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. Up to 16 hex digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. Save L1 Cache Data One line of data (8 bytes) can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVAGxxx? ( ' Fast Alter L1 Cache Data *INSERT/EXTRACT* Display L1 Cache Data l," • The'misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and no altering occurs. • The op code MOVES the data to, AlVDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Label Identification LN: An addressable line number. D. 2 etc.: A byte number. Model Group 2 EC 319808 06Mar81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2616410 1 of 1 44 425f ( oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc ~~----~ --~~~- ---~ - -~~-- ~---------- - - -~-~-~-~---~--~----~-~--~------~~ ------ ~ _____ ~ _ _ .J c ( ( ( (: ( ~' ( , , C' ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( 1. Key QOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clcx;k. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AR and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Cache Retry Data , To alter Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Display Cache Retry Data screen as in the preceding A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CKANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AROO CACHE RETRY DATA (QVAR) LI NE 0 4 6 2 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 a RTYACT 00 RTYCNT FL ADDRESS CNT 8E FA 0000 00 (3) (4) (5) ( ( ( '(- 01 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FA 4000 00 02 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FA 8000 00 03 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FA COOO 00 04 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FB 0000 00 05 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FB 4000 00 06 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FB 8000 00 To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 07 0000 0000 0000 0000 82 FB CODa 00 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter Cache Retry Data. ==> CLOCK STOP 5. Press ENTER. Example: QVAR~'fi~~'3Hex data t:::(4) Op code (3) Une number (2) Une number (1) Cache Retry Dllta arrllY Notes: 4341 • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • Up to 24 hex digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. • The CNT field cannot be altered. • The misplacement or absence 0/ an op code produces an error and no altering. key in the new data. 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER. ( R identifies the array as Cache Retry Data. 0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number. O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number. Op code • (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. (2) steps. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and .( ( ( (1 ) *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* To display Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVA) screen: ( 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: INSERT/EXTRACT CACHE RETRY DATA (QVAR) (GRP 2) Display Cache Retry Data ( Notes: • Eight lines of the 32 entries can be displayed on a screen. • The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs with the data in the selected location(s). • Addressing one-fourth of the array is address 00, OB, 70, or 18. • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • This array can be paged. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Save Cache Retry Data Label Identification One line of 13 bytes can be saved by the Block function. The format is QVARxx7. LINE: An addressable line in the array. Fast Alter Cache Retry Data FL: If bit x is on, byte x of the doubleword was modified by the PU during the execution of the current instruction, where x is greater or equal to zero and less than or equal to seven. To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (QV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA): 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key QOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. ADDRESS: Real address of corresponding doubleword. CNT: Value of RTYCNT when doubleword was saved. RTYACT: 0 - No retry data was saved for the current instruction, and screen data is not valid. 1 - At least one doubleword was saved for the current instruction, and screen data is valid. RTYCNT: Indicates which line in the Cache Retry Data array was the last valid line. Use with microcode EC 856091 and abOve e IBM Corp. 1980 (. (- oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc " "------ "-~-- -~- { ( ( ( ( (~ Example: *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* To display Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVA) screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key AR and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Cache Retry Data ( ( ( 5. Press ENTER. INSERT/EXTRACT CACHE RETRY DATA (QVAR) (GRP 1) Display Cache Retry Data " , . A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR AD~RESS 1 RTYACT 1E RTYCNT FL ADDRESS 00 0000 00 CACHE LINE 00 RETRY DATA (QVAR) 4 a 2 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 01 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 02 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 03 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 04 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 05 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 06 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 07 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0000 Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: AROO QVAR~'F~i'Ct~·3Hex data L- (4) Op code (3) Line number (2) Une number (1) Cache Retry Data array To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Cache Retry Data." Notes: To alter Cache Retry ·Data from the Array (OVA) screen: ==> CLOCK STOP 1. Display Cache Retry Data screen as in the preceding steps. o Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. o Up to 24 hex digits can be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the array. o The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an error and no altering. 4341 The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and key in the new data. o 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER. o A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. A W-command also stops the PU clock. Notes: o o o . Label Identification Eight lines of the 32 entries can be displayed on a screen. Fast Alter Cache Retry Data Addressing one-fourth of the array is address 00, 08, 10, or 18. To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA): This array can be paged. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Save Cache Retry Data 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. One line of 12 bytes can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVARxx? 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) R identifies the array as Cache Retry Data. 0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number. O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number. Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND). / (OR). Hex data. LINE: An addressable line in the array. FL: If bit x is 'on', byte x of the doubleword was modified by the PU during the execution of the current instruction, where x is greater or equal to zero and less than or equal to seven. ADDRESS: Real address of corresponding doubleword. RTYACT: 0 - No retry data was saved for the current instruction and screen data is not valid. 1 - At least one doubleword was saved for the current instruction, and screen data is valid. RTYCNT: Indicates which line in the Cache Retry Data array was the last valid line. Use with microcodeEC154322 and above EC379807 22Sep80" ;PN2676441 @ IBM Corp. 1980 ':44429 1''Of 1 .--.,---~--- ._--.- oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc --------- ~-----~ --- ---------------- ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( *INSERT/EXTRACT* To display the Status Scan Ring screen from the QV screen: 1. Key S next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Notes: • All status scan ring information can be displayed and formatted. The display consists of system status information. This screen is scan ring 23. Alter Status Scan Ring Note: This screen cannot be altered. ( 1 MTOPB IT A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0 MTMWSTOP I PU HARDWARE MTS370 B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE MTMODE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE o MTDAT X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING o MTWAIT W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: S 0 MTCHSEQM MT IPURUN 0 MTANYD IS ' 0 MTCSARM MTCHNLRN 0 MTANYCSE 0 MTSTGRFM MTREFRUN 0 MTANYL 1E 0 MTLSREFM 1. MTOPBIT: Is the status of the I cycle op rate bit. 0 is a softstop. 2. MTCHSEQM: If on, channel sequence count match has occurred. 0 MTANYCHE 3. MTIPURUN: If on, PU clock is in run mode. 0 MTANYIPE 4. MTANYDIS: If on, one or more of the 18 error disable latches are set for the particular chip used at this time. 0 MT lOB ITJ 0 MTINSMDE o MTIOBIT2 o MTMWDSMD 5. MTMWSTOP: The status of the CREG byte 3, bit 2. 0 MTIOBITl 0 MTCLKCMD 6. MTCSARM: A CSAR address match. 0 MT lOB ITO 0 MTPULMDE 7. MTCHNLRN: If on, channel clock is in run mode. 8. MTANYCSE: If on, an enabled error on one or more of the control storage cards. ===> CLOCK STOP 9. MTS370: The status of I-cycle register bit O. 4341 10. MTSTGRFM: If on, storage reference (any reference, I/O reference, data store, instruction counter fetch) address match has occurred. 11. MTREFRUN: If on, refresh clock is in run mode. 12. MTANYLlE: If on, an enabled error on one or more of the five storage cards. 13. MTMODE: Status of PSW byte 1, bit 4. 14. MTLSREFM: If on, local store reference (source or destination) address match has occurred. 16. MTANYCHE: If on, an enabled error is on one or more of the four channel cards. 17. MTDAT: Status of PSW byte 0, bit 5. 18. MTIOBIT3: Status of the I/O register, bit 3. 19. MTINSMDE: If on, instruction step interrupt bit is set. 20. MTANYIPE: If on, an enabled error is on one or more of the eight PU or three clock cards. 21. MTWAIT: Status of PSW byte 1, bit 6. 22. MTIOBIT2: Status of the I/O register, bit 2. 23. MTMWDSMD: If on, clock is in single-microword cycle mode. 26. MTIOBIT1: Status of the I/O register, bit 1. 27. MTCLKCMD: If on, PU is in clock-cycle mode. 30. MTIOBITO: Status of the I/O register, bit O. 31. MTPULMDE: If on, PU is in pulse mode. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 © IBM Corp. 1979, 1980 ( ..' ( ( Screen label identification 0 represents the off condition; 1 represents the on condition. STATUS SCAN RING (QVS) Save Status Scan Ring Note: The data from this screen cannot be saved, except through the regular scan raVR) screen. <: Label Identification INSERT/EXTRACT STATUS SCAN RING (QVS) Display Status Scan Ring ( ( PN 5666386 1 of 1 44435 .•. ( o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OG;·······() 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c c (~ ( ( (- ( ( ( ( (~ ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT CHECKS IN SYSTEM (QVK) *INSERT/EXTRACT* To display the Checks in System screen from the QV screen: 1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Pr~s ENTER. 3. Key K next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. ( ( . «- 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. (GRP 2) Display Checks in System ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS II L:: Example: QVK15-1 ..F1F CHECK AND DISABLE (QVK) FIELDS 1-17 SYSCKS D F CARD/AREA DETAIL LATCHES a a CS CONTROL 0000 00000 0000 0 CS ARRAY 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 a a CHN DATA BUFFER 0000 00 0 a 00 CHN CONTROL 0000 00 a 0 CHN INTERFACE 00 00000000 0 STG CACHE/DATA 0000 0000 0000 00 00 a STG BSM 0000 0000 00 00 STG SAR/KEY 0000 00 00 00 STG DLAT/DIR 0000 0000 0000 00 0 00 PU DATA FLOW 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 a a PU SAR 0000 0000 00 a a 00 PU DF CONTROL 0000 0000 a 0 a PU SHIFTER 0000 a 0 a PU I-CYCLES 0000 0 a a 0 PU INTERRUPTS 000 0 0 00 PU TIMER 000 a 0 CLK CLOCK 000 (4) Hex data (3) Op code (2) Digit of a field number (1) Digit of a fiBid number To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter Checks in System. Notes: • Spaces between cheracters are dBieted before the command is analyzed. • "more data is keyed then the SIIIected field permits, the message INVALJD INPUT appeers and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. • The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or DRs with the data in the sBiected locationls) The data from the Checks in System screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is QVKxx7 where xx is a line • The check fields are numbered (1-17) top to bottom on the screen. number on the screen. It is left-adjusted in the Save area. Only one line can be saved per selection. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. • The last eight digits of Field 2 are unalterable and remain at zero. Alter Checks in System Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: K ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 Save Checks in System Note: The facilities (field number) are numbered 11-17) top to bottom of the screen. Label Identification Check Reset To reset all the detail latches: 2. Press ENTER. SYSCKS: A summary of the DETAIL LATCHES on the same line. Error conditions that occur on the DETAIL LATCHES are carried over to the appropriate SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates an error condition. A 0 represents a normal condition. Fast Alter Checks in System D: Disables the SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates SYSCKS is disabled. A 0 represents a normal condition. To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (QV) or one of the Array (QVA) subscreens: F: Prevents a hardware portion from becoming inactive when 1. Key QVKR next to SELECTION. an error condition is present. A 1 keeps the hardware portion active if an error condition is present. A 0 causes the hardware portion to become inactive if an error condition occurs. 1. Place the C£ MODE switch ON. 2. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. . CARD/AREA: IdentWteS the name of the hardware portion for which the error indicators are in effect. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key QVK next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code .. (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. DETAIL LATCHES: Represent a low-level error. A 1 indicates an error condition. A 0 represents a normal condition. 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the the selected address. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above @ IBM Corp. 1980 ""---- -~--~--- - --_._-_._- _. "~-- - -_._-- ... _---_ .. -_._-_ ...... - _._--_... _.. _-"--_._-- -_.- - _.. _.. _---_ ...__ .. _c-~~-=··.~_~-."-,~_~~~..,."...,.....,__-,......,..-~~~~-~~~- ( (' 0000000000000000000000000000000000 ( ( ( ( ( { ( ( ( { ( INSERT/EXTRACT CHECKS IN SYSTEM (QVK) (GRP 1) Display Checks in System To display the Checks in System screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key K next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Alter Checks in System Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. ( *INSERT/EXTRACT* A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: K CHECK AND DISABLE (QVK) FIELDS 1-17 SYSCKS 0 F CARD/AREA DETAIL LATCHES a a CS CONTROL 0000 0000 0 0000 0 CS ARRAY 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 0 C CHN DATA BUFFER 0000 00 0 0 00 CHN CONTROL 0000 00 0 0 CHN INTERFACE 00 0000 0 STG CACHE/DATA 0000 0000 000 00 0 STG CONTROL 0000 00 00 STG SAR/KEY 000 00 00 STG DLAT/DIR 0000 00 00 a FF PU DATA FLOW 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0 0 PU SAR 000 0 0 00 PU OF CONTROL 0000 0000 0 0 0 PU SHIFTER 0000 0 0 8 PU I CYCLES 0000 0 o 0 C PU INTERRUPTS 000 0 0 00 PU TIMER 000 0 0 CLK CLOCK 000 (' IIIL(') Example: QVK15=1 .. F1F Hex d." L(3) Op code (2) Digit of a field number (1) Digit of a field number To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter Checks in System. Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. ==> CLOCK STOP The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s) 4341 Note: The facilities (field number) are numbered (1-17) top to bottom of the screen. ( 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. Save Checks in System The data from the Checks in System screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVKxx? where xx is a line number on the screen. It is left-adjusted in the Save area. Only one line can be saved per selection. ( The check fields are numbered (1-17) top to bottom on the screen. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. • The last eight digits of Field 2 are unalterable and remain at zero. Label Identification Check Reset To reset all the detail latches: SYSCKS: A summary of the DETAIL LATCHES on the same 2. Press ENTER. line. Error conditions that occur on the DETAIL LATCHES are carried over to the appropriate SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates an error condition. A 0 represents a normal condition. Fast Alter Checks in System 0: Disables the SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates SYSCKS is disabled. A 0 represents a normal condition. 1. Key OVKR next to SELECTION. To fast alter from any screen other than the Ihsert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. F: Prevents a hardware portion from becoming inactive when an error condition is present. A 1 keeps the hardware portion active if an error condition is present. A 0 causes the hardware portion to become inactive if an error condition occurs. CAROl AREA: Identifies the name of the hardware portion for which the error indicators are in effect. 4. Key OVK next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE). & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. DETAil LATCHES: Represent a low-level error. A 1 indicates an error condition. A 0 represents a normal condition. 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the the selected address. Use with microcode EC 154322 and above EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 © IBM Corp. 1979, 1980 PN 5666387 1 of 1 44445 oooooooooooooootJO()oooooooooooooooc ~~ ~-.---~.-~~ . - - - . - .. -~----~-~~.~---- .--~.~~---~---~ ~---~~~ ..... ~.--~---~ c ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT PU HARDWARE (QVI) (GRP 2) To display the PU Hardware screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Pre., ENTER. 3. Key I next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: • • The PU Hardware control facilities (some are individual latches) are displayed on the screen. The display can be fast selected by keying QVI instead of I if selection from any other QV screen. ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: I FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 0000 DESTFLAG 8000 TRPOP E 80 00 00 0 80 00 00 C 80 00 00 FF 00 00 FF 00 00 00 *** FF 00 00 FF 00 00 00 FF 00 00 FF 00 00 00 *** B J 80 80 LSADR 00 00 EXTADR 00 00 RTYADR PU REGS *** FIELDS A(AREG) 0000 0000 0000 0000 DFCAREG 0000 0000 0000 0000 DFBREG 0000 0000 0000 0000 OF DREG 0000 0000 MQREG 00 INDIRO a GREG 00 INDIRl 00 XLATSAR 00 RDWRFLG 00 0000 PU CONTROLS *** *** SYSTEM CHECKS *** 0000 0000 SYSCKS ==> CLOCK STOP 1-19 CREG SFIBB SFIB NIB SFPDC PADFLG AUXSTBDY FIELDS 20-26 ICYCTRL 0000 TRPCTRL F 0000 0000 TPULSES o CCLKCTRL 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVI next to SELECTION followed by: FIELD 27 A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE), 8& (AND). / (OR). Hex data. (1) (2) (3) (4) o 0000 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. I\I 4341 Example: QVI01=F.•2 ..F3 L(4) (3) (2) (1) Hex d. . Op code Digit of a fiBid number Digit of a 'iBid number To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or the array subscreens: on.e of 1. Invoke steps 4. 5. 6. and 7 of Fast Alter PU Hardware. Notes: • Spaces between characters are dBieted before the command is analyzed. • If more data is keyed than the selected fiBid permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. • The op code MOVEs the data to. ANDs with. or DRs with the data in the selected location(s) • The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimBI, left to right and top to bottom, on the screen. • A period (.) is a digit pllJCe holder in the hex data. When the operation is executed. that digit is unaffected. • A W-comrnand also stops the PU clock. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above @ IBM Corp. 1980 \. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. Nota: This screen cannot be fIJI/-screen altered. The data from the PU Hardware screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVlxx7 where xx is a field number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per selection. l ( To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: Alter PU Hardware Save PU Hardware ( Fast Alter PU Hardware *INSERT/EXTRACT* PU HARDWARE (QVI) Display PU Hardware ( ( ( ·f. -----------------------~---------------- Label Identification 1. A(AREG): Eight-byte Even word (byte 0-3) if CSAR bit 21 Odd word (byte 4-7) if CSAR bit 21 = O. = 1. 3. DFCAREG: Same as the A-reg, except dedicated to channel operation only. ---------- - --,----- ROWRFLG: A bit for each byte to be gated through the shifter control where a 1 is for an active condition and a o for an inactive condition. 19. AUXSTBOY: The first real address not accessible to user programs. Bits 13-23 are unused. 20. ICYCTRL: Engineering data. 21. LSAOR: Five bytes should always be equal and each byte consist of bits 0-2 for a control line and bits 3-7 for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no local storage destination and thus no address. 4. .IBB: IB buffer. Bytes 2-7 are used. 5. DFBREG: B-register. 22. TRPCTRL: Engineering data. 6. SFIB: Instruction buffer. 23. 7. DFDREG: Data register in the PU. 8. NIB: Instruction buffer. - ._-_._. 9. MQREG: Multiply and divide register. LS Section 1000 0000/0001 1010 1011 PU PU 1100 1101 1110 1111 "'"\; ~ EXTADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each byte consist of bits 0-4 for a control line and bits 5-7 for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no external destination, and thus no address. 24. TPULSES: A bit for each clock pulse (TO-T7) beginning with the second bit. The first bit represents the 'last pulse'. 10. INDIRO: Indirect register 0 (10). Bits 0-3 ----- 18. PU register. 2. CR-=G: Contains two four-byte control words. - Ch-1 Ch-2 Ch-3 Ch-4 Ch-5 Ch-O 25. RTYAOR: Five bytes should always be equal and each byte consist of bits 0-2 for a control line and bits 3-7 for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no retry and thus no address. 26. CCLKCTRL: Engineering data. 27. SYSCKS: Number of checks logged on the QVK screen. Bit 0 .. 0 for indirect addressing. Bit 0 = 1 for direct addressing:_ 11. SFPDC: One digit (four bits) called the digit catcher. 12. DESTFLAG: Two bytes containing a bit for each byte in the DREG. Byte 0 should be the same as byte 1. Byte 1- must duplicate byte O. This flag controls the O-reg destination. 13. GREG: Register used for storage addressing (updating and displacement), parallel address update, I-cycle B and 0 and B+O+X, cache ACB, and calculating channel-end address. 14. INDIR1: Indirect register 1 (11). Bits 1-3 . 000 001 010 01; 100 101 110 111 LS Section PU PU - Ch-1 Ch-2 Ch-3 Ch-4 Ch-5 Ch-O 15. PADFLG: Controls the shifter control. 16. TRPOP: Two-byte address forced into CSAR at the next Trap routine. 17. XLATSAR: Segment table entry address or page table entry address. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above I EC 379822 22Sep80 o o o ~____Q___O_ _ _ _ Q ________.__ . ,:-, ... ,.,,,).'>-l..p _.... ,,l"!:>.-.;, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ._--_ ..._--_ .. _._. _....._._-_. _. -- -- .---------- ..~-------------- ... ---. -.-... -.----- .. -------~.--.-.----.-----.------.----"-.-_._--_._._._----_._--- ----_. ---------- ----. -------...; I PN ::~ 44 _I 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ()O ----._------.--- ------ -- --- -- -------- --_.- - --- - .. _-------- --- -- ............-... - _. _.. _. --_...._---_.. __. --.----------.----.-------.-----.. ~." -~ ( « (' ( (' ( { ( ( o (" ( ( f ( INSERT/EXTRACT PU HARDWARE (QVI) (GRP 2) To display the PU Hardware screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key I next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: • • The PU Hardware control facilities (some are individual latches) are displayed on the screen. The display can be fast selected by keying QVI instead of I if selection from any other QV screen. ( ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: I PU HARDWARE (QVI) FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 0000 DESTFLAG 8000 TRPOP E 80 00 00 0 80 00 00 C 80 00 00 FF 00 00 FF 00 00 00 *** PU REGS *** FIELDS FF FF A(AREG) 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 DFCAREG 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 00 DFBREG 0000 0000 0000 0000 FF FF DFDREG 0000 0000 00 00 MQREG 00 INDIRa 0 00 00 GREG 00 INDIRI 00 00 00 XLATSAR 00 RDWRFLG 00 0000 1-19 CREG SFIBB SFIB NIB SFPDC PADFLG AUXSTBDY FIELDS a 0000 0000 F 0000 0000 o 20-26 ICYCTRL TRPCTRL TPULSES CCLKCTRL *** PU CONTROLS *** B J 80 80 LSADR 00 00 EXTADR 00 00 RTYADR *** SYSTEM CHECKS *** 0000 0000 SYSCKS ==> CLOCK STOP FIELD 27 To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key aoc or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVI next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. III 4341 Example: QVI01=F.. 2 ..F3 L(4) Hex data L(3) Op code (2) Digit of a field number (1) Digit of a field number Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. The data from the PU Hardware screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVlxx? where xx is a field number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per selection. A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE). & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. Alter PU Hardware Save PU Hardware f' ( Fast Alter PU Hardware *INSERT/EXTRACT* Display PU Hardware ( To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter PU Hardware. Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. • The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s) • The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal, left to right and top to bottom, on the screen. • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1980 PN 2676443 . 1 of 2 44449f Label Identification 18. 1. A(AREG): Eight-byte PU register. 2. CREG: Contains two four-byte control words. Even word (byte 0-3) if CSAR bit 21 = O. Odd word (byte 4-7) if CSAR bit 21 = 1. 3. DFCAREG: Same as the A-reg, except dedicated to channel operation only. RDWRFLG: A bit for each byte to be gated through the shifter control where a 1 is for an active condition and a o for an inactive condition. 19. AUXSTBOY: The first real address not accessible to user programs. Bits 13-23 are unused. 20. ICYCTRL: Engineering data. 21. LSADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each byte consist of bits 0-2 for a control line and bits 3-7 for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no local storage destination and thus no address. 4. SFIBB: IB buffer. Bytes 2-7 are used. 5. DFBREG: B-register. 22. TRPCTRL: Engineering data. 6. SFIB: Instruction buffer. 23. 7. DFDREG: Data register in the PU. 8. NIB: Instruction buffer. 9. MQREG: Multiply and divide register. 10. INDIRO: Indirect register 0 (10). Bits 0-3 1000 0000/0001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 LS Section PU PU Ch-1 Ch-2 Ch-3 Ch-4 Ch-5 Ch-O EXTADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each byte consist of bits 0-4 for a control line and bits 5- 7 for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no external destination, and thus no address. 24. TPULSES,: The first bit represents the 'last pulse'. A bit for each clock pulse (TO-T7) beginning with the second bit. 25. RTY ADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each byte consist of bits 0-2 for a control line and bits 3-7 for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no retry and thus no address. 26. CCLKCTRL: Engineering data. 27. SYSCKS: Number of checks logged on the QVK screen. = 0 for indirect addressing. Bit 0 = 1 for direct addressing. Bit 0 11. SFPDC: One digit (four bits) called the digit catcher. 12. DESTFLAG: Two bytes containing a bit for each byte in the DREG. Byte 0 should be the same as byte 1. Byte 1 must duplicate byte O. This flag controls the O-reg destination. 13. GREG: Register used for storage addressing (updating and displacement), parallel address update, I-cycle B and 0 and B+O+X, cache ACB, and calculating channel-end address. 14. INDIR1: Indirect register 1 (11). Bits 1-3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 LS Section PU PU Ch-1 Ch-2 Ch-3 Ch-4 Ch-5 Ch-O 15. PADFLG: Controls the shifter control. 16. TRPOP: Two-byte address forced into CSAR at the next Trap routine. 17. XLATSAR: Segment table entry address or page table 'entry address. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 OSJun81 ~) 0 o () () 0,', ~ ' 0 '" , , o o o rf) "l. " f") o o 000 o/'" 0.',' 0,', 00 " PN 2676443 444601 20f2 o o o o o o () () {} ( ( ( ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT CONTROL STORAGE HARDWARE (QVB) Display Control Storage Hardware To display the Control Storage Hardware screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM' next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key B next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: The Control Storage Hardware facilities (not shown on another screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or binary whichever is applicable for that particular facility. ( ( ( ( () ( ( ( ( 0980 lB40 0940 0000 0000 0000 A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING 00 0000 FF FFFF K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE FF READ 000 M MS HARDWARE 3 TBADR H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: B FIELDS 01-12 CS HARDWARE (QVB) lB40 0000 0000 FFFF CREG DATAIN ODD EVEN o CSAR21 0000 BLKERR 1800 CNTL 00 00 00 00 a a 2000 0040 2000 9830 CSAR CSARE CSARD BLKCSAR CSARBU 00 BLKCREG SAVEREG 00 BLKOE FIELDS 13-23 00 0000 TRACEREG 14 TRADR 00 0000 MATCHREG 14 CNTR 00 0000 CLKGATE 00 USE21 To fast-alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVAl subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or OOB next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVB next to SELECTION followed by: The data from the Storage Hardware screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVBxx?, where xx is a field number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per selection. A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. (1) (2) (3) (4) 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. 1I'L-(41 Example: aVB07=F.. 7F2.F3 Hex data L-(3) Op code (2) Digit of a field number (7) Digit of a field number Alter Control Storage Hardware Save Control Storage Hardware « (' Fast-Alter Control Storage Hardware *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* The display can be fast-selected by keying aVB instead of B if selection is from any other av screen. Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. ( ( To fast-alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of "Fast-Alter Control Storage Hardware." Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message IIVV ALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal, left to right and top to bottom, on the screen. • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 CIBM Corp. 1981 PN 5666205 1 of 2 44 4531 " La bet Identification 13. 1. CREG: Two four':byte control words. Even word (byte 0-3) used if the even latch is on. Odd word (byte 4- 7) used if the odd latch is on. CSAR21 : Set when the CSARaddress bit 21 is on and used with USE21 to set the odd latch. 14. TRACEREG: register. Contains the CSAR address in the trace 2. CSAR: Along with CSARD and CSARE, make up the microword address. 15. TRADR: Indicates the trace address. 16. READ: 3. CSARE: Along with CSAR and CSARD, make up the microword address. 17. BLKERR: Scan-only latches that may be used to block the setting of the error latches. 4. OATAIN: Eight-byte scan-in register used to load the microcode into the control array. lS. MATCHREG: Address to be matched for a stop condition. 5. CSARO: Along with CSAR and CSARE, make up the microword address. 19. CNTR: Trace array counter: 20. TBAOR: Two-bit address of the Trap/BAL array with values for the trap levels of 0, 1, 2, or 3. 21. CNTL: 6. BLKCSAR: blocked. Determines whether or not the CSAR is 7. ODD: All bits are set to 1 when the odd latch is on. BYTE S. CSARBU: Contains the address of the microword currently being executed. Bit 10. EVEN: All bits are set to 1 when the even latch is on. a GATEOES GATEOEM GATEOEL TARGET Bit 4 BALFLAG BLKSAVE 1.6 BLKCSARL Bit 4 5 6 7 MODSW STGWD FINETRC TRAPFLAG BYTE 1 11. SAVEREG: Data-in register for the Trace and Trap/BAL arrays. SAVEREG normally contains the address of the microword previously executed. 12. Bit sensitive bytes: (56K control store) a 1 2 3 9. BLKCREG: Consists of eight bits and determines whether or not the C-register is blocked. Byte set to ones in read mode. Bit a 1 2 3 BLKOE: Indicates whether the odd or even latch is to be blocked. CNTL: BYTE Bit 5 6 7 BLKCSARH a a 0 Bit sensitive bytes: (64/S0K control store) a a a 1 a 2 3 Bit 4 5 0 TARGET 6 7 MODSW STGWD FINETRC TRAPFLAG BYTE 1 Bit a 1 2 3 BALFLAG BLKSAVE IB BLKCSAR(l) Bit 4 5 6 7 BLKCSAR(2) BLKCSAR(3) a a 22. CLKGATE: Control store clock gate. 23. USE21: Eight-bit control line that sets the odd or even latch. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 . /) 0 o 0, \:.. ,:n ,JJ 0) ,0 ~y ~) ~,- () () 0 () o o 000 :{) 0 (f~) '- --~------ 0 0 00 PN 5666205 2 of 2 - ------- o o 44454f - 00 o } 0·.,·' " ~--.------ ( c (" (' (' ('~ (' (~' ( INSERT/EXTRACT MAIN STORAGE HARDWARE (QVM) (GRP 2) Display Main Storage Hardware To display the Main Storage Hardware screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clOCk. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key M next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: o o The Main Storage Hardware facilities (not shown on another screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or binary whichever is applicable for that particular facility. -(~ (' ( ( ( ( ("- (~-' ( ( (' ( (' (-- ""(' ( ( -- (' ( ( Fast Alter Main Storage Hardware FIELDS 01-14 MS HARDWARE (QVM) FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF A FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF DFDREG 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG01 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG10 A ARRAYS 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG23 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG32 S STATUS SCAN RING 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG45 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG 54 K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG76 I PU HARDWARE 0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG67 B CS HARDWARE 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECHDRE 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECMDRO M HS HARDWARE 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECRE 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECRO H CHANNEL HARDWARE FIELDS 15-34 C CHANNEL INTRFACE 0000 0000 0000 0000 DIRRA03 0000 0000 0000 0000 DIRRA47 X EXTERNAL REGS 0000 0000 DIRRAHL 000 0000 0000 DLDIST 00 0000 BSMST R SCAN RING 0000 DIRRADDR 0000 0000 DLTRAASM 00 0000 BSMADR 00 0000 SAR 00 0000 DLATVA 00 0000 BSHDXCYC Y CLOCK SCAN RING W eOHHAND SBA-CAC 00 0000 VACMPR 0000 0000 KEYS 00 CHDREG T ADDRESS TRANSLAT 00 0000 RACMPR 00 0000 RTYCTL 00 STRTADR G SET CSAR ADDRESS 00 0000 ACBCMPR 0000 0000 SYSCKS 00 STOPADR FIELDS 35-37 o CHID Q GENERAL SELECT 0000 0000 SLOTHIT o CYCRING Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: M ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* To Fast Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE, MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or nOM next to ,SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key nVM next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE). & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. Example: QVM01-F.. 1F2.F3 The display can be fast selected by keying QVM instead of M if selection is from any other QV screen. lI'L-r4J Hex d... (3) Op code (2) Digit of a field number (1) Digit of a field number Alter Main Storage Hardware Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: Save Main Storage Hardware 1. Invoke steps 4. 5. 6. and 7 of Fast Alter Main Storage Hardware; The data from the Main Sterage Hardware screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is nVMxx7 where xx is a field number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per selection. Notes: o o o o o o Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, th6 message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal, left to right and top to bottom, on the screen. A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. A W-command also stops the PU clock. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above @ IBM Corp. 1980 lEe . 379822 22Se, p80 I . PN 2676446 1 of 2 44 456 (' (' ·0· .:.....•. :. _._ ~:..:" 1. A(AREG): PU A-reg. 19. BSMST: Digit 1 Bit Bit Bit Bit 5. QREG23: Cache data input/output data register. Eight- byte field associativity class 2. 6. DREG32: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 3. 7. DREG45: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 4. Digit 2 20. CMDREG: Five-bit storage command register. It has the same order as the command bus (0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 Real). 29. RACMPR: Address for real storage address match. Bits 0 and 21-23 are not used. 1 2 3 4 Unused Fetch gate Out page Busy 30. RTYCTL: 22. BSMADR: Address register for main storage. Bits 0 and 18-23 are unused. It is the actual, rather than the translated, address which is determined by the IML microcode. 23. SAR: Storage address register. 24. DLATVA: Digit 0 - Unused Digit 1 - Bits used for Ch-DLAT bits 8-11 13. ECRE: Even half ECC register and its output of the ECC logic. Digit 1 - Bit 1 is .Chan DLAT valid status bit. 25. Digit 4 - Bits 4, 2, 1 (DIR 0 Stat) bad entry, invalid, and modified, respectively. Bit 2 Bit 3 Cross doubleword boundary first cycle Cross doubleword boundary second cycle Hold count Retry active. Bit Bit Bit Bit Unused Unused DLAT trap - first cycle Retry overflow. Bit 1 Digit 5 0 1 2 3 31 . STRTADR: Starting storage address for channel data. Bits correspond to real address bits 18-23, left justified. ACBCMPR: Compare address used to determine if user has exceeded real storage. Bits 13-23 are unused. Digit 3 - DLATO virtual address 33. SYSCKS: Checks on QVK screen Digit 4 - DLAT1 virtual address 34. STOPADR: Stopping storage address for channel data. Bits correspond to real address bits 18-23, left justified. 35. SLOTHIT: Displays the Directory Associativity class as captured on each of the cache cards. An 'F' in a digit position indicates that the cache is working with data from that associativity class. BSMDXCYC: Digit 0 and 1 - DXR 0-7 Digit 2 and 3 - DXR 0-7B Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit 4 and 5 - DXR 0-70 Digit 6 and 7 - Six-bit BSM ctrl ring (rt. adj.) 26. VACMPR: Address for virtual address match. Bits 21-23 are not used. 27. Bit 0 32. KEYS: Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 3 4 5 Digit 2 - Bits 4, 2, 1 (PU DLATO Stat) valid, real, and ACB bad, respectively. Digit 3 - Bits 4, 2, 1 (PU DLAT1 Stat) valid, real, and ACB bad, respectively. Digit 4 Digit 5 - DLAT1 virtual address 16. DIRRA47: Fifth through eighth 2-byte fields contain real address with bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) for Directory associativity classes 4, 5, 6, and 7, respectively. 18: DLDIST: DLAT and directory status. Digit 2 and 3 - Retry counter look-ahead (right adjusted) Digit 2 - DLATO virtual address 14. ECRO: Odd half ECC register and its output of the ECC logic. 17. DIRRAHL: High-order two bytes contain real address bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) from Directory if a match occurred in one of the associativity classes 0-3. Low-order two bytes contain real address bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) from Directory if a match occurred in one of the associativity classes 4-7. Digit 0 and 1 - Retry flags DIRRADDR: Bits 0-12 of the real address (bits 13-15 are zero). DLKYRASM: Bits 0-12 of the real address (bits 13-15 are zero) read from the DLAT if there was a match. 12. ECMDRO: Odd half main data register for the BSM and its input into the ECC logic. Extra byte is for check bits. : 28. 21. 10. DREG78: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 7. :1 Bit Bit Bit Bit ., PU Key Parity Check Kevstack Protect Check Dlat Protect Check Keystack Protect Check. always zero. Unused Unused SBE stop Inhibit ECC 9. DREG87: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 6. 15. DIRRA03: First through fourth 2-byte fields contain real address with bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) for Directory associativity classes 0, 1, 2, and 3, respectiVely. . Bit 0 Bit 1 . Bit 2 Bit 3 Digit 8 - Unused; 1 2 3 4 8. DREG54: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 5. 11. ECMDRE: Even half main data register for the BSM and its input into the ECC logic. Extra byte is for check bits. Digit 7 Digit 7 - Directory 3 status bad entry, invalid, and modified, respectively. 2. DFDREG: PU D-reg. 4. DREG10: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 1. _.0 Digit 6- Directory 2 status badentry,invalid, and modified, respectively. Laballdentification 3. DREG01: Cache data input/ output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class O. o~ Digit 6 - PU Key KEYSTACK Key DLATO Key DLAT1 Key KEYSTACK Unused Bit 0 Bit 1 Reference Bit 2 Change Bit 3 Fetch Protect. Bit 0 DlatO Fetch Protect Bit 1 DlatO Parity Bit 2 Dlat1 Fetch Protect Bit 3 Dlat1 Parity. 36. Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity class class class class class class class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CYCRING: Bit Bit Bit Bit 37. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 Prime cycle S1 cycle S2 cycle Follow cycle. CHID: Channel 10 register (right adjusted). Use with microcode EC 856091 and above Digit 5 - Directory 1 status bad entry, invalid, and modified, respectively. EC 379822 22Sep80 PN 2676446 44 456 20f2 00 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0.0000 o 000000000 ( ( ( ( c ( ( c ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT MAIN STORAGE HARDWARE (QVM) (GRP 2) To display the Main Storage Hardware screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key M next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: • • The Main Storage Hardware facilities (not shown on another screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or binary whichever is applicable for that particular facility. A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: M MS HARDWARE (QVM) FFFF FFFF FFFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 FFFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 DIRRA03 0000 0000 DIRRAHL 000 0000 0000 DIRRADDR 0000 00 0000 SAR 00 00 0000 VACMPR 0000 00 0000 RACMPR 00 00 0000 ACBCMPR 0000 0000 0000 SLOTHIT FIELDS 01-14 FFFF FFFF DFDREG 0000 0000 DREG10 0000 0000 DREG32 0000 0000 DREG54 0000 0000 DREG76 0000 0000 ECMDRO 0000 0000 ECRO FIELDS 15-34 0000 0000 0000 0000 DIRRA47 0000 DLDIST 00 0000 BSMST 0000 DLTRAASM 00 0000 BSMADR 0000 DLATVA 00 0000 BSMDXCYC 0000 KEYS 00 CMDREG 0000 RTYCTL 00 STRTADR 0000 SYSCKS 00 STOPADR FIELDS 35-37 a CYCRING a CHID A DREGOI DREG23 DREG45 DREG67 ECMDRE ECRE FFFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 00 0000 ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 FFFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 To Fast Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract . facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVM next to SELECTION followed by: A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. (1) (2) (3) (4) 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. Example: QVMO 1=F.. 1F2. F3 The display can be fast selected by keying QVM instead of M if selection is from any other QV screen. III L-(4) (3) Save Main Storage Hardware The data from the Main Storage Hardware screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVMxx? where xx is a field number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per selection. Hex dst. Op code (2) Digit of a field number (1) Digit of a field number Alter Main Storage Hardware Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. ( ( ( Fast Alter Main Storage Hardware *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* Display Main Storage Hardware ( ( To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter Main Storage Hardware. Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. • The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). • The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal, left to right and top to bottom, on the screen. • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676446 1 of 2 44457f ( ~--.--.-------~- --~----~.--~---------.-- - .. --------~ ~----------- -_.- Label Identification 18. -.--~-~~.-----------------------.-------.----------------- DLDIST: DLAT and directory status. 1. A(AREG): PU A-reg. 3. DREG01: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class O. Digit 4 - Bits 4. 2, 1 (DIR 0 Stat) bad entry, invalid. and modified. respectively. Eight-byte field associativity class 1. 5. DREG23: Cache, data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 2. Digit 5 - Directory 1 status bad entry. invalid. and modified, respectively. 6. DREG32: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 3. Digit 6 - Directory 2 status bad entry, invalid, and modified, respectively. 7. DREG45: Cache dat!') input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 4. Digit 7 - Directory 3 status bad entry, invalid, and modified, respectively. 8. DREG54: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 5. 19. 9. DREG67: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 6. 11. DREG76: Cache data input/output data register. Eight-byte field associativity class 7. BSMST: Digit 1 Bit Bit Bit Bit Digit 2 Bit Bit Bit Bit ECMDRE: Even half main data register for the BSM and its input into the ECC logic. Extra byte is for check bits. 1 2 3 4 Unused Unused SBE stop Inhibit ECC 1 2 3 4 Unused Fetch gate Out page Busy 12. ECMDRO: Odd half main data register for the BSM and its input into the ECC logic. Extra byte is for check bits. 20. DIRRADDR: Bits 0-12 of the real address (bits 13-15 are zero). 13. ECRE: Even half ECC register and its output of the ECC logic. 21. DLKYRASM: .Bits 0-12 of the real address (bits 13-15 are zero) read from the DLAT if there was a match. 14. ECRO: Odd half ECC register and its output of the ECC 10Qic. 22. 15. DIRRA03: First through fourth 2-byte fields contain real address with bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) for Directory associativity classes 0, 1, 2, and 3, respectively. BSMADR: Address register for main storage. Bits 0 and 18-23 are unused. It is the actual, rather than the translated, address which is determined by the IML microcode. 16. 17. 23. SAR: Storage address .register. 24. DLATVA: DIRRA47: Fifth through eighth 2-byte fields contain real address with bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) for Directory associativity classes 4, 5, 6, and 7, respectively. 1 2 3 4 5 Digit 3 - DLATO virtual address Digit 4 - DLATl virtual address Digit 5 - DLATl virtual address 25. 29. RACMPR: Address for real storage address match. Bits 0 and 21-23 are not used. 30. RTYCTL: Digit 2 and 3 - DXR 0-7B Digit 4 and 5 - DXR 0-70 Digit 6 and 7 - Six-bit BSM ctrl ring (rt. adj.) 26. VACMPR: Address for virtual address match. Bits 21-23 are not used. 0 1 2 3 Prime cycle S1 cycle S2 cycle Follow cycle. CHID: Channel 10 register (right adjusted). Digit 0 and 1 - Retry flags Digit 2 and 3 - Retry counter look-ahead (right adjusted) Digit 4 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Digit 5 Bit Bit Bit Bit 0 1 2 3 Cross doubleword boundary first cycle Cross doubleword boundary second cycle Hold count Retry active. Unused Unused DLAT trap - first cycle Retry overflow. 31. STRTADR: Starting storage address for channel data. Bits correspond to real address bits 18-23, left justified. 32. ACBCMPR: Compare address used to determine if user has exceeded real storage. Bits 13-23 are unused. 33. SYSCKS: Checks on QVK screen 34. STOPADR: Stopping storage address for channel data. Bits correspond to real address bits 18- 23. left justified. 35. SLOTHIT: Displays the Directory Associativity class as captured on each of the cache cards. An 'F in a digit position indicates that the cache is working with data from that associativity class. BSMDXCYC: Digit 0 and 1 '- DXR 0-7 37. CMDREG: Five-bit storage command register. It has the same order as the command bus (0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 Real). Digit 2 - DLATO virtual address DIRRAHL: High-order two bytes contain real address bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) from Directory if a match occurred in one of the associativity classes 0-3. Low-order two bytes contain real address bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) from Directory if a match occurred in one of the associativity classes 4- 7 . - 28. Digit 0 - Unused Digit 1 - Bits used for Ch-DLAT bits 8-11 CYCRING: Bit Bit Bit Bit PU Key KEYSTACK Key DLATO Key DLATl Key KEYSTACK Bit 0 Unused Bit 1 Reference Change Bit 2 Bit 3 Fetch Protect. Bit 0 Dla10 Fetch Protect Digit 6 DlatO Parity Bit 1 Dlatl Fetch Protect Bit 2 Bit 3 Dlat1 Parity. PU Key Parity Check Digit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Keystack Protect Check Bit 2 Dlat Protect Check Bit 3 Keystack Protect Check. Digit 8 - Unused; always zero. Digit 3 - Bits 4, 2, 1 (PU DLATl Stat) valid, real, and ACB bad, respectively. 4. DREG10: Cache data input/output data register. 36. KEYS: Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit Digit 2 - Bits 4, 2, 1 (PU DLATO Stat) valid, real, and ACB bad, respectively. 2. DFDREG: PU D-reg. 10. 27. Digit 1 - Bit 1 is Chan DLAT valid status bit. D~1 D~b2 D~b3 Digit 4 D~b5 D~b6 D~b7 Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity Associativity class class class class class class class 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 ~-- ~) 0 o () (lO o o f) ~ 0" i., In\ \~ 0, ;11 o 0000 '0" 0 ,';., .: ," o 00 o - -- PN 2676446 20f2 ---------1------ - 44458f - o o o o 00 ~), 'l~ o (' ( ( ( ( c ( ( ( ( f (. ( *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* To display the Channel Hardware screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key H and a channel number (0-5) next to SELECTION. The channel number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: • The Channel Hardware facilities (not shown on another screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or binary whichever is applicable for that particular facility. • The display can be fast-selected by keying QVH and a channel number instead of H and a channel number if selection is from any other QV screen. ('\ (" ( Fast-Alter Channel Hardware INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL HARDWARE (QVH) Display Channel Hardware ( ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE CS HARDWARE MS HARDWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE EXTERNAL REGS SCAN RING CLOCK SCAN RING COMMAND SBA-CAC ~ ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS A S K I B M H C X R Y W Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: HO FIELDS 01-14 CHANNEL HARDWARE (QVH) CHANNEL 0 = 00 00 00 00 00· 00 CH DATA 0000 CHANIN 0000 CHANOUT CH-FULL 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHDBREG CH-PTR 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 CH CCA CH-LCM 0000 0000 CHrCARl 0 0 0 0 00 CHDLR 0000 0000 CHCCAR2 0 CHIOHWI FIELDS 15-34 00 CH SYNCO 00 CH STAT CHSLRFTH 00 CHrOMONR 00 CH-IMODE 0 CH TRPRQ 00 CHMDMIN 00 CHACMDR 0 CH-CURTP 00 CHMDMISC CHSLRSTG 00 CH SYNCI 0 CHTPUTRQ 00 CHMDMOUT CH ADR23 CH-CMDRD 00 CH-CMDR 00 CHTRPADR 00 CHMDMCTL 0 CH LASTP 00 CH-SDBAR 0 CH MISC CHANNEL NPL LINES OPOUT SRVOUT 0 OPIN SRVIN HOLDOUT DATOUT 0 SELIN OAT I N SUPROUT ADROUT 0 REQIN ADRIN CMDOUT 0 DISCIN STATIN 00 NPLBOUT 00 NPLBIN ANY CHANNEL CHECK 0 ==> CLOCK STOP o o a a o o o o o o o o o o o a o o o 4341 To Fast-Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MOOE switch ON. 2 ..' Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key OVH next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Channel number A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code'" (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. Example: QVHOO1=F.. 1F.2F3 III" Alter Channel Hardware ~!~ ~;x:::: (3) Digit of a field number (2) Digit of a field number (1) Channel number Note: This screen is not to be full-screen altered. To Fast-Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: Save Channel Hardware The data from the Channel Hardware screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVHcxx? where c is the channel and xx is the field number. Only one field can be saved per selection .. 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of "Fast-Alter Channel Hardware." Notes: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • Facilities below CHANNEL 1 NPL LINES cannot be altered from the QVH screen. • If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. • The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). • The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal(1-34), left to right,.and top to bottom, on the screen. • A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. o A W-command also stops the PU clock. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 5666206 1 of 2 44463f ( -.-~.- Label Identification 1. CH DATA: Six bytes of data are used by channels 1 and""2, while four bytes are used by channel and channels 3 through 5. ° 19. CHSLRFTH: This digit indicates that a channel (0-5) is aligned with the channel control array fetch cycle. 20. CHACMDR: A command to the channel from the asynchronous command register. The external address is 3,0. 2. CHANIN: Two bytes of data to the channel-in register. Bit 4. CH_FULL: Byte indicates that a channel data register position is full; a bit is on for each byte. 5. CHDBREG: Eight bytes of data in the channel data buffer register. 6. CH PTR: This byte points with a bit on, left to right, to those bytes that are to be transferred from the channel data register next. 7. CH CCA: Eight bytes of data is two words per channel where bytes 0-3 are used in data mode (bytes 4-7 are used in sequence mode only). 8. CH LCM: These bits point, left to right, to the last of datato be transferred. 21. CHDLR: Contains the value of the channel data length register. It has a maximum value of hex 40 (64). 11. CHCCAR2: Eight digits are the input to the channel control array. 12. CH SYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync register. It is used to pass information between the microcode and the channel hardware. The external address is 7,0. ° 13. CH STAT: This byte contains status information set by channel hardware. The external address is 2,1. 14. CHIOHW1: PU I/O register value. 15. CHCOMONR: These values are the control bits of the common register. The external address is 2,0. Bit ° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 370 mode latch Allow external source Meter on latch Microdetected channel control check Storage busy Valid TIC Valid CC CCW Valid CO CCW 16. CH IMODE: This byte contains (when corresponding bit ison) gating controls for ACB checking and hardware set latches for PCI and COA controlling. The external address is 3,1. 17. CH has 18. CHMDMIN: One-byte MOM bus-in. 33. Channel 10 latches Channel 10 latches Channel 10 latches I/O spin latch Inhibit select-out and unload trap latch Command function bit latches Command function bit latches Command function bit latcheS" CH_CURTP: This digit identifies whether or not this channel is in a trap. 22. CHMDMISC: MOM miscellaneous bus-in. It is 6 bits wide. The bits are right adjusted. 23. CHSLRSTG: This digit identifies whether or not a channel (0-5) has a slot rotor time for storage access. 24. CH SYNC1: This byte contains conditions, such as trapaddresses, flags, and timeout values. It is used to pass information between the microcode and the channel hardware. The external address is 4,0. 25. CHIPUTRQ: This digit identifies whether or not a channel (0-5) has a trap request line active to the PU. 26. CHMDMOUT: MOM bus-out. It is one byte. 27. CH_ADR23: When both digits are the same, it is in sequence count mode. 28. CH CMDR: Command register content for this channel. The external address is 5,0. The types of commands are: 9. CHCCAR1: Eight digits are the output from the ch.annel control array. 10. ° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3.' CHANOUT: Two bytes of data from the channel-out register. \32 -.~--- ------ CH SDBAR: Used to address the channel data bus when transferring and receiving data from storage buffer. The external address is 6,0. CH_MISC: This byte uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify data in parity, output, ISB and first character transferred. The external address is 6,1. Bit ° 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 34. .. 01 parity check Output ISB First character transferred Spare Spare Spare Spare CH_LASTP: This digit identifies whether or not this channel had the last trap taken. Data transfer Sequence count I/O instruction load UCW load Misc CCW fetched Interface adapter Interface controller 29. CHTRPADR: This byte identifies the trap address (00-1 Fl. 30. CHMDMCTL: MOM control bus. It is 5 bits. The bits are right adjusted. 31. CH CMDRD: External signifies that a channel com-;:nand is ready. TRPRQ: This digit. indicates whether this channel -a trap request. Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 5666206 44 464f 2 of 2 ')0 o o o 00 0'· . .. o o () o o 0000· 00 o o o o o o o o I i 00 ~) o ('- ( ( c ( ( ( Label Identification INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL INTERFACE (QVC) *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* Display Channel Interface To display the Channel Interface screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key C next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. Note: The display can be fast selected by keying ave instead of e if the selection is from any other av screen. Alter Channel Interface Nota: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. CHANNEL INTERFACE (QVC) 0 1 2 3 4 5 CHANNEL 0 A ARRAYS 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARITYCK 1 S STATUS SCAN RING 0 0 0 0 0 0 OKLATE 0 K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEQERROR 0 I PU HARDWARE 0 0 0 0 0 0 OVLAPERR 0 B CS HARDWARE 0 0 0 0 0 0 SHORTPLS 0 M MS HARDWARE FIELDS 11-21 0 H CHANNEL HARDWARE 0 0 0 0 0 0 HALTBRST 0 C CHANNEL INTRFACE 0 0 0 0 0 0 INHIBDBO 00 X EXTERNAL REGS 0 0 0 0 0 0 RSTADROT 0 R SCAN RING DIAGMODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y CLOCK SCAN RING DATAMODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W COMMAND SBA-CAC FIELDS 22-32 0 T ADDRESS TRANSLAT 0 0 0 0 0 0 HOLDUP 0 G SET CSAR ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 0 0 ODDLATCH 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 OUTMODE 0 Q GENERAL SELECT 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALLOWHI 0 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS 0 0 0 0 0 0 HIMODE 00 ==> SELECTION: C CLOCK STOP FIELDS 1-10 CHANNEL 1 OPOUT HOLDOUT 0 0 ADROUT CMDOUT 0 SRVOUT 0 0 DATOUT 0 SUPROUT 20 NPLBOUT 0 OPIN 0 SELIN 0 ADRIN 0 STATIN SRVIN 0 DATIN 0 0 REQIN DISCIN 0 00 NPLBIN 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CE 01 00 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 4341 PARITYCK: 1 identifies a parity check on the channel data bus. OKLATE: Not used. SEQERROR: Not used. OVLAPERR: Not used. SHORTPlS: Not used. HALTBRST: 1 identifies a halt operation. INHIBDBO: 1 inhibits the NPL BUS OUT lines. RSTADROT: 1 resets NPL ADR OUT. DIAGMODE: 1 assigns the diagnostics and microcode to monitor all the NPl BUS and TAG lines. DATAMODE: 1 enables the interface to transfer data. Save Channel Interface The data from the Channel Interface screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is QVCxx?, where xx is a 2 digit field number. Fast Alter Channel Interface Nota: This screen cannot be fast altered. HOLDUP: 1 causes NPlSRVOUT to be held up until the channel is ready to transfer data. ODDLATCH: 0 tells the interface that an even byte of data is to be transferred. 1 tells the interface that an odd byte of clata is to be transferred. OUTMODE: 1 tells the interface that the data is to be transferred out. 0 tells the interface that the data is to be transferred in. AlLOWHI: Not used. HIMODE: Not used. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 @ IBM Corp. 1979. 1980 PN 5666388 44495 1 of 1 OOOOoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc - -- ---- ---- -------------~~~-~~~~~---------- ----------~--------------~-- ( c ( ' " ( ( (- ( (- (- ( ( ( Fast Alter External Registers INSERT/EXTRACT EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QVX) (GRP 2) *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* Display External Registers To display the External Registers screen from the QV screen: 1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key X and a channel number (0-5) next to SELECTION. The channel number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: • This provides a display of the external registers whenever the PU microcode is unavailable. • The contents of the external registers can be displayed with errors highlighted by brightened characters. • The TOD clock is not displayed because the scan rings destroy its contents. • The display can be fast selected by keying QVX and a channel number instead of X and a channel number, if selection is from any other QV screen. Alter External Registers Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: XO FIELDS 1-46 EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QVX) 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF A(AREG) 00 ** CHANNEL 0 = ** - SIR INT5 INDIRO CHKEY 0: CHDLR (4) 00 00 00 00 00 MNTR STAT1 ( 10) 1: CH SYNCO CH DATAO WI 00" 00 00 00 00" INT4 STAT2 CTLRO 2 : CHCOMONR CH STAT W2 (16) 00" 0 00 00 00 00 3: CHACMDR CH IMODE PSWO PSWI PSW2 (23) 00 00" 00 00 00 INT3 STATO 4: CH SYNCI CH DATA2 (29) 00 00 00" 00" ICYC INT2 INDIRI (34) 5: CH CMDR 00" 02 00 00 INTI RETRY 6: CH SDBAR CH MISC OP (39) 00" 20 00" 00 00 7: HREG INTO (45) 00 00 DFCAREG INEXTREQ CHAN SAR 00 00 00 LlBU 00 00 00 SAR2 00 00 00 SAR1 00 00 00 ICTR 00 00 00 NIBI 00 NIB1BFR 00 To Fast Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (QV) or one of the Array (QVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key QVX next to SelECTION followed by: 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from ==> CLOCK STOP Channel number. A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR). Hex data. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) the selected address. 4341 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. Example: QVX045~~i~~) Hex data L(4) Op code (3) Digit of a field number (2) Digit of a field number (1) Channel number To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter External Registers. Notes: Save External Registers The data from the External Registers screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is QVXcxx? where c is a channel number and xx is a field number. Only one field can be saved per selection. • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. • If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message INVAUD INPUT appears, and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. o The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s). The facilities (field number) are numbered left to right, top to bottom on the screen. o A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. o A W-command also stops the PU clock. Use with microcode EC 856091 and above C IBM Corp. 1980 .-~~~----------------------------------.-------.-.-.--._-----_. ~. il 1'1: tt Label Identification ';1 14. 1. A(A-REG): PU A-register. STAT1: This byte contains conditions (status) relative to ALU. The external address is 1,2. Bit 0 1 2 2. DFCAREG: Eight-byte register containing hex data from the channel. 3. INEXTREQ: External signal request. 3 4 5 6 7 4. CHDLR: Contains the count value of the channel data length register. The channel external address is 0,0. Wl (4) = 0 W2 (0-4) = 0 Invalid decimal format (cumulative) True/complement decimal Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned ACB check enable 5. SIR: This byte contains data which determines the number of bits or bytes that are to be shifted. The PU external address is 0,0. 15. 6. INT5: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,1. L1 BU: Three bytes contain the cache backup address. The external address is 1, 5-7. 16. CHCOMONR: This byte contains the channel control bits in the common register. The channel external address is 2,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 0 interrupt request Channel 1 interrupt request Channel 2 interrupt request Channel 3 interrupt request Channel 4 interrupt request Channel 5 interrupt request Unused Reset ADDRMATCH CTLRO:Control register 0 bit 8-12 with bit 12 OR"d into bit 10. 22. SAR2: Three bytes contain the address of operand 2 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. 23. CHACMDR: One-byte command from the channel asynchronous command register to the channel. The external address is 3,0. 24. CH IMODE: This byte contains gating controls for ACBchecking and hardware set latches for PCI and CDA controlling. The Channel external address is 3,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17. CH STAT: This byte contains hardware set channel statUs indicators. The channel external address is 6,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7. INDIRO: This byte contains the address that is the Rl field of the current instruction. The external address is 0,2. 8. CHKEY: Bits 0-3 are key bits; 4-7 are unimplemented bits, sourced as zero. The external address is 0.4. 9. CHANSAR: Three-byte address invoked when the channel is used. The extern. address is 0, 5-7. 10. CH SYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync 0 regiSter. The Channel external address is 1,0. 12. W1: This byte contains the shift length value when Wl register is specified as a length parameter. The PU external address is 1, O. 13. MNTR: Monitor external senses certain system status information. The external address is 1,1. Start I/O count SVC interrupt I/O interrupt Page fault interrupt Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Spare = 0 Incorrect length latch Prog or Prot check latch Spare = 0 Channel data length latch Channel control check latch Spare = 0 Chaining check latch 18. W2: This byte contains the shift length value when W2 register is specified as a length parameter. It may also serve as a loop counter. The PU external address is 2,0. 19. INT4: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 2,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11. CH DATAO: This byte is the first byte of the channel datar~ister. It is assigned to contain the channel address protect key. It is assigned to obtain device address, device status, interface status and other information from the interface adapter. The channel external address is 1,1. Bit 0 .1 2 3 4 5 6 7 21~ 20. CPUTIA CCOMPIA ITIMIA Pending machine check interrupt Retry interrupt force Spare Restart request Spare 25. PSWO: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function Current PSW for byte and bit significance. The PU external address is 3,0. 26. PSW1: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function Current PSW for byte and bit significance. The PU external address is 3,1. 27. PSW2: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function Current PSW for byte and bit significance. The external address is 3,2. 28. SAR1: Three bytes contain the address of operand 1 of an instruction. The external address is 3,5-7. 29. CH SYNC1: This byte contains conditions as trap addresses, flags, timeout values, etc. The channel external address is 4,0. 30. CH DATA2: This byte contains the sequence count frO/TIthe channel. The channel external address is 4,1. 31. STAT2: This byte contains status conditions relative to arithmetic, branch, shift, etc. of ALU. The external address is 2,2. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Working stat 0 Working stat 1 Working stat 2 Working stat 3 Channel working stat 0 Channel working stat 1 Instruction length counter Instruction length counter Block-multiplexer mode latch Byte-multiplexer mode latch Enable ACB check latch Hi-speed mode latch Internal interrupt request latch Implement spare latch PCllatch CD prefetch latch 32. 33. ICTR: Three bytes contain the starting address of the next instruction. The external address is 4, 5-7. 34. CH CMDR: Command register content for this channel. The external address is 5,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 35. ICYC: Byte (I-cycle control register) contains status information of I-cycles. It contains I-cycle function and flags. The PU external address is 5,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 36. Data transfer Sequence count I/O instruction load UCW load Misc CCW fetched Interface adapter Interface controller 370 mode Unconditional I-cycle store error Conditional I-cycle store error Successful branch Execute PU retry mask IB empty Operate latch INT2: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 5,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signal DIAGM ITIMWRPA ADRMATCH ISTRSTEP Pending machine check interrupt Decrementer adjustment CCOMPIB CPUTIB 37. INDIR1: This byte contains the address which is the R2 or X2 field of the current instruction. The external address is 5,2. INT3: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 4,1. 38. NIB1: This byte is the second byte of the NIB. The external address is 5,7. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 39. CH SDBAR: Used to address the channel data bus whe;:;- transferring and receiving data from storage. The channel external address is 6, O. ITIMIB Interrupt key External signal External signal External signal External signal External signal External signal 2 3 4 5 6 7 STATO: This byte contains status conditions of various conditions in ALU. The external address is 4,2. Bit 0 ALU overflow 1 Negative result 2 Recomplement 3 Destination = 0 4 ALU carry 51-bit carry 6 Z /*= 0 7 ALU size exception Use with microcode EC 856091 and above I EC 379822 22Sep80 . PN 2676449 20f3 0-.. . 0.-.0 . --0 .....-0.0. ..0 .... 0.0 . . .0 ....0 . . _0__. 0 . _. . 0_0. . . . .0-.. . . 0 -.. _O_. . O_._O~__O_. . O__O . __.Q •.... _ _-...,...-...,.-" ... , . ,.,.n'.", " ..... n '. ~. <.>;~'.:.;.,,>...,.;t" ~':w;:": :'" ;:t<"l<'~;"~'->">'-" ".;.' ::" .~'~~:)." ~~\::;"',-.' o._. o._~_o_ . . 0 ..... O. ~ '.~',"''''''',",''r--'' 44498 - _ .. 0_._.0_ . 0 ...._0____0 ( ( 40. ( ( ( ( ( a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( 01 parity check Output ISB First character transferred Spare Spare Spare Spare 41. OP: Contains the first byte (byte 0) of the current instruction. It implies 256 op code possibilities. It is driven by the NIB. The PU external address is 6,0. 42. INT1: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 6,1. Bit a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Unused Channel a interrupt 1 2 3 4 5 interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt external interrupt RETRY: This byte contains eight bits that indicate the status conditions relative to a retry operation. The external address is 6,2. Bit a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Hardstop Sequential processing Instruction processing· SS operation Refresh in progress Retry in progress Unretriable section of code System operation 44. NIBIBFR: This byte is the second byte of the NIB buffer. The external address is 6,7. 45. HREG: This byte contains eight bits that act as status conditions for taking traps. The external address is 7,0. Bit a 1 2 .3 4 5 6 7 46. ( CH MISC: Uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify datain parity, output, ISB and first character transferred. The external address is 6,1. Bit 43. ( Spare Odd branch address - trap level a L1 miss - trap level a ACB check -trap level 0 OLAT miss - trap level 1 _~~~age protect check - trap level 1 Block channel traps Channel trap - trap level 2 INTO: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,3. Bit 0 1 .2 3 4 5 6 7 Interrupt pending PER Pending channel interrupt Pending external interrupt MSVP request Execute interrupt Oecrementer = 0 ITIMWRP Use with microcode EC 856091 and above EC 379822 22Sep80 PN 2676449 30f 3 44499 ( ( :oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooc .-.--.-------.---~-.---.--~--~---------. --- - .,- - - ..... __ .. --_._..- ._.--------- ---------- --~.----- -- - ~ ....----------.-----~------~~--------,--- ( ( ( ( ( ( ( *1 NSERT/EXTRACT* To display the External Registers screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key X and a channel number (0-5) next to SELECTION. The channel number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: o This provides a display of the external registers whenever the PU microcode is unavailable. o The contents of the external registers can be displayed with errors highlighted by brightened characters. o The TOD clock is not displayed because the scan rings destroy its contents. o ( Fast-Alter External Registers INSERT/EXTRACT EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QVX) (GRP 2) Display External Registers '( ( ( A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: XO EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QVX) FIELDS 1-46 FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF A(AREG) 0000 0000 0000 0000 ** CHANNEL 0 = ** 00 - SIR INT5 INDIRO CHKEY 0: CHDLR (4) 00 00 00 00 00 ( 10) 1: CH SYNCO CH DATAO WI MNTR STAT 1 0'0' 0'0' 00 00 00 ( 16) 2 : CHCOMONR CH STAT W2 INT4 STAT2 CTLRO 00 0'0' 00 00 00 0 3 : CHACMDR CH IMODE PSWO PSWI PSW2 (23) 00 00 0'0' 00 00 (29) 4: CH SYNCI CH DATA2 INT3 STATO 0'0' 00 00 0'0' 5 : CH .. CMDR (34) ICYC INT2 INDIRI 0'0' 02 00 00 6: CH SDBAR CH MISC OP (39) I NTI RETRY 0'0' 0'0' 00 20 00 7: HREG INTO (45) 00 00 ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 DFCAREG INEXTREQ CHAN SAR 00 00 00 L1BU 00 00 00 SAR2 00 00 00 SARI 00 00 00 ICTR 00 00 00 NIBI 00 NIB1BFR 00 To Fast-Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key avx next to SELECTION followed by: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Channel number. A high-order decimal digit of a field number. A low-order decimal digit of a field number. Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND), / (OR). Hex data. 5. Press ENTER. 6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from the selected address. 7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER. Examp/" QVx~r~~ ~:x::: (3) Digit of a field number (2) Digit of a field number (1) Channel number . The display can be fast-selected by keying QVX and a channel number instead of X and a channel number, if selection is from any other QV screen. Alter External Registers To Fast-Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered. 1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of "Fast-Alter External Registers. " Notes: Save External Registers The data from the External Registers screen can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVXcxx? where c is a channel number and xx is a field number. Only one field can be saved per selection. o o o o Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears, and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with the data in the selected location(s), The facilities (field number) are numbered left to right, top to bottom on the screen. o A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data. o A W-command also stops the PU clock. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825. 05Jun81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676449 1 of 3 44501f Label Identification 14. 1. A(A-REG): PU A-register. STATl: This byte contains conditions (status) relative to ALU. The external address is 1,2. Bit 2. DFCAREG: Eight-byte register containing hex data from the channel. a 1 2 3. INEXTREQ: External signal request. 3 4 5 6 7 4. CHDLR: Contains the count value of the channel data length register. The channel external address is 0,0. a Wl (4) = W2 (0-4) = Invalid decimal format (cumulative) True / complement decimal Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned ACB check enable 15. 6. INT5: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,1 . L1 BU: Three bytes contain the cache backup address. The external address is 1, 5-7. 16. CHCOMONR: This byte contains the channel control bits in the common register. The channel external address is 2,0. a Channel interrupt request Channel 1 interrupt request Channel 2 interrupt request Channel 3 interrupt request Channel 4 interrupt request Channel 5 interrupt request Unused Reset ADDRMATCH 17. CH STAT: This byte contains hardware set channel status indicators. The channel external address is 6,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7. INDIRO: This byte contains the address that is the Rl field of the current instruction. The external address is 0,2. 8. CHKEY: Bits 0-3 are key bits; 4-7 are unimplemented bits, sourced as zero. The external address is 004. 18. 9. CHANSAR: Three-byte address invoked when the channel is used. The external address is 0, 5-7. CH SYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync register. The Channel external address is 1,0. 11. CH_DATAO: This byte is the first byte of the channel data register. It is assigned to obtain device address, device status, interface status and other information from the interface adapter. The channel external address is 1,1. 12. W1: This byte contains the shift length value when Wl register is specified as a length parameter. The PU external address is 1, O. 13. MNTR: Monitor external senses certain system status information. The external address is 1,1. Bit a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19. a 10. INT4: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 2,1. a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20. Start I/O count SVC interrupt I/O interrupt Page fault interrupt Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned 33. ICTR: Three bytes contain the starting address of the next instruction. The external address is 4, 5- 7. 23. CHACMDR: One-byte command from the channel asynchronous command register to the channel. The external address is 3,0. 34. CH_CMDR: Command register content for this channel. The external address is 5,0. The types of commands are: 24. CH IMODE: This byte contains gating controls for ACBchecking and hardware set latches for PCI and CDA controlling. The Channel external address is 3,1. CPUTIA CCOMPIA ITIMIA Pending machine check interrupt Retry interrupt force Spare Restart request Spare Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 25. Working stat 0 Working stat 1 Working stat 2 Working stat 3 Channel working stat 0 Channel working stat 1 Instruction length counter Instruction length counter CTlRO: Control register into bit 10. a bit 8-12 with bit 12 ORed Block-multiplexer mode latch Byte-multiplexer mode latch Enable ACB check latch Data stream mode latch Internal interrupt request latch Implement spare latch PCI latch CD prefetch latch PSWO: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and bit significance. The PU external address is 3,0. PSW1: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display / Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and bit significance. The PU external address is 3,1. 27. PSW2: Consult your reference summary card or consult the Display/Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and bit significance. The external address is 3,2. 28. 29. 31. INT3: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode.' The PU external address is 4,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ITIMIB Interrupt key External signal External Signal External signal External signal External signal External signal 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 36. 370 mode Unconditional I-cycle store error Conditional I-cycle store error Successful branch Execute PU retry mask IB empty Operate latch INT2: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 5,1. Bit a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CH SYNC1: This byte contains conditions as trap . addresses, flags, timeout values, etc. The channel external address is 4,0. CH DATA2: This byte contains the sequence count fro';-the channel. The channel external address is 4,1. ICYC: Byte (I-cycle control register) contains status information of I-cycles. It contains I-cycle function and flags. The PU external address is 5,0. Bit SAR1' Three bytes contain the address of operand 1 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. 30. 32. Data transfer Sequence count I/O instruction load UCW load Misc CCW fetched I nterface adapter Interface controller 35. 26. STAT2: This byte contains status conditions relative to arithmetic, branch, shift, etc. of ALU. The external address is 2,2. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 21. Spare = a Incorrect length latch Prog or Prot check latch Spare = a Channel data check latch Channel control check latch Spare = a Chaining check latch W2: This byte contains the shift length value when W2 register is specified as a length parameter. It may also serve as a loop counter. The PU external address is 2,0. Bit SAR2: Three bytes contain the address of operand 2 of an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7. a 5. SIR: This byte contains data which determines the number of bits or bytes that are to be shifted. The PU external address is 0,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 22. Signal DIAGM ITIMWRPA ADRMATCH ISTRSTEP Pending machine check interrupt Decrementer adjustment CCOMPIB CPUTIB 37. INDIR1: This byte contains the address which is the R2 or X2 field of the current instruction. The external address is 5,2. 38. NIB1: This byte is the second byte of the NIB. The external address is 5,7. 39. CH SDBAR: Used to address the channel data buffer when transferring and receiving data from storage. The channel external address is 6, O. STATO: This byte contains status conditions of various conditions in ALU. The external address is 4,2. Bit a ALU overflow 1 Negative result 2 Recomplement 3 Destination = 4 ALU carry 51-bit carry 6 Z /*= 7 ALU size exception a a Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 ~) 0 () o o o o o O· 10· ,,', .", . o o o 000 000 o 00 a o PN 2676449 0:" 00 ,. 44502f 20f3 ~) \iL' o o o ( ( ( ( 40. ( f ( () ( (- ( ( ( 01 parity check Output ISB First character transferred Spare Spare Spare Spare 41. OP: Contains the first byte (byte 0) of the current instruction. It implies 256 op code possibilities. It is driven by the NIB. The PU external address is 6,0. 42. INT1: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The PU external address is 6,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Unused Channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt interrupt external interrupt RETRY: This byte contains eight bits that indicate the status conditions relative to a retry operation. The external address is 6,2. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Hardstop Sequential processing Instruction processing SS operation Refresh in progress Retry in progress Unretriable section of code System operation 44. NIBIBFR: This byte is the second byte of the NIB buffer. The external address is 6,7. 45. HREG: This byte contains eight bits that act as status conditions for taking traps. The external address is 7,0. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 46. ( CH MISC: Uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify datain parity, output, ISB and first character transferred. The external address is 6,1. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 43. ( Spare Odd branch address - trap level a L1 miss - trap level 0 ACB check - trap level 0 OLAT miss - trap level 1 Storage protect check - trap level 1 Block channel traps Channel trap - trap level 2 INTO: This byte contains eight bits used in channel mode. The external address is 0,3. Bit a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Interrupt pending PER Pending channel interrupt Pending external interrupt MSVP request Execute interrupt Oecrementer = a ITIMWRP Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676449 30f 3 44503f o () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 ····0·0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 (j. ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INSERT jEXTRACT SCAN RINGS (QVR) (GRP 2) ( ( CO *INSERT/EXTRACT* Display Scan Rings A S K I B M H C ARRAYS STATUS SCAN RING CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE CS HARDWARE MS HARDWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS To display the Scan Rings Screen from the OV screen: 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key R and a two-digit scan ring number plus a byte number next to SELECTION. The scan ring and byte number can be defaulted to zero. 4. Press ENTER. Notes: • ( All 38 scan rings can be displayed in unformatted binary. SCAN RING (QVR) 4E CHANNEL CONTROLS 00 0000 0000 *01 0000 0000 *02 0000 0000 *03 0000 0000 04 0000 0000 *05 0000 0000 *06 0000 0000 *07 0000 0000 08 0000 0000 *09 0000 0000 *OA 0000 0000 *OB 0000 0000 OC 0000 0000 *00 0000 0000 *OE 0000 0000 *OF 0000 0000 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 (- ( SERDES (Control Storage) Diagnostic (Control Storage) CS Controls and SM 1 Scan first Array Byte 0 and 4 Scan second Array Byte 1 and 5 Scan third Array Byte 2 and 6 Scan fourth Array Byte 3 and 7 Main Storage Refresh Loop Scan Rings 10 0000 0000 *11 0000 0000 *12 0000 0000 *13 0000 0000 14 0000 0000 *15 0000 0000 *16 0000 0000 *17 0000 0000 18 0000 0000 *19 0000 0000 *IA 0000 0000 *IB 0000 0000 lC 0000 0000 ·ID 0000 0000 *IE 0000 0000 ·IF 0000 0000 Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: ROOO The refresh clock must be stopped when displaying/altering 21,2241,42,81, Cl, and C7. Cl C2 (' ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 The time-of-day clock is invalidated when displaying/altering SR 42. The scan rings can be placed into a loop and an 8-bit data pattern can be scanned into the looped scan ring. The following commands can be used to invoke this function: OVRLxx OVRLxxO OVRLxx=yy where xx represents the scan ring number and yy represents the optional bit patern in hex. If the bit pattern is not specified, it defaults to X'OO'. Looping continues until the MODE key is pressed. This screen can be paged. Note: An initial test pattern of X'AS' and parity precedes the data pattern. The eight-bit data pattern is scanned into the specified scan ring without parity. Alter Scan Rings 1. Display the selected scan ring as in the preceding steps. 2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and £xam~", QVR~iD79~ 3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged and press ENTER. ~ Save Scan Rings The data from the scan rings can be saved by the Block function. The format is OVRxxbb? where xx is a ring number and bb a byte number. Fast-Alter Scan Rings The 38 scan rings are: 5. Press ENTER. key the new bit data. Bit data Op code Byte number (3) Byte number (2) Scan ring number (1) Scan ring number To Fast-Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of the array subscreens: 1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast-Alter Scan Rings." Notes: To Fast-Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens: • Spaces between characters are deleted before the command is analyzed. 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. • If more data is keyed than the select line permits, the message INVALID INPUT appears, and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. • If hex data is keyed instead of bit data, the message INVALID INPUT appears, and the cursor moves to the right of the op code. 2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 3. Press ENTER. 4. Key (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) @ -----_..- ... OVR next to SELECTION followed by: A high-order hex digit of a scan ring number. A low-order hex digit of a scan ring number. A high-order hex digit of a byte number. A low-order hex digit of a byte number. Op code = (MOVE). Bit data. __ • A period (.) is place holder in the data. When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected. • A W-command also stops the PU clock. SEROES (Clock Chip) Diagnostic Latches Refresh Clock and SMl Latch Dynamic Status (M2 Chip) Maintenance Clock PU, CHNL, and L 1 Clock L1 Clock Serdes (PU Maintenance Chip) Diagnostic (PU) Timer and SMl (TOO) Interrupt PU SAR PU Shifter PU Shifter Controls Local Storage Addressing I-Cycles Data Flow Low Data Flow High I/O Interface Channel Data Buffer Channel Interface Card Channel Controls SERDES (Cache/Storage Chip) Diagnostic Latches SAR, Keys, and Cache Controls Cache, Data Reg Bytes 0:3 )Cache, Data Reg Bytes 4:7 DLAT and DIR BSM Controls ECC/Data Flow Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676427 1 of 1 IBM Corp. 1981 - ._-_.__._--. The op code MOVEs the data to the selected location(s). 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 40 4E 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 ..... 44 515f o \ 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 () 0 0: 0 00·0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 I() 0 {~ ( ( ( ( ( (' ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (. ( . ( ( ( ( (. ( • Label Identification INSERT/EXTRACT CLOCK SCAN RINGS (QVY) (GRP 2) CAUTION Observe notes before attempting this procedure. *INSERT/EXTRACT* A S K I B M H C X R Y W T G Display Clock Scan Rings To display the Clock Scan Rings screen from the OV screen: 1. Key aoc or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key W28 next to SELECTION to stop the refresh clock, as all clocks must be stopped. 4. Press ENTER. CLOCK RING (QVY) CP DL PW CP DL ARRAYS 1 2 STATUS SCAN RING 02 00 00 CHECKS IN SYSTEM 14 10 PU HARDWARE 2 13 CS HARDWARE 17 13 MS HARDWARE 3 16 CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE 4 17 12 17 EXTERNAL REGS SCAN RING 5 16 10 15 CLOCK SCAN RING COMMAND SBA-CAC 6 08 08 00 ADDRESS TRANS SET CSAR ADDRESS o o o o CGRPNNXX CP DL PW 3 15 1 15 11 PW 6. Press ENTER. 15 10 11 07 17 11 17 11 11 16 16 13 09 11 08 11 07 13 17 13 17 12 12 06 12 08 10 16 10 16 10 09 06 00 Slitting off of the refresh clock (W2B) destroys the main memory contents. • This procedure should never be used, except when the 4347 clock Distribution Adjustment is performed. • Normally, thess values do not require change, except when a new diskette has been installed, cards H or K replllCfld, some ECs installed which add new groups (modules), or the board has been replaced.. • When installing a new diskette: you must use the update function of the 4347 Clock Distribution Adjustment. • The values of the clocks are critical and have been established tind set by the producing plant. Each machine has its unique values and should not be compared with those of another system. • No attempt should be made to modify the clock values. These values should be displayed periodically to assure that the values have not be6n accidentally modified. Compare with your on-site plant copy. • If the values must be changed, refer to 4347 Clock Distribution Adjustment. • For clock adjustment procedure, see supplements to the MAPs. • Displayed serial number and the NS field is for reference purposes only. o 08 o 00 08 000 CCSYSOSC CGRPNNXX: Represents 15 clock pulses within one pulse of each group. Two groups are addressed at once designated as NN and XX. CP: Represents the chip select SRL. The CP value is for engineering use only. DL: Represents a delay selector. The DL values are for engineering use only. 00 PW: Represents a delay selector. The engineering use only. 00 CCOSCDIV CCSYSOSC: Represents the value of the oscillator frequency. The oscillator frequency is for engineering only. XXX NS ==> ceOSCDIV: CLOCK STOP .Notes: • CP DL PW 6 1 12 08 09 Q GENERAL SELECT SERIAL NO. 000000 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: Y22 5. Key Y22 next to SELECTION. **IML REQUIRED** CP DL PW CP DL PW 4 5 1 12 08 1 16 13 PW value is for Represents a value for engineering use only. 4341 Use with microcode EC 856091 and above @ IBM Corp. 1980 _ _ _ _• _ _ • _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ •••• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ • _ _ _ . • _ _ _ • • __ ~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ • • _ _ _ _ _ _ _ •• _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ • ___ ••• _____ . _____ ~-.!!'.;-~,..'.:::~_,.~!.~.I';~.,':':'"7,("r':::_::" _,~~_ -_._" <_... " _.. " ___ • - - _ _ -0- • •- · __ •• _ _ •••• _ _ •• _ . _ _ . _ ••• __ • ~I::: .. ;......,:,.''''.~~~.;~~~...,._"L~~~~ ....... ....;:-..<"'-----~ use ( 0000000000000000000000000000000000 ( c (~ (' (~ f (' (' ("\ (" (,; (' (~ ("-' (" -' '" ("'\ ( <- (~ Display Clock Scan Rings To display the Clock Scan Rings screen from the av screen: 1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key W2B next to SELECTION to stop the refresh clock. as all clocks must be stopped. 4. Press ENTER. 5. Key Y22 next to SELECTION. 6. Press ENTER. Notes: • (' (- (C' f- (' (~ (~ (" C: Label Identification INSERT/EXTRACT CLOCK SCAN RINGS (QVY) (GRP 1) Warning: Observe notes before attempting this procedure. ('~- CLOCK RING (QVY) CP DL PW CP DL 1 ARRAYS 2 0 02 00 STATUS SCAN RING 00 CHECKS IN SYSTEM PU HARDWARE 14 10 CS HARDWARE 2 13 MS HARDWARE CHANNEL HARDWARE CHANNEL INTRFACE 3 16 17 13 EXTERNAL REGS SCAN RING 17 12 17 CLOCK SCAN RING 4 COMMAND SBA-CAC ADDRESS TRANS SET CSAR ADDRESS 5 16 10 15 ·INSERT/EXTRACT· A S K I B M H C X R Y W T G, o Q GENERAL SELECT SERIAL NO. 000000 Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: Y22 CGRPNNXX CP DL PW 3 1 15 11 15 PW ·*IML REQUIRED·· CP DL PW CP DL PW CP DL PW 4 5 6 1 12 08 1 16 13 1 12 08 CGRPNNXX: Represents 15 clock pulses within one pulse of each group. Two groups, are addressed at once designated as NN and xx. 09 15 10 11 07 17 11 17 11 CP: Represents the chip select" SRL. The CP value is for engineering use only. 11 16 16 13 09 11 08 11 07 Dl: Represents a delay selector. The DL values are for engineering use only. 13 17 13 17 12 12 06 12 08 PW: Represents a delay selector. The PW value is for engineering use only. 10 16 10 16 10 100 CCSYSOSC 100 CCOSCDIV ==> 150NS CCSYSOSC: Represents the value of the oscillator frequency. The oscillator frequency is for engineering use only. CCOSCDIV: Represents a value for engineering use only. CLOCK STOP 4341 Setting off of the refresh clock (W2B) destroys the main memory contents. This procedure should never be used, except when the 4347 clock Distribution Adjustment is performed. • Normally, these values do not require change, except when a new diskette has been installed, cards H or K replaced, some ECs installed which add new groups (modules), or the board has been replaced. • When installing a new diskette; you must use the update function of the 4347 Clock Distribution Adjustment. The values of the clocks are critical and have been established and set by the producing plant. Each machine has its unique values and should not be compared with those of another system. • No attempt should be made to modify the clock values. These values should be displayed periodically to assure that the values have not been accidentally modified. Compare with your on-site plant copy. • If the values must be changed, refer to 4347 Clock Distribution Adjustment. • For clock adjustment procedure, see supplements to the MAPs. • Displayed serial number and the NS field is for reference purposes only. Use with microcode EC 154322 and above EC 379807 22Sep80 © IBM Corp. 1980 PN 2676452 1 of 1 44 519 (" ,/ ( '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,;0',0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C ------------_._- - - ------------------------ - - - ---_._------------ - ------------------------- (' (' INSERT/EXTRACT W COMMAND (QVW) (GRP 2) Note: This function is to be used only under the guidance of your support structure. The W-command sends a command across the Service Bus Adapter (SBA) as a preliminary step to other manual functions. The command is analyzed for valid hex values, and an error message is displayed if incorrect. The scan ring numbers are considered invalid. This command does not require stopping of the PU clock to be invoked. Warning: The W-command is a specialized function designed for debuging activity of the hardware. The PU must be set to the required state for the command to function properly; otherwise. unreliable results occur. ( ( Cache/Storage Maintenance Chip CMD List Cmd Description Cmd Description 2A 2B Start Refresh Clock command Stop Refresh Clock command Set Clock-O Start This is required for each single cycle. Set Single-Cycle Mode/Hard-Stop Mode command Set Clock Cycle Mode command Set Run/Reset Stop Mode command Start PU Clock command Read Local Store Array Read Local Store Retry Array Read Channel Data Buffer Array Read Channel Control Array Read PU TRAP / BAL (TBALSAVE) Array Write Local Store Array Write Local Store Retry Array Write Channel Data Buffer Array Write Channel Control Array Write PU TRAP/BAL (TBALSAVE) Array Pulse Go command Set Instruction Step Mode/Soft-Stop Mode command Set Single Pulse Mode command Reset Pulse Mode command 8A Read Directory 0- 7 Array command Read Channel DLAT Array command Read DLATO Array command Read DLAT1 Array command Read Cache Array command Read Retry Address and Flags Array command Read Retry Buffer Array command Read Keystack Array Command Write Key Stack Array command Write Cache Array command Write Swap Buffer Even Array command Write Swap Buffer Odd Array command Read Swap Buffer Even Array command Read Swap Buffer Odd Array command Write Channel DLAT Array command Write DLATO Array command Write DLAT1 Array command Write Directory 0- 7 Array command Write Retry Address and Flags Array command Write Retry Data Buffer Array command 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 W-Command Invoke Procedure 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 3. Press ENTER. Notes: • • Observe that SBA CMD xx SENT is displayed next to the message indicator. where xx is the two-digit command number. This message remains until another command is sent or until a null (ENTER key only) is performed. When the first manual op command is invoked. the entire command appears along the SELECTION line. If followed by a second command. only the selection character (two-digit number) appears. The W-command can be placed into a loop by using the command QVWLxxyyyy. where L is the loop command. xx represents the command to be performed and yyyy equals the number of times it is to be performed. When this command is used. the message SBA CMD SENT YYYY is displayed next to the message indicator. ( Clock Maintenance Chip Command List 32 2. Key QVW and a two-digit command number next to SELECTION. ( 34 35 36 37 8B 8C 8E 90 91 92 93 94 95 97 ( ( (' (' Control Storage Maintenance Chip Command List Cmd Description CA CB CC CD CE CF DO D1 Set/Reset CSAR command Set/Reset CREG command Read TRACE Array command Set/Reset Trace Buffer Address (TBADR) Set/Reset CS errors Read/Write CS Array command Write TRAPBAL Array command Write TRACE Array This command displays the Insert/Extract menu when entered from any non-Insert/Extract screen. The last display remains on the screen when the command is entered from an Insert/Extract screen. Model Group 2 EC 379822 22Sep80 EC 379808 06Mar81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 ,------~~~-- PN 2676453 1 of 1 44521f ( ( 0000000000000000000000000000000000 - , I " -----.---~-.-.-~--.---~-- .~-------~---- -~~-----~--- ( ( ( ( (- ( (- ( ( ( INSERT/EXTRACT TRANSLATE ADDRESS (QVT) Translate Address Any V-Screen To display any V-Screen: 1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key T next to SELECTION. 4. Press ENTER. 5. Observe message: ENTER 6 DIG AND V OR R. 6. Key the six digits plus V (virtual) or R (real) next to T. 7. Observe that a DLAT address and a Cache address is decoded and displayed next to the message indicator. Notes: • The Insert/Extract Screen selected remains when the translate address is entered. • Message ENTER 6 DIG AND V OR R is displayed when T is entered. • Message BAD ADDRESS is displayed if an incorrect address format is used. • Message DLAT MISS AUxx is displayed if no match was found in the DLAT array. • Message DIR MISS AFxx is displayed if there is no match in the Directory array. • Message AUxx DIR MISS AFxx is displayed if a match is found in the DLAT array, but not found in the Directory. • Message Code is: *INSERT/EXTRACT* A ARRAYS S STATUS SCAN RING K CHECKS IN SYSTEM I PU HARDWARE B CS HARDWARE M MS HARDWARE H CHANNEL HARDWARE C CHANNEL INTRFACE X EXTERNAL REGS R SCAN RING Y CLOCK SCAN RING W COMMAND SBA-CAC T ADDRESS TRANSLAT G SET CSAR ADDRESS Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTRN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: TOOC5llV AL AP AD AN PU LS PU RETRY LS CHNL DATA BUFFER CHNL CONTROL AS AC AT AB AU AH AY AF AG AR SWAP BUFFER CONTROL STORAGE TRAP/BAL STACK CSAR BACKUP PU DLAT CHNL DLAT KEY L1 DIR L1 CACHE DATA CACHE RETRY DATA ==> CLOCK STOP AUla AF14 AGOA2l 4341 a. AUxx - matched DLAT address b. AFxx - matched DIRECTORY address c. AGxxxx - cache address which holds data. Alter Translate Note: There is no alter for the Translate function. Save Translate Note: There is no save for the Translate function. Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 e IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676412 1 of 1 44 525f 0000000000000000000000000000000000 -- ._.- --.. --~---- ----~ ._- ( ( ( (- (\ ( ( ( (' ( (\ INSERT/EXTRACT SET CSAR ADDRESS (QVG) Set CSAR Address 1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU clock. 2. Press ENTER. 3. Key OVG and a control storage address next to SELECTION. Note: The address may be 1 to 5 digits long and must have a value within the range of the control storage that the machine is configured for. 3. Press ENTER. Notes: • The G-command causes the machine to branch to a microword at a specified control storage address. This microword is the next one to be executed. • This command sets up a double-branch microword in the CREG, and cycles the machine to bring the doubleword at the specified control storage address into the CREG. • THE CSAR HAS BEEN SET is displayed next to the message indicator. This message remains until another command is sent or a null (ENTER key only) is performed. • This command causes the Insert/Extract menu to be displayed. Return to General Selection (Q) 1. Key a next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Return to Prog Sys (Z) 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379807 22Sep80 @ IBM Corp. 1979. 1980 PN 5666391 1 of 1 44535 (' 0000000000000000000000000000000000 (' (~ ( ( ( f' { (' ( ( ( (' ( ERROR LOGOUT SCREENS *ERROR LOGOUTS* C S L B T ERROR LOGOUTS (OE) The Error Logouts are a manually invoked function to observe errors that have been collected from the processing unit or the support processor. The error screens are a CE function only. To invoke them, you must first place the CE MODE switch ON. PU LOGOUTS SP LOGOUTS POWER LOGOlITS TEMPERATURE LOGOUTS RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS R REFERENCE CODE LOGOUTS I CAP INITIATOR W SAVED SCREENS D DISKETTE ANAL YS.I S Note: Detailed information pertaining to the logs can be found as follows: • For SELECTION C, S, R, I, and D, see Volume 17, Processor Logs. • For SELECTION Land B, see Volume 16, Processor Power. Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS ==> CLOCK STOP SELECT ION: 4341 Display Error Logouts To display the Error Logout screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key E next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. PU Logouts (OEC) *PROCESSING UNIT LOGOUT SELECTION* To display the PU Error Logouts from the E-screen: 1. Key C next to SELECTION. D DIRECTORY DISPLAY 2. Press ENTER. P PURGE S SUMMARY DISPLAY SELECTION: C ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 Model Group 2 " EC 379808 06Mar81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676413 1 of 2 44 545f PU Directory Display (OECD) To display the PU Directory Display from the PU Logouts screen: 1. Key CD next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. PU Purge Function . You can purge the PU Error Log, but this does not bring up a particular screen. The instructional messages appear on the screen. MODEL: 4341 PROCESSING UNIT LOGOUT DIRECTORY 10 TODC EQUIVALENT REF CODE 00F9 00F8 00F7 00F6 OOF5 00F4 00F3 00F2 OOFI 00/001 05:20:28 00/00105:20:11 00/00101:16:31 00/001 01: 11 :39 00/001 00:21:40 00/001 00:06:50 00/001 00 06:46 00/001 00 05:59 00/001 00 04:24 602986AE 602986AE 660452AE 660452AE 6B2075A6 5E3336AC 5E3336AC 634137AC 633977AE SELECTION: CD MAN TEST STORAGE ERROR AT 000100 AT 000100 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER: 000000 MACHINE STATUS AND CHANNEL RESET 123450 CHECK STOP (RESET) SUCCESSFUL CC=l ON I/O x----SUCCESSFUL CC=l ON I/O x----XXXXXX CHECK STOP (FIRST) CHECK STOP (RESET) CHECK STOP (RESET) CHECK STOP (RESET) LOGOUT HAS BEEN PURGED LOGOUT HAS BEEN PURGED ==> CSAR: 370 TIMER: ON CLOCK STOP 0000 4341 PU Logout Summary (OECS) PU LOG SUMMARY MODEL: To invoke the PU Logout Summary screen from the PU Logout screen: 1. Key CS next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. 4341 008C OOOC 0000 0005 001C 0010 0000 001E 0005 0007 0000 008C OOOC 0000 0005 001C 0010 0000 ODIE 0005 0007 0000 SUCCESSFUL RTY SUCCESSFUL I/O UNSUCCESSFUL RTY UNSUCCESSFUL I/O UNRTY (NORMAL) UNRTY (EHC) UNRTY (NO RETRY) CK ST (FIRST) CK ST (EHC) CK ST (NO LOG) SK ST (MACH RST) 0002 0000 0000 0018 0002 0000 0000 0018 KEY ENABLED SINGLE DOUBLE (PU) DOUBLE (CHANNEL) SERIAL: 0011 0000 0006 OOOA 0019 0019 0019 0019 002A 0038 0037 OOOA 0002 001A 0008 0008 0002 0011 0000 0006 OOOA 0019 0019 0019 0019 002A 0038 0037 OOOA 0002 001A 0008 0008 0002 000000 CURRENT TODC EQU: 79/062 CHN CONTROL CHN DATA BFR H CHN DATA BFR L CHN INTERFACE CS ARRAY a CS ARRAY 1 CS ARRAY 2 CS ARRAY 3 CS CONTROL PU DATA FLOW H PU DATA FLOW L PU I-CYCLES PU INTERRUPTS PU OF CONTROL PU SAR PU SHIFTER PU TIMER SELECTION: CS 0008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0002 0004 0003 0010 0020 0003 0001 0000 0004 0008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0002 0004 0003 0010 0020 0003 0001 0000 0004 ClK STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG 14:27:15 CLOCK CACHE a CACHE 1 CACHE 2 CACHE 3 CACHE 4 CACHE 5 CACHE 6 CACHE 7 CONTROL a CONTROL 1 DLAT/DIR a DLAT/DIR 1 SAR/KEY 0 SAR/KEY 1 ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676413 20f2 0000000000 000000 • ~ 44 550f .• 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (' (' (' (' (~ (- ( (-- (' ( (- ( ( SP Logouts (OES) To invoke the SP Logout screen from the E-screen: ·SP LOGOUTS. 1. Key S next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. A SUMMARY SCREEN P PURGE ALL LOGS o TO 15 DETAIL SCREEN Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROGSYS SELECT ION: S ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 SP Logout Summary (OESA) To display the SP Logout Summary from the SP Logout screen: 1. Key SA next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. SP Purge All Logs This function purges all log records in the SP error area on the diskette. No new screen is involved when you use this function. .**SP LOGOUT SUMMARY••• CURRENT TODC EQUIVALENT: 79/264 11:53:12 ================================================================================ LN EVNT CT TODC EQU IVALENT 00 0017 01 79/263 16:43:24 01 0015 02 79/263 16:09:53 02 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 03 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 04 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 05 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 06 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 07 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 08 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 09 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 10 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 11 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 12 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 13 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 14 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 15 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00 SELECTION: SA LVL 07 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MM 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MC 20 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 --MSW--845C2F2E 845C2F2E 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 C-IC 845A 845A 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 INST A9Ce A9Ce 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ADPT 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SIC2164 2164 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 LMR3900 3900 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 REP. CODE Fll00114 Fll00114 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ==> 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 e IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676414 1 of 2 44 555f SP Detail Screen An SP Log request from an interrupt level 0, lines 17-19 are blank. To display the SP Detail screen from the SP Logout screen: 1. Key Sx next to E on the SELECTION line. (where x = 00 through 15) 2. Press ENTER. Power Logouts (QEL) Notes: • • An SP Log request from a interrupt level " 6, or 7, lines 17-19 display the current and last SPIL instructions. An SP Log request from a interrupt level 2, 3, 4, or 5, line 17-19 display the Device Control Block. To display the Power Logouts screen from the Error Logouts screen: 1. Key L next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. EXPANDED POWER ERROR INFORMATION SP lOG·:OO TOOC EQUIV:81/029 00:05:57 10:0100034341 EC:OOOOOO ================================ EVENT:0002 =============================================================================== 07 lEVEL 7942 IC 00 10ADPT 00000000AA38FOF88238F0790000 CNFG 00 MMASK 34 PP 00 10CMD --------------MSW'S·------------DF CMASK 35 SP 2020 lMR D5E4 E160 lVlO 82DO 6362 lVll 12 SPCK 80 ZHCV 2000 LMRBASE 456E A524 lVl2 OFDO 2726 lVL3 00 10lRR 7942 C-IC F5000120 REFCODE B5AA A928 LVl4 C242 AB2A LVL5 01 MIRR EE05 INST 00000000 RC EXTN 82DO AD2C LVL6 7946 B534 LVL7 ---------1/0 STATUS----------------BURST MODE-------------PLDA-------02 DISK 0002 DCA 5AFC LCA 68 Cl OF C2 80 C3 FE C SCL 000200 LCA DF24 0000 DISK 2F AS AO 1M D3 ID 02 PWR 0000000000 T CCA 0000 0000 AECE AEEO DCA 00 OP 00 CK 30 PG 02 C SBA 00000000 PU AF60 AFEO A86C BOEO DCA 44 TM C8 PF 00 BF 00 CC 00 CA 00 CT REGS:2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 1100 0100 lEOO 2A93 0002 2AOO 7256 726C EODE E300 7235 7534 7920 7C7A 72F6 7214 -------SPll CURRENT INSTRUCTION-------------SPIL LAST INSTRUCTION-------ADDR:20D6 DATA:5201 0000 2494 20EE ADDR:20EE DATA:5000 249A 215A 04FO SPIL BRN TABlE:20DE 2180 2160 20F4 20DE 2180 2160 20F4 20DE 2180 2160 20F4 20DE ==> SELECTION: SOO INSTR STOP DATA: 47FO R-ADDR: 000420 MAN TEST LOG 1: ADDR= 81839193 A1A3B1B3 LAST LOG 54001560 40801780 008007CO 03800380 85879597 A5A7B5B7 2401FFB5 E7FFF1FF 01F02228 00C00600 40424446 50525456 32 03448F78 00008F98 00 ADOR 20F6 LOG 2: ADDR= 81839193 A1A3B1B3 54201560 40801780 008007CO 03800380 85879597 A5A7B5B7 2401FFB5 E7FFF1FF 01F02228 00C00600 40424446 50525456 32 03448F78 00008F78 00 AD DR 20F6 LOG 3: ADDR= 81839193 A1A3B1B3 40000400 40000001 lF8077FB 03807783 85879597 A5A7B5B7 000109Bl 8322D1DF FFFEF66E 7CC02E20 40424446 50525456 32 20658F77 8DF08F98 OD ADDR 3DB5 LOG 4: ADDR= 81839193 A1A3B1B3 40200400 40000001 lF8077FB 03807783 85879597 A5A7B5B7 000109Bl 0322D1DF FBFEF66E lC802E20 40424446 50525456 32 20658F78 8DF08FB6 OD ADDR 3DB5 REFERENCE CODES: 101FF202 101FF202 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A MAN TEST INSTR STOP 4341 4341 SP lOG:OO TODC EQUIV:81/029 00:05:57 ID:Ol00034341 EC:OOOOOO EVENT:0002 =============================================================================== 07 LEVEL 7942 IC 00 10ADPT 00000000AA38FOF88238F0790000 CNFG 00 MMASK 34 PP 00 10CMD --------------MSW'S-------------DF CHASK 35 SP 2020 LMR D5E4 E160 LVLO 82DO 6362 LVLl 12 SPCK 80 ZHCV 2000 LMRBASE 456E A524 LVL2 OFDO 2726 LVL3 00 10lRR 7942 C-IC F5000120 REFCODE B5AA A928 LVL4 C242 AB2A LVL5 01 MIRR EE05 INST 00000000 RC EXTN82DO AD2C LVl6 7946 B534 LVL7 ---------1/0 STATUS----------------BURST MODE-------------PLDA-------02 DISK 0002 DCA 5AFC LCA 68 Cl OF C2 80 C3 FE C SCl 000200 LCA DF24 0000 DISK 2F AS AO 1M D3 ID 02 PWR 0000000000 T eCA 0000 0000 AECE AEEO DCA 00 OP 00 CK 30 PG 02 C SBA 00000000 PU AF60 AFEO A86C BOEO DCA 44 TM C8 PF 00 BF 00 CC 00 CA 00 CT REGS:2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 1100 0100 lEOO 2A93 0002 2AOO 7256 726C EODE E300 7235 7534 7920 7C7A 72F6 7214 -----------------------------DEVICE CONTROL BlOCK-----------------------------0200 FFOl 1000 0000 003C 8117 EDOO 0000 5400 5406 0801 0000 190C 0000 60C2 073C C1E8 0746 0757 0769 0767 077F E500 B2BA 0000 0000 F028 C1F8 E520 BED6 B9FC FFFF SELECTION: SOl ==> MAN TEST INSTR STOP DATA: 47FO R-ADDR: 000420 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676414 20f2 0000000000 000000 o 44560f ·0 0 0 0 0 '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (' (' ( (' (>; Temperature Logouts (OEB) To display the Temperature Logouts screen from the Error Logouts screen: TEMPERATURE TRACE DEGREES C. 42 1. Key B next to SELECTION. 40 2. Press ENTER. 38 36 LAST ERASE DATE ================= YY/MM/DD 00/00/00 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 .+.+ +. .++ + +++-++. + +++++ - ++- + +++ +++++++ + +++ + +++ +++++++-+.--+++++++-+--++---++- 18 16 14 12 . .. +++++++++++++ . 10 TO PURGE ENTER "P" AND DATE .. • •••.... MAN TEST INSTR STOP 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 @ IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676415 1 of 3 44 565f -~~-=-=-- RSF Line Error Statistics (QET) The Line Error Statistics screen enables you to read all send/receive operations and any errors that occurred during a Remote Support session. These statistics are accumulated and the counters are reset at the beginning of each new session. *RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS* NUMBER OF OPERATIONS NUMBER OF ERRORS SEND RECEIVE 0000 0000 0000 0000 Display RSF Line Error Statistics Screen To display the RSF Line Error Statistics screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key ET next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION: T ==> 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676415 20f3 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 o 44566f .0 0 0 0 0 ,0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (" ( (~ (-". ("' (~ (' (' (' (-" (,- (' f ('- (' <: (~' { ( (- (- (- (O- f (\ [' ( -----_ (" (' (., ( ... Reference Code Logouts (QER) *REFERENCE CODE LOGOUTS* To display the Reference Code Logouts from the Error Logouts screen: 1. Key R next to SELECTION. o DISPLAY REFERENCE CODES P PURGE ALL LOGS 2. Press ENTER. Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: R MAN TEST ==> I NSTR STOP 4341 Reference Code Logout File (QERD) **REFERENCE CODE LOGOUT FILE** To display the Reference Code Logout File from the Reference Code Logouts screen: 1. Key RD next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. CURRENT TODC EQUIVALENT: 79/264 11:48:43 ================================================================================ RN CT ---TODC EQUIV-01 79/263 16:43:24 1 02 79/263 16:09:53 2 00 00/001 00:00:00 3 00 00/001 00:00:00 4 00 00/001 00:00:00 5 00 00/001 00:00:00 6 00 00/001 00:00:00 7 00 00/001 00:00:00 8 00 00/001 00:00:00 9 00 00/001 00:00:00 10 00 00/001 00:00:00 11 00 00/001 00:00:00 12 00 00/001 00:00:00 13 00 00/001 00:00:00 14 00 00/001 00:00:00 15 00 00/001 00:00:00 SELECTION: RD MAN TEST o REF CODE Fll00114 Fll00114 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RC EXTN. 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RN CT ---TODC EQUIV-- REF CODE RC EXTN. 16 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 17 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 18 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 19 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 20 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 . 21 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 22 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 23 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 24 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 25 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 26 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 27 00 00/001 00:00:.00 00000000 00000000 28 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 29 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 30 00 00/001 00:00:00 00000000 00000000 TIME OF LAST PURGE: 81/003 13:34:43 ==> CLOCK STOP 4341 Purge All Logs Use this function (PI to purge all logs. Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676415 30f3 44570f 0000000000000000000000000000000000 (" ( o • ( ( ( (- (0' CAP Initiator (QEI) To invoke the CAP Initiator function from the Error Logouts screen: CAP iN IT I AT OR 1. Key I next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. £NTERREfE.RENCE CODE ('8 mlt;lTS) ~ OR ADO EXTENS-ION (8 MORE) ~AN TEST INSTR STOP 4341 Model Group 2 © IBM Corp .. 1979, 1981 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379829 28Jun82 PN 2676458 1 of 4 44 575f --------- SAVED SCREENS (QEW) The Saved Screerrs:;screen provides an area ,·screenHor a log entry by the S6rvicEnepresentative or allows:t"hedisplay of a screen(s) that~beeflsaved by the COP¥" Key (~ function. The. CE-Log' sa:eeft'iS'B;cpreformatted scre:$ withillput fields used for~estrvof proWemsand!ar repairactiofls. TheC£ SCfeeR'$ao.Copy of a saved scr..een: and the. current TOO clock. valueo·Qfl the: diskette when tna. CDPY kelt is pressed. The Saved ~screencontains alt thacommam:ls necessary to masipWatedhe CE Log screents} or the: CE screen(s). Screen Layout - *SAVED SCREENS. T LI ST o DISPLAY L RE-TITLE ADOR RMGE (-OO/OE) DATE: YY/DDO HH:MM' ••"We LOG TITLE ..... *........u**... 0(1 DIR MISS a1 CACHE PROBLEMS LOG TITLE ................. CLOCK CARD FAI LURE 02 E CE LOG EDIT •• ***- R ERASE ONE X PURGE CE LOG SCRttS Y PURGE tE S{RNS 01 POWER DROP 1\:1-B 1 BOARD PRIlB CETITLE ..........****...........*** SAVED DATE * QVAFO{) o%al oo~oa The Saved Screens screen menu is displayed on the left side .of thest:reerT. The area on the right- (top) displays the address and title afany CE Log(s). Two logs are contained on earn. CE Log screelT. The area an the right (bottom) disptays- the address, title, and saved date of any CE screen copied to the diskette. The Saved Screen function' displays the most recent saved CE Log screen or CE screen at thEf'tOP of its respective grouping. A maximum combinatiorr of four screens (between the twa groups) can be saved. NOtes: F SEND TO CONS PRT C SEND TO CHNL PRT .. ane or twa logs saved tue- CE wg- screen is considered lI!L t:I/!'Ie' saveti Q GENERAL SELECT Z RTN TO PROG SYS == SELECT ION! WTOO screen; .. Lagf serves- as the title to the CE Log screen. 0> Paging may be requ;ret! to SEi!e' the complete list of saved sc.reeos.. Display Saved-Screens 43iA-l To display the SavectScreens from the General Selection screen: CElog Screen . layout The GE log screen is a preformatted screen with input frelds. Each screen provides for two log entries. This enables the service representative to communicate. intermittent problems and repair activities:. 1. Key EW next..to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER Notec Pressing the EOF key when the cursor is positioned after SYMPTOM: clears, up to CE NAME, the remaining titles: to provide more space for describing- a problem. CE Screen Layout ';j (ENTER KEYWORIl SYM·PTON) LOGI: SYMPTON: ~.~~~;:.--::-' The CE screen is a copy of a screer!. and the current TOO clock. value.. SAVED-title is displayed an the screen next to the message indicator. YY/MM/DD FRUS CHANGED-: FRUS CALLED: DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS/COMMENTS: INC IDENT: CE NAME PROBLEM: (ENTER KEYWORD LOG2: SYMPTON: YY/MM/DD: SYMPTa~) FRUS CHANGEO: FRUS CALLED: DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS/COMMENTS: INCIDENT: SELECTION: WDOO PROBLEM: CE N,AME ==-> 43:4'1 Model Group 2 I EC 379808:' 06Mar81' EC 3.79829 .2BJun8Z o o o 000000000 o o :. .. '0,:-0 0 0 o o 0000 PN 2676458: 2of4 o o 44 57fif 000 o (' (' (' ( .. .. o • (C { Commands CE Log Edit Send to Console Printer F addr List E addr Displays the CE Log screen at the specified address. If no address is specified, a new CE Log screen is :displayed. 00-03. This command enables the inputting of log entry data or editing to existing log entries. After any required entries or editing has been made, pressing the ENTER key saves the screen at address Jocation 00. Notes: Notes: T addr Displays the addresses, titles, and saved dates (CE screen) of the saved CE Log and CE screens; addr is an address from If an existing CE Log screen is displayed and the ENTER key (saved) is pressed, its new .address.iocation is 00. Entering QEW defaults to WTOO. Entering wn defaults.to WT01. Pressing the MODE SEL key or changingYire CDmmand on the SELECTION line prevents the displayer:i C£ Log screen from being saved. Display QEWT is redisplayed and SAVE-tjtfe apfJliSrs on line 23 after saving. o addr Displays the specified saved screen; addr is an Bddress from Prints the specified saved screen on the console printer (Kn); addr is the address of the screen to be printed. (- Return to' General Selection (Q) 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Notes: The console printer must be disconnected (assigned Kdsc) on the program load (QL) screen before using this command. Entering FALL next to SELECTION and pressing ENTER prints all saved screens. Return to Prog Sys (Z) 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Entering Faddr1-addr2 (addr1== beginning address, addr2= ending address) prints the screens specified from the beginning address through the ending address. Send to Channel Printer C addr cuu 00-03. Displaying a saved screen lines (1-19) also displays lines 20-24 of the current screen. Unes 20-24 of thE saved screen are displayed on lines 2-6 when pag.ing forward {still keeping lines 20-24 of current displayed screen). Row 1, column 1 characters are not displayed, and theSAVED-titla is displayed on the screen next to the message indicator. R addr Erases the specified screen from the diskette. Note: All fields are protected when displaying a saved screen. X Erase One Purge CE Log Screens Erases all CE Log screens from the diskette. Prints the s!,ecified saved screen on 1he channel printer; addr is the address of the screen to be printed, and cuu is the channel unit address of the channel printer. Notes: This_selection is valid when the machine has been IMLed but ffVtlPLed. The -channel unit address (cuu) def.aults to the KCcuu assignment if not specified. See "Program Load (QL)." Entering CALL cuu next to SELECTION and pressing ENTER prints all saved screens. Re-Title L addr new title If the address of the saved screen is speci~d, this command renames the title at that arldress to the specified title. If no title is given, the title rs not changed. but a copy of the title of the address specified is put on the SelECTION line after L addr. Purge CE Screens y Erases all CE screens from the diskette. Entering Caddr1-addr2 cuu (addr1== beginning address, addr2==ending address) prints the screens specified from the beginning address through the ending address. Warning: If the machine has been IPLed, a QCLEAR is required. However, a loss of customer data can result with this selection. Notes: CE Log screens cannot be retitled. Because all blanks are talren out of the SELECTION line commands, a period must be used in place of a blank. Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 EC379829 28Jun82 -_ __._-----_.._....._---_._--.. PN 2676458 30f4 44 577f OISKETTE READABILITY (QED) The Diskette Readability screen enables ,{outo read all records on a, diskett~, starting at a given address. This function tests'tlre-.abfI;ity to read the, record_ Any umeadable records arerepm:te.d, and the function continues to the end of the .diskette, Status Field Field t TO STARr: I) MAKE SURE 0 I SKffiE TO BE JESTED I S I KSTALLED :L} TYPE CYLINDER- AND RECQRD-NUM5ER IN ItEX I NTO SElECT 10N-F I ELO At+D PRESS ENTER-KE 80 40 CO OR N.orm-alopeFal!iontime for this functiorl'lScaoout one minute, unless theprorgram-is interrupted by thE!' opsator if he pressestbe·l','6ElESEL key or the LOGlCRESET outton. The diskette:ha&,7&cylinders with 26 recaros on each side. A four-digit hes:Rwnber is the address at,-lNbich this function begins its anaLysfs:. The- first two digits' are:otb& cylinder number (rangaOOm4C); the second twa digits are the record number;-; Rcmge80 to 9A is for th$-'fFGnt of the diskette, and ~·OO to lA is for the bac:I£. The front is the side with tl"l& pmoauent label. The following fields combine ta create the ohe-byte deviCe status. -DISKETTE READABILITY TEST- 2.) PRESS ENTER-KEY ONLY TO START ANALYSIS WITH CYLINDER 0 MO RECORD 1. TO 18 - 20 - 30 - 3B: - za - SELECTION-FORMAT:. DCCRR (ALL NUMBERS IN HEX) CC=CYLfNDER, 00 TO 4C RR=RECORD. 00 TO lA, BACK-HEAD 80 TO 9A ~ FRONT -It-E-Ptfl ==>. Diskette Readabili-ty Screen 4141 To select the DIskette Readability screew from the General Selection screerr: - Field 2. 08 EXIT: 1) MAKE SURE ORIGINAL-DISKETTE IS INSTALLED. 2) SELECT ANY SCREEN. SELECTION: 0 - Ftekt3 at OL - Q4;: - Error Status Command Error CRe Error Hardware Error Operational. Status Control Opef'8tion Complete Busy Overrun or Underrun Timeout Recard Not FOUDd Diskette Nat Ready mterrupt Statl:.l& lmerruptR~ Eflable fntemlpt: Machine Cbeck: Return to General SeIectionfQ) a next to SELECTION. 1. Key ED next to' SELECTION. 1. Key L 2.. Press ENTER Press ENTER. The Diskette Analysis: screen appears. 3. Change thec:liskette to the one to be analyzed. Return to Prog Sys (Z) 4. Enter the starting address, and press ENTER. Note: The analysis begins with cylinder 0 and record 1 if no address is entered. t. Key Z next to SELECTIQN_ 2. Press ENTER- 5. Any error is displayed on the screen. If the screen becomes full, press ENTER to continue the analvsis. You can interrupt the program by selecting another screen. 6. If you get the message OPERATOR TROUBLE, check the diskette drive. Usually, the dOor is open. Close the door and start the analysis from the- beginning. If the door is not open, there is a physical problem with the drive. 7. At the end of the analysis or if you wish to interrupt the analysis, be sure to replace the original c:lisk. Note:. If a module ID of FFFF appears, one-of the following has occurred: -DISKETTE READABILITY TESTLINE CYLINDER HEAD NUMB NUMBER FRONT 12 01 BACK 16 02 lA BACK 03 25 FRONT 04 2C FRONT 05 FRONT 39 06 3F BACK 07 RECORD MOo-ULE 10 NUMB.ER 0580 04 11 1120 IA 1145 OE 44B4 9000 01 9E24 09 D72A 12. DEVICE STATUS 42 42 42 42 42 42 C.4 PARAMETERS ARE GI VE.N I N HEX-VALUES The module ID is beyond the emf of the writteIT data Cylinder 0 was read A cylinder index was read The master index was read. I F THERE I S MORE TO DO, PRESS ENTER-KEY OR EX IT • TO INTERRUPT, INSTALL OR/G,.-DISK AND PRESS MODE KEY. I F ANAL YS I SIS COMPLETED YOU MAY START AGA H~ NO MaR£: REAtl ERROR SELECTION: 01284 ==>ANAlYSIS COMPUTED 434-1 Model Group- 2. EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379829 2BJun8L 00 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 il • • • 000 o \[. o o PN 2676458 4 of 4 44 580f 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 1",,' ) ' '\.. ' o (' ( (" ( '.... "',, ( (~ .• c- {~' . (' C' ( .... ( () ( .. cc POWER/TEMPERATURE SCREENS' POWER/TEMPERATURE (M-SCREEN) *POWER/TEMPERATURE* You use the Power/Temperature screen to invoke the power or temperature programs. When these functions are invoked. the diagnostic monitors assume control and other manual functions are not available. except under the monitor's control. Each function makes reference to the proper manual for additional information. W PARTIAL POWER UP/DOWN U FULL POWER UP A ANALOG SENSOR DISPLAY D DIGITAL SENSOR DISPLAY Display Power/Tanperature Screen T TEMPERATURE SENSOR DISPLAY WITH POWER OFF ONLY: V VOLTAGE TRACKING To display the Power/Temperature screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key M next to SE~ECTION. P POWER DIAGNOSTICS 2. Press ENTER. Q GENERAL SELECION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: ==> INSTR STOP • 4341 Partial Power Up and Down Screen (QMW) To display the Partial Power Up and Down screen from the Power/Temperature screen: POWER UP---------------------- 00 POWER DOWN-------------------- 01 1. Key W next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Full Power Up Function (QMV) PARTLY POWER UP AND DOWN ======================== FUNCTION: . When you press QMU. the system automatically powers up completely. This function alone does not bring up a special screen. COMPLETE PART 1 / PART 2 PART 3 PART 4 / PART 5 PART 6 PART 7 / POWER UP/DOWN: .. SYSTEM PROC U~IT CTCA 1...0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 STATUS ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF FUNCTION: .. INSTR STOP 4341 - EC 376695 16Aug79 EC 379598 15Apr80 @IBM Corp. 1979 PN 5666396 10f2 44585 • - - - - - - ._----_ .. _---_._---._-- . _ - - - - - _.. ----------_. -- - --------- - _ . _ ... _ - - - - - Momentary Status Display To display the Momentary Status screen from the Partial Power Up and Down screen: 1. Press the PF8 key once. MOMENTARY STATUS DISPLAY ======================== CONTROL LATCH ADDRESSES: CONTROL LATCHES: 40424446 01450FA0 50525456 0CF00FA0 DIGITAL SENSE ADDRESSES: DIGITAL SENSES: 81839193 00200000 A1A3B1B3 60000000 ANALOG SENSE ADDRESSES: ANALOG SENSES: 85879597 FF0EFF6C A5A7B5B7 7C010FC0 INTERRUPT AND STATUS BYTE: 00 ADDR OF STOP AND SEQUENCE: SEQUENCE: ERROR BITS--BIT/ADDR: 2116 1034 30 00 02 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 0000 00A3 20A3 9495 1034 4341 Error Status Display ERROR STATUS DISPLAY To display the Error Status Display from the Partial Power Up and Down screen: 1. Press the PF8 key twice. 2. Press PF8 again to retum to the Partial Power Up and Down screen. ==================== CONTROL LATCH ADDRESSES: CONTROL LATCHES: 40424446 50525456 32 00000000 00000000 00 DIGITAL SENSE ADDRESSES: DIGITAL SENSES: DIGITAL COMPARE MASK AND RESULT 81839193 00000000 00000000 00000000 A1A3B1B3 00000000 00000000 00000000 85879597 00000000 00000000 00000000 A5A7B5B7 00000000 00000000 00000000 ANALOG SENSE ADDRESSES: ANALOG SENSES: , ANALOG COMPARE MASK AND RESULT SEQUENCE:, ADDR/DATA DATA ERROR BITS--BIT/ADDR: 1034 2116 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0000 0000 0 00 0000 0000 1034 REF CODE F70CE002 4341 EC 376695 16Aug79 EC 379598 15AprSO PN 5666396 2 of 2 3000000000 0,000000 44590 00000000000000 ( ( ( (~ ( ( ( ( (" ( ( Analog Sense Display (QMA) To display the Analog Sense Display screen from the Power/Temperature screen: 1. Key A next to SELECTION. **...*.............**.............. . .........*****.....*.............. MAXIMUM C E CALL 2. Press ENTER. ANALOG SENSE AOI TO A32 + -+- -+ -++ ++ ++++ ++ THIS DISPLAY IS TO BE USED FOR COARSE ADJUSTMENT ONLY WHEN ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETE. PRESS FUNCTION KEY 9. -+ -+- 00000000 01111111 11122222 22222333 12345678 "90123456 78901234 56789012 MAXIMUM .......*********.....*.*****....... ..*..............*•••••••* C E CALL ...............*****............... ++ ++ ++--+ ANALOG SENSE A33 TO A64 ..*......................* + -- 33333334 44444444 45555555 55566666 34567890 12345678 90123456 78901234 4341 Digital Sensor Display (QMD) DIGITAL SENSE DATA DISPLAY - REPRESENTS INACTIVE STATE • REPRESENTS ACT IVE STATE To display the Digital Sensor Displa"y screen from the Power/Temperature screen: 1. Key D next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. SAMPLE DIG ITAL MODE IS ACTIVE MODES: SAHPLE- READ DIGITAL INPUTS ONCE AND DISPLAY CONTINUOUS- READ AND DISPLAY DIGITAL INPUTS CONTINUOUSLY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ._----- ._- 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 -----35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 - - - - - - - - - - - . DIGITAL 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 DIGITAL 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 ENTER DISPLAY CONTROL CHARACTER S. OR C: MAN" TEST ==> INSTR STOP 4341 EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379604 05Dec80 © IBM Corp. 1979, 1980 "- PN 5666397 1 of 2- 44595 , ._- .. ---~-------------~ Thennal Sense Data Display (QMT) To display the Thermal Sense Data Display screen from the Power/Temperature screen: 1. Key T next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. THERMAL SAMPLE SENSE DATA DISPLAY MODE IS ACTIVE MODES: SAMPLE- READ THERMAL INPUTS ONCE AND DISPLAY CONTINUOUS- READ AND DISPLAY THERMAL INPUTS CONTINUOUSLY THERMAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DEGREES C 24 29 28 25 MAXIMUM ----------------------------------------------------------------------- CE CALL ----------------------------------------------------------------------- NOMINAL ............******..................................................... ENTER DISPLAY CONTROL CHARACTER S, OR C: MAN TEST ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Voltage Tracking Display (QMV) To display the Voltage Tracking screen from the Power/Temperature screen: 1. Key V next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. VOLTAGE TRACKING DISPLAYS THE TURN ON OF SELECTED VOLTAGES IN THE PROCESSING UNIT AND CTCA (IF INSTALLED). THERE MUST BE TWO INPUTS, TRACK NUMBER (01-14) AND VOLTAGE(S) (Vl-V7). THE TRACKS ARE IN THE ORDER OF THE POWER ON SEQUENCE TRACK V4 NUMBER VI V2 01 -2.2 BIAS -4.25 BIAS -1. 5 BIAS 02 +4.25 BIAS 03 +6 BIAS -1. 5 BULK 04 +6 BULK -2.2 BULK 05 +4.25 BULK -4.25 BULK +5 VOLTS 06 -6.45 INITIAL (-2.2) 07 +4.25 INITIAL EXAMPLES: TRACK NUMBER VI V2 08 -1.5(Al} -1.5{A2) 09 -4.25(A1) -4.25(A2} 10 -6.115 11 +6 12 +4.25 FINAL 13 +1.25· -3· 14 +6· • = CTCA VOLTAGE V4 -1.5(B1) -4. 25(B 1} TRACK NUMBER 04 V2 = -2.2 BULK TRACK NUMBER 04 V5 = +6 & -1.5 BULK TRACK NUMBER 04 V7 = +6,-2.2, & -1.5 BULK ENTER: TRACK NUMBER .. VOLTAGE(S) V 1004 1004 4341 Note: This screen reflects a typical voltage tracking display. Refer to "Processor Power" section for the machine's correct version. EC 379598 15Apr80 EC 379604 05Dec80 3000000 0000000000 PN 5666397 2 of 2 44600 000000 000000 000 (' (" ( (>. ('\ (' Power Diagnostics Use this function to run diagnostics on the power controller adapter section of the machine. Return to General Selection from the M-Screen 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Return to Prog Sys 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. EC 37~586 19Nov79 EC 37959815Apr80 @ IBM Corp. 1979 PN 5666398 1 of 1 44605 iO 0 0 0 () 0 '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 C '0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C ('\ c ( o • ( Diskette IPl (01) (' (~ (" Return to Prog Sys (Z) *DISKETTE IPL· The Diskette IPL screen provides the service representative with a selection of diagnostic tools. These tools are diskette dependent; the screen identifies which one is required. 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 4300 FRIEND CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL DIAG DIAG 2. Press ENTER. SYSTEM TEST ST/4300 TAPE OLTS (xxxx = DEVICE TYPE) DIAG 5 DIAG 5 Return to General Selection (0) LOAD MODULE -FEnn- DIAG 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. D SP DUMP TO MAIN STORAGE FUNC 2. Press ENTER. Q Z GENERAL SELECTION RETURN TO PROG SYS E C The Diskette IPL screen is a CE function and can only be invoked in CE mode. S Txxxx FEnn Display Diskette I PL To display the Diskette IPL screen from the General Selection screen: 1. Key I next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. NOTE: 'QRES' REQUIRED AFTER DISKETTE IPL SELECTION: ==> " t J ". ~ -E 4300 Friend FEnn load Module For detailed information about 4300 Friend, see Volume 17, section 40, "4300-FRIEND." This selection allows loading a module from a disk into main storage. To use this function: C Channel-To-Channel For detailed information about Channel-to-Channel, see volume 17, section 42, "Channel-to-Channel Adapter Test." S System Test ST / 4300 For detailed information about System Test ST /4300, see volume 17, section 40, "ST / 4300." 1. Key FEnn (nn=module ID number) next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. 3. When the message MOUNT PROPER DISK ENTER appears. Mount the required disk. 4. Press ENTER. 5. When the message REMOUNT FUNCTIONAL DISK appears. Mount the functional disk. 6. Key QRES next to SELECTION. 7. Press ENTER. Txxxx Tape OLTS For detailed information about Tape OLTS, see volume 17, section 40, "ONLINE TESTS (OLTS)." D SP Dump To Main Storage This selection is used with the SP STAND-ALONE DUMP SUPPORT option. Model Group 2 @ IBM Corp. 1981 EC 379825 05Jun81 EC 379829 28Jun82 PN 2676428 1 of 2 44 607f ( ( SP STAND-ALONE DUMP SUPPORT Note: Use this function only as directed by your Support Structure. This command provides a support processor storage dump to main storage which then can be printed. To invoke SP Stand-Alone Dump: 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Press CE panel switches invokes SP trace. Format: A. B, and C together. This x(x> INSTR STOP 4341 When a device is removed from the system. unassign its address by using the X-option on 'the aDUU screen. The aDU selection gives you a menu of the subsereens that can be selected. The aDUU (U selection) function updates the seme directory that you can display by using the aDUC (C selection) and the aDUE (E selection). The U and E selections display the directory that associates the channel devices to the UCW• . Note: For sddltiOllllI information about UCW assignments, ,life, to the UCW Assignment table in the "Service Aid" StlCtion af Volume 13. UCW FACILITIES. Display ODU Menu Screen (ODU) 1. Place the CE MODE switch ON. 2. Key in aDU. 3. Pre.. ENTER. J 4» IBM Corp. 1979, 1980 t " l' EC 866430 14Nov80 379824 16Jan81 ~C PN 5666400 10f3 44615 (, ( _. .-.~---~-- (. ..... ,.,.""-,"!.•• Display UCW Directory Update Screen (QDUU) EXAMPLES Of UCW ENTRIES This screen is used to make updates to the UCW Directory. "DISPLAY/ALTER" G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS W SP STORAGE D CON.S1JLE DI SK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UU 380-387 SL 1. Key U and a three-digit device address next to U on the SELECTION line if you have the facility screen displayed. Key QDUU and a three-digit address next to SELECTION if you are doing a fast-select. Nota: The address is in the form of XXX-YYY. The XXX is a requirad thrfHl-digit dllVice address. The-YW is optione/ and gives the ending address of a range of dfNice addresses. The addresses can range, with three clNmnels installed, from 000 to 2FF, and with six cIumneIs installed, from 000 to SFF. Addresses OFO through OFF are resarved. 2. Press ENTER. Nota: Including the cherBCteristics after the address may be required. If included, they replace those cheracteristics which IU. set by default. The default assigns the dllVice to a byt. or block-multiplexer UCW. The default is detlUmined from the channel list shown on the top of the ODUU screen. The following list shows the optione/ chtuscteristi" and how they are displayed on the UC and UE funCtion screens. Chtu deP det- i.... Display L S X SHR UNA FORMAT: One example of an entry is illustrated on the screen. By keying U and 380-387, and then Sand L. the entry shows on the OOUC screen across from the Trace Function selection on the Display/Alter screen. Note that the dllVica is shared and a selector device on a channel ia listed in the CHARACTERISTICS column. UU XXX -YYY CHARACTERISTICS XXX STARTING DEVICE AD DR -YYY ENDING DEVICE ADDR (OPTIONAL) • CHARACTERISTICS (OPTIONAL, ANY ORDER) S SHARED UCW L SELECTOR MODE -BLOCK ONLY D DATA STREAMING MODE -BLOCK ONLY Another example: If you keyed 003-006 next to the U on the SELECTION line, you permit a default to occur. In this example, if you display OOUC, note that under the CHARACTERISTICS column, the device address defaults to byte-multiplexer mode, and thus has one UCW per device. X UNASSIGN DIRECTORY PU-IML REQUIRED AFTER UPDATES' ==> INSTR STOP 4341 Byte-multiplexer device Block~multiplexer dllVice Selector device on block-multiplexer channel Use a shared UCW No device' isaigned to address UCW has invalid format for channel mode Datil streaming mode INV o "UCW DIRECTORY UPDATES" , LASTREF=OOF CHANNEL: O-BYTE I-BLOCK 2-BLOCK 3-BLOCK 4-BLOCK 5-BLOCK Function BYT BLK SEL . .. ,_.;>,...;. OST • Abbreviation for default. Notes: • The ptIIfJing kll'/s are inoperative for the UCW function. • Channel 0 defaults to BYT; channels 1-6 default to BLl(. ChsnneI" defaults to BYT when selected to do 80 on the System Configuretion screen (OF$J. • Do not IML tha processor if using this procedure during the install.tion of tllli processor. - I EC 865430 14NovSO EC379824 16Jan81 PN5666400 ' 44620 20f3 ----- " ,.... 1 . . . '. .... .' I . r . :<)0 to· 0 0.00 00 00,·.00 00'0 ... " '.- -'. .. ~ ~----- :----- - ..... 0·0 -.- ..-" .. ~~ .... o r 0 00>0:.0.0 00 0 /. o tin " (' ( { ( (' "" ( " ..,r' (' ( ... , ....""'.. UCW Compressed Directories (QDUC) UCW Expanded Directorie. (QDUE) This screen is used to verify any changes made while using the Update acreen (QDUU) in the assignment procedure. This screen is used to wrify any changes medII while using the Update acreen (QDUU) in the assignment procedure. Display UCW/Device Directory-Compressed Directories Display To display the UCW/Devic:e Directorr-Compressed Directories Display from the D-screen: 1. Plaeeth8 CE MODE switch ON. 2. Kay UC and a three-digit address (OOO-5FF) next to SELECTION. Note: The tlwee-digit address can lHI defaulted to 000. 3. Preas ENTER. Ncmts: • • The message MORE, PRESS ENTER appellrs ift""'e is """" date then can lHI displayed on one page. *DISPlAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA A AUXILIARY STORAGE U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS ,W SP STORAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UC *UCW DIRECTORIES DISPLAY. CUU REF CHARACTERISTICS 003-006 010-013 BYT 010 003 BYT 060-067 014 BYT.SHR 150-15F 015-024 BlK 240-243 025-028 SEL.BLK 280 029 BlK 380-387 02A SEL.SHR SEL.SHR 388-:-38F 02B 4B8 4CO-4C5 503-506 51A 520-527 02C 02D-032 033-036 037 038-03F Display UCW/Device Directory-Expanded Directorie. Display To display the ucw /Dwit:8 Directory-Expended Directories Display from the D-screen: 1. Place the CE MODE swi1Ich ON. INV BLK.DST BlK SEL BLK 2. Kay UE and a three-digit address (000-5FF) next to SELECTION. Note: The tlwee-digit sdd,.". can lHI dtlfeulted to 000. 3. Preas ENTER. ==> INSTR STOP The Compressed Directories Display screen cannot lHI e/tered. If you need to elter, it must lHI dona by the Update screen (ODUU}. Use Restrictions The routine does not allow 1he user to assign Of unaaaign a UCW for a native device. The Load screen handles the native device meppings dynamically. 4341 If two ranges of shanId UCW devices are adjacent. they must be assigned at different times (a different entry); otherwise. the same r.f• •nCB number is assigned to both ranges. This is not true with nonahared c:Ievicea, where a range over many control units may be sssigned at one time. The reference numbers 000 through OOF are reserved. Device numbers OFO through OFF are also reaeMld. *DISPLAY/ALTER* G GENERAL REGISTERS C CONTROL REGISTERS F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS P CURRENT PSW K STORAGE KEY V VIRTUAL STORAGE M REAL STORAGE T TRACE AREA S BLOCK SAVE AREA ,A AUX ILIARY STORAGE, U UeW/DEVleE DIRECTORY L LOCAL STORAGE X EXTERNAL REGISTERS WSP STPRAGE D CONSOLE DISK FILE = HEX CALCULATOR ~ GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: UEOFO . *UCW DIRECTORIES OISPLAY* CUU REF CHARACTERISTICS OFO 007 INV OFI OOB INV OF2 003 BYT OF3 004 lNV OF4 005 INV OF5 006 INV OF6 001 BYT OF7 002 BYT OF8 OF9 OFA OFB OFC OFO OFE OFF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF 009 ==> UNA UNA UNA UNA UNA UNA INV BYT HEX OICO 0200 OOEO 0100 0140 0180 0060 OOAO The routine only changes the console file (diskette' holding the directories. It does not change the UCWs in auxiliary storage. Do a processor re-IML, to have the changes made on the screen reflect the UCWs in auxiliary storage. If the characteristicaof a device must be changed, first unassign the UCW for that device addr.... and then perform a new assignment with the proper characteriatica. 0300 03DO 03DO 03DO 0300 0300 03eO 0260 INSTR STOP 4341 EC 866430 14NovSO EC 379824 16Jan81 '1"---'--' ~ PN 5666400 30f3 44625 " ( o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:'''''''0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C .,-- .. (' ('\ ( .' C (" (- (' ("' (' BLOCK FACILITY The blobk facility allows you to create a block of one or more commands and store it on the system diskette. You can create a block that contains up to 19 commands (one command per line). You usually use a block to gather problem determination information. You do this by setting up an address compare with a QA ... command. When the address match occurs, needed information can then be read into a save area. I nformation from the Insert / Extract and Display / Alter screens can also be saved on the system diskette and can be displayed (via the ODS screen) after the block facility has executed. After you set up a block, customers can operate normally with the exception of address match commands or block execution. Two types of block commands are available to you: • • Commands that create, alter, and control the execution of a block (see "Block Commands"). Commands that are within a block and are used in the execution of the block (see "Block Execution Commands"). With the block facility you also are able to have a block run automatically after a successful IML. (For more information, see "Automatically Running a Block at IML." c c ( • The first character must be some character other than a P. • The next seven (or less) characters can be any characters you choose. (~ C (-' (' (" ( (' ( Command *BLOCKS* TP PATCH LIST F ED IT R ERASE A ACTIVATE H HALT K TRANSFER X INIT INDEX M I ML PATCHES Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECT ION:T BLOCK LIST 10 NAME 9540 IFCCSAVE 9541 ADORWAIT 9542 OETECTST 9543 9544 9545 9546 9547 MATCH-WAIT 9548 9549 954A 954B 954C 9540 954E 954F Saves data and ends edit. Use the S command to write the block on the system diskette and enter the block name in the block index. If you enter an incorrect CRC value (or nonel. the correct CRC value is displayed for you when you use the S command. N Ends edit immediately (no data is saved). X Deletes a line. Use the X command to delete the specified line. The remaining lines move up one. *EOIT MODE COMMANDS* S SAVE. END EDIT N END EDIT, NO SAVE A Adds a blank line. Use the A command to put a blank line ahead of the line with the A command. o Duplicates a line. Use the 0 command to duplicate the line that contains the 0 command. X DELETE LINE A ADD BEFORE LINE o DUPLICATE LINE M MOVE BEFORE> LINE > Inserts a line. Use the > command, in combination with the M command, to move the line preceded by an M, ahead of the line with the >_ Executes a line and ends edit immediately. Use the = command to execute the line as if it were entered from the SELECTION line. The line must begin with a Q command; else, it is not executed. (You use the = command to diagnose errors that occur during the attempted activation of a block.) Note that after executing the = command, no 'block data is saved and the processor exits from the block facility. (' ( r 9558 9559 955A 955B 955C 9550 955E 955F ==> 4341 S Moves a line. Use the M command, in combination with the > command, to move the line preceded by an M, ahead of the line with the >. (" 10 NAME 9550 9551 9552 9553 9554 9555 9556 9557 Edit Function M c--- (~ DISPLAYING THE BLOCK LIST Use the following commands to edit a block (enter them to the left of the line numbers on the screen): DISPLAYING THE BLOCK LIST IT) IBM Corp. 1981 (~. Pressing the ENTER key also performs a cyclical redundancy check (CRC) on the body of the block (CRC is sometimes called CHECKSUM). The CRC check includes the first line (DO command) and all remaining lines except lines with NOP, *, and the END commands. The check value (calculated by the processor) is compared with the four-digit hex number specified in the END command. Use the following commands to create, alter, and control the execution of a block: e ~ Use the F blockname command to create a new block or to make changes to an existing block (replace block name with the name of the block you want to edit). Enter F blockname (or OSF blockname) on the SELECTION line; this puts the desired block in edit mode. You can now enter block data by positioning the cursor and keying in the data. After keying in all the data, press the ENTER key. The code checks the syntax of the lines (if an error occurs, the cursor is positioned under the error). Any blanks within a line of data are deleted. Also checked is the size of the block and whether or not the DO and END commands are in the proper places. Block Commands Enter T (or QBT) on the SELECTION line to get a list of all the blocks on the system diskette (displayed are module IDs, block names, and the block status). Block status can be either MATCH-WAIT (indicates that the block is positioned at a match command waiting for an address compare to occur) or no status. c .. ....-.-., EDITING BLOCKS IF blockname) Rules For Specifying Blockname The name you choose for a block can be up to eight characters long and must follow these conventions: (' - EDITING A BLOCK = EXECUTE LINE, END EDIT - - 01 DO.02.DETECTST 02 MSG.WAITING.FOR.OATA.STORE 03 QAS0040080 04 MATCH 05 Sl=5QDP? 06 COMP.S1.00A30000.010909 07 MSG.PSW.LT.A300 08 GOTO.OE 09 MSG.PSW.GE.A300 OA *.SAVE.GENERAL.REGISTERS.E&F OB QOGE? OC QOGF? 00 XFER.SAVEMEM OE S2=S2+00000001.LOOP. INDICATION OF· KEY.START.Ol.GET.GOING.AGAIN 10 NOP.LOOK.FOR.DATA.STORE.TWICE 11 12 13 END.OOOO. I . LAST NAME.MM/DO/YY ==> 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676424 1 of 4 44635f r (~- ( , ~l !~ h • - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - - - _.. _ - - - . f I I :'1 ERASING BLOCKS (R blockname) TRANSFERRING BLOCKS AUTOMATICALLY RUNNING A BLOCK AT IML (M) Enter R blockname (or aBR blockname) on the SELECTION line to erase t~ block from the diskette and remove its name from the block index (replace blockname with the name of the block you want to 'erase). (K blockname1 <.blockname2» Use the M (or aBM) command to automatically run a block after a successful IML. Enter on the IML PATCH screen (after S/370 or VSE mode) the desired block name(s). (Note that you can enter only one block name per CORELOAD. If you need to run more than one block. give control to subsequent blocks by including the XFER command within the previous block.) I ACTIVATING BLOCKS (A blockname) Enter A blockname (or aBA blockname) on the SELECTION line to start the block running (replace blockname with the name of the block you want to activate). The block runs until an error occurs. the MATCH command is encountered, the MODE SEL key is pressed (aborts the run). or the block successfully terminates. Enter K blocknamel < .blockname2 > (or OBK blocknamel < .blockname2 » on the SELECTION line to transfer (copy) a block from one diskette to another (replace blockname1 and blockname2 with the name(s) of the block involved in the transfer). If you do not specify blockname2. the processor assumes that blockname2 is the same as blockname1. The action that occurs after entering K blockname1 < .blockname2 > is as follows: The block index is searched for blocknamel. After the block is located. it is read into storage. You are now prompted to switch diskettes. Block Status Area While the block is running (via the A (activate) command), the current status of the block is displayed in the message area. The status field is in the following format: ACT: sts save LN line LP loop • ACT = indicates that the block is being activated. sts = Status field; either: RUN = running ERR = error in LN line END = successful completion of block HLT = aborted with the MODE SEL key MAT = waiting for an address match to occur XFR = transfer in progress. save = Set to SAVE if the ODS area is full (ODS savearea overflow); otherwise blank. LN line = Two-digit line number in hex. LP loop = Two-digit loop number in hex. • Blockname1 (or .blockname2 in the case where .blockname2 is specified) is now compared with the block names on the new (to be copied to) diskette. If the same block name is found. the old block data is overwritten with the new block data. If it is not found. the new block name is entered into the block index and the block is written in the first available area on the diskette. Note: Do not press the Copy key while transferring a block; the transfer is not completed. If you mistakenly press the Copy Key. re-enter the transfer (K) command. To run the block, answer YES to the RUN PATCHES question that appears after a successful IML. After you press the ENTER key. the processor is placed in a hard-stopped state (operation rate set to microword step). If the block runs successfully. the status field on the Program Load screen displays IML COMPLETE. If unsuccessful. IML does not complete. and the screen displays PATCH ERROR. IMl PATCH SCREEN IML PATCHES *BLOCKS* T LIST F EDIT R ERASE A ACTIVATE CORELOAD BLOCK NAME S/370: VSE: H HALT K TRANSFER INITIALIZING THE INDEX (X) Use the X (or aBX) command to initialize the block index. This command applies in those instances where a block has been written on the diskette via the Module Transfer function. If any block names are missing from the block index. the X command automatically places them in the index. X IN IT INDEX M IML PATCHES HALTING BLOCKS (H) Q GENERAL SELECTION Enter H (or asH) on the SELECTION line to clear the block message and status areas on line 23. and reset all information pertaining to running blocks. If a block is in MATCH-WAIT . status. a message appears to warn you that an address-compare match is still waiting to occur and therefore. has not been removed by the H command. Note that H can only be used to stop a block in match-wait s.tatus (the keyboard remains locked until MATCH-WAIT- status is attained). Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION:M ==> 4341 , . Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676424 44 640f 20f4 :JO()OOOOOOO o o 00 o o C). 00000 o o o o 00000 (' f 'C (' (' C" ( Block Execution Commands MSG <.text> SAVING DATA Block execution commands are those commands that are within a block. This command allows you to enter informational messages within a block. When the MSG command is encountered during execution of the block, the text of the message is displayed on line 23 of the display console. To make the message easy to read, place a period (.) between each word (recall that the code removes all blanks within a line). aD ... ? FAST-SELECTING A SCREEN (a screenid) This is the most common type of block command. It is what you would enter on the SELECTION line to get from one screen to another in order to perform a function on the called screen. Use the a screenid command to either: Alter some state of the machine (For an example, see line 03 on the "Editing a Block" screen). Return information to the block facility (places the returned information into the block save area via the QDS command). (For an example, see lines OB and OC on the "Editing a Block" screen.) Note: The machine must be soft-stopped before executing a QD command that modifies PU data. DO.xx.blockname This command is the first command in the block and appears only once. xx is the loop number in hex. Replace it with the number of times you want the block to execute. The name of the block blockname is automatically inserted in the DO command; therefore, do not try to change its name. NOPS<.comment> This command is used only for spacing or commenting purposes. • comment This command is used only for spacing or commenting purposes. TOD<.comment> Use this command to set the time-of-day clock in the save area. END.xxxx<.name.date> This command must be the last command in a block; it terminates the block'. xxxx is a four-digit hex number (entered by you when you first key in the END command) that is compared with the CRC value when the block is saved. You can enter name. date either when you first key in the END command or when it is requested by the S (save) command. (CRC value is sometimes called CHECKSUM.) HALT <.comment> Use the HALT command to immediately terminate execution of the block even if more loops remain to be executed. Note: Do not confuse this HALT command with the block screen H (or QBH) command which suspends the execution of a block at MATCH-WAIT only. GOTO.line <.comment> Use the GOTO command to go to the line number specified and then continue processing there. SETTING (AND SAVING) VARIABLE DATA Sn= a screenid Sn=aaa <.comment> Use this command to set and save variable data within a four-byte save area. You can enter up to five of these commands within a block (substitute the number 1 to 5 for the n in the command). You have the following two ways of specifying this command: Sn= Q screenid Use the following two examples as an aid in understanding this method. S2=ODMOOOO78? - This example indicates that the bytes stored at locations 78 through 7B of main storage are to be set into a save area named S2 (the save area can hold up to four bytes of information). S3=2QDMOOOO78? - In this example, the number 2 im~ediately after the equal (=) sign indicates that the first two bytes in main storage address 78 (that is, bytes 78 and 79) are to be skipped. Therefore, the save area named S3 contains the bytes stored at storage locations 7A through 70. This method allows you to get to the data you want to save in those instances where the field contains more than four bytes. For example when you specify a main storage address (as in this example!. eight bytes are available to you, but you can save only four of the available eight bytes. [The number immediately following the equal (=) sign indicates the number of bytes to be skipped, proceeding from left to right. If the saved data is less than four bytes long, the save area is padded with zeroes to the right of the data. J Sn=aaa <.comment> Use this method if you either want to set a constant (for example, S2=00000002) or you want to calculate and save a variable by using an arithmetic expression (for example, S3=Sl+00000008). In the above command, substitute the number 1 through 5 for n, substitute Sl through S5 or an eight-digit constant for aaa, and substitute one of the following op codes for opcode. TRANSFERRING CONTROL FROM ONE BLOCK TO ANOTHER av... ? XFER.blockname Use these commands to save data within the save area. For a list of the 00 and OV commands that you can use to save data, see "Display/Alter Block Save Area (ODS)" in Volume 18, Console functions. The question mark (?) after the command instructs the processor to save the data pointed to by the command. For example, the ODGE? command copies the data in general register E, into a block save area. (You can see what has been saved in the block save area by using the Display / Alter ODS screen.) Block Save Area The that you point to via the more information on the Block Save Area (ODS)" C' block save area is used to store data OD, QV, or Sn commands. For block save area, see "Display / Alter in Volume 18, Console Functions. Use the XFER command to transfer control from the current block to the block indicated by blockname. XFER terminates the current block without error, regardless of how many loops remain to be executed (has the same effect as the block execution HALT command). The new block is activated and starts running as though it were started from the SELECTION line. The data saved by the save-variable, 00, or OV commands (in the block save area) is not cleared when the new block starts running; this data is saved from one block to another. WAITING FOR AN ADDRESS MATCH TO OCCUR MATCH <.comment> COMPARING DATA COMP.aaa.bbb.Jine1 line2 line3 <.comment> Use this command to compare aaa with bbb and as a result of the comparison '(see below). branch to line 1, line2, or line3. Substitute Sl through S5 or an eight-digit constant for aaa and bbb. Line1, line2, and line3 are two-digit line numbers (hex) that identify a line within the block. If aaa < bbb then go to linel If aaa = bbb then go to line2 If aaa > bbb then go to line3. Example: COMP,S2.00000002.0A 11 OB.CHECK.S2 In this example the data in area S2 is compared with constant 00000002. Execution continues at line OA if S2 is zero or one, at line 11 if S2 is two, and at line OB if S2 is greater than two, CHECK.S2 is an optional comment Use the MATCH command to signal the block to stop running and to begin waiting for the address compare set up by the QA ... command to occur. The MATCH command does not need to follow the QA ... command immediately. Also, once you set up an address compare in a block, you do not need to set up another match using the same conditions. The following example illustrates a possible block: QAHC8600 KEY.START.Ol MATCH QOM KEY.START.02 OVAL108? QAN OON KEY.START.02 Set compare for hard-stop on storage address match Start PU running Wait for match to occur Set op rate for microword step Run two microwords Record data in local storage Set address compare to normal Set op rate to normal Start PU running again NOTE: A aD or QV command cannot be executed between the aA and MATCH commands. SIMULATING THE START OR STOP KEY KEY.START.xx<.comment> KEY.STOP<.comment> This command simulates pressing the START or STOP key on the console. If you specify START, you must also provide a two-digit hex number to indicate the number of times the key is to be activated. You can also provide an optional comment. + Add - Subtract & And / Or Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676424 30f4 44 645f Executing a Block You initiate the execution of a block with the A (activate) command. The block starts to execute after the block data and initial status information are displayed and the message area is cleared. The orCler of execution of the block commands depends on those commands that change the flow of control (for example. by using the compare command you can skip to a predetermined line). Using the Address Compare (OA... ) and MATCH Commands The only way you can suspend execution of a block is with the Fast-Select Address Compare (OA... ) command combined with the block MATCH command. After the address compare is set by the OA... command. the block executes until it encounters a MATCH command. The block facility then releases control and unlocks the keyboard so that norma! processing can begin (the block is transparent to the user). When a match occurs. execution of the block resumes at the next command following the MATCH command. Because the match can occur anytime. the machine can be in any state· upon return to the block facility. If block execution resumes when a keyboard is in manual mode. that keyboard is locked until the block releases control. (During this time. the screen that was displayed remains unchanged.) Aborting a Block If a block is executing. you can stop its execution by pressing the MODE SEL key (if inhibited. the keyboard must be reset first). Any Fast-Select commands waiting to be executed. finish execution before termination occurs. If a block is waiting for a match to occur. the block screen Halt (H) command must be used. This terminates block execution but leaves the address compare active (you can ,clear this.compare with the address compare screen OAN command). IML Effect on a Running Block If you IML the machine while a block is waiting for a match to occur. the block is halted. If you want to trap or record an error condition. the block you use must be active (waiting for a match) whenever the processor is running. Make the block active by using the block screen M command. See "Automatically Running a Block at IML (M)." Model Group 2 I EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676424 44 650f 40f4 J 0 0 0 0 ,0 0 0 0 0 o o o 0000 10 o 0·0 0 o 00 o o I I 0 0 0 Of c ( (~. PATCH FACILITY The patch facility allows you to patch (make changes to) microcode and store the patch on the system diskette. You can enter a patch that contains up to 19 commands (one command per line). Two types of patch commands are available to you: • • Commands that Display (TPI. Edit (F), Erase (Rl. Activate (A). Deactivate (D). and Transfer (K) patches (see "Patch Commands"). Note that the Edit (F) command provides you with additional commands to edit the patch (see "Editing Patches"). Commands that are used in the execution of the patch are: the DO. END. NOPS. * comment. and ODD commands (see "Patch Execution Commands"). Rules For Patchnames The patch name is eight characters long and follows these conventions: • The first character must be a P. • The next three characters must be the last three digits of the microcode EC number. • The next character should be an M. • The last three characters are a three-digit numbering scheme. name of the patch you want to edit). Enter F patchname (or aSF patchname) on the SELECTION line; this puts the desired patch in edit mode. You can now enter patch data by positioning the cursor and keying in the data. After keying in all the data. press the ENTER key; the code checks the syntax of the lines. (If an error occurs. the cursor is positioned under the error.) Any blanks within a line of data are deleted. Also checked is the size of the patch and whether or not the DO and END commands are in the proper places. Pressing the ENTER key also performs a cyclical redundancy check (CRC) on the body of the patch (CRC is sometimes called CHECKSUM). The CRC check includes the first line (DO command) and all remaining lines except lines with NOP. *. and the END commands. The check value (calculated by the processor) is compared with the four-digit hex number specified in the END command. Use the following commands to edit a patch (enter them to the left of the line numbers on the screen): Command S Patch Commands Use the following commands to enter. control. and transfer patches: Status Description Active Indicates that the patch is recorded on the diskette and applied to the microcode. Inactive Indicates that the patch name is in the patch index. but the patch is not functional (the effects of the patch have been removed from the microcode). Error Indicates that an error occurred while a patch was being activated. The patch is not activated, but its name remains in the patch index. EDITING PATCHES (F patchname) Use the F patchname command to install (for a step-by-step procedure. see "Patch Installation and Update Procedure" in Console Functions Service Aids) a new patch or to make changes to an existing patch (replace patchname with the @ IBM Corp. 1981 Saves data and activates the patch. The S command writes the patch on the system diskette. enters the patch name in the patch index. applies the patch to the microcode. and sets the patch status to active. (If you enter incorrect patch data. the patch is not applied to the microcode nor set to active status). During the execution of the S command. the status of the patch is displayed in the message area (see "Patch Status Area"). N Ends edit immediately (no data is saved). X Deletes a line. Use the X command to delete the specified line. The remaining lines move up one. DISPLAYING THE PATCH LIST (TP) Enter TP (or QBTP) on the SELECTION line to get a list of all the patches on the system diskette (displayed are module IDs. patch names. and patch status). The patch status can be: Edit Function A Adds a blank line. Use the A command to put a blank line ahead of the line with the A command. o Duplicates a line. Use the 0 command to duplicate the line that contains the 0 command. M Moves a line. Use the M command. in combination with the > command. to move the line preceded by an M. ahead of the line with the >. > Inserts a line. Use the > command. in combination with the M command. to move the line preceded by an M. ahead of the line with the >. Executes a line and ends edit immediately. Use the = command to execute the line as if it were entered from the SELECTION line. The line must begin with a 0 command; else. it is not executed. (You use the = command to diagnose errors that occur during the attempted activation of a patch). Note that after executing the = command. no patch data is saved. and the processor exits from the patch facility. (' DISPLAYING THE PATCH LIST *PATCHES* T BLOCK LIST F EDIT R ERASE A ACTIVATE 0 DEACT IVATE K TRANSFER Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PRoG SYS PATCH LIST 10 NAME 9580 P322MOOI 9581 P322M008 9582 P322M010 9583 958 .. 9585 9586 9587 10 NAME 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 9595 9596 9597 INACTIVE ACTIVE ERROR 9588 9589 958A 958B 958C 9580 958E 958F 9598 9599 959A 959B 959C 959D 959E 959F ==> SELECTloN:TP 4341 EDITING A PATCH *EDIT MODE CoMMANDS* S SAVE. ACTIVATE N END EDIT, NO SAVE X A D M DELETE LINE ADD BEFORE LINE DUPLICATE LINE MOVE BEFORE> LINE = EXECUTE LINE. END EDIT - 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC 00 OE OF 10 11 12 13 Do.Ol.POOOMOOO QDD900100081A3410=78880 QDD9001003413555=3554 QDD9001013A1A5=09F0345004F032AC END.OOOO. I . LAST NAME.MM/DD/YY ==> 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676426 1 of 2 44 655f -------- ERASING PATCHES (R patchname) TRANSFERRING PATCHES (K patchname) Enter R patchname (or aBR patchname) on the SELECTION line to: remove the effects of the specified patch from the microcode, erase the patch from the diskette, and remove the patch name from the patch index (replace patchname with the name of the patch you want to erase). Enter K patchname (or aBK patchname) on the SELECTION line to transfer (copy) a patch from one diskette to another (replace patchname with the name of the patch you want to transfer). If a patch with the same name exists on the new (to be copied to) diskette, and it is in the active state, the transfer is not made. After you successfully transfer the patch, it is automatically activated. ACTIVATING PATCHES (A patchname) Enter A patchname (or aBA patchname) on the SELECTION line to apply the specified patch to the microcode (replace patchname with the name of the patch you want to activate). The patch runs until an error occurs or the patch successfully terminates. The action that occurs after entering K patchname is as follows: • Enter D patchname (or aBD patchname) on the SELECTION line to remove the effects of the patch from the microcode (replace patchname with the name of the patch you want to deactivate). The patch name remains in the patch list; however, its status becomes inactive. PATCH STATUS AREA While the patch is running [via the S (savel. A (activate), or 0 (deactivate) commands], the current status of the patch is displayed in the message area. The status field is in the following format: func: sts • • Patch Execution Commands Patch Execution Patch execution commands are those commands that are within a patch. You initiate the execution of a patch with the S (save) or A (activate) commands. The patch starts to execute after the patch data and initial status information are displayed and the message area is cleared. DO.01.patchname This command is the first command in the patch and appears only once. The name of the patch (patchname) is automatically inserted in the DO command; therefore, do not try to change its name. The patch index is searched for patchname to locate the patch. Then the patch is read into storage. You are now prompted to switch diskettes. • DEACTIVATING PATCHES (0 patchname) ---------~=-~~~-~~~-~~~- Patchname is now compared with the patch names on the new (to be copied to) diskette. If a patch with the same name exists on the new (to be copied to) diskette, and it is in the active state. the transfer is not made. If the same patch name is found and it is not active, the old patch data is overwritten with the new patch data. If it is not found, the new patch name is entered into the patch list, and the patch is written in the first available area on the diskette. The patch is applied to the microcode. aDD This command alters the microcode on the diskette. NOPS<.comment> This command is used only for spacing or commenting purposes. * comment This command is used only for spacing or commenting purposes. LN line LP 01 END.xxxx<.name.date> = Function being performed; either, CHK = checking patch to verify that it will activate or func This command must be the last command in a patch; it terminates the patch. xxxx is a four-digit hex number (entered by you when you first key in the END command) that is compared with the CRC value when the patch is saved. You can enter name. date either when you first key in the END command or when it is requested by the S (save) command. (CRC value is sometimes called CHECKSUM.) deactivate. ACT = patch is being activated. DAC = patch is being deactivated. sts = Status field; either: RUN = running. = error in LN line. END = successful completion of patch. LN line = Two-digit line number in hex. LP 01 = Loop number (always 01). ERR :I Model Group 2 EC 379808 06Mar81 PN 2676426 20f2 () o o o 000 o a o 000 000 I 44660f I 000000 0000 00 000 , ( ( ( ( f' ( ( ( ( (' ( ( ( -- - -- ( REMOTE SUPPORT FACILITY The Remote Support Facility (RSF) enables linking the display console, through a switched network, to a support center or to a data bank system (if available) for diagnostic assistance. The RSF is for service usage, and is not meant to be used as a teleprocessing port. If the maintenance package does not successfully resolve a problem, the on-site service personnel can invoke a data bank operation (if a data bank system is available) for additional diagnostic information. The RSF also enables a remote specialist to assist on-site service personnel in problem resolution by observing and initiating functional operations of the 4341. The RSF permits remote operation of all system functions except those requiring manual intervention (power on/off, IML, initial I/O control. etc.). *GENERAL SELECTION* Data Bank Invoke Procedures To establish a data bank connection: 1. Ensure that the 4341 has the required hardware (two cards) installed. Information on the types of cards, installation procedures, and card setup is in the Installation Procedures. Note: If you install the cards, run the diagnostics (MSS option diagnostics, selection DO) before proceeding. Also ensure that a CDT 1000A coupler (or equivalent) and dataphone are available. 2. Set the CE MODE switch ON, and stop the PU (OOM). Y TIME OF DAY-ENABLE J INTERVAL TIMER-SWITCH F CONFIGURATION L PROGRAM LOAD B BLOCK/PATCH SYSTEM RESET-PROGRAM SYSTEM RESET-CLEAR MACHINE RESET A COMPARE/TRACE K CHECK CONTROL o OPERATION RATE PROGR CLEAR CM RES SAVE z X RESTART o DISPLAY/ALTER V INSERT/EXTRACT MACHINE SAVE RETURN TO PROG SYS SP STORAGE DISPLAY E ERROR LOGOUTS M POWER/TEMPERATURE I DISKETTE I PL 3. Select the General Selection screen: a. Key in Q next to SELECTION. REMOTE SUPPORT FACILITY KEYS Two keys on the 4341 operator console keyboard are dedicated to the RSF: 1. Communications Request (COMM REO) Key - This key initiates voice or terminal communication between an on-site service representative and a remote specialist. Initiating a communications request can be done by either the on-site service representative or the remote specialist. 2. Line Disconnect (LINE DISC) Key - This key can be used to abort RSF initialization. It can also be used to disconnect the data link. SELECTION: ==> b. Press the ENTER key. 4341 4. Select the Configuration screen: a. Key in F next to SELECTION. b. Press the ENTER key. 5. Select the RDB Initialization screen: a. Key in D. b. Press the ENTER key. (Once the procedure becomes familiar, you can do a fast-selection by entering OFD.) *CONFIGURATION* DATA BANK MODE If the maintenance package does not successfully resolve a problem, the on-site service personnel may invoke a data bank operation (if a data bank system is available) for additional diagnostic information. In Remote Data Bank (RDB) mode, the 4341 console operates as a data bank system terminal. For details concerning the use of RDB mode, invoke your support structure. S A P M R C D SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE CONSOLE TEST PATTERN MO~ULE TRANSFER REMOTE CONSOLE INITIALIZATION REMOTE CONSOLE COMMUNICATIONS DATA BANK INITIALIZATION T TAPE TO DISKETTE BUILD (IBM AFE ONLY) Q GENERAL SELECTION RETURN TO PROG SYS Z SELECTION: ==> 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676429 44675f @ IBM Corp. 1981 1 of 2 ._----_._-------- MACHINE TYPE - The data in this field is supplied by the microcode. • MACHINE SERIAL NO. - The data in this field is supplied by the microcode. • EXTERNAL MODEM INSTALLED - You supply this data. You must enter the proper response (N for internal modem; Y for external modem) depending or. the hardware configuration. (The default answer is N.) 7. Press ENTER. ----- Data Bank Operations • 6. Put the correct response into the input field of the screen. -------- Follow the instructions in your support structure. *DATA BANK INITIALIZATION* Data Bank Disconnect Procedures MACHINE TYPE ••••• : 4341 MACHINE SERIAL NO: yyyyyy Follow the instructions in your support structure. Data Bank Mode Restrictions EXTERNAL MODEM INSTALLED ••• (Y/N): N Q GENERAL 1. The following 4341 display console system function keys are NOT supported in ROB mode: SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS START STOP INTR COMM REQ PAGE UP Note: The LINE DISC key is now functional. B. Invoke your support structure. SELECTION: D ==> 4341 CHG DPLY SPM/O MODE SEL DIAG PAGE DOWN 2. After Data Bank mode is terminated, the state of the 4341 is unpredictable. SP reset, re-IML, or re-IPL is necessary, depending on the state of the 4341 at that time. REMOTE CONSOLE SUPPORT For Remote Console Support, invoke your support structure. *DATA BANK INITIALIZATION* MACHINE TyPE ••... : 4341 MACHINE SERIAL NO: yyyyyy EXTERNAL MODEM INSTALLED .•• (Y/N): N APPLICATION: (64 byte non-displayable input area) 4341 EC 379825 05Jun81 PN 2676429 44680f 2 of 2 /)0 01 i~ LJJ . 0 ~.' !~ ' " , 1 1 ,0 \ \ '0 o 000 o (),OO 000 o o o o o o f) ,~ , O '. o 0,' i',~ ~JJ o o ( ( ( (' (' ( ( (- ( 00 (~ ( REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY (QFB) The B-selection from the Configuration screen displays the Remote Operator Console Facility screen. The Remote Operator Console Facility screen provides selections which assist system operation in a Distributed Data ProceSSing environment. When the system is operated in this mode, personnel at a host site have the ability to control the 4341 via the Remote Support Facility (RSF) port. • STATUS AREA • M ROCF MODE-SWITCH P PROTECTION-SWITCH C CHANGE PASSWORD ROCF MODE ENABLED PASSWORDS REQUIRED SYS NODE 10 IBM 4341 CONSOLE DEV Tl D 2. Press ENTER. Remote Operator Console Facility screen is Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS If no device is aSSigned when selecting the T-option, you are prompted with the choice of valid con.soles to enter. • If the assigned device is not ready when the Remote Operator Console link is activated, an alternate console is selected. o SELECTION: B ==> M ROCF Mode-Switch: The Remote Operator Console Facility is alternately enabled and disabled each time the M-option is entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER key is pressed. The current status is highlighted in the status area on the right side of the screen. 4341 Note: If the protection switch is set to PASSWORDS NOT REQUIRED, the entry is cleared after pressing ENTER. The message REENTER SELECTION appears. Reenter the D-option and press ENTER again. Return to General Selection (O) Note: If the protection switch is set to PASSWORDS NOT REQUIRED, the entry is cleared after pressing ENTER. The message REENTER SEl.ECTION appears. Reenter the M-option and press ENTER again. 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. C Change Password: To change the password for the Remote Operator Console Facility: 1. Enter C next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. ENTER NEW PASSWORD message is displayed. 3. Enter new password. Notes: • ( System Power Down: Entering D on the SELECTION line and pressing ENTER powers down the Remote system. To update the Remote Operator Console Facility record: or Not Acquired each time the P-option is selected. Entering P on the SELECTION line and pressing ENTER prompts you to enter the correct password. Entering the correct password and pressing the ENTER key completes the selection. The current status is highlighted in the status area on the right side of the screen. -- The console assignment is valid only when that device has been installed to the system through the System Configuration (QFS) screen. SYS POWER ON SYSTEM POWER DOWN 1. Key B next to F on the SELECTION line. P Protection-Switch: Passwords are alternately Required ( -' Notes: LINE SPEED 1200BPS SEC COUNT 14 N SYSTEM NODE 10 T CONSOLE DEVICE displayed. (' Remote Operator Console Facility is initialized is aSSigned with the T -option. Entering Tn (where n = 0, 1, 2, or 3) next to SELECTION assigns that device for the facility. The status area on the right side of the screen indicates which console is to be linked to the host system when the Remota Operator Console Facility is activated. o S LINE SPEED-SWITCH R RESET SECURITY COUNT To select the Remote Operator Console Facility screen from the Configuration screen: c\ T Console Device: The Console Device to which the *REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY. The Remote Operator Console Facility screen is selectable only when the ROCF Auto-Ans modem is configured on the System Configuration (QFS) screen. (- ( 4. Press ENTER. REPEAT NEW PASSWORD message is displayed. When passwords are required, all selections require entering the current password before any changes take effect. 5. Enter new password again. 6. Press ENTER. ENTER OLD PASSWORD message is displayed. The passwords are entered into a nondisplayable field. S line Speed Switch: The Line Speed switch is alternately changed between 600 bps and 1200 bps each time the S-option is entered on the SELECTiON line and the ENTER key is pressed. The current line speed is highlighted in the status area on the right side of the screen. Return to Prog Sys (Z) 1. Key Z next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. Note: If the protection switch is set to PASSWORDS NOT REQUIRED, the entry is cleared after pressing ENTER. The message REENTER SELECTION appears. Reenter the S-option and press ENTER again. R Reset Security Count: The security counter is reset each time the R-option is entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER key is pressed. The current count is displayed in the status area on the right side of the screen. 7. Enter old password. S. Press ENTER. ENTER DATE MM/DD/yY message is displayed. 9. Enter the date. 10. Press ENTER. PASSWORD CHANGED message is displayed. Notes: N System Node 10: The node identification is changed each time the N-option followed by the new node 10 is entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER key is pr~ssed. The current node ID is highlighted in the status area on the right side of the screen. Notes: o The passwords are entered into a nondisplayable field. o © IBM Corp. 1981 • A minimum of four and a maximum of eight characters are required for the password. - • If the entered date is not a valid date, the user is allowed one attempt to correct the date. Entering N on the SELECTION line and pressing ENTER prompts you for a Node ID. The Node ID can consist of eight characters maximum. Model Group 2 EC 379827 020ct81 PN 2676463 1 of 1 446911 o () , (j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (;l 0 0 0 0 '0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 (: I (. ( (' DISKETTE BUILD (QFT) o 0·· · . ( . ( ( (~' (' (Diskette Build Function) DISKETTE BUILDER FUNCTION The diskette build function enables the service representative to build functional and/or diagnostic diskettes from a tape. STEP ONE The tape used to build the required diskette contains the machine serial number and the diskette image data format generated by manufacturing. MOUNT TAPE CONTAINING THE DISKETTE IMAGE AND THEN ENTER THE TAPE UNIT ADDRESS IN THE FORMAT 'CUU' The diskette build procedure is divided into steps with instruction sequenced screens. This procedure requires: • A successful IML of the processor. • CE MODE switch set to ON. • Operation Rate set to NORMAL (OON) Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS ==> SELECT I ON: T Diskette Build Procedure 434·1 To display the Diskette Build Function screen from the OF screen: 1. Key T next to SELECTION. 2. Press ENTER. This step requires mounting the tape containing the diskette image and entering the correct three-digit address for the tape drive being used. Tape Load (Tape Load) The Tape Load screen (Step 2) is displayed after the tape drive address has been entered. DISKETTE BUILDER FUNCTION STEP TWO This step requires entering the correct part number of the diskette to be built. Diskette Part Numbers: GRP 1 56k GRP 1 64k ENTER THE PART NUMBER OF THE DISKETTE TO BE BUILT (7 DIGITS) GRP 2 DISKmE PART NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER FUNCTIONAL 1954214 1954230 1954255 DIAGNOSTICS 1 1954215 1954231 1954256 Q GENERAL DIAGNOSTICS 2 1954216 1954232 1954257 Z RETURN TO PROG SYS DIAGNOSTICS 3 1954217 1954233 1954258 DIAGNOSTICS 4 1954218 1954234 1954259 DIAGNOSTICS 5 1954166 1954166 1954166 PADI 1954189 1954224 1954254 After the part number has been entered, the message LOADING TAPE is displayed in the system message area. SELECTION SELECTION: T191 ==> 4341 Model Group 2 EC 379827 020ct81 EC 379829 28Jun82 © IBM Corp. 1981 PN 2676416 1 of 2 44 695f ( .. -.' (Diskette Build) Diskette Build Return to General Selection (0) 'The Diskette Build screen (Step 3) is displayed after the diskette image has been read from the tape into PU storage. The message TAPE LOADED is displayed in the system message area. DISKETTE BUILDER FUNCTION 1. Key Q next to SELECTION. STEP THREE 2. Press ENTER. Mount a formatted 4341 diskette into the- diskette drive, and press the ENTER key. The message DISKETTE BEING BUILT is displayed in the system message area. Return to Prog Sys (Z) 1. Key Z next toSEtECnON. MOUNT A 4341 FORMATTED 0 ISKETTE IN Ti'tE CONSOLE DISKETTE DR IVER AND THEN PRESS THE ENTER KEY 2. Press ENTER. Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS SELECTION: T1234567 ==> TAPE LOADED 4-341 Diskette Label (D i skette Labe 1 ) The Diskette Label screen (Step 4) is displayed after the diskette is built. Copy this information or mount a copy of the screen displayed onto the diskette. After a copy of the information is obtained, replace the diskette. The Q-screen noiN appears. DISKETTE BUILDER FUNCTION LABEL FOR THE DISKETTE JUST BUII.;T: • ••••••••••••*••*.**............. For installing this diskette, follow the same procedure as for any new diskette. See Volume 13/16, Section 14, "Diskette EC Update Procedure." • S:3FD* • 4341-{)01 SER NO. 012J456. • FUNCT' 001FUl.. • LINK DATE 00000000000 ISEQ 01 • •• PN- 0001234567 ' • EC- 000000000 • REA • GID- T1234567 Q GENERAL SELECTION Z RETURN TO PROG SYS * XX9999 • ,.." tiloil, 00012.34-56 7 **" ••••••••••".*••••••,•••••••••••••• • DATE SELECTION: T1234567 ==> REPLACE ORIGINAL DISK 4141 Model Group 2' lEECe 379827 02.0ct81 31982!l asJun82 ()OO o 000 00000 o o • • i -,00 0 i" ' o o o 00 f " PN 2676416 Z af2 o o o 441QOf I 00000 ( ( ( ( o o ( (' ( ( ( (' (~ INDEX This index is a composite of both model groups and storage sources of the 4341. A page reference in parentheses indicates an earlier EC. lK1 A any reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... A patchname, activating patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . aborting a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACB value changed by XXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ac drive parts (diskette drive) list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal/ replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . access and return of diskette drive 20 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accumulate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accumulation sw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . action parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . action strings, power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . activating patches (A patchname). . . . . . . . . . . . . actuation tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . actuation tool blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adapter cable (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . card (interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . communications common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . device cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSS card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power controller detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . probe tip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support control log ic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . test, EIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . additional protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . addr cuu already assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . addr field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . address adder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . already used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . compare circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . compare (QA) and match command . . . . . . . . . . CUU already assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . out of range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjustment clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS210 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS211 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS212 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS213 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © IBM Corp, 1981 44 44 44 44 225 660 650 155 15035 15 065 15 44 44 44 20 44 11 11 025 220 220 215 415 660 020 016 15 14 34 34 34 34 20 100 225 170 140 130 155 350 20 345 34 150 11 025 34 160 34 165 14515 40 105 20 055 44 155 44 230 34 44 44 34 44 44 44 44 44 045 155 350 070 650 155 155 215 155 13 12 12 12 12 005 066 066 066 069 adjustment (continued) 15055 solenoid and bail voltage IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20215 switching regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215 ADR= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085 address, invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 address too large. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 advanced capabilities, 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . 40 055 AFS103 fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060 air flow sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 air inlet sensor (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 air moving device monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 air moving devices (AMOs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 air outlet sensor (AOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 AIS (air inlet sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 alarm audible, volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 console, audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071 indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 3287 audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 ALARM command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 105 ALD example, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405 aligner card pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030 decoupling capacitor pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 single pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030 alignment, card pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030 alignment. LED and PTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 070 alphameric and special character keys . . . . . . . . . 44 055 ALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44060 alter auxiliary storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310 block save area . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . 44 305 cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 429 channel control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 370 data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365 DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 44 463 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 console disk file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 340 control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 storage hardware . . . . . . . .. , . . . . . ....... 44 453 store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380 CSAR backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 44 397 (or 44 400) current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 external registers (display / alter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 alter (continued) external registers (insert/ extract) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 floating-point registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 general registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 PU (instruction processing unit) DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44405 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . retry local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . . . . . L 1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L 1 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . real storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . status scan ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . swap buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . translate ...... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trap/BAL stack . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCW / device directory tasks change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . virtual storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . will be ignored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALTER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ..... ALU/local storage/data flow registers . . . . . . . . . AMD monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMD103 fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . analog measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sense display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sense point listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sensors (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . voltage display (MA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . analysis, problem (PAl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . analysis, invoking problem) .... , . . . . . . . . . . . . AOS (air outlet sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . area display mode, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patch status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr/kybd mode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arithmetic and logic unit (ALU! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . array addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 449 360 415 325 355 425 419 457 290 515 335 435 280 375 525 395 44 315 44 320 44 320 44 285 44 155 40 105 34 035 20 365 20060 20 380 44 595 20 225 20 365 20085 14805 14 805 20 245 44 095 44 660 44 090 44 085 34 035 44 34 34 34 34 350 095 030 035 030 assembly access and return of diskette drive 20 cover, diskette drive list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . index detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal, collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal, latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacement, collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacement. latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assignment table, UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ...... asynchronous command register . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATI= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . audible alarm feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . audible alarm volume control (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . audible alarm volume control (3279) . . . . . . . . . . . automatic patch installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automatically running a block at IMl 1M) . . . . . . . B MICBR-trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . back tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . backspace key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAl stack description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . base color switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . basic check light (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15025 15035 15070 15 035 15 045 15 040 15 045 15 040 14051 14035 44 195 34 095 40085 44 071 44 045 44 051 14 605 44 640 44 44 44 34 44 220 060 060 030 051 14 325 OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diagnostic tests, processing unit . . . • . . . . . . . . . MSS diagnostic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power-off sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage module . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . battery 1.35V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battery 2.8V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBCCHH= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . belt removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . belt replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bit shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bl. OFFS.= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLCK. CNT= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . block. aborting a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 1 of 16 20 36 36 20 20 34 11 11 40 15 15 34 40 40 44 060 050 030 045 040 065 015 015 085 065 065 040 085 085 650 46005 ( block commands activating blocks (A blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . comparing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . displaying the blocklist (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing blocks (F blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 640 645 635 645 635 END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 44 645 erasing blocks (R blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 executing a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 HALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 halting blocks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 initializing the index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 setting variable data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 simulating the start or stop key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 TOO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 transferring blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 XFER blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 block diagram channel hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 075 instruction processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 025 main storage and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 055 maintenance and support subsystem .......... 34 110 power system ....... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 035 block facility aborting a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655 IML, QB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 block is at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 block list. displaYing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 block name. rules for specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 blockname. XFER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 BMPX comm~nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 105 board 03AA1 voltage pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20213 A 1 and B1 voltage pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205 A2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 210 B2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 211 C2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 212 02 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205 layout, 01 A gate. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 105 Logic, pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 113 LSI removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 015 MST removal.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020 probe mask figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 017 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020 voltage sense points (logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241 signal levels ........ -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 111 01CA1 (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20191 02AA1 (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20185 02AA2 (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 190 03AA2 (CTCA IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 195 brightness control 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 BTS command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' .... 40 105 buffer channel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . instruction backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . swap .. _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . build diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette function (QFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUILD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . burst mode control diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bus/tag receptacle pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . bus/tag cable-end connector pin numbering . . . . . button. logic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . byte shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . byte shifter test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090 34 060 34 040 34 040 34060 44 44 44 40 14 10 10 44 34 36 700 695 695 105 320 070 070 035 040 065 @] C (clock cycle step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 250 C instruction counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 C (stop after log-switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 cable adapter diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 100 channel wrap test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 clamp position tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 external interrupt connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 241 FOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 installation of FOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 refolding FOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 repairing FOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 troubleshooting FOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 cache/stg maintenance chip CMD list ......... 44 521 cancel manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ ... 44 065 printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065 CAP (code analysis processor) error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020 initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 575 manually reques::ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 075 tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020 capacitor. decoupling insert/ extract tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 030 pin aligner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 030 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 030 card container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 diskette drive 20 control locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 035 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090 functions, HWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 300 interface adapter..... '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 225 card (continued) layout. 01 A gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 105 LSI logic removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12025 MSS adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 350 pin alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030 puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14310 38LS installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 056 modem description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170 wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 525 cards. RSF wiring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 525 care. diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 015 catalog categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 210 numbers and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14210 CCW (channel command word) CCW= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 105 command modifiers 4300-FRIENO ........... 40 155 commands 4300-FRIENO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 135 flags, 4300-FRIENO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 155 CE log (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 635 log must have a title (message) ............. 44 155 log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 635 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060 mode power-on sequence.. . ............. 20 040 panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 080 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 255 keys and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 305 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 stop word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 030 safety practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 007 chan-chan disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 chan-chan disabled indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 045 change display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 CHANGE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 CHANGE KEYBOARD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 changes require IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 channel and instruction processor OLA Ts ............ 34 070 cable wrap test (CWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36071 checks switch (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 control array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 control array register 1 ........ , .......... 34 095 control array register 2 ........ ;;'........... 34 095 control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 control section data flow diagram ............ 34 095 data buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090 data buffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090 data buffer section data flow diagram ......... 34 090 data register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 085 failure isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 224 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 075 hardware block diagram ....... ' ........... 34 075 hardware (general introduction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34010 channel (continued) interface control check logout (LCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 235 save block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220 trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223 local storage layout (QVALn) or (QOLn) ........ 14 230 logic description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ..... 34 085 logout (LCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 235 microcoded device exerciser (CMOE) .......... 36 070 service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205 status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14215 storage address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 tests. special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 070 to channel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 wrap test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 o unavailable (message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 channel trace procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 615 channel-in and channel-out registers ........... 34 090 channel-to-channel adapter (see CTCA) characteristic console 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055 printer (3287) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 chart. voltage track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 105 check basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14325 light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 325 OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44035 SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 control - fast-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235 control (QK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235 diskette speed service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 070 LED output service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 075 operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 115 PTX amplifier service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 080 reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 reset (QVK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 reset (re-IML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 solenoid and bail service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 050 checker. continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025 checks in system log. processing unit .. ; ...... 38 040 chg dply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 CHSAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 circuit breaker. monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 circuit protector. monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 circuit. timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 clear instruction counter trace (TIX) .............. 44 295 PSW and I/O trace (TPX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 reset (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 saved IFCC (TSX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 CLEAR command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 clock adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 015 adjustment, equipment needed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 020 adjustment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050 Model Groups 1 and 2 j 0000 o 0'0 0 o 000 o o tt • t • EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 () 00 0 0 000 0'0 • PN 5666420 2 of 16 o o 46 010 000 o (~ ( ( clock (continued) basic diagnostics run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050 distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 010 maintenance chip command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 521 tvt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13015 CMD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085 CMDE (channel microcoded device exerciser) .... 36070 code analysis processor (see CAP) collet assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 045 collet assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 045 color, console convergence (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187 color console display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 color switch, base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 comm req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 command display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095 read (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 350 registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 write (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20350 commands address compare (OA) and match . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 activating blocks (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 block execution (see block commands) control, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 displaying the blocklist (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 editing blocks (F blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 erasing blocks (R blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 halting blocks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 initializing the index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 modified no-op, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 Nap (printer/keyboard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 no operation, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 patch activating (A patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 deactivating (0 patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 displaying the patch list (TP) . . • • . . . . . . • . . • • 44 655 editing (F patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655 erasing (R patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 transferring (K patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 printer /keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 OEW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 576 read backward, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 read, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 read inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 sense adapter state, CTCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 sense I/O display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 096 printer keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 sense (printer/keyboard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 test I/O, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025 transferring blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 write, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 write end-of-file, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025 communications common adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170 common adapter status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170 request key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 ( o o compare address (OA) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 trace (OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215 COMPARE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40110 complete IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ....... 44 156 IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44157 COND CODE= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 095 confg data err:consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 confg data err:UCWs44 155 CONFIG command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 configuration data err:consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 data err:UCWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 record update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 185 RSF cards and wiring EIA adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14555 line plate (external modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 545 protective coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 565 38LS/Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 535 38LS/(U.S.A. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 525 screen (OF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 180 screen update OFS (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 015 CONNECT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 connect external interrupt cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 241 connector CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10080 pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 065 top card crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 075 console address (Tn/Hn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 320 color convergence (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187 characteristics 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 disk failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 file labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 340 I/O error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 display (3278). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 facility, remote operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 691 functions (see volume 18) functions (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 605 indicator area 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 language code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14015 mode (Nn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025 printer/keyboard mode, 3278-2A display ...... 44 085 printer not configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 test pattern (OFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 188 console/keyboard, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025 console/printer, end of forms sensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 115 contactor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 container, card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 ( contents clock adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 005 console functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 016 diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 005 diskette drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 005 features (CTCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 005 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 005 locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 025 maintenance tools list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 025 processor functional units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 005 processor logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 005 removals / replacements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 005 screen, abbreviated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 015 service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14001 system tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... 40 005 tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 005 continuity checker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025 battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025 lamp replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025 maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025 operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025 contrast control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 control audible alarm volume 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 brightness 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 card, diskette drive head cable pins . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . 15 090 interconnections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 095 removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090 replac;ement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090 socket and connector pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090' test pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090 card, power description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 locations, IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215 contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 keys, input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065 line sense point listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 230 panel, operator (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025 panel, operator (switches and indicators) ....... 44 035 register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34030 signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 stg maintenance chip command list . . . . . . . . . . 44 521 storage address backup register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34030 hardware data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 store (OVAC) warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 385 controls check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 3278 model 2A operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 COPY command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 copy key (Kx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 copy key options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 628 copy mode (3287) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 copy options (screens) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '...... 14625 counter data length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090 instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 instruction backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 COUNTER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 coupler, protective configuration (RSF) . . . . . . . . . 14 565 cover assembly (diskette drive) locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 035 removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040 convergence check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 convergence, console color (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187 convergence procedure (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187 conversion, PS215 voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 075 CP open, PS104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060 CP1 open (conv outlet), PCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 CREATE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 CSAR address (QVG) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535 CSW=xxxx command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 CTCA (channel-to-channel adapter) commands control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 halt I/O or halt device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025 no operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 read or read backward to a busy adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 to an idle adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 when EOF was issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 sense adapter state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 sense command byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 system or selective reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 030 status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 030 test I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025 write. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 write end-of-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025 CTCA compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 040 CTCA data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42010 CTCA functional units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 055 address compare and data flow X. . . . . . . . . . . . 42 055 disable and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. 42 060 mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060 select priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060 selection and reset X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060 select-out bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060 sequence and control X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42060 status, sense, & input B bus-in X . . . . . . . . . . . . 42060 CTCA input data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42010 CTCA introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 010 CTCA online/offline modes I/O interlace isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42045 power-on/off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42045 select-out bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 045 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 j*. vP. PN 5666420 3 of 16 46 015 ----------_. __ . -~-- .. - .. -- .......... --.~-~ ... - . -- _._ .... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I -""""-i I CTCA operational summary addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... not-ready ability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTCA output data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTCA programming notes attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . halt device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . halt I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . initial program load (lpL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . suppress data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wrong length record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTCA sense bit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTCA test cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing/swapping CTCA cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . resuming normal CTCA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . run procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cursor control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWT (channel cable wrap test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data bank (continued) 42 01 5 42 015 42 015 42015 42 010 42 050 42 050 42 050 42050 42050 42 050 42 050 42 035 42 075 42 075 42085 42 085 42 085 42 075 44 060 36071 CYL= .................................. 40085 [Q] o data store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 o 44 660 o (disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 patchname. deactivating patches . . . . . . . . . . . data comparing, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error, engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error, transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . failure, engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flow, power controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flow registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . length counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . link disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... not on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . saving, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . setting variable, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . data bank disconnect procedures operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . service aid . . . . . .. ... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . invoke procedure operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 44 156 44 156 44 156 20355 34 035 34 090 44 155 44 155 44 155 34 060 44 645 44 645 14 505 14 505 44 675 14 505 44 675 mode active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . restrictions (operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . restrictions (summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data buffer data register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA DUMP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data field. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data flow diagram ALU/local stor/data flow reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel data buffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . device cluster adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette drive adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • high-speed buffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interface adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interface controller section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local channel adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main storage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power controller adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shift circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage addr and controls sect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support bus adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support control logic adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data-in register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data not on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data-out register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . de distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCA operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deactivating patches (0 patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . decoder, local storage address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . decoupling capacitor (C-pac) insert/ extract tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pin aligner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removai. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DECREASE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DECREMENT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . definitions. LCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . delete key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . description, catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . description, diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . detector. EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEV. ADDR= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEV. TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEV=. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEV=DEVICE ADDRESS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . device busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cluster adapter data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cuu is busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . not functional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 14 505 44 675 14 505 44 680 34 090 40 110 44 230 34040 34 095 34 090 34 030 34 140 34 130 34060 34 080 34 085 34 120 34 155 34 065 34 150 34 040 34 070 34 160 34 165 34 115 40 085 34 080 44 155 34 080 20 160 34 140 44 660 34035 12 030 11 015 12 030 12 030 40110 40 110 14235 44 065 14210 15 010 20295 40 085 40 085 40 085 40 085 44 155 34140 34 145 44 155 44 115 DEVICE= command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAG4 diskette recovery procedure . . . . . . . . . . . DIAG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diagnostic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mode FSC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . general selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 14 079 40 025 power controller adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tests, 4341 processor byte shifter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . code analysis processor (CAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EIA adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error log analysis (ELA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance and support subsystem . . . . . . . . . . messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . peA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reference codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . special purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . special channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage single-bit failure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diagram hardwired sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power controller adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . digital display screen (MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sense point listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sensor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sensors (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitec** 2210 multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . directory log (OECD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . log (OECD), messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCW 14035 disable block-multiplexer mode (NO BMPX) ..... DISCONNECT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disconnected message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette build procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data recovery procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drive adapter data flow diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disk status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drive 20 control card (locations). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control card (removals/ replacements). . . . . . . . . . parts and location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 145 44070 36 057 36 055 36 065 36 020 14 515 36010 36 010 36010 36 030 36 075 36 040 36 045 36 015 36 065 36 070 36 065 36 025 20 290 20 345 20 035 20 20 44 20 11 090 225 595 365 015 38 030 38 035 40 115 40 110 44 156 44 695 44 700 15015 14 081 15010 34 130 34 135 34 135 15 15 15 15 035 090 035 030 I diskette (continued) EC update procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 075 insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 010 IPL (01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607 label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . not ready. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . part number console functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . service aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . readability screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . recovery procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . speed service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . update procedure (clock values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 700 44 156 44 695 14 01 5 44 580 14 079 15 010 15 070 13 050 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15010 display analog voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . area display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr/kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arrays facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auxiliary storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ..... block save area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLAT . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 085 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 095 085 135 350 310 305 429 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 370 365 409 463 495 445 519 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clock scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . console color display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 disk file . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 340 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ... 44 045 failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 025 control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453 store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 380 CSAR backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400) current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 digital sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595 diskette IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607 ELA log (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 error logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545' error status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 080 external registers display / alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 insert/extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 floating-point registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 general registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 hex calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 I/O device status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 Model Groups 1 and 2 ** 000 o 000 o 0000 o o Trademark of United System Corp. EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 4 of 16 46020 0·0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o , ' .. ",. () o display (continued) image 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L 1 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mode commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . momentary status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patch list (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power /temperature screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program load screen (l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSW and I/O trace (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU OLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU retry local store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ODU menu screen (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . real storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . screen print (DSP) service aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . status scan ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage single-bit errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . swap buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trace area (ODT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trap/BAL stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCW (unit control word) change UCW directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . device directory tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . expanded directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . virtual storage 370!VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OISPLA Y command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display/alter auxiliary storage (ODA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . block save area (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . console disk file (ODD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control register (ODC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . current PSW (OOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D screen (OD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . external regrsters (ODX 0-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44415 44 055 44 325 44 355 44 425 44 419 44 457 44 155 44 44 44 44 44 20 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 095 050 156 085 025 075 655 585 195 296 405 449 360 615 290 515 14 628 20060 44 335 44 435 44 280 36 065 44 375 44 295 44 395 44 44 44 44 44 40 315 315 320 320 285 110 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 310 305 340 265 275 255 329 display/alter (continued) floating-point registers (ODF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44270 general registers (ODG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 hex calculator (OD=) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 I/O device status (ODTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 instruction counter trace (ODTC) ............. 44 296 local storage (ODl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44325 PSW and I/O trace (ODTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 PSW and I/O trace controls (ODTC) .......... 44 296 real storage 370 (OOM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290 saved IFCC (ODTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 255 SP storage (ODW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 storage key (ODK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 trace area (ODT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295 UCW/device directory (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315 virtual storage 370!VSE (ODV) .............. 44 285 distribution clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13010 dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20160 switching regulator, voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 200 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 200 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 155 DL= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 085 DO, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 DO, patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 documentation organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 025 drive motor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065 motor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065 pulley removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065 pulley replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065 2D, diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '5 005 dual case/mono case switch (A,a/A) 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 dump, SP stand-alone dump support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 44 608 (or 44 675) DUMP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110 duplicate device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 III E screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E (stop word chks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EAU (erase all unprotected) (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EC machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EC update procedure, diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (' ( ( 20 125 20 125 44 240 44 095 20135 20 135 14015 14 075 EC update procedure, flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . edit command error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing patches (F patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EHC flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EIA adapter test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cards and wiring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . signal level converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . El screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELA (error log analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELA log display (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .......... EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sensing (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . emergency power-off, unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . END, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . END, patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . engineering data error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enter display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printer /keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enter (ptr/kybd mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . equipment needed (clock adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . erase all unprotected (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patches (R patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . title (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . erase/write command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EREP (failing storage address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERR:CSW=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error action microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . analysis and logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . building diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . correction and bit-generation unit ............ during data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . edit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . engineering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . handling component (EHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . information, expanded power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intermittent or soft (processing unit) .......... 14 075 44 156 44 655 38035 14515 14 555 34 170 20 130 20 130 36010 44 240 20 295 20 295 20 295 20 365 20045 44 645 44 660 44 156 44 156 44 44 44 44 13 065 065 065 065 015 44 095 44 065 44 065 44 660 44 156 44 095 14095 44 156 20 275 20 275 44 156 34 065 44 156 44 156 44 156 38035 20 130 14 115 ( (' ( error (continued) IML. ... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . log analysis (see ELA) log. power error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logging. power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logout screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logouts (E screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logouts screen (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . messages 44 156 44 157 20 36 20 44 44 20 055 010 055 545 545 125 CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36075 line 20 (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36080 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 095 or slow printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 statistics. line (OET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566 status display detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 080 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 590 voltage tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 110 when starting PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 when stopping PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 errors, intermittent or soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 115 EX CLRIO (execute clear I/O) command ........ 40 115 EX HOV (execute halt device) command ........ 40 115 EX HIO (execute halt I/O) command .......... 40 115 EX STIDC (execute store channel 101 command .. 40 115 EX TCH (execute test channel) command ....... 40 115 EX TIO (execute test I/O) command ........... 40 115 example E screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 125 EB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 135 El screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 130 error status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 080 M screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 065 MA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 085 MO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 090 momentary status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 075 MT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 095 MV screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 100 of UCW entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 620 power ALD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405 executing a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ 44 650 execution. patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 execution time xx minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 expanded power error information (EL) ......... 20 130 extended and optional MSS diagnostic tests .... 36 035 external control and sensing (sensor) .......... 20 365 external interrupt cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . 14 241 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 5 of 16 46025 " III F patchname. editing patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F (ref codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . facility; patch (QBTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . failing storage address. EREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . failure. engineering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . failure. power-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fast-selecting a screen (Q screenid) ........... fast-alter auxiliary storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . block save area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --....... -, -.-.- ....,.---------.. 44 44 44 14 44 20 44 655 240 655 095 . 156 060 645 44 310 44 305 44 429 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 370 365 409 463 495 445 340 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " .. checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . console disk file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453 store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380 CSAR backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400) current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 external registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 external registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 floating-point registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 general registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 415 local storage . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355 L 1 cache data . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425 L1 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 419 main storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457 PU DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 405 PU hardware . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 PU retry local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 360 real storage 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290 scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 swap buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 375 trap/BAL stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395 virtual storage 370!VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285 fast-select IML/IPL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 IML/IPL (alternate) ....... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 fast-selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 165 fast-selection hexadecimal calculations ......... 44 260 fault isolation/identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 FDS cable removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025 FDS cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025 feature audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . security keylock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel-to-channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ferro resonant power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ferroresonant power supply monitoring ........ field support center (FSC) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . fixed compare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLAG command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flexible distribution system (FDS) removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flowchart. power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flowchart. power-off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . frame 01 behind gate 01A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grounding paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rear view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . frame 01. 02. and 03 (front view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . frame 02 grounding paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . front view behind gate 02A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rear view (ferro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rear view (sw reg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . frame 03 grounding paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FSC screen. diagnostic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . full power-up function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . function key ignored . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . keys, program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUNCT diskette recovery procedure (for two damaged FUNCT diskettes) ......... functions. HWS card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071 44 071 42 005 20 050 20 365 36057 20 365 40 115 12 025 20 180 20 390 20 400 10 040 14 705 10 045 10 040 10035 14 715 10055 10 055 10 060 14725 10 061 40035 36 057 44 585 44 156 44 065 14081 20 300 @] G-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gate 01 A gate card layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 A (pin side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 C (lPS301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 D (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 E (channel interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02A (front view) sw reg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02A (rear view) sw reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03E (CTCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 14 105 10 050 10061 10 070 10 070 10070 10 055 10 055 10070 general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ..... selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selection (Q screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO. block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grounding paths model group 2, frame 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . model group 2, frame 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . model groups 1 and 2, frame 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . GRPs. adjusting clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 035 44 200 44 165 44 645 14 705 14 715 14725 13035 IE] H channel checks switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H channel-seq cnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H hard stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HALT, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . handling. operation check error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARD COPY (Y /N)= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hard stop (QKS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardwired sequence diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware. sensor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . head load parts locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removals/replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high-speed buffer directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . section data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hold print timeout (3287 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . home key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . horizontal positioning (keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to adjust the clock GRPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to change a GRP value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to run processing unit diagnostic tests ..... HWS (hardwired sequence) card functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . second levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 44 230 44 220 44 645 44 115 40 085 44 240 20 20 20 44 20 40 290 285 340 025 365 085 15 035 15050 40 115 34 34 34 44 44 070 060 060 115 060 44 060 13035 13 030 36 055 20 20 20 20 20 300 290 305 285 340 OJ I (lCNTR polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44- 240 I (instruction step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 250 I initialize 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 115 I I/O reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 idler assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065 idler assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065 IFCC clear saved (TSX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220 save (TS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 trace (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223 image. display 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 IML (initial microcode load) automatically running a block (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640 complete (message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 effect on a running block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 in prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 invoke procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 invoke procedure (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205 required (message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 incompatible selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 incomplete command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 incomplete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 INCREASE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 115 index detection assemblies location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 035 removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15070 indicator alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 area (ptr/kybd mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 basic check (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035. chan-chan disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035. off-screen 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052 on-screen 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _44 050 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44· 052 power complete (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 power in process (OCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035' power-on proceed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 3278, ... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 () 0 o o 000 o 0000 o o ····c··O 0 .:.~ -:~.:.~, O >..... -. . . ,.: t' ',:", . o o o 00 00 PN 5666420 6 of 16 . 46030 o o 00 / '" ,---p o (' ( (0 (' inditmor IcnontinuBrU 1 (3.279) . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .44 052 :2 (327B) . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 44 050 2 {3279} .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 44 052 3 l3279~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052 32713 Model 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 U50 3279 Model 2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052 indioatoTs and switches, 1lower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 20 060 CE pan~1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 255 operator control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 20 255 infonmrtion, .general. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 035 inhibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 "56 init im:lex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 44 £40 .initial clock settings. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . • . . 13 030 initialize index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 43OD-FR1END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 input area {ptr /kybd model . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 44 input control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . 44 insert key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 insert/extract 640 115 085 065 065 . 44 350 cache retry data (OVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 429 channel control (OVAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . . . . 44 370 arrays (OVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " 44 365 44 409 44 463 44 495 checks in system (OVK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 clock scan rings (OVY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 519 control storage hardware (OVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453 control store (OVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380 CSAR backup (OVAS) . . . . . . . . . . . 44 397 (or 44 400) external registers (OVX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 key (OVAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44415 local store (OVAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355 L1 cache data (OVAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425 L1 directory (QVAF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44419 main.storagehardware (OVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44457 PU(instruction processing unit) D1AT (QVAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . 44 405 hardware (QVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 retry local store (QVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . 44360 OVGscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535 scan rings (OVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .screen (OV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set CSAR address \OVG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . status scan ring (OVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( o o iruert!ilxtrnct Icontin:UBu) .wai1 __ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44035 1(3278) . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 050 data buffer (DVAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLAT (DVAH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hardware (QVH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interface (QVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( 44 515 44 345 44 535 44 435 '5WiIP D.uffer(QVAS) ...... , . . . . . . • . . . , . - • 44375 transla1eaddress (QVT) ..... , .. _ .. _ . . . . . . . 44525 trapIBALstack{OVAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .. 44 395 VSCTeEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 345 W command (QVW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . 44521 insertton, diskette . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15010 insert mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . 44 157 installation of fDScables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 i nstaffation patches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . 14 605 probe mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020 4341 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 005 irrtensity override switch . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 44 051 instruction buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . 34 040 buffer backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ " ...... 34 040 .counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 counter backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 counter trace (Til . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 processor block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . functional operation . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . , •..• general introduction . . . . . . . . . . , ' . . . . . . . . . service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • . • . . . . 34 025 34025 34 010 14 115 INT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 40115 integrated power system (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 interconnection, control card (diskette drivel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15095 interface adapter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • control logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data flow diagram. , . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14225 34 080 34080 34 080 control check logout .... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14205 control check save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220 control check trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223 controller section . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .34 085 controller section data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . 34 085 standard power (SPI) description . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . ., . • . . . . . . . 20 270 second level . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . _ . . . . . . . . 14 425 interface control check save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . intermittent or soft errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . internal confg data error . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . interrupt data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220 14 115 44 157 34 120 20 370 44 070 34 1 20 44 070 ( (' ( C' ( f ( ( (" (' ( ( l'IH!'ve1rtionre:ql.lired display mode . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . M 005 message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 44 1'57 printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44090 invalid i'lddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44157 CHARC.ODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 input, C£ only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44157 input (line 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 Dperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 processor 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 with Mur P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 invoke,·the module transfer screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 191 (or 44 190) invoking problem analysis (PAl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14805 I/O (input/output) PSW trace (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 .296 interface switch, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 045 interrupt request regi:ster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 signal cabie rem-oval . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 D35 T.ep!acement . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 12 035 38 020 status field in SP detail log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPL (initial program load) complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , device unavail-selin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ... diskeHe display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette (01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . invoke procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O error.US/CS=XXXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSW format error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPS (integrated power system) board 14615 44 157 44 157 44 607 44 607 44 157 44 157 44 205 44157 44 157 44 157 meAl ............................. 20 191 D2AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20185 02AA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 190 03AA2 (CTCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 195 control card locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20215 gateU2A (card side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 060 integrated power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 voltage 20 21 5 20 200 20 215 20 085 isolation/identification, fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 :adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . distribution . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nreasurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. isolation, channel failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 224 Japan, k-eyboard . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3£.D4D jumpe1'S. -sense card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20370 K patclmame, transferring .patclles . . . . . . . . . . . . 441560 key alprrBmeric and specialchaecter . . . . . . . . . . . . 441355 back:tab . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44060 backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 060 chg dply . . . . . . . . . . . . • _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 comm req . . . . .......• _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44070 compare circuit. . . . . . . .• _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 D70 copy vption ..........•._ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 fi28 cursor control. ......•.. _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MatID diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 IDO home . _ . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 000 input control . . . . . . . . _ . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . 44 D65 intr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 44 lineuisc . . . . . . . . . . . • . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 mode sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 new 1ine . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44070 program function ....... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 005 printer /keyboard mode,:carmel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065 remote facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 remote support facility Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 055 mo IDo operation . . . . . . . . . . .. ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505 wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 14525 shift and shift lock . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 SPM/O ..... , . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 stack. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . 34 070 start .. , . .. . . ....... - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 stop ... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .... , ...... ····41~--symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . :44 D55 system function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 tab . . . . . . . . . . , ...• _ .. ~ . . . . . . . . . . • . . ~ 44 000 typematic . . . . . . . . . . _ . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055 vertical positioning ....•. _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 44 il60 KEY command ....... _ .. _ . _ • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 '15 KEY= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __ .. , . . . . . . . . . . . 40005 keyboard characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 44 D55 deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 D90 display . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . 44 055 Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 040 keylock {optional feature), security . . . . . . . . . . , . 44 071 keys and switches, CE panel-: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20305 KL= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82··· PN 5666420 7 of 16 46D35 III L local store-dst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 l (SP logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 label identification QOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' .. QVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - QVAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aVAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .... ' .. (lVAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aVAR ................................ QVAT ................................ QVAU ................................. rnFAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " .... QVB ........ '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ (lVC . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 44385 44 365 44 419 44 425 44 409 44 360 44 429 44 395 44 405 44 415 44 454 44 495 QVH ..................... , . . . . . . . . . . . 44464 avJ. ................ ~ ............... 44 450 QVK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 QVM .................................. 44 458 ' (lVS . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 ,," .. ' '~--:-: . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 502 QVY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 519 lamp. basic check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14325 lamp test CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 last level register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 latch assembly. diskette drive removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040 layout. channel local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 230 lead extension assembly . . ...•. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 lED /light-emitting diode) output service check. . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 075 PTX alignment. . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 15 070 removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 075 replacement. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 075 Irght. basic check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 325 limrted channel logout bit definitions . . . . . . . . . . 14235 nne ruse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 line error statistics (QET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566 line plate configuration (RSF) •............... 14545 list. maintenance tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 f 015 0" • • • • • • • • • • • • • listing. analog and digital sense point . . . . . . . . . . 20 225 listing. control line sense point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 20 230 load screen (Ql) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 local channel adapter data flow diagram ........ 34 155 local channel adapter status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34155 local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 035 local storage address decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 035 locations. table of contents, . . . . . . . . . . . .- .... 10025 locations~ card layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 105 locations. IPS control cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20215 log power error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 lOG. END= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 085 lOG. START= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085 logging. error analysis and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 logging. power error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 logic board monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 board pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 113 board voltage sense points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241 reset.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 305 reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 logout interface control check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205 reference code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565 logs checks-in-system. processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . 38040 directory, processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 030 general information on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010 how to display processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38010 how to print processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010 power 20 125 20 055 processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 030 reference code history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 050 scan rings, processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045 SP detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015 SP summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015 summary. processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045 support processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 lOOP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 loop procedure for TI~/SID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14215 loop scan rings. QVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 lSI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12015 lSI logic card ..........' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025 screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ M (ElA·UNRECV MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M (microword step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M microword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M MICWD-trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M screen example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M/Q register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . machine check. support processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reset 240 250 225 220 20 065 20 065 34 040 20 085 20085 44 44 44 44 20 045 170 170 170 44 170 34 065 34 070 34 070 34055 34 065 CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 CMrr (one ring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 CMlxxxx (with k>gl . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 save (SAVE) (VSE motie' only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . addresses . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . address register ........, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . controls diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance and support subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and support subsystem block diagram ......... and support subsystem logs (see support processor logs) and support subsystem tests (see diagnostic tests) and support subsystem (gen. intro) . . . . . . . . . . . diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power ............. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . procedure 34 105 34 110 34010 15 010 20 055 detail. . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 025. summary . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 34 screens. power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 tools list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 manual functions . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patch installation .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mark in test..... '.•... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ' . . MASK BYTE= ........' ...... , . . . . . . . . . . . . MASK= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . match circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MD screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurement analog. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . points, IPS voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . temperature. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 030 105 065 015 44 165 14 606 36 070 40 090 40 085 34 045 20090 20090 20 380 20215 20 380 message ACe value changed by XXX .... : . . . . . . . . . . . 44155' addr comp remains . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . : ...... 44 155 addr cuu already assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44155 address already used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 address out of range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 address too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 alter ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 alter will be ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 block is at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3&075 CE log must have a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 changes require IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 channel 0 unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 compare/trace not reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 confg data err:consoles ... ,.... " . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 confg data err:UCWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 44 155 console disk failur,e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . 44 155 disk I/O error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 printer not configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . 44 155 control storage failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 convergence ctTeck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 data bank mode active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 data link disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 data not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 data not on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 device busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 device cuu is busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 device Nx config error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155 disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 diskette check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 diskette not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 display console failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 done-put in original disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 duplicate device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 edit command error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 engineering data error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 engineering data failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 erase ?title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 err-put in original disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 err-block at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 44 156 err-disk error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1'56 err-no space in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 err-not found in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 err- patch EC name wrong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 err- patch is active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 err:CSW=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 15& error building diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 150 error during data xfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 () o o o 000 o 0000 o o • • • • 0, 0 0 0 .:.:.' , o o 00 00 PN 5666420 __ ---.Lot 1L_ o o 4&040' -_.. _ - - - - - 000 o (- (" l (' (. (".. (" (~. message (continued) error or slow printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error when starting pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error when stopping pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . execution time xx minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . function key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I invalid with M or P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IML complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IML error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IML in prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IML required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incompatible selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incomplete command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incomplete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inhibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . insert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . internal confg data error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intv- reqd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . invalid address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . block name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAR.CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . input, CE only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . processor to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPL (initial program ioad) complete .... ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . device unavail-selin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O error.US/CS=XXXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSW format error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KC invalid with M or P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line S or size over max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . log area full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . long IPL proceeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . machine not hard stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . machine status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main console not ready during power-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main stg data cmp error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . main stg address error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . module not found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . more, press enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . name2 longer than namel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . native device addr used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no block at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no saved screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no space in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . not a color console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . not available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . not found in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (" ( c c (' (~ 0 '. •••• message (continued) 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 157 157 157 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 38 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 035 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 157 155 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 158 158 158 158 158 ( not IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operation rate not normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . paging key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patch is active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patch error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power incomplete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power not up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . press enter to save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printer halted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . proceed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr/kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSW unpredictable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr-busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr-chk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr- intv reqd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr/kybd cons addr error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU already intialized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU hard stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU is not soft stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU not initialized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . put in from disk, enter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . put in to disk, enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 'QCLEAR' reset required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . re-IML required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ready the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ref code logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rejected-block invoked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remove part of shared UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROCF active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . monitor active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . saved-title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . selection complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . serial nos. do not match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . serial numb ready to lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . soft stop required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP /PU communication err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP /PU communications failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP / PU data miscompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP/PU transfer error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTL not available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support bus failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . syntax error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is IPLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reset req' d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tape not operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCM . .' .... , . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . message (continued) 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 148 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 158 44 159 44 159 44 159 44 159 44 159 44 159 44 159 44 159 44159 44 159 44 159 44 159 44 44 44 44 44 36 159 159 159 159 159 080 (' ...• trace / data comp not reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 transfer halted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 update over 1024 UCWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 usage conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 wng: check error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 X of part of shared range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40095 4300-FRIEND error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 100 4341 processor tests code analysis processor (CAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 {)75 TCM (testcase monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 080 metering service procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120 microcode error-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 interrupt request register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 partial power up/down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20275 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 scan-in register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090 mode accumulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 220 assist screen (QU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 BC/EC= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40090 CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060 CMD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40090 data bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 675 (or 44 680) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095 insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 nonaccumulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 printer /keyboard operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085 sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44070 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 MODEl: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090 model differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32010 modes of operation. console display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025 manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' ...... 44 025 printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025 module not found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157 module. power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 module transfer (QFM) console functions. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 190 (or 44 191) service aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 025 momentary status display detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 075 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 590 monitor. EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 295 monitor. powe.r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 monitoring AMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20365 CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20365 circuit breakers and protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 ferroresonant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 hardware (sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 logic board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 series regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20365 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 370 M/Q register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040 MSG. block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 MSMD (machine speed microdiagnostics) ...... 36051 MSMD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045 MSMD run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 055 MSS (maintenance and support subsystem) adapter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 350 diagnostic tests basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 030 extended and optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 035 manually running ,PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 040 stop words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 030 service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 305 MST board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020 MT screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 095 MT screen example. . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 095 multiple decision maker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 MV screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 100 MW screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 070 N normal check control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235 compare trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215 operation rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 250 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 new line key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 nn-ACTIVATE.* (activate CCW chain nn) ....... 40 105 nn-STOP (stop execution of chain nn) ......... :' 40 125 no assists (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 control store load (Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210 IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210 retry (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 nonaccumulate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 NOP block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095 patch command .. '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 printer /keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 90f 16 46045 normal (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44240 power-off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 {)45 power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20040 test switch 3278 . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . '. 44 051 not available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 115 number, catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14210 NUMBER OF TIMES=: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090 numbering, logic board pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 113 0, ELA log display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 OCP indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCP to CTCA (interconnections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCP to HWS (interconnections). . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCP to 4341 cable route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCP switches description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off-screen indicators 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OLTEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OLTS (online tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on-screen indicators 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . online tests (OLTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OP. BYTE= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OP field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operating tips, processing unit tests ........... operation actuation tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . continuity checker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . modes of (console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rate - fast-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rate control (QO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operator console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control panel indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switches (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switches (pin numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . controls, 3278 model 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 806 14806 14806 14807 14808 14810 14811 14811 14 812 36 035 11 017 44 051 20 385 If] [Q] o I/O instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . option 1 :the start problem analysis routine. . . . . . . . . . . 2:start system again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:run 4341 processing unit analysis .......... 4:send service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:display detailed PA-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:customer data and security control. ......... 7:go to part number and FRU list ............ 8:display 4341 processing unit analysis FRU-Iogs. 9:display service transmission history ......... optional MSS diagnostics tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oscilloscope, Tektronix* 475/DM44 ........... override switch. intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . overvoltage protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225 44 035 14 317 14 315 14315 44 035 10 080 44 44 40 40 050 052 025 025 44050 44 052 40 025 40 090 44 230 36 055 11 44 11 44 44 44 44 020 11 5 025 157 085 245 245 44 025 P (all polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P (clock pulse step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P PSW swaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA (problem analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . paging key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operator control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parameter action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . partial power up and down screen (summary) ............. up/down microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . up/down screen (MW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patch at IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . commands activating patches (A patch name) ............ deactivating patches (0 patch name) ........... displaying the patch list (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . editing patches (F patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . erasing patches (R patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . transferring patches (K patch name) ........... execution commands DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 44 44 10 44 265 035 035 080 045 facility (QBTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation and update procedure ............ status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patches at IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . patchname, rules for specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 44 250 44 225 14805 44 070 44 158 20060 44 025 44 215 44 215 44 225 44 585 20275 20070 44 210 44 44 44 44 44 44 660 660 655 655 660 660 44 44 44 44 44 14 44 44 44 660 660 660 660 655 605 660 210 655 pattern. console test (QFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 188 PCA block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . 20 345 PCA diagnostic tests. manually running ........ 36040 PCC CP1 open (conv outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 perform IML (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200 PF1-PF12 display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065 manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065 ptr/kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065 PHY. START= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090 pin aligner. decoupling capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10065 control card (diskette drive) head cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... 15 090 socket and connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090 test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15090 numbering (bus/tag receptacle/cable-end) ..... 10070 numbering. logic board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 113 numbering (TCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10075 numbering (relays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 065 pins board 03AAl voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 213 A 1 and 81 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205 A2 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 210 82 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '20 211 C2 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 212 02 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205 PLDA field in SP detail log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 025 POINTER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 points, IPS voltage measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215 points. logic board voltage sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241 pOSitioning key, horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 position tool, cable clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 power ALD example ...... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405 cable removal tool . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 complete indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 controller adapter detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 345 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 150 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 345 data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 150 diagnostics (MP) • . . . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • 20 145 controller data flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 355 diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 44 605 error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 error logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 fault. power-off because of a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045 groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 015 in process (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 indicators and switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 interface. standard (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 270 lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 logouts ............................... 44 560 power (continued) logs screen. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off error condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sequence flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on/IML switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on / off switch 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 125 055 055 065 275 385 275 44 20 20 44 115 060 060 035 20 20 20 44 275 390 060 035 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 supply and transformer locations . . . . . . . . . . . . supply, ferroresonant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . supply switch setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . temperature (M screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power-off because of a power fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sequence basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unit emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power-on action strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . indicator 12 043 20050 12 066 20 035 44 585 20 045 20 275 20 045 20 400 20 405 20 045 20045 20 41 5 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 44 050 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . 44 052 microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 sequence, basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040 sequence in CE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-20040 sequence logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 395 sequence (normal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040 predefined CCW chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 060 present level register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 prinCiple. IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 print function. display screen (DSP) ........... 14 628 PRINT SENSE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 printer characteristics (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075 3287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 • Trademark of Tektronix inc. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 C) o 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o .• ,. .. PN 5666420 10 of 16 T· 1 46 050 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0' 0'" 0 t ," 1 ,. o ,. c·· c\ ( printer/keyboard console address error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 mode commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 indicator area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085 probe adapter. cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 017 probe mask installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020 probe tip signal and ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . problem analysis (PA) ..................... procedure clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clock adjustment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clock basic diagnostics run ................ data bank disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data bank invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette 11 016 11 016 14805 13 015 13 050 13 050 14 505 14 505 EC update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 075 recovery for DIAG4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 079 update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050 maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 32' 030 metering service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120 MSMO run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13050 patch installation and update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 605 recovery. for two damaged FUNCT diskettes .... 14081 remote data bank invoke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505 TIO single cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 225 proceed indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 process. pwr in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 processing unit diagnostic tests basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to run PUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance algorithm (PUMA) ............. messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSMO (machine speed microdiagnostics) ...... MSMO monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . testcase monitor (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . processing unit service aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . processing unit logs checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . processor logs general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to display ....... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . how to print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOC equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . processor overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program area 36 050 36 055 36020 36 055 36 075 36051 36045 36 055 36 045 14 115 38 38 38 38 040 030 045 045 38010 38010 38010 38 010 38010 32 010 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . load-parameter details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . load screen (QL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reset (PROG R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . protection. additional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 20 065 200 195 170 055 C C'. " (~ o o protection. overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 protective coupler configuration (RSF) ......... 14 565 PSW (program status word) and I/O trace (TL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44296 restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 screen label (BC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 screen label (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 unpredictable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 PS101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 055 PS102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12095 PS103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 098 PS104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12045 PS104 CP open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 PS105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12097 PS105 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250 PS201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 065 PS205 . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 080 PS206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 105 PS205 thermal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 PS210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 057 PS211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12060 PS212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12063 PS213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 069 PS215 . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 072 PS 215 voltage conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 075 PS216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 078 PS301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 085 PTX amplifier service check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 080 PTX removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 085 PTX replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 085 PU (processing unit) diagnostic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045 directory display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 hard stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 is not soft stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545 logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38030 purge function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 puller. card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 PUMA (processing unit maintenance algorithm) how to run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020 when to run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 055 purge all logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 pwr complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 20 060 pwr in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 pwr/thml status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060 a (general selection) from K 'screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from 0 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' ......... aB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aBTP. patch facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aCLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aDA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aoc screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 44 250 44 165 44215 44 635 44 655 44 170 44 255 44 310 44 265 , I: (. aDD. patch execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 aDD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44340 aOF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 aOG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44265 aOK screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 aOL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 aOM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290 aop screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 aDS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305 aOT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295 aOTC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 aOTF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 aOTI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295 aOTM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a4 297 aOTP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 aou screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44315 aouc screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 aOUE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320 aouu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315 aov screen . . . . . . . . . . . " . . . . . . . . . , ....... 44 285 aow screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 aox screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 aE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545 aEB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565 aEC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545 aECO directory log machine status messages ... 38 035 aECO (processing unit directory log) .......... 38 030 aECO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 aECS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 aECS summary log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045 aEO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580 aEI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 575 aEL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560 aER screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 aERO reference code history log ............. 38 050 aERO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 aES screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 aESA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 aESA (SP summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 38 015 aESxx (SP detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015 aESO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560 aET screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566 aEW screen commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 577 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 576 aF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 180 aFB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 691 aFO screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 680 (or 44 685) aFM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 191 (or 44 190) aFS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ............ 44 185 aFT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 695 aiD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . .. 44 608 (or 44 675) al screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607 QJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 aK screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235 aL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 aLi screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 aM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 585 aMA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595 (- (- (' aMO screen '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44595 aMT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600 aMV screen . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600 aMW screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 585 ao screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 245 aPROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 aRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 aSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 aUIT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 av screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 345 aVA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 350 aVAB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 397 (or 44 400) aVAC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380 aVAO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365 aVAF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 419 aVAG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425 aVAH screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409 aVAL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355 aVAN screen ..... ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 370 aVAP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 360 aVAR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44429 aVAS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 375 aVAT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395 aVAU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 405 aVAY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 415 aVB screen .......... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453 avc screen., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 aVG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535 aVH screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463 aVI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 aVK screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 aVM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457 aVR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 avs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 aVT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 529 avw screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 521 avx screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501 aVY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 519 ax screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 175 ay ................................... 44 170 R (no retry) ......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R patch name. erasing patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R (repeat microword-switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCO NO.= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . read buffer (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inquiry command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . modified (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 44 660 44 250 40 090 44 095 20 350 44 090 44 095 Model Groups 1 and 2. EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 11 of 16 46 055 real address register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 34 070 real address register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 070 recovery procedure for 0lAG4 diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14079 for two damaged FUNC diskettes ............ 14081 reference code history log (QERO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 050 logout file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 reference codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 025 reference codes. 4341 processor.............. 36 015 refolding FOS cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 180 register asynchronous command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 channel control array 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 control array 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34085 channel-in and channel-out ................ 34 090 command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 control storage address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 control storage address backup ............. 34 030 control .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34060 data buffer data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090 data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 035 data-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 080 data-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 080 floating-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 I/O interrupt request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 last level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 1 25 M/Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ......... 34040 main storage address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 070 micro code scan-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 microcode interrupt request ................ 34 125 present level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34030 SP check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 storage backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34045 storage data buffer address ................ 34 090 support processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34095 regulator. switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 185 re-IML required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 rejected-block invoked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 relay pin numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 065 remote console support summary . . . . . . .. 44 680 (or 44 685) data bank invoke procedure ................ 14 505 facility keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 operator console facility (see ROCF) support facility diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 515 keys (detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505 service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ...... 14 505 removal belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . board probe mask. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . collet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . control card (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cover (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . decoupling capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette drive 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drive pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . FOS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . idler assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O signal cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . latch assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . LEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSI logic card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MST board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power cable tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power supplies and transformers ............ PTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . signal cable tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . solenoid and bail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remove part of shared UCW ................ removals/replacements contents ............. REMOVE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repairing FDS cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPl. CNT=. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacement battery (continuity checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . belt (diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . board probe mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . collet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control card (diskette drive) ............. , . . cover (diskette drive) ....... , ............. drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diskette drive 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drive pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . idler assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lamp (continuity checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . latch assembly (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . solenoid and bail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ....... request indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . request key display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . printer /keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reset check re-IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QVK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . system ... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UEPO switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15065 12 020 15045 15 090 15 040 12 030 15 01 0 15 030 15 065 15 065 12 025 15 065 12035 15 040 15075 12 025 12 020 11 016 12 043 15085 11 016 15 060 44 158 12 005 40 120 40 120 20 180 40 090 11 025 15 065 12 020 15045 15 090 15 040 15 065 15 020 15 065 12 025 15 065 11 025 15 040 15075 15085 15 060 44 090 44 065 44 065 44 065 44 170 44 445 20 060 44 170 14 305 44 170 44 170 44 170 20340 restart (RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 restarting the CTCA test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 085 restriction. data bank mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 14 505 restrictions and deviations display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 096 ptr/kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 restrictions. 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40045 retry array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 305 retry stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 060 return to general selection from the QL screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200 from the QM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 605 to programming systems from the QL screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200 from the QM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 605 RETURN command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 rings. loop scan. QVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 ROCF (Remote Operator Console Facility) active . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170 monitor active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158 QFB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 691 routine. problem analysis (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14806 RSF cards and wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14525 EIA adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 555 line plate (external modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 545 protective coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 565 38LS/Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14535 38LS/(U.S.A. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14525 configurations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170 diagnostics. EIA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14515 line error statistics (QET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566 service aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505 test options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 035 rules for specifying patchname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655 rules for specifingblockname. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635 run 4341 processing unit analysis ............. 14806 R4/L1 shift circuit . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040 R9 shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 045 [IJ S hard stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 S local store-SRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 230 S stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215 safety practices (CE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 007 SAR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34045 SAR2.... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34045 save area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14220 area type field description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305 auxiliary storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310 blocks, I FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220 cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 429 save (continued) channel control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 370 data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365 DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ',' . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495 check in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445 console disk file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 340 control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453 store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380 CSAR backup. . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400) current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 external registers display / alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 insert/ extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 .501 floating-point registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270 general registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265 IFCC (TS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ',' ...•............. 44 415 local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355 L1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425 L1 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 419 main storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457 PU (instruction processing unit) DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 405 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 retry local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 360 real storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290 register . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 screen label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305 SP storage . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 status scan ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 525 trap/BAL stack, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395 virtual storage 370!VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285 saved screens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 576 scan rings log. processing unit ............... 38 045 SCOPE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120 screen customer data. and security control ........... 14810 diagnostic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 057 digital sensor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595 display detailed pa-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 14808 saved screens •....................... 44 576 service transmission history ................ 14 811 4341 processing unit analysis............... 14811 error status display. . . . . ................. 44 590 FSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36057 general selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36055 go to part number FRU list ... , ............ 14811 layout. problem analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 805 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 C)· o ~) o 0000 00000 o i' • I " 0000 II. o o PN 5666420 12 of 16 46060 0000 o 0000 o c' (~ (- screen (continued) momentary status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 590 power maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20065 problem analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 805 Q. general selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 165 QA. compare/trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215 QD. display/alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 255 QDA, display/alter auxiliary storage .......... 44 310 QDC. display / alter control registers .......... 44 265 QDD. display/alter console disk file .......... 44 340 QDG, display / alter general registers .......... 44 265 QDH, display/alter hex calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 QDK, display/alter storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280 QDL. display/alter local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325 QDM, display / alter real storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . 44 290 QDP, display/alter current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275 QDS. display / alter block save area . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305 QDT, display/alter trace area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295 QDTC, display/alter PSW and I/O trace controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 QDTF, display/alter saved IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 QDTI, display / alter instruction counter trace .... 44 295 QDTM, display/alter I/O device status ........ 44 297 QDTP, display/alter PSW and I/O . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 QDV, display / alter virtual storage 370 /VSE ..... 44 285 QDW, display/alter SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335 QDX, display / alter external registers . . . . . . . . . . 44 329 QE, error logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545 QEB, temperature logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565 QEC, PU logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545 QECD, PU directory display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 QECS, PU logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550 QED, diskette readability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580 QEI, cap initiator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 575 QEL, power logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560 QERo reference code logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 QERD, reference code logout file . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570 QES, SP logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 QESA, SP logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 QESO, SP detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560 QET, RSF line error statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566 QEW, saved screens CE log (service aid). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 635 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 577 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 576 QF. configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 180 QFA, console color convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187 QFB, Remote Operator Console Facility ........ 44 691 QFM, module transfer . . . . . . . . . . . 44 191 (or 44 190) QFP, console test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 188 QFS, system configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 185 QFT, diskette build function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 695 QI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607 QK, check control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235 QL, program load screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 QLI. mode/assist screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 QM, power/temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 585 QMA, analog sense display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595 QMD, digital sensor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595 QMT, thermal sense display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600 ( o screen (continued) QMV. voltage tracking display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600 QMW. partial power up and down screen ...... 44 585 QO. operation rate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 245 QV, insert/extract screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 345 QVA; insert/extract arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 350 QVAB. insert/extract CSAR backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400) QVAC, insert/extract control store . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380 QVAD, insert/extract channel data buffer ...... 44 365 QVAF. insert/extract L1 directory ..... ~ ...... 44 419 QVAG, insert/extract L1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . 44 425 QVAH, insert/extract channel DLAT .......... 44 409 QVAL. insert/extract local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355 QVAN, insert/extract channel control ......... 44 370 QVAP. insert/extract PU retry local store ....... 44 360 QVAR, insert/extract cache retry data ......... 44 429 QVAS, insert/extract swap buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . 44 375 QVAT. insert/extract/trap/BAL stack ......... 44395 QVAU, insert/extract PU DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 405 QVAY. insert/extract key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 415 QVB. insert/extract cntl storage hardware ...... 44 453 QVC, insert/extract channel interface ......... 44 495 QVG, insert/extract set CSAR add-ess ........ 44 535 QVH. insert/extract channel hardware ......... 44 463 QVI, insert/extract PU hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449 QVK, insert/extract checks in system ......... 44 445 QVM, insert/extract main storage hardware ..... 44 457 QVR, insert/extract scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515 QVS, insert/extract status scan ring . . . . . . . . . . 44 435 QVT, insert/extract translate address ......... 44 525 QVX, insert/extract external registers ......... 44 501 QVW, insert/extract W command . . . . . . . . . . . 44 525 QVY, insert/extract clock scan rings . . . . . . . . . . 44 519 SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 175 translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260 send service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14807 service request and send service info . . . . . . . . . 14 807 service request IBM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14807 SO:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40090 SEC. PRINTER ADDRESS:: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090 second levels, HWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 305 SECOND SO: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40090 security keylock (optional feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071 select (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095 selecting a manual function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 165 selection complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 send service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 807 sense adapter state bits, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020 byte. CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 035 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20365 card jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 370 command display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095 printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 I/O (printer/keyboard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 point listing (analog and digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 225 point listing (control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 230 points, 10Qic board voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241 ax. ( sense I/O display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095 printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 sensing, external control and (sensor) . . . . . . . . . 20 365 sensor entry to board 01AB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 230 sensor external control and sensing . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 sensors air flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 air inlet/ outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245 analog (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 digital display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595 digital (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 IPS voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20085 listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 225 sequence basic power-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045 basic power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040 hardwire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 290 normal power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045 power-off. flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20400 power-off, logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 405 power-on, flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 390 power-on in CE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040 power-on. logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 395 sequencing microcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275 serial number card description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170 jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14310 serial number (machine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 015 serial numb ready to lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 series regulator monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 serpentine connector (bus/tag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070 service aids assignment. UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14035 analysis. problem (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 805 basic check light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14325 burst 'TIode control diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14320 catalog number and desription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14210 CE log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14635 channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205 channel failure isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 224 channel local storage layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 230 configuration record update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 015 connect external interrupt cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 241 console functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 605 diskette EC update flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14075 diskette EC update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 075 diskette recovery procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 079 diskette data recovery procedure (two damaged FUNCT diskettes) . . . . . . . . . . . 14081 EIA adapter configuration (RSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 555 EREP (failing storage address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14095 How to display stop words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 325 IFCC catalog numbers and descriptions ........ 14 223 IFCC save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220 IFCC trace example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223 (~ (" (' service aids (continued) interface adapter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 225 interface control check logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205 interface control check trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223 ground paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 705 I/O and channel trace flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 615 I/O and channel trace procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 14615 limited channel logout bit definition . . . . . . . . . . . 14235 line plate configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 555 metering service procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120 module transfer ...... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 025 MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14305 MSS logic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 305 OCP to CTCA (interconnections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 317 OCP to HWS (interconnections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14315 OCP to 4341 cable route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14315 patch installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14605 patch installation and update procedure . . . . . . . . 14 605 power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405 power ALD example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405 problem analysis (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 805 processing unit (intermittent or soft error) . . . . . . 14 115 remote data bank invoke procedure . . . . . . . . . . 14505 remote support facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14505 remote support facility diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14 515 remote support facility keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505 RSF card and wiring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 14525 screen copy options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 625 serial number card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14310 standard power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14425 system configuration, (QFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14015 TIO single-cycle procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 225 UCW assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 035 UCW assignment table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14051 service procedure, metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14120 service request IBM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14807 service request and send service information. . . . 14 807 set CSAR address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535 setting, initial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 030 shift and shift lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34040 circuits data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. 34 040 signal and ground probe tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 signal cable removal tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016 signal levels, board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 111 signals, control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 Sill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 155 single pin aligner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030 SIZE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 125 slot rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 13 of 16 46065 ~~-----------~~-~,-,~ --------- ----~ ~--------- -~----.-- -- -~ ~--"~-,-,~, ----------- -~;;;i.:j1Ii> soft stop required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 solenoid and bail adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 055 removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 060 replacernent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; " ..... 15 060 service check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 050 SP (support processor) check register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 detail log, I/O status field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 020 detail log, PLOA field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 025 detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 stand-alone dump support. . . . . . .. 44 608 (or 44 675) storage (QX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 175 space bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 :special conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210 special purpose tests byte shifter . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065 channel cable wrap test (CWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065 CMOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36065 mark in test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065 special channel tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065 strg single-bit failure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065 SPI (standard power interface) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 270 locations gate 010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10070 panel PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070 panel Pl through P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070 second level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 425 SPM/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 SP-purge all logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555 standard power interface (SPI) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 270 locations gate 010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10070 panel PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070 panel Pl through P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070 second level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 425 start key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 start problem analysis routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 806 STARTL not available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 station; test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 statistics, line error (QET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566 status area codes console functions. . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 191 (or 44 190) service aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 025 area, patch ........... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660 communications common adapter ............ 34 170 device cluster adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 145 diskette drive adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 135 field ......... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580 local channel adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 155 machine sensitive data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 025 ~ messages, machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 035 power /thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 word, channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 215 stop words, MSS diagnostic tests ............ storage addr and controls sect data flow diagram ...... address backup register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . addresses and controls section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . addressing and update registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . control storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data buffer address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single-bit failure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . verification tests (Vn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . store status (SAVE) (370 mode only) .......... ST4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . summary log (QECS), processing unit .......... supply, ferroresonant power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support bus adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adapter data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support control logic adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support control logic adapter data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . support processor bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logs SP detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . machine check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . suppress incorrect length indicator (Sill) ....... swap buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch A,a/ A, dual case/mono case 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel checks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . base color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel to channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intensity override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lamp test (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. normal/test 3278.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power off (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power on/IML (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power on / off 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . settings and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unit emergency power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 030 34 070 34 045 34 045 34 045 34 070 34 045 34 030 34 090 34 035 36065 44 210 44 170 40 015 38045 20 050 34 160 34 160 34 165 34 165 34 115 34 115 34 120 38 38 20 34 34 40 34 015 015 045 125 115 155 060 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 045 051 240 051 035 051 035 44 44 44 44 045 051 035 035 44 44 12 10 045 051 066 080 switches CE panel keys and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 305 OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035 pin numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 080 power indicators and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060 switching regulator voltage distribution ........ 20 200 switching regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 185 symbolic I/O areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 055 symbols and punctuation marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055 sync registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095 system configuration (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 015 configuration screen (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 185 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070 is IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 is IPLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20055 mode (Wn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195 resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170 status display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 135 tests online tests (OLTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 025 ST4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 015 4300-FRIENO for the 4341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 035 m T trace-stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table, UCW assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tag logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tape load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TC. display PSW and I/O trace controls ........ TCM (testcase monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCM (testcase monitor) messages . . . . . . . . . . . . Tektronix* P6106 probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475/0M44 oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . temperature display screen (MT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trace (EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . test basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . case monitor (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . console, pattern (OFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EIA adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215 44 060 14051 34 080 44 695 44 296 36 045 36 080 11 015 11 017 20095 44 565 20 380 20 055 20 135 36 025 36045 44 188 13 050 36 025 14515 test (continued) extended MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 115 MSMOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025 optional MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025 station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385 verification (Vn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210 TH SW TR104 01A-B2-BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060 thermal monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365 PS105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250 PS205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 sense display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600 TR102 ..... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250 TR104/TH10l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250 TR201/TR202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 TR204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 TR206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 TR301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250 thermals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 THIRD SD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090 TH101 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250 TIME DELAY command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 125 timeout circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 timer. 30-second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 timers. hardwired sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 340 timing (ptr/kybd mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090 timing verification test (TVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 015 TIO single-cycle procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 225 TI. instruction counter trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 title. erase? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156 TOD, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645 TODC (time-of-day-clock) equivalent ........... 38 010 tool bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 tools (see 11 015 for list) top card crossover connectors (TCC) . . . . . . . . . . 10 075 top card crossover connectors 01AB2 (PCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10075 top card crossover connectors pin numbering .............. _............ 10075 TP, displaying the patch list ........... , ..... 44 655 TP. display PSW and I/O trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 TPX. clear PSW and I/O trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ 44 296 trace area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295 array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030 data comp not reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 I/O device status (OOTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14223 instruction counter (OOTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 PSW and I/O (OOTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 PSW and I/O controls (OOTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296 saved IFCC (OOTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297 temperature screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 135 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055 • Trademark of Tektronix inc. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 00 o o 000 o 0000 ~ o o ., .. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 -\ PN 5666420 14 of 16 o o 46 070 00 () o c (' o o c TRACE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tracking error, voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . transfer halted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . transferring control from one block to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . transferring patches (K patchname) ........... translate address any V screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trap/branch and link stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . troubleshooting FDS cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR101 removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR102 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR104 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR104/TH101 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR201 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR201/TR202 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR202 removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR204 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR206 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR216 removal/replacement (sw reg) .......... TR301 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR102 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . TR204 thermal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR206 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR301 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS, save IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSX. clear saved IFCC ',' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TVT, timing verification test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . typematic keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 125 20 110 44 159 U (PU logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCW (unit control word) assignment (service aid). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assignment table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UEPO switch reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unit control word . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . emergency power-off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . emergency power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . update circuits +214 and +8/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . update over 1024 UCWs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . update procedure diskette EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCW assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . usage conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240 44 650 44 660 44 525 44 260 34 030 20 180 12 055 12 100 12 050 20250 12 067 20 250 12 075 12 100 12 110 12 081 12 090 20 250 20 250 20 250 20 250 44 297 44 297 13 015 44 055 44 225 14 035 14 051 20 340 14 035 10 080 20045 34045 44 159 (' .. 111 [Y] V EMC ABC logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44240 verification tests (Vn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210 vertical positioning keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060 voltage adjustments IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215 PS210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 066 PS211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 066 PS212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 066 PS213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 065 switching regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215 distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 155 measurement points, IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215 monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 370 pins board 03AA1. . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 213 board A1 and 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20205 board A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 210 board 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 211 board C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 212 board 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205 sense points, logic board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241 sensors, IPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 085 track chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 105 tracking display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600 tracking error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 105 tracking screen (MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 100 volume control, audible alarm 3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44045 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051 V /R field (S/370 mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 230 ( (' W command invoke procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W CSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W EMC D logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W trace-wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wait indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . waiting for an address match to occur ......... WAIT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WCC:: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wiring configuration, RSF card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wiring diagrams (RSF) EIA adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line plate (external modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . protective coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38LS/Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38LS/(U.S.A. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wng :check error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . word, channel status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wrap, channel wrap test (CWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wrap test cable, channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . write ACR (ptr/kybd mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . command (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr /kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 44 44 44 44 44 40 40 14 521 225 240 220 035 650 125 090 335 14 555 14 545 14 565 14535 14 525 44 159 14215 36 071 11 015 44 090 20 350 44 090 X channel-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 230 X of part of shared range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159 XFER blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650 Y sync pulse '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 220 m Z (return to prog sys) from K screen . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. ' 44 240 from 0 screen ....... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 250 01 A gate-card layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 105 03AA1 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 213 2210 multimeter, Digitec** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015 30-second timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3278 Model 2A indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3278 Model 2A operator controls ............. 3278-2A Display Console display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ptr/kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 Color Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3279 indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3287 audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3287 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ......... 38LS modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wiring and configuration (RSF) .............. 20 055 44 050 44 045 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 095 095 085 051 052 075 075 34 170 14525 ** Trademark of United System Corp. 14075 14 035 44 159 Model Groups 1 and 2 EC 379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28Jun82 PN 5666420 15 of 16 46 075 4300-FRIEND advanced capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 055 CCW commands . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 135 CCW flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . ... 40 155 command modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 155 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __ .......... 40 105 how to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...•...... 40 040 information requested by . .. . .•.•......... 40085 loading from diskette ........•............ 40 040 messages . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 095 single. CCW chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 40 045 special storage areas . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 40 075 unit control block (UCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 075 4341 configurations .......................... 32 020 diagnostic test summary . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025 hardware EC level ........•..•............ 14 015 model differences . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 015 power logic level .... . . . . . . • .. . . . . . . . . . . . 14 01 5 processor data flow ........•...•...•...... 43 010 processor data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 015 processor logs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010 processor overview block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 32 010 highlights • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 32 015 modes of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 01 0 optio.nal features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 020 processor configuration . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 020 programming support . . • . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . 32 010 standard features . . . • . .. . _. . . . • . , • . . . . . . 32 020 01A gate-card layout . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . 14 105 475/DM44, Tektronix* oscilloscope . ........... 11 017 ~"'c...-~.~ .. 53FD access and return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 025 * Trademark of Tektronix inc. Model Groups 1 and 2 EC379815 12Nov81 EC 379837 28.Jun82 ,~ 0 () o 00000000 o o ~. • • 10 0000 o o 0000 PN 5666420 16of16 o o 46080 .. 000 o
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:10:10 09:43:41-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:10:10 10:43:07-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:10:10 10:43:07-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:bf115986-70e7-ea45-9f50-e16f4aa0fb24 Instance ID : uuid:b83c2929-3e28-e445-a93a-9d946dde6f51 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 223EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools